Home

User Guide INTERSHOP 4

1. 167 Search and Review Purchase 168 Cancel a Purchase 168 Customer 169 Enter a New 170 Define a Supplier choot eoe bes Sa EUER v ee eke 173 Search and Edit Customer and Supplier Data 173 Delete Customers or Suppliers from the 174 Record Transactions in Customer 5 174 Order 176 Process a New Order sul bent ee ee 178 Cancel or Delete an 184 Review and Follow Up on 5 184 Settings Manager 187 Setup s ce onse S netta erede 181 Drop Down Mens RR 188 Discounts sca dre meet EE 190 Shipping 194 Taxes te oos e uas dte ade ees d ayant E ed up Ra EAT RR T ag gdh nes 200 Statistics E ee oe Ne ea EE UI NEU CET 24 Manual Credit Card Handling 208 Log Off INTERSHOP 5 5 265 e dates edendo neas e irap d EN 209 The Customer Profi
2. 15 Demonstration Homepages 18 Log In on the Splash Screen eee eee 19 Sports Place for Visitors 21 Look for Things to 2l Enter Customer Data 25 Sports Place for Members 27 Member Registration 5 21 Register as a New Member from the Navigation 28 Usera Wish list s 5 doce dete het beret petere ob bed e redet ted 29 Placingsan Ordet Sonsini meei see eu ER eee DR eR Re 30 Online Customer Service 5 RR 3 Sports Place for 35 Log Inasa Retailer oia mete Renee ees eR REOR RS 35 Two Step Re Orders o poir ni eee III 36 Looking Aheadss css eR e EE RR ed Re eas 36 Chapter 2 System Administration 37 When and Why to Use System Administration 39 Use System Administration First 40 Access the Back php IRR hr 4l Graphical Store Design 43 Set General 48 System Preferences csse tu beer e Re teta ra id ERE a 48 Mail Preferences sene b DI rebel A Ies 50 Regional Preferences cese RR 52 Search Result 55 Customer P
3. NAME VariationType_Color gt LOOP VariationType_Color lt OPTION VALUE VariationValue_Color_ID VariationValue_Color_SELECTED gt VariationValue_Color lt OPTION gt ENDLOOP lt SELECT gt lt Add a button named Update to set the chosen value gt BR lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Update lt FORM gt ENDIF ENDIF Similar code was used to build the variation box in Sport Place below SPORTS PLACE Your One stop Sports Superstore Po Y SO BIKING MOUNTAIN BIKES Gibson 2000 Mountain Bike Ch ws lt lor Furuoka x gt 12 Mercury Silver H Product variations displayed in a Manufacturer select box 1 139 05 59 95 Cross sell link to related products Figure 191 Variations displayed using a select box Page 382 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Product Templates Cross Sell Links in Product Templates Cross Sell Links in Product Templates You can embed cross sell functionality in your product templates to refer customers to related products For example the INTERSHOP demonstration store Sports Place sells bikes and uses the embedded cross sell functionality on the bikes products template to refer customers to tires Sample code for embedded cross sell functionality IF B MT10000 IN ProductNo You ll be ready to ride as soon as the Gibson 2000 arriv
4. Chapter 5 Templates Page 353 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Template List Page 354 In this section you list the templates used by your template style Refer to your Templates folder to be sure you are entering all the templates used by your template style The code below contains all the templates used by a standard SDW template style It is not possible to add any Product List Catalog or Storefront templates to a SDW template style However you can add as many User defined templates as you wish Template list Templates PR default CT default root LT default OS ShippingAddressForm ChangePassword OrderConfirmati on ListOfPreviousOrders HomePage NavigationBar StoreC losed StoreMessage RegistrationConfirmation ProfileEd itor 1 Basket PreviousBasket ListOfPreviousBaskets Pr eviousOrder SelectPaymentMethod NMC OrderInformation PasswordForm CreditCardForm SearchResults SearchMask ProfileEditor 2 LoginPanel RegistrationForm ServicePa ge HotDeals NonMemberDataForm Bookmarks ProfileDispla y WelcomePage OrderInformation UT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Chapter 5 Templates CHAPTER 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates NS 7 INTERSHOP 1 Chapter Overview Chapter Overview This chapter outlines specific functions you can add to your store using TLE elements in templates For detailed information on TLE variabl
5. IV visible at Storefront Discounts Big Discount T Hot Deal Template Accessories z Manufacturer AcuSteer zl Wholesale Price net 119 00 supplier x Retail Price net 198 95 Tax Class Taxable z Minimum Inventory 0 Units z Weight 0 00 Min order level 1 Availability In Stock Number in Stock 200 Bookmarks 0 Reserved 5 Ordered 0 Assign To Category kid PURCHASING manager Product Profile Information ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager CUSTOMER SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 144 Product Profile information for a product appears on bottom left of page Page 214 Chapter 3 The Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional 3 Chapter 3 The Back Office Click Assign Profile The Assign Profile to Product page is displayed Figure 145 for linking profile items directly to products Profile items already directly assigned to the product if any show in the top scroll window Product Manager BACK SAVE Assign Profile to Product Profile settings for 2MB Psion Series Assigned Items Gender Female Age 30to40 Profile Classes Profile Items Age Under30 CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager SETTINGS SYSTEM manager ADMIN Fi
6. Comment The product must be in the basket Override Customer Related TLE Variables The customer override functions cannot be used with anonymous customers The first two functions SetCustomerBillingAddress and SetCustomerShippingAddress require the input in the form of a sub set of the structure of the hash reference below namel gt lt value gt name2 value name2 gt lt value gt street gt lt value gt zipcode gt lt value gt city gt lt value gt country gt lt value gt phone gt lt value gt phone2 gt lt value gt fax gt lt value gt email gt lt value gt state gt lt value gt Table 109 SetCustomerBillingAddress Change the fields of the current customer s billing address does not apply to non member customers Example SetCustomerBillingAddress namel 7 Beatrix name2 gt potter cty gt garden email bunny macgregor com INPUT hashreference A hash reference to a structure containing all or some new values OUTPUT Page 426 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions The Override Functions Table 110 SetCustomerShippingAddress Change the fields of the current customer s shipping address does not
7. The category number is automatically assigned in the Category Manager and you can look them up there NOTE Links to product or categories cannot be hard coded to a page if the product or category page is enabled for Page Caching See page 307 for more information on Page Caching Training Store provides an example on the Homepage where you find a product link to the Aiwa AM FM Stereo Figure 184 Page 374 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Catalog List Templates login hot deals yer X gm imm van AT TRAINING STORE catalog browser Welcome to the Training Store n Electronics basket where you ll find a quick and easy Example of a Catalog basic way to learn about building your Template 5 own INTERSHOP store ervice Sports search store This special store provides informative comments regarding basic store concepts template usage and options like conditional or rule based presentation of content at the bottom of the Example of a Catalog enhanced Template Language Courses Example of a List basic Template a list has no sub categories Using FORMs in Templates store page you re viewing In some cases you will get a brief overview at the top of the page 3k hot deals When appropriate you will find a 2MB Psion Series 3A HELP button that will lead you to amp Psion Series more detailed information and podiat PO only assistance Plea
8. mation about this page when accessed directly from the Data CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Import Too menu Figure 58 Upload data files to your Web server 1 Click Browse to launch the Windows File Upload dialog box and locate the data import file to upload on your hard drive You can also type the full pathname of the file in the File To Upload entry field If you already have your Data File on the server skip this step by choosing a Description File and leaving the File To Upload field empty and click Next NOTE The Data Import Tool requires Netscape 4 0 or later or Internet Explorer 4 0 or later If you do not see a Browse button or if it fails to launch a file selection box your browser does not support file upload We also do not recommend uploading data files larger than 3 MB For files larger than 4 MB transfer them directly to the data import directory of your store 2 When the name of the file to upload appears in the File To Upload entry field click Next to go to Step 3 Define Mapping File When you click Next the Data File selected is updated with the dat file extension Click Back to check or re enter information on a previous screen Page 96 Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Data Import Tool Step by Step Step 3 D
9. Figure 3 Sports Place login Choose visitor member or retailer 2 Enter the store using one of the following methods e Non member visitor Click Shop Now under the Visitors section e New Member Click Become a member and fill out the resulting registration form e Returning Member Enter your name and password and click Login under the Members section Retailer Enter one of the retailer sample names and passwords listed in the bottom right corner and click Login under the Retailers section Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 19 Log In on the Splash Screen The INTERSHOP Storefront Page 20 First explore Sports Place and place orders as a visitor non member Later visit as a member and as a retailer to see added features These tours are covered in the following order Visitors can e Enter and browse anonymously e Browse categories and see prices as set for visitors Search by keyword brand name product variation price range or product number Register as a member or order as a non member Members can do everything visitors can do plus Be recognized by cookie or login to activate saved registration data See additional discounts targeted for members e Mark items on a wish list e Access account information including order status previous baskets and compiled wish lists Bi Retailers can do everything members can do plus View a welcome page targeted
10. lt FRAME AME TOP FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZE SCROLLING auto MARGINHEIGHT 1 MARGINWIDTH 1 BORDER 1 SRC http URL_Catalog gt lt FRAME AME BOTTOM FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZE SCROLLING no ARGINHEIGHT 0 MARGINWIDTH 0 BORDER 0 SRC http URL_NavigationFrame gt lt FRAMESET gt lt HTML gt The lt NOFRAMES gt portion of the code must be placed right below the first frameset tag Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates Call the Main Level Categories into the Homepage Frameset The most important function of the home pag The Store Homepage Template e is displaying the Main or root level of the store s product catalog This is done by calling the Main level categories template into the main content frame of the home page using the TLE variable URL_Catalog 1 This gives the attributes for the first frame gt lt FRAME NAME TOP FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZ MARGINWIDTH 1 BORDER 1 SRC http URL_Catalog gt SCROLLING auto MARGINHEIGHT 1 Call the Navigation Bar Template into the Homepage Frameset After calling the Main level categories template into the top frame above the link to the Store Navigation bar template needs to be called into the bottom frame using the TLE variable URL_NavigationF
11. mappingfile lt yourfilename gt map datafile lt yourfilename gt dat dbuser lt yourDBUserName gt password yourDBpassword default intershop gt insertmode lt choose update replace or ignore database lt yourdatabasename gt dbserver yourDBserver usually ISSERVER gt importmode choose validate validate import or import startrow first row of data e g 2 gt delafterimp 0 statusfile status log errorfile error log Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Command Line Data Import Command Line Options Arguments directory The directory where all files data description data mapping status and error log are located If a directory is not defined in the arguments the default directory is the Datalmport sub directory of the store s home directory The Data Import Tool saves files here too configfile The data description file containing the field and record separators the field delimiter and the header row flag If this file was created using the Data Import Tool it was automatically saved as a cfg file mapping file The mapping file maps the columns in the data file to the corresponding columns in the database If this file was created using the Data Import Tool it was automatically saved as a map file datafile The data file which may or may not contain a header row The items listed in the data file are identifi
12. specified in the example Checks if the value of a TLE used within a TLE loop exists and is available Use this prior to a GetTLE function as Example ExistsTLELoop BasketPostions do something INPUT A loop B index C TLE A A TLE loop name The index within the loop I count of loop elements C The TLE name OUTPUT flag Boolean true or false Table 80 Get TLE Get the value of any TLE used within this template Example shippingprice GetTLE Shippingprice do something INPUT TLE a TLE name SSS issues an error if this TLE does not exist within the template OUTPUT value The value of the specified TLE Table 81 GetTLELoopNames Get the names of all TLE loops that are present Example Loops GetTLELoopNames INPUT Not needed No input needed OUTPUT Loops The names of all loops present Table 82 GetTLELoopCount Get the count of the elements within a given TLE loop Example count_products_in_basket GetTLELoopCount BasketPositions INPUT loop A TLE loop name SSS issues an error if this loop does not exist OUTPUT count The number of elements in the specified loop Page 416 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions TLE Handling Functions Table 83 GetTLELoopData Get the value of a TLE used within
13. A new browser window opens and shows a print preview of the purchase order formatted according to the selected Print Template To print a copy to mail to the supplier make sure the print preview window is selected and choose Print from your browser commands Close the print preview browser window to continue Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 167 Search and Review Purchase Orders Purchasing Manager Search and Review Purchase Orders To search for purchase orders that you have already created 2 3 Click the Purchasing Manager Fill in search criteria as desired then click Search Click on the number of the purchase order you want to review Cancel a Purchase Order Page 168 Canceling a purchase order reverses any effect the purchase order had on the inventory After canceling the items on the cancelled purchase order will reappear when you request stock order suggestions again Search for the purchase order as described above and click on the number of the purchase order you want to cancel Click the Cancel A dialog confirmation box appears click OK The purchase order reappears with the word Cancelled written across it in bold text If you also created a hard copy print out to mail to your supplier there will be a reference at the bottom of the page You may either View the print out or Delete it Be careful not to cancel and delete a purchase order yo
14. Create and Edit Catalog Attributes Attribute Name NewMultimediaAttribute Attribute Data Type mmedia zl Attributes catalogimage string PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 79 Use this page to create edit or delete catalog attributes 3 Enter a name in the Attribute Name field Attribute names can contain alphanumeric characters only a z A Z 0 9 _ Attribute names cannot contain spaces Page 132 Chapter 3 The Back Office Catalog Manager Catalog Attributes 4 Choose a data type see Table 2 for details 5 Click Add to List The new attribute appears in the Attributes list box and a TLE variable for this attribute is added to the Catalog Attribute Variables section of the TLE list panel Once you have created and defined a value for a catalog attribute you must edit the appropriate Catalog and List Templates using the TLE variable associated with the attribute For more information see Insert Catalog Attribute TLE Variables into Catalog and List Templates on page 377 Table 2 Catalog Attribute Data Types Data Type Range For all multimedia files Multimedia Attributes with this type can be uploaded to the web server directly from an upload page in the Catalog Manager This option is not available for other
15. StoreImagePath URL_Store roductName Reference f close LELSE ONCLICK self close ENDIF gt G SRC StoreImagePath SiteImages ton_addtobasket jpg ALT Add to basket DER 0 gt lt A gt Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 387 Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced Product Templates Step 3 Create the Attribute Reference and Give It Values Page 388 Let s assume you have created a Bookstore containing the category Classics You have stocked the store with the title Wuthering Heights assigned to the Product default template You have inserted the appropriate JavaScripts into your Store Homepage template and the Product default template You now want to cross link Wuthering Heights to another book Jane Eyre The JavaScripts for cross selling are designed to check for the existence of a product attribute called Reference You assign this attribute the number and name of the product you wish to cross sell entered in the format lt product number gt lt product name gt e g 1005 Jane Eyre To create this attribute and assign it values in the Bookstore example follow these steps 1 Open the Product default template and create a new attribute called Reference See Product Attributes p 145 for more information on how to create an attribute 2 Go to the Product Manager and find t
16. l Create a catalog attribute name as described in Create Catalog Attribute Names p 132 The code example below assumes that the attribute catalogimage was created generating the corresponding TLE variable catalogimage 2 Define a value for the catalog attribute as described in Define or Edit Catalog Attribute Values p 134 3 Add the attribute TLE variable to the Catalog or List template For example catalogimage img src StoreImagePath ProductImages catalogimage gt ENDIF Page 326 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Product Product Attributes vs Product Variations Template Groups in Detail Product Product templates are used to display the individual products in your store so you can have as many or as few Product templates as you like When designing product templates you group products with similar characteristics together and create a template for displaying them Open a Product template and click on Available TLEs to bring up the TLE Assistant and see all the standard TLE variables you can use for product pages Product Attributes vs Product Variations There are two different ways to define and display the particular characteristics of your products in INTERSHOP product attributes and product variations It is up to the store designer to decide for each product whether a characteristic is an attribute or a variation and to define it according
17. lt B gt lt a gt lt BR gt writeln Perhaps you would like to have a look at it writeln lt BR gt lt TD gt lt TR gt writeln TR lt TD WIDTH 250 gt amp nbsp lt TD gt lt 1 writeln writeln lt TD ALIGN RIGHT gt lt FONT COLOR 666666 SIZE 2 writeln lt BR gt lt BLOCKQUOTE gt Otherwise just lt BR gt lt a href javascript self close click here lt a TD writeln TR writeln TABLE writeln writeln close lt BODY gt HTML lt SCRIPT gt lt HEAD gt lt FRAMESET ROWS 34 FRAMEBORDER no BORDER 0 gt lt NOFRAMES gt lt H2 gt Sorry you need a browser with FRAME support lt H2 lt NOFRAMES gt lt FRAME FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZE SCROLLING auto MARGINHEIGHT 1 MARGINWIDTH 1 BORDER 1 NAME TOP SRC http URL_Catalog m E lt FRAME NAME BOTTOM FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZE SCROLLING no MARGINHEIGHT 0 MARGINWIDTH 0 BORDER 0 SRC http URL_NavigationFrame gt lt FRAMESET gt lt HTML gt Page 386 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Product Templates Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced Step 2 Insert JavaScript in Product Template The sample
18. 3 Follow the procedure for Step 1 Enable Payment Methods for All Customers p 77 Select the checkbox in the Non Member column Click Save NOTE You cannot require a password for any payment method offered to non members since non members do not establish passwords Step 4 Enable Payment Methods for Select Customers Only Perhaps you want to offer certain members special payment privileges that should not be visible to other customers To do so you must first enable the payment method for approved users only and then go to the Customer Manager to approve particular customers for the method Select the Payment Method Settings link on the System Administration Main Menu Figure 44 Select the Enabled checkbox for the method you want to offer to select customers Click Save When the dialog box appears click Cancel Clicking Cancel will limit the display of this payment method in the storefront to those customers you subsequently select for pre approved status You have cancelled the universal application of the Enable command not the Enable command itself Click Customer Manager on the back office navigation bar to get the Search Customers page Search for a customer you wish to approve and open his or her Customer Details page Figure 46 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 79 Use the Payment Method Settings Page Page 80
19. 3 Enter a name for the profile class you wish to create Use only letters and numbers Symbols and spaces are not accepted 4 Click Save You return to the Customer Profile Matrix page and the new profile class appears in the left column Because you have not yet created items for this class the Available Items column for the new entry is blank Chapter 2 System Administration Page 73 Create Items for a Profile Class Customer Profile Matrix Create Items for a Profile Class Page 74 Customers create their personal profiles by choosing among the profile items you create Profile items can only be created within a particular profile class see above 1 On the Customer Profile Matrix page Figure 40 click the name of the profile class for which you wish to create items The Create or Delete Profile Items page is displayed Figure 42 2 Enter the name for the new item in the New Item entry field Use only letters and numbers Symbols and spaces are not accepted 3 Click New Item The new item appears in the Defined Items list box Repeat as desired 2 System Administration BACK NEW ITEM DELETE ITEM SET UP CUSTOMER PROFILE Create or Delete Items Profile Age New Item Teens Defined Items Overes Underi2 CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manage
20. All templates except Catalog display model New with INTERSHOP 4 templates ISMb 1259 ProductName Name of product A Reng ates except Catalog templates sed to display the product price ProductNetPrice when the store is set to Net price All templates except Catalog display model Replaces ProductPrice templates in INTERSHOP 4 ISMb 1259 ProductNo Product ID number ProductPrice See ProductNetPrice templates ISMb 1258 Quantity of a single product ordered by ProductQuantity Storefront Mail and Print templates a customer Lists all products in a category without Products subcategories Used in LOOP List templates List basic statement to tax matrix in the Settings Manager Replaces Productlax with 4 ISMb 1259 AES ELA except Gale and All templates except Catalog templates ProductlaxClass Tax class product is assigned to Mail templates ProductWeight Weight of product except Catalog ad Mail templates SpecialProducts lists all Rot dL Storefront template Hot Deals statement Amount of product in stock Displayed Storefront Product and List in Storefront templates Amount om by Storefront Product and List StockLevelReserved customers but not shipped no packing slip created Displayed in Storefront templates Page 232 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables
21. Glossary explains key terms What Knowledge is Assumed INTERSHOP is designed for maximum ease of use even if you re no expert on computers You don t need to know a single line of computer programming code to set a basic INTERSHOP store or to use the back office For customizing templates to design the look and feel of your Storefront we recommend having some and design experience or getting assistance from someone who does Chapter 7 Server Side Scripting allows programmers to customize and extend the INTERSHOP core without using third party development tools Server side scripting requires knowledge of Perl programming language and of HI ML and TLE for template customization Getting the Latest INTERSHOP Updates INTERSHOP is always working to bring exciting new capabilities to your software For late breaking documentation and for the most recent information on plug ins and special offers visit the INTERSHOP Web site at http www intershop com Page 12 CHAPTER Explore the Storefront t 2 INTERSHOP DS The INTERSHOP Storefront Use the Demostores The INTERSHOP Storefront The Storefront is the part of your store your customers see In this chapter you tour a demonstration storefront to get the feel of online shopping examine special INTERESHOP 4 features and see design elements from the customer s point of view One of the INTERSHOP demostores Sports Place is designed to show ways
22. If you have not selected the Run in Background checkbox the Data the import process Import Tool Monitor page is displayed Figure 63 Ji Store Back Office BACK DATA CACHE RESET DISPLAY ERROR LOG DATA IMPORT TOOL Monitor records press the DISPLAY ERROR LOG button Import completed After an import enforce a DATA CACHE RESET if you did not choose an automatic reset In case of not imported or incompleted Validated records Rejected records 20 1 Removed Pages and Directories Started At Current Time End Time Intershop Build Operating System Database Version Import OF Store Database Database User Import Mode Insert Mode Start At Row Delete Data File After Import Delete Cached Pages Completely After Import Directory Description File Data File Mapping File Status File Error File Data Cache Reseted Exit Code 15 3 55 5 22 99 15 3 56 5 22 99 15 3 56 5 22 99 15Mb1249 MSWin32 Adaptive Server Enterprise 11 9 2 1031 P NT IX86 OS 3 51 4 0 FBU Fri Aug 14 01 42 41 1998 product screenshot sa validate replace 2 FALSE TRUE Cifintershop Data ishome screenshot DataImport fIntershop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport documentation cfg Intershop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport documentation txt dat C fIntershop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport documentation Cifintershop Datayishome screenshot Datalmport status log C fInters
23. L create and manage your payment methods Figure 43 Payment Method Settings link in the System Administration Main Menu Chapter 2 System Administration Payment Method Settings Use the Payment Method Settings Page Use the Payment Method Settings Page In most cases you can select the Payment Method Settings link on the System Administration Main Menu and manage payment methods using the Payment Method Settings page Figure 44 The only exception is setting up online credit card payment which entails some additional steps described in the Accept Direct Credit Card Entry on p 83 The following section describes how to activate existing payment methods and create new ones using the Payment Method Settings page FA System Administration BACK SAVE NEW PAYMENT METHOD Payment Method Settings ForNew Non member pru Passwo rd Name Pre approved Enabled Customers Checkout Default Required Cash on Delivery 4 Iv Iv r Pay with cash on delivery Charge to Account 4 n Charge to the customer s account Company Check 4 c n Pay with a company check Credit Card via Phone Fax 4 Iv Iv Credit card data sent via fax or phone Direct Credit Card Entry 4 Iv Iv n n Direct credit card payment Direct Debit 3 2 BH c o Pay by issuing withdraw permission ie account debit Personal Check 3 H Pay with personal check Prepaid 3 Iv Iv Payment h
24. The operator printing the purchase CurrentOperator order Print templates only Date when the current record was last LastUpdateDate updated Print template Customer Lists all products on purchase order This TLE can be used in LOOP statement For more information see LOOP Statements p 273 SupplierOrderPositions Print template Purchase Order Wholesale price of all products on SupplierOrderSubTotal supplier purchase order less discounts Print template Purchase Order shipping cost Wholesale price of all products on supplier purchase order less discounts shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping SupplierOrderTotalPrice Print template Purchase Order Tax on all products on supplier purchase order any tax on shipping costs Print template Purchase Order Page 260 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Table 40 Invoice Print Out TLE Variables FORM TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Operator to whom processing is Print templates Credit Card Data CreationByOperator Pe P d plates assigned Purchase Order CreationDate Date when the order was created Mail and Print templates CurrentOperator The operator printing the invoice Print templates only CustCreditBalance Customer s account balance All templates except Print templates Number of days before a bill bec
25. when the form is complete To print a hard copy of the Customer Details page choose a print template and click Print Preview A new browser window opens and shows a print preview of the Customer Details page Choose Print from your browser commands to print Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 171 Enter a New Customer Page 172 rt 5 Customer Manager Customer Manager BACK SAVE NEW CUSTOMER DEFINE PROFILE ACCOUNT INFORMATION PRINT PREVIEW DELETE Customer Details Name Jacques Beulieu Customerno 1004 Comments Login Pacques Beaulieu Account Balance 73 01 Password Password Conf Category New Customer x Deactivated Operator Administrator Supplier Tax Jurisdiction France zl Alternate Currency US Dollar USD x Print Template English Customer brief Created 06 18 99 Updated 06 18 99 cash on Delivery charge to Account company check M Credit Card via Phone Fax pany IV Direct Credit Card Entry Direct Debit T Personal Check Prepaid Store Credit 500 06 Credit Length days 14 Bank 1 Customer Banki Bank 2 Customer Bank2 Comments r Send the customer a fax as order Send the customer an email as order confirmation confirmation Account Address Shipping Address Ship to billing address Name Jacques Beulieu Name Jacques Beulieu Street Address City State Zip Code Country Phone Fax
26. 2 Click Search A list of transactions appears Figure 101 Inventory Manager Inventory Transactions List Transaction no Product no Date Description 1004 1002 06 18 99 Inventory Adjustment 1003 1002 06 18 99 Inventory Adjustment 1002 1002 1 06 18 99 Packing slip no 990618 1001 1001 1002 06 18 99 Inventory Adjustment 4 of 4 inventory transactions have been found CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 101 A list of inventory transactions 3 Click a transaction number to get a full report Figure 100 From the report page you can also cancel the transaction by clicking Cancel Page 164 Chapter 3 The Back Office Purchasing Manager Use Inventory Transactions Purchasing Manager The Purchasing Manager is designed to alert you when stock levels are low and purchase orders to suppliers need to be generated It keeps purchasing simple and within your control you confirm the stock order suggestions and click Print to print orders for your suppliers For the Purchasing Manager to perform correctly Products must be assigned a minimum inventory of at least 1 on their Product Details page in the Product Manager See Create a New Product on page 140 for details on assigning this amount Products must be assigned to a particular Supplier also from the Product Details page in th
27. ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager Figure 75 Products listed in the Storefront using the default list template Chapter 3 The Back Office SYSTEM ADMIN Page 127 Edit a Category Catalog Manager Edit a Category l Click Catalog Manager on the back office navigation bar 2 Select the category to edit 3 Make changes in the name description or template entry fields 4 Click Save NOTE Click Catalog Manager at any time to view the Main Level Categories page Using HTML in Category Descriptions You can use HI ML tags in your product and category description fields When the ProductDescription or CategoryDescription TLEs are used the content will display as coded For example if you entered the following in the description field of the product data page This sneaker is the lt I gt Best lt I gt on the market it would display in the storefront as This sneaker is the Best on the market Move One Category into Another You can rearrange your catalog tree and move one branch into another The highest level of the category you move becomes a subcategory of the category you select as a destination Note that it is only possible to move into categories that do not contain any products l Select the category you want to move 2 Click Move Category The Main Level Categories pag
28. OUTPUT Comment After execution of the SSS script the script is replaced by the text given to AddContent inside the template use this function to generate the dynamic parts of the HTML page produced by this template This function doesn t manage HTML text conversion you must embed the necessary HTML tags in the string Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 423 The Basket Processing Functions The Basket Processing Functions The Scripting API Functions Functions used to add or remove products manually from the basket or to set a particular shipping method for a basket Table 101 AddProduct Add a product to the basket at a specific quantity Example AddProduct productno quantity INPUT productno A valid product number OUTPUT quantity The quantity Comment This is the same as adding a product to the basket manually using the storefront Table 102 RemoveProduct Remove a product from the basket Example RemoveProduct productno INPUT productno A valid product number OUTPUT Comment This is the same as removing a product from the basket manually using the storefront Table 103 SetShipping Example SetShipping 4 Set a specific shipping method for the current basket INPUT shippingid A valid shipping id or number OUTPUT Table 104 UpdateProduct Update the product i
29. ProductSubTotal_Value ProductTlaxAmount ProductTax_Value ProductlaxClass ProductTotalPrice ProductTotalPrice_Value ProductlotalTax ProductTotalTax_Value ProductWeight ProductWeight_Value StockLevel StockLevel_Value StockLevelReserved StockLevelReserved_Value UnitOfMeasurement LOOP Statements Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 281 LOOP Statements TLE Statements Category and Service Templates Table 54 lists all TLEs that can be used on any Category template with the loop variable Categories Table 54 Category Templates LOOP variable Categories Category root CategoryDescription Category root CategoryName Category root ltemNo Category root NoOfSubCategories Table 55 lists all TLEs that can be used on the List of Previous Orders Service template with the loop variable PreviousBasket Table 55 Service Template List of Previous Orders List of Previous Orders with PreviousBasket AIt_PrevSubTotal PrevOrderDate FAlt_PrevTotalPrice PrevOrderNo Alt_PrevTotalTax PrevShelved ltemNo PrevSubTotal LastShippingDate PrevTotalPrice NoOflnvoicesPaid Prevlotallax NoOflnvoicesToOrder ShippingComplete NoOfltemsOnInvoice ShippingStarted NoOfltemsOnOrder HURL_PrevOrder NoOfltemsOnPackingSlip ProductQuantity OrderCompletlyProcessed ProductSubTotal OrderProcessingComplete ProductTaxAmount OrderProcessingStarted ProductTax_Value PaymentCom
30. Table 12 Standard Product TLE Variables TLE Variable UnitO Measurement Description Current quantity unit defined in Settings Manager Product Related TLE Variables Available Templates All templates except Catalog templates HURL_HotDeals Creates a link that displays the Hot Deals template All templates except Print templates URL_ProductView Creates a link that displays a specific product page Outside the product and list templates add the product ID parameter Example lt A HREF http URL_ProductView 10354 gt All templates except Print templates WeightSymbol Symbol used for a unit of weight kg lb etc Defined in Settings Manager All templates except Print templates These TLE variables are always available no matter which price display model is selected however the variable appropriate to the model used in your store should be used in templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 233 Product Related TLE Variables TLE Variables Product Attribute TLE Variables Page 234 Product attributes are custom definable descriptors of a product which can reference test images or multimedia They are distinguished from the standard descriptors assigned on the Product Details page When a user creates a product attribute name INTERSHOP 4 automatically creates its corresponding TLE variable and the variable appears on the TLE list
31. You can enter Quantity The amount of product you are stocking enter a negative number to subtract from current inventory levels Reserved Any amount you want to place aside e g on hold for a customer Normally 0 Ordered Amount you have on order from a supplier and want to record manually Select Register Upon Order in System Preferences on page 48 to have INTERSHOP record ordered stock as inventory automatically Comments Explanatory notes dates etc describing the inventory transaction you are recording Inventory Manager BACK SAVE Stock Entry Product no jp _ 7 Quantity Reserved Ordered 0 SSS Description TOS CATALOG manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 85 The Stock Entry page in the Inventory Manager H 3 Click Save The Inventory Transaction Detail page appears describing the inventory transaction just completed Figure 100 page 163 4 Click Cancel to cancel the transaction Otherwise click the Product Number to return to the Product Details page Scroll down to see the updated inventory information in the middle of the page Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Product Attributes Product Attributes Product Attributes are freely definable TLE variables used to display descriptive text and images for your products Data types are assigned to attributes depe
32. and cannot be changed 5 Click Save Delete an Operator 1 Choose the operator name from the Operator Settings Menu page The operator information is displayed Figure 51 2 Click the Delete button 3 Click OK when prompted Lock Unlock the Storefront 1 Click the link for Lock Storefront the Administration section of the System Administration Main Menu to lock the store If the store is already locked this link will read Unlock Storefront When the store is locked a store closed page is displayed to all visitors Figure 53 2 Select Unlock Storefront to reopen the storefront STORE CURRENTLY CLOSED Please try again later Figure 53 Store closed page Page 90 Chapter 2 System Administration Database Administration Menu Lock Unlock the Storefront Database Administration Menu Most database maintenance is handled by the Site Administrator and is described in detail in the INTERSHOP Site Administration Guide As a result System Administrators in a multi site environment do not need to concern themselves very often with database issues However System Administrators can use the Database Administration Menu Figure 54 to view information about database processes and size and to delete the contents of an individual store database System Administration Database Administration Menu View Database Processes Display database se
33. deactivate box on an individual customer s page in the Customer Manager to proceed with order fulfillment Deactivation of new customers is one of several methods you can use to verify that a customer is legitimate and to help assure that you secure payment or approve credit before fulfilling orders Other means to this end include setting a store credit limit or accepting only verified credit card payments or payments via electronic currency systems Default setting No unchecked Supplier Checking this box will automatically identify all those who register in the shop as suppliers You might enable this box while entering a large a number of suppliers in the Customer Manager Default setting No unchecked B Tax Check the Tax box here and sales tax will automatically be added to all orders based on the tax jurisdiction information customers enter when registering and the information you enter into your tax matrix See Create a Tax Matrix on p 208 for instructions on creating the tax matrix for your shop Default setting Yes checked Page 56 Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Customer Preferences 2 System Administration BACK SAVE Customer Preferences Deactivate New Customers Classify new customers as deactivated Supplier Oo If this box is checked then if you create a new customer it will be flagged as a supplier automatically Tax
34. email zs Rue du Gauche vine France 11 222 2222 4 com Street Address City State Zip Code Country Phone Fax email fis Rue du Gauche vine sesso France 1 111 1111 11 222 2222 namegdomain com Customer Profile Information IV Profile is activated Age FrequentShoppers Gender Hobbies VIPShoppers Figure 106 The Customer Details page Chapter 3 The Back Office Customer Manager Define a Supplier Define a Supplier Enter supplier names and addresses just as you would new customers but check the Supplier box on the Customer Details page Figure 106 1 Click New Customer on the Search Customers page 2 Fill out the required fields for supplier information INTERSHOP requires that you enter a Login Password and address information including e mail The name entered in the Login field subsequently appears in the supplier drop down menu on product data pages for assignment of suppliers to products If your supplier does not have an e mail account you can enter a dummy address in the e mail field It is possible to deactivate suppliers see Enter a New Customer on page 170 for more detail on deactivation 3 Check the Supplier box in the middle of the page 4 Click Save 5 To search for a list of all suppliers set the radio button on the Search Customers page to Suppliers Y
35. 16 characters total A sample key set might look like this KEYT 12F48832A9CE4171 KEY1 7968AB76EC51DC89 KEY2 D9253EBCODA1F2C8 KEYS EA132676B3B9CE6B IVEC B69D6810D057D910 After creating a unique key save it in a file named lt store_database_name gt key The Site Administrator places the file in the Intershop Data CCCkeys directory NOTE System Administrators should save a copy of the store s key file s in either electronic or printed form This copy is the only chance to decrypt data in the unlikely event the key file in Site Administration is lost or damaged Do not discard old key files INTERSHOP may need them to decrypt older data The Site Administrator can access and make copies of these files Page 86 Chapter 2 System Administration Payment Method Settings Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data Allow a New Key Set When Encryption is Already Enabled As soon as encryption is enabled for a store each piece of credit card data is tagged with the current key tag information and can only be decrypted using that same key set Therefore the data must be decrypted using the current key set before introducing a new one 1 Disable Encryption See below for instructions 2 Replace the current key set with the new key set the Site Administrator does this Make sure the file name is lt store_database_name gt key and is placed in the Intershop Data CCCkeys directory 3 Enable Encryption See below for instru
36. Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Product Related TLE Variables Standard Product TLE Variables The standard Product TLE variables are used to display basic product qualities such as the product name ProductName the price ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice and so on The values for standard Product TLE variables are entered in the back office or are calculated automatically depending on the variable For example ProductName is entered in the Product Manager while ProductIaxAmount is automatically calculated in the Basket template Table 12 Standard Product TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Inventory status has one of three values In Stock Out of Stock or AvailabilityString Available Soon Available Soon means not yet in stock but ordered from supplier Storefront List and Product templates Storefront templates Basket Non member Data Form Order Lists all products in the basket Used in Member Order Information Non LOOP statement member Order Information Select Payment Method and Print templates Basket T BasketPositions Lists all products on current packing TE Delivery estan slip Used in LOOP statement Print template Packing slip Lists all products in inventory report InventoryPositions Used in LOOP statement Print templates Inventory list Lists all products on current invoice Pe
37. Choose a template to be used when printing out the Customer Details page for your records INTERSHOP defaults include two styles one brief and one complete Payment Methods Check the boxes for all payment methods you want to make available to this customer Deselect boxes for those you want to disable for this customer To add more payment options see Payment Method Settings on page 76 Store Credit The default credit amount for all new customers is set in System Preferences see Customer Preferences on page 56 for details Use this field to change this customer s credit limit Credit Length The number of days before a bill is due e Bank 1 amp 2 This information is used only when the European direct debit payment option is activated e Fax E mail confirmation Check these boxes if you are enabling customers to request order confirmations by fax or e mail e Account Shipping Addresses Enter all billing address information in the account address area Check Ship to billing address or enter a separate shipping address NOTE By default the e mail address for customers is used to check and avoid duplication of customers i e e mail addresses must be different for each customer To change this default see Mail Preferences on page 50 Profile is Activated Check this box to activate the customer s profile See The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on page 210 for more information on profiles Click Save
38. Day Air Shipping 14 90 cost Net total 98 34 990618 1011 Shipping John Doe Software Programmer 123 Main Street Providence Rhode Island 44444 USA Payment Method Cash on Delivery Charge to Account Company Check Credit Card via Phone Fax now Figure 45 Activated payments in the storefront drop down menu Step 2 Enable Payment Methods for New Members You may want to restrict new customers to only certain types of payment methods Only those payment methods with the For New Customers checkbox selected will be offered to first time shoppers who choose to register Once they return all payment methods selected in Step 1 are be available New customers who choose to order as non members will see payment methods enabled for non members See Step 3 below To enable payment methods for new members 1 Follow the procedure for Step 1 Enable Payment Methods for All Customers p 77 2 Select the checkbox in the For new customers column for payment first time members can use Page 78 Chapter 2 System Administration Payment Method Settings Use the Payment Method Settings Page Check the Default box by the method that should be highlighted by default in the payment drop down menu in the storefront See Figure 45 Click Save Step 3 Enable Payment Methods for Non Members To enable a payment method for Non Member Checkout simply 2
39. Description CONTENT Page where ustomer selects a payment method Will be skipped hen payment method was already selected or predefined gt Chapter 5 Templates INTERSHOP Template Tools Export Templates and Import HTML Files The META tags define TemplateID a unique value within a template class TemplateClass an abbreviation corresponding to the template group LanguageID a number associated with each national language supported by INTERSHOP Languages other than English are available only if the necessary Language Pack s has been purchased from INTERSHOP and installed to your INTERSHOP program e German 1 English 2 e French 3 Spanish 5 This is only partial list of languages available Name as defined when template was created Description as defined when template was created Corresponding templates in multiple languages must have the same name and description in all languages The system uses only the Language Identifier to distinguish between the corresponding templates Therefore if you change a name or description in the template editor or in a META tag be sure to do so in all applicable languages You need to be careful that you do not erase META tags when editing templates but other than that they can be ignored However if you create a new file to be imported as a template you will need to attach lt META gt tags to it as discussed in the following section
40. Do not delete attributes still in use by templates or broken links will cause misdisplays in the storefront Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 145 Product Attributes Product Manager Attribute Data Types Attributes can be assigned one of five data types choose the type that best suits the values to be entered If an invalid entry is made a warning will appear upon saving The data types are described in the following table Table 4 Attribute Data Types Data Type Range Unlimited characters uses at least 2Kbytes per value even if only one Text character is actually entered Attributes of this data type have an entry field composed of a scrolling text box Up to 255 characters String Attributes of this data type have an one line entry box that holds up to 255 characters All catalog attributes have this data type 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Integer Attributes of this type have an entry box that holds up to 11 characters Float Attributes of this type have an entry box that holds up to 11 characters For all multimedia files Attributes with this data type can be uploaded to Multimedia the Web server directly from the Product Attribute Values page in the Product Manager this option is not available for other attribute data types Create or Edit Product Attribute Names 1 Open the Product Details page Figure 84 for any product and click Product Attribute Values The Product A
41. Page 82 3 The cleared payment methods will no longer appear for this customer when he or she orders in the Storefront Search for the customer in the Customer Manager and open his or her Customer Details page Figure 46 Clear the checkbox for the payment method s you wish to disable for this customer Click Save Chapter 2 System Administration Payment Method Settings Accept Direct Credit Card Entry Accept Direct Credit Card Entry INTERSHOP allows merchants to accept credit cards in various ways Credit card payments entered directly whether by the customer online or accepted by phone or fax and entered by the operators are discussed in the section below Credit card entry pages can be SSL secured and are processed by the back office Direct Credit Card Entry allows customers to enter their credit card type card number and expiration date without using an electronic payment system INTERSHOP s three demonstration stores are configured to accept four major credit cards You can set the system to check that card numbers are entered in a permissible format Considerations When Using Direct Credit Card Entry SSL in the Storefront When creating your template design it is possible to SSL enable the Storefront pages where customers enter their credit card numbers This increases both actual and perceived security for your customers See Chapters 4 and 6 for more information Bi Legal Responsibility
42. ProcessTotalTax in any itan Print template Credit Card Data on shipping costs CreditCardExpireMonth Input field where the credit card Print templates Invoice Credit Card expiration month is entered Data Order Confirmation CreditCardExpireYear Input field where the credit card Print templates Invoice Credit Card expiration year is entered Data Order Confirmation CreditCardNo Input field where the credit card Print templates Invoice Credit Card number is entered Data Order Confirmation Table 36 Inventory Print Out TLE Variables TLE Variable CurrentOperator Description The operator printing the inventory report Available Templates Print templates only T InventoryPositions Lists all products in inventory report Used in LOOP statement Print template Inventory list Date when the current record was last LastUpdateDate updated Print template Customer ProductStockLevel Number of items in stock Print template Inventory list ProductStockLevelMin pum reete alloyed as un Print template Inventory list the Product Manager ProductStockLevelOrdered Quantity ordered from supplier but not yet in stock Print template Inventory list ProductStockLevelReserved Quantity reserved for a customer but not yet shipped Print template Inventory list Table 37 Customer Print Out TLE Variables TLE Variable Des
43. Purchasing Order to be sent to a supplier your system considers the ordered stock as being already on hand in your inventory even though the stock may not actually arrive for some time If you prefer to log additions to inventory only after ordered stock is received then deactivate this setting and use the Inventory Manager to adjust inventory levels manually See Enter Stock Manually on p 162 Default setting No unchecked Check Credit Limit Activate this setting to have the INTERSHOP system check a customer s store credit level when invoices for that customer are generated If the accumulated amount of a customer s open invoices exceeds his or her store credit limit then creation of further invoices is blocked until credit is readjusted To set the default system wide store credit limit see Customer Preferences on p 56 To adjust for individual customers see Customer Manager on p 169 Default value Yes checked Enable Profiles This setting must be activated to enable the customer profiles and personal shopping assistant feature Implementation also requires that you create profile classes and profile class items and then link the items to catalogs products and customer categories see Link a Profile Item to a Category on p 212 You then prepare profile templates see Create and Assign Profiles on p 390 Default value Yes checked Year 2000 Split Year If you choose a four digit date style
44. See Create Catalog Attribute Names on page 132 and Edit or Delete Catalog Attribute Names on page 133 for details E Define attribute values Navigate through each category and define values for that category See Define or Edit Catalog Attribute Values on page 134 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 131 Catalog Attributes Catalog Manager W Insert attribute TLE variables in Catalog and List Templates Each attribute created generates a TLE variable that must be added to the HTML of the appropriate catalog and list templates This step is described in Chapter 6 see Insert Catalog Attribute TLE Variables into Catalog and List Templates on page 377 for details Create Catalog Attribute Names 1 Open the Catalog Manager and click Catalog Attribute Values The Catalog Attribute Values page is displayed Figure 78 WW catalog Manager BACK SAVE CREATE AND EDIT ATTRIBUTES HELP Catalog Attribute Values Category Name Main Level Category Hide Empty Attributes String Attributes catalogimage 7 Text Attributes Text Attrib a Multimedia Attributes CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 78 The Catalog Attribute Values page 2 Click Create and Edit Attributes The Create and Edit Attributes page is displayed Figure 79 w Catalog Manager BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST DELETE
45. Settings Manager 4 Statistics Click Search to see the report Figure 137 Access Count How many times the product has been accessed by customers In Baskets How many times the product was placed in shopping baskets In Orders How many times the product was ordered Profit How much gross profit can be attributed to the product retail sales price minus wholesale purchase price Sales Total sales of product Ai Settings Manager BACK PRODUCT STATISTICS SEARCH RESULT 1002 Leather Steering Wheel Cover Access Counter In Baskets In Orders Profit Sales CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 137 Statistics report on an individual product To Rank Products in Terms of Interest Shown 2 3 4 5 Select Settings Manager from the navigation bar Select Product Statistics Select the radio button for Top Products Enter the number of products you would like ranked enter a date range or leave blank to query an unlimited date range Click Search The report appears Figure 138 ranking products according to number of times accessed by customers PI Settings Manager BACK PRINT PREVIEW Show Product Hit List Top 5 products accessed 01 01 99 09 01 99 B Leather Steering Wheel Cover 6 N Aiwa AM FM Stere
46. Storefront templates only Service NoOfltemsOnInvoice Mor j are already part of an invoice List of previous order The number of items of the order that Storefront templates only Service are already part of a packing slip List of previous order The number of invoice that have been Storefront templates only Service created from to that order List of previous order NoOflnvoicesPaid The number of invoice the have been Storefront templates only Service paid see above List of previous order NoOfltemsOnOrder The number of items on the order Storefront templates only Service total List of previous order The number of items of the order that Storefront templates only Service NoOfltemsOnInvoice ae are already part of an invoice List of previous order 0rderCompletlyProcessed All necessary invoices and packing slips Storefront templates only Service exist and all invoices have been paid List of previous order All items of the order are placed on Storefront templates only Service OrderProcessingComplete du r corresponding invoices List of previous order At least one invoice exists for Storefront templates only Service OrderProcessingStarted mp this order List of previous order Page 246 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Table 22 Previ
47. Style of Date ayerag Number of Baskets ooo Period From Number of New Customers Number of Orders Number of Visits Orders per Basket Yearly C Profit Turnover CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 134 Traffic Order Statistics search page 3 From the drop down menu select the item for which you desire an analysis Accounts Receivable Total value of all unpaid invoices Average Basket Price Average cost of each basket Average Order Price Average cost of each total order Number of Baskets Number of shopping baskets filled Number of New Customers Number of new shoppers who completed registration Number of Orders Number of times customers completed an order Number of Visits Number of visitors to your storefront Orders per Basket Ratio of baskets filled that resulted in orders Profit Total sales minus total wholesale price of items sold Turnover Total sales revenue from all invoices 4 Enter a date range or leave blank if you wish to query the entire database 5 Select a measurement interval numerical breakdown on a per day per week per month or annualized basis Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 205 Statistics Settings Manager 6 Click Search The analysis is displayed Figure 135 7 If you wish to print click Print Preview then select Print from your bro
48. The Direct Credit Card Entry Menu page is displayed Figure 48 2 System Administration BACK Direct Credit Card Entry Menu Create Edit and Delete Accepted Credit Cards Credit Card Settings CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 48 Menu for managing default direct credit card entry settings 2 Select Create Edit and Delete Accepted Credit Cards The appropriate page is displayed Figure 49 System Administration BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST DELETE DIRECT CREDIT CARD ENTRY Create Edit and Delete Accepted Cards New Value Euro Card AmEx Diner s Club MasterCard Visa CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER SETTINGS SYSTEM ADMIN manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 49 Add edit or remove card names 3 Enter the name of a credit card you want to add to the list 4 Click Add to List To edit the name of an existing credit card select the card from the drop down list edit the information and click Save Page 84 Chapter 2 System Administration Payment Method Settings Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data Verify the Format of Credit Card Entries Select Direct Credit Card Entry from the System Administration Main Menu Select Credit Card Settings Figure 48 Check the box Check Credit Cards in the Storefront
49. View a previous basket order PrevShippingMethodName Name of the shipping method of a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service T PrevShippingNamel basket order View a previous basket order PrevShippingName2 Kee et PrevShippingName3 a i Weine ee en pts basket re E en pets halo PrevShippingCity Ae ale Suh hiec bs PrevShippingCountry ee E PrevShippingPhone a mor eli PrevShippngPhone2 Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Table 22 Previous Order TLE Variables Service TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates for Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service Mrd basket order View a previous basket order bea Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order ar Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service PrevShippingState basket order View a previous basket order A Total price of the shipping of a Storefron
50. We recommend including explicit instructions on the Direct Credit Card Entry page warning customers that they accept the same legal responsibility when entering their card number electronically as they do when signing a physical credit card receipt Y m i TRAINING STORE checkout Credit AmEx z Order summary Basket AmEx 990618 1011 number Credit Card Diner s Club Number MasterCard Taxi 0 00 Visa Shipping UPS US 2nd method Day Air Expiration Date giro sl AL 414 90 total Sub total 98 34 Address information Billing Shipping John Doe John Doe Software Programmer Software Programmer 123 Main Street 123 Main Street Providence Rhode Island 44444 Providence Rhode Island 44444 USA USA The Credit Card Entry template appears if Direct Credit Card Entry is chosen as payment method This payment e Y alaa inim ial Figure 47 Direct entry unsecured credit card payment in the Training Store Chapter 2 System Administration Page 83 Accept Direct Credit Card Entry Payment Method Settings Enable Direct Credit Card Entry To enable customers to pay using online entry of credit card information select the Direct Credit Card Entry checkbox on the Payment Method Settings page Add Accepted Credit Cards to the Drop Down Menu 1 Select the Direct Credit Card Entry link on the System Administration Main Menu
51. a drop down menu containing any existing entries Type your new entry in the New Value field Example Enter the customer category Retailers Click Add to List Your entry now appears in the drop down menu Delete Drop Down Menu Entries Select Set Up Drop Down Menus from the Settings Manager Main Menu Click on the name of the drop down menu you wish to edit The edit page appears with a drop down menu that contains the current entries From the drop down menu select the entry you wish to delete so that it shows in the New Value field NOTE If you wish to delete the first entry in the drop down menu you may need to select a different entry and then re select the first entry to make it appear in the Name field Click Delete A message asks if you are sure Click Yes The entry no longer appears in the drop down menu Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 189 Discounts Discounts Settings Manager Through the INTERSHOP discount system you can offer sales and discounts in your online store The procedure described below details the steps involved You create a discount class such as Summer Sale you apply that discount class to one or more customer categories and define the terms of the discount then you link particular products to the discount class in the Product Manager For how to create customer categories and link customers to them see Drop Down Menus
52. and CustomTLE Sections of the style ini File In this section you define the color schemes that the user selects in Step 8 of the Store Design Wizard Later in the Color Schemes section of the style ini file you enter the HTML color codes for each scheme defined by a name in this section The key number associates the value entered here with the correspondingly numbered schemes defined in the previous section ColorSchemes count 4 1 Colorl 2 Color2 3 Color3 4 Color4 Table 71 Key Value Input for ColorScheme Key Value in Example Description The number of Color Schemes being defined for this template count 4 style Color Red A unique identifier for the first color scheme which is the default Color2 Blue 14 Color Green The unique identifiers for the second third and fourth color schemes defined for this template Color4 Yellow Page 346 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini ButtonStyles BannerStyles and HeaderStyles Sections of the style ini File A button banner or header style is a collection of button banner or header images located in a particular directory and associated with a scheme via the key number Because all schemes use the same template set the images in the different sub style directories must have the same file names ButtonStyles count 4 1 Buttonsl Red 2 Buttons2 Blue 3 Buttons3
53. column will be used to assure unique customer Identification Identification values must be unique for each shopper e g if a customer enters a login name already used by another shopper they will be prompted to choose a different name BI Double Registration Check D The fields designated in the D Duplication column will assure that a customer doesn t register twice under different names e g if different logins and passwords are chosen for a single e mail address INTERSHOP will send a message that the customer already has an established membership Page Caching Preferences These options are discussed in Page Caching on p 307 Supported Language Preferences If you have purchased and installed one or more INTERSHOP 4 Language Packs you can select the languages you wish to enable for your Storefront This choice will also affect the Back Office and System Administration Languages pop up menu in Regional Preferences on p 52 which sets the language for the back office When printing forms in the Order Manager or editing Templates in System Administration formats will be available only in the selected languages System Administration BACK SAYE Supported Language Preferences Active Language 150 Code iv English EN CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 36 Supported Language Preferen
54. count 4 1 Banners1 2 Banners2 Figure 173 The style ini file showing sections sub sections and key value pairs The sections and sub sections of the style ini file are as follows each section will be treated in greater detail below E Set Up Information Enter the identifying information for your template style and schemes in the Info Languages and Schemes areas of this section Customizable Sub Styles Associate the schemes defined for your template style with the elements users customize in the Store Design Wizard steps ButtonStyles BannerStyles HeaderStyles ColorSchemes and CustomT LE Chapter 5 Templates Page 341 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Page 342 Scheme Defaults Set the default values for the schemes defined for your template style Each sub section corresponds to one of the schemes defined for your template The style ini file references the schemes Style1 Style2 Style3 and Style4 Button Styles Banner Styles and Header Styles Although these are three separate sections in the style ini file the key value pair set up is the same for all three and they are discussed as a group for the sake of brevity Color Schemes Define your color schemes using standard HTML color codes Custom TLE Variables Enter the default values for the TLE variables used by your template style Template List The INTE
55. it cannot be assigned no checkbox will appear Click Save The Assign Product Variation Values page is displayed Figure 94 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager e Product Manager BACK ASSIGN TO PRODUCT HELP Product Variations Assign Product Variation Values 1002 Leather Steering Wheel Cover Number in Stock 20 Color Fire Engine Red 4 Mamba Maroon Mercury Silver Metallic Yellow ks Midnight Blue ks Model 1960 70 Classics zI 1970 80 Gas Guzzlers zI Luxury Cars ks Minivans ks Sports Utilities CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager ADMIN manager manager manager Figure 94 Assign the values to be used for each type in this variation set 6 Create the product variation set Select the values for each type you will include in this variation set Enter an amount for Number in Stock It will apply to each variation in the set and can be modified later Click Assign to Product Wait as prompted during the creation process 7 The Variation Create and Edit Rules page appears Figure 96 To create rules see Create a Variation Type and its Values on page 152 For now skip the Rules page you can return later leave all fields in their default positions and click Apply Rules 8 The newly created variations appear in the produ
56. mam xc o A wr ELM S o gt 0 BI U EZ SHss u9Gm 5 A F22 M A B C D E G product Wholesale Retail 1 no Product Description Price Price 2 5001 Sybil by F Schrieber 5 10 In this example data import 3 5002 Cannery Row by J Steinbeck B 12 file the first row containing 4 5003 In Cold Blood by T Capote Y 14 5 5004 Taming of the Shrew by W Shakespere 8 16 non header data is row 2 6 5005 Without Feathers W Allen 9 18 Row is the header row 7 Figure 62 A sample Excel spreadsheet used to import product data Chapter 2 System Administration Page 101 Data Import Tool Step by Step Page 102 Data Import Select Delete Data File After Import checkbox if you want your data file deleted from your hard drive after import The data file will only be deleted if the import is successful no errors or rejected records Select Run in Background if you do not want to monitor the import process on the Data Import Tool Monitor page The Data Import Monitor page lists details of the import process and is updated as the process runs Figure 63 The Clear Page Cache After Import checkbox is selected by default Selecting this checkbox will delete all your cached pages after import and the import process will take less time If you do not select this checkbox only the pages affected by the import will be deleted after import Click Start to begin
57. up on baskets that were filled but not ordered These baskets occur in two groups Anonymous Baskets If the shopper doesn t register the basket is stored under the name WWWAnonymous Anonymous baskets can help you detect trends and refine your marketing strategy products often handled but seldom bought may be priced too high while an item that is never handled might need to be moved to a more prominent place in the store e Non Ordered Customer Baskets If a registered shopper selects an item but doesn t buy or if a non member customer fills out the Non member registration form and then doesn t buy INTERSHOP retains the information so the merchant can send a follow up letter about the basket perhaps offering a discount or promoting related items Page 184 Chapter 3 The Back Office Order Manager Review and Follow Up on Baskets Search and Review Non Ordered Baskets Open the Search Orders page in the Order Manager and select Transaction Type Baskets Narrow your search using the other search fields if desired Click Search A list of baskets fitting your search criteria is displayed Figure 115 Those which were ordered have an order number link those which were not show non ordered Click the basket number of a non ordered basket to open the Basket Details page and review Order Manager Baskets List Name Order No Date Sub total 990618 1009 Jo
58. 1 Enter a name manufacturer or price range as desired The Sports Place search is designed to find variations on all bikes but not fishing or sailing products Be sure to enter name manufacturer etc as appropriate for bikes 2 Select the color component maker and frame size you would want in a bike 3 Click Go under the variations drop down boxes A list matching your search terms is displayed 4 Click on item names to see them in more detail When you place an order you will be asked to register or provide your member name and password SPORTS PLACE Your One stop Sports Superstore 2 18 SEARCH 1 Choose a search method BUILD A BIKE Color 2 Components Select other options 5 8 Figure 5 The search page in Sports Place includes search by variations price range etc Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 23 Look for Things to Buy Sports Place for Visitors Find Products on Special Offer The Specials button associated with the template called Hot Deals allows merchants to showcase items that are on sale for all customers 1 Click the Specials button A list of products on special is displayed 2 Click the Add button beside a product name to add it to your basket or click the product name to see more details Browse the Catalog You browse the catalog by clicking on product categories and products 1 Click the HOME button to retur
59. 2 Follow the steps to Fill the Shopping Basket on p 30 Follow the steps for Non Member Checkout on p 25 Click Order and review resulting Order Information page Merchants decide whether or not to include this page by clicking a checkbox in System Administration If order is satisfactory click Order An order confirmation message appears Submit the Order as a Member 2 Follow the steps to Fill the Shopping Basket on p 30 Choose to order as a member It may be necessary to register or log in as described in Member Registration on p 27 then return to the basket page to order using your current membership A payment selection page appears Select a payment method and click Order Now If prompted enter your password In Sports Place an order information review page is displayed If order is satisfactory click Order Now If payment method Direct Credit Card Entry was chosen a credit card entry mask appears Otherwise the order is sent immediately Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 31 Placing an Order Page 32 SPORTS PLACE EZ Your One stop Sports Superstore CHECK OUTE Order Summary Order Number 990705 1008 0 00 Shipping USMail 0 00 Sub total 180 49 Additional info Total 180 49 Address information Billing Member Name Company 500 Townsend San Francisco CA 94103 USA Your order has been completed To coi 5
60. 2 delafterimp 0 statusfile status log errorfile error log 3 Your data cache is automatically reset once the import process is complete Page 114 Chapter 2 System Administration Staging Information Copied Between Live and Staging Stores Staging Staging stores are unlicensed stores used for demonstration and testing purposes Merchants can copy a live store to a staging store and modify it while keeping the original live store online Then the updated staging store is copied back to the live server eliminating downtime in the storefront Staging stores and live stores are run simultaneously and require different URLs Contact your Site Administrator to get the URL addresses database logins and passwords for both the staging and live stores Staging is activated from the System Administration Main Menu of the source store the store being copied Information Copied Between Live and Staging Stores If you are copying a live store into a staging store or a staging store into a live store the following information will be sent e Product data e Category structure Profile items e All templates Image files e Other static files i e data that is used by INTERSHOP 4 to create Web pages NOTE Once a live store is copied to a staging store any changes made to products categories profiles templates images or other static files such as price changes or product
61. 270 CurrentDay 225 270 CurrentHour 225 270 CurrentMinute 226 270 CurrentMonth 226 270 CurrentOperator 260 CurrentTime 226 270 CurrentYear 226 270 CustAccount2String 226 CustAccountDetails 226 CustAccountString 226 CustCategoryName 226 270 CustCategoryNo 226 CustCity 226 262 270 CustComment 226 CustCountry 226 262 270 272 CustCreditBalance 270 CustCreditcard 259 CustCreditPeriod 226 CustEMail 226 262 270 Page 453 CustEax 226 262 270 CustLoginName 226 263 270 CustName 365 CustNamel 226 263 270 284 CustName2 226 263 270 CustName3 227 263 270 CustNo 227 270 CustOperator 227 CustOperatorNo 227 CustPaymentMethod 227 270 CustPaymentMethodID 227 270 CustPhone 227 263 270 CustPhone2 227 263 270 CustState 227 263 270 CustStoreCredit 227 270 CustStreet 227 263 270 CustTaxArea 227 270 CustTaxAreaNo 270 CustZipCode 227 263 270 DeliveryPositions 231 260 DiscountName 236 277 DiscountPercent 236 277 284 286 DNSname 257 277 ErrorMessage 227 321 FirstNolInBatch 237 265 262 277 281 364 FormTagAttributesSSL 262 277 281 GenericMessage 257 HasDiscount 227 236 270 HasLanguageChange 257 HasNewPrice 243 IE and ELSE Statements 271 Image 328 Input_ProductQuantity 265 InventoryPositions 231 InvoiceNo 261 InvoicePaid 261 InvoicePositions 231 InvoiceSubTotal 238 InvoiceTotalPrice 238 InvoiceTotalla
62. 400x200 pixels The suggested size is 300x100 pixels The name of the group the template belongs to determines group Classic where in the SDW the template selection is displayed Headers identifying each template group appear in Step 3 of the SDW The name of a sub directory that contains static HTML files that will be copied independently of the selected schemes This directory can also contain sound or image files tied to a specific scheme staticfiles StaticFiles Chapter 5 Templates Page 343 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Table 68 Key Value inputs for the Info Section of ini file Key Value in Example Description of Value The directory containing your image imagedir Sitelmages files The name of a sub directory that contains static HTML files that will be copied independently of the selected scheme This directory can also contain sound or image files tied to a specific scheme templates Templates The name of a static HTML file preview preview html located in the style directory that is used to preview the style Figure 174 shows how the name description group and preview jpeg entries in the Info section of the style ini file are displayed in Step 3 of the Store Design Wizard Store Design Wizard Store Design Wizard Step 3 All Purpose cious Audience Will Find his Style That
63. Administration BACK SAVE OPERATOR SETTINGS New Operator Name kitty Cartwright login Miss Kitty SCS Password Confirmation Deactivate CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN manager manager Figure 52 The New Operator page NOTE Select the Deactivate checkbox to temporarily block the operator from logging on 4 Click Save when then form is complete You automatically return to the Operator Settings Menu page Change Passwords and Login Names The procedure for changing passwords for operators and the System Administrator is the same As a security precaution change passwords regularly l Select Operator Settings Menu on the System Administration Main Menu The Operator Settings Menu is displayed Figure 50 2 Select Administrator or the name of the operator whose name password or login you want to change 3 To change the password Enter the old password then enter the new password in the Password field and again in the Password Confirmation field Passwords must have at least six alphanumeric characters and are Case sensitive Chapter 2 System Administration Page 89 Delete an Operator Control Back Office amp Storefront Access 4 To change an operator name or login Edit the name and login fields Reminder the System Administrator login is preset to admin
64. Administrators can also create TLE elements to be used by all of the stores in a site For example a site name or logo These Site wide TLE elements appear in the list of TLEs available to a template if they can be used on that template TLE Variables and Page Caching Because cached pages cannot contain any dynamic content that is content that changes during a single session at the Storefront the following TLE variables cannot be used in templates designated for Page Caching Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 269 TLE Variables and Page Caching Page 270 For more information see Page Caching p 307 TLE Variables Table 44 TLE Variables Incompatible with Cached Static Pages BasketNo TE CustEMail TE CustTaxAreaNo ShippingMethod BasketSubTotal TE CustFax CustLipCode ShippingName BasketTotalPrice CustLoginName HasDiscount ShippingNamel BasketTotalTax CustNamel sAnonymous ShippingName2 CountBookmarks CustName2 sProfileActivated ShippingName3 CurrentDate CustName3 ProductTaxAmount ShippingPhone CurrentDay CustNo ProductlaxClass ShippingPhone2 CurrentHour CustPaymentMethod ProductlotalPrice ShippingPrice CurrentMinute CustPaymentMethod ProductlotalTax ShippingState CurrentMonth CustPhone TEREMOTE ADDR ShippingStreet CurrentTime CustPhone2 TEREMOTE HOST ShippingSubTotal CurrentYear CustState TEREMOTE USER ShippingTax Cust
65. An order confirmation message appears unt BASKET SPECIAL Thank you for shopping at Sports Place Keep this order confirmation for your records You may want to print out this page To become a Sports Place retailer call 1 888 000 1111 Please stop by again soon Shipping Member Name Company 500 Townsend San Francisco CA 94103 USA ntinue shopping please click the button below BACK TO STORE Figure 13 The order confirmation page Sports Place for Members NOTE If when registering you checked Send an e mail to confirm my order you ll also receive an order confirmation via e mail Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Members Online Customer Service Online Customer Service Through the My Account links merchants can provide information to their customers about company policies and member benefits allow customers to review their personal ordering histories and even provide them real time access to pending order status Members can also track orders and review previous shopping baskets from the Account page SPORTS PLACE Your One stop Sports Superstore EY TD MY ACCOUNT Welcome to your account Member Name Store Services This is where you can change your store password edit your shipping address view previous baskets or completed orders and manage your account We hope you find everything you need but if you have any questions
66. Create Profile classes and items in System Administration Customer Profile Matrix p 72 Bi Assign Profile items to categories and products in the back office see Chapter 3 Edit templates so that customers can define their Profile Create a link to the Profile section in the Storefront Create an input form on the Profile editing page e Activate deactivate the Profile feature e Display the profile to the customer Enable the search mask to work with Profiles This section describes how to edit all the templates involved Step Create a Link to a Profile Section with ZURL ViewProfile Page 390 Embed an HTML link in any Storefront template for customers to access the Profile tool To create this link use the TLE variable URL_ViewProfile as in the example below lt A HREF URL_ViewProfile gt Click here to view your profile A When a customer clicks on the link INTERSHOP automatically brings up one of two pages e An introductory page Storefront template Profile New Profile if no profile for this customer exists yet This template includes a link to the Profile editing page Storefront template Profile Edit Profile See step 2 for details An existing profile Storefront template Profile Display Profile if the customer has already filled out the Profile form and created a personal profile This template also includes a link to the Profile editing page so customers can edit their pr
67. CustNo automatically assigned by Customer All templates Manager or when a customer registers in the storefront Operator assigned to customer If the customer registered in the storefront CustOperator the operator is automatically online All templates This can be changed in the back office using the Customer Manager CustOperatorNo All templates customer CustPaymentMethod Payment nee Chiosen es sane All templates except Print templates entry credit card CustPaymentMethodID D mbes corresponding tthe All templates except Print templates customer s payment method CustPhone Billing address phone number All templates CustPhone2 Billing address second phone number All templates TECustState Billing address state All templates CustStoreCredit Customer s total credit allowance All templates TECustStreet Billing address street All templates CustTaxArea Customer s tax area All templates except Print templates CustZipCode Billing address zip code All templates Provides an error message if customer Storefront templates Non member ErrorMessage registration or change of shipping Data Search Mask Registration address fails Shipping Address Flag set to I if customer gets a HasDiscount discount 0 if not Used with EF All templates statement TE lsAnonymous Flag set to I if customer is anonymous 0 if not Used with IF statement All templates except Prin
68. Data page is displayed Figure 8 Notice that there are no fields for member name or password In some cases a non member registration might include nothing but an e mail address SPORTS PLACE IS Your One stop Sports Superstore y Y VY CHECK 0 U T mmm Billing Address SPECIALS INFO SEARCH HOME Shipping Address Ship to billing address Name Title Company Street Address City State Zip Code Country Daytime Phone Evening Phone Fax Email o Please send me a fax as order confirmation 7 Please send me an e mail as order confirmation M Payment Method Cash on Delivery E Your basket s total price 1 139 05 Tax Jurisdiction California z CONTINUE Items marked with are required Figure 8 Non member data form in Sports Place Fill out the Non Member Checkout data and select a payment method and tax jurisdiction Including payment and tax selection on the checkout page reduces steps for the user Click Continue The non member information is now logged and is available throughout this session If you wish you can continue browsing or complete the order Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Visitors Sports Place for Members Member Registration Sports Place for Members Once a shopper registers with a login and password a persistent shopping identity is established in the d
69. Description of category Catalog and List templates CategoryName Name of category Catalog and List templates CategoryNo Category displayed Catalog and List templates automatically in Catalog Manager Number of first displayed element on a page in a List template Example if number of items in a list was set to FirstNolnBatch 5 in System Administration then the Storefront and List templates value for the first page of search list would be I For the second page the value would be 6 LastNolnBatch Nuber n st displayed elemehton a Storefront and List templates page in a List template Displays number of subcategories in a category Value 0 means the category empty or contains products Value not TENoOfSubCategories 0 number of subcategories Used Catalog templates Category basic Root Categories in IF statements with operators to determine whether a subcategory or product list should be displayed Lists all products in an end category Products category without subcategories Used List templates List basic in LOOP statement TotalltemsInList Number of total elements in a list All templates except Product and Mail templates URL_Catalog Creates a link that displays the store s main categories i e the Root category All templates except Print templates TEURL Category Creates a link that displays a specific category page when used with a categor
70. Green 4 Buttons4 Yellow BannerStyles count 4 1 Banners1 Red 2 Banners2 Blue 3 Banners3 Green 4 Banners4 Yellow HeaderStyles count 4 1 Headers1 2 Headers2 3 Headers3 4 Headers4 Table 72 Key Value Inputs for Buttons Banners and Headers Key Value in Example Description of Value The number of button banner and count 4 header styles or color schemes NA being defined for the template style The name of the directory within Buttons Red the template style directory that contains the image files for the first 7 button style Buttons2 Blue The name of the directories within Buttons3 Green the template style directory that 2 4 contain the second through fourth 1 Buttons4 Yellow button style s The name of the directory within the template style directory that 1 contains the image files for the first 5 banner style Chapter 5 Templates Page 347 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Table 72 Key Value Inputs for Buttons Banners and Headers Key Value in Example Description of Value The name of the directories within the template style directory that Banners3 Green contains the image files for the 4 Banners4 Yellow second third and fourth banner 5 Styles The name of the directory within the template style directory that Headers Red contains the image files for the first 6 header st
71. LSE EF http URL_ProductView gt ProductNo lt A gt ENDIF IF Color lt br gt Color Color ENDIF IF Size lt br gt Size Size ENDIF ENDLOOP lt ENDIF 2 de db dE OTe JavaScript Display Many Variations in a Drop Down Menu JavaScript can be used to display a larger number of imported variations at the storefront Insert the following code into the assigned template lt script language JavaScript gt function varsubmit document GoToAnotherVariation action document GoToAnotherVariation ProductVariation option s document Go ToAnotherVariation ProductVariation selectedIndex va lue document GoToAnotherVariation submit lt script gt Call the script to create a drop down menu that displays the variation product numbers When customers select a variation using this menu the page automatically updates with correct price and attributes for the selected variation Chapter 5 Templates Page 329 Product Attributes vs Product Variations Template Groups in Detail Product Search Products by Attribute Data Type Page 330 Note that if you allow customers to search by attributes in the storefront you may need to edit the templates so customers enter data in the required format For example if they should enter integers such as 20 or float values such as 20 00 the input field should make the requirement clear String or tex
72. Levy sales tax the new customer Customer Category Frequent Buyer x Default category for a new customer Tax Juristiction Others z Default tax juristiction for a new customer Store Credit 0 999999999 410 000 00 Default amount of store credit for a new customer Credit Length 0 100900 14 Default length of time that credit is given to a new customer in days Figure 30 Customer Preferences in System Administration W Customer Category Auto Assignment for New Customers Some merchants may want all newly registering customers automatically assigned to a category which can then be linked to a discount scheme For example customers registering in December can automatically be assigned to Customer Category Holiday Shoppers which you have linked to a discount class such as Holiday Sale If you want all new customers to fall into a certain Customer Category when they register select that category from the drop down menu here so that it shows in the window otherwise select the blank entry For complete instructions on setting up discounts and linking them to customer categories see Discounts on p 190 NOTE Operators create new Customer Categories under Drop Down Menus in the Settings Manager see Drop Down Menus on p 188 Default setting Blank no Customer Category assigned to new customers Tax Jurisdiction Enter the state or country in which the majority of your customers live or l
73. Managers work together as paired teams to carry out your daily tasks Catalog and Product Managers keep the catalog structure organized Inventory and Purchasing Managers keep your shelves stocked and the Customer and Order Managers work together to process all customer orders The Settings Manager sets up standard preferences used by all the other Managers and keeps track of activities so you can generate reports and analyses Organize and Enter Products The Product Manager and Catalog Manager are used for maintenance of your products Daily tasks may include Create or Extend a Category Edit a Category Create a New Product Edit Product Information Organize and Enter Products Manage Inventory and Purchase Stock Page 122 Use the Inventory and Purchasing Managers to track inventory and order additional stock You are likely to carry out these workflow steps Check inventory levels Request stock order suggestions and generate purchase orders Record additions to inventory upon receipt of stock from your suppliers Chapter 3 The Back Office Introduction to the Back Office Overview The Managers and Everyday Business Operations Administer Customer Information and Orders The Customer and Order Managers assist you in the daily tasks of customer account administration Review accounts of newly registered member customers Register members who do not register themselves online e Assign member customers to your cus
74. Names creating 132 Names deleting 133 CATALOG MANAGER 124 Categories Creating 126 Deleting 131 Moving 128 Sorting alphabetically 130 Sorting manually 129 Templates assigning to 124 Clicks Reducing in storefront 60 320 Comment Field See Free Text Entry Comparison Operators See IF Statements Cookies 28 48 320 Credit Cards By phone or fax 179 Direct entry 83 179 Export data for processing 209 Manual handling 208 Print data for processing 209 Processing 85 208 Verifying 85 Credit Limit See Store Credit Cross selling Electronically download Java script for 384 Currency Create multiple 66 Default alternate 68 Exchange rates 68 Net or Gross prices and 66 See Numbers formatted Customer Accounts Balance calculating 170 Errors correcting 174 Introduced 174 Customer Category Customer assigning to 170 Drop down menu adding to 188 CUSTOMER MANAGER 169 Customer Profiles Activating 394 Classes creating 73 Classes deleting 75 Creating and assigning 390 Displaying to customer 395 Editing 217 Input form creating 391 Item link to category deleting 216 Page 447 Item link to product creating 214 Item link to product deleting 216 Items creating 74 Profile section creating link to 390 Search engine enabling 396 System wide enabling 49 Customer Registration And cookies 28 Login 28 Member 27 28 31 Non member 31 Customer Service 33 Customers Category see Customer Category Deactiva
75. ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 155 Using the Template Editor Any changes made to a template must be saved to take effect If you leave a template without clicking Save your changes will be lost Chapter 5 Templates Page 297 Export Templates and Import HTML Files INTERSHOP Template Tools Export Templates and Import HTML Files Any template can be exported as an HI ML file to the hard drive and any page created externally for example with an HI ML authoring tool can be imported into the Editor window Exported templates contain META tags to assure successful re import When you create new files for import you simply add the appropriate META tags to the new files See Tips on Using META Tags on Exported Template Files p 300 for details before working with exported files NOTE The export and import tools described here create static pages for opening in external HTML editors such as FrontPage Do not confuse this with the Cached Templates command used Page Caching p 307 Export ALL Templates Simultaneously Page 298 You can simultaneously export all templates in the store s database The entire template directory structure will be created as htm files on the hard drive After working with these files you can also re import the entire structure at one time see Import ALL Templates Simultaneously p 299 To export all tem
76. P gt Manufacturer lt BR gt SelectBox_Manufacturer lt BR gt lt P gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Start Search gt lt FORM gt How it looks in the Storefront Name or Description AND OR Manufacturer Start Search Figure 180 Search interface using both And and Or Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 369 Using FORMs in Templates Storefront Templates Search Within Price Ranges Two TLE variables allow you to build a search interface for searching within price ranges Name_SearchPriceMin and Name_SearchPriceMax Insert the following into the code example for Search with AND or above right before the INPUI SUBMIT tag 1 CurrencySymbol causes the symbol chosen in System Ad ministration to be displayed gt Search for products between lt BR gt CurrencySymbol lt INPUT TYPE TEXT NAME Name SearchPriceMin SIZE 6 gt and CurrencySymbol lt INPUT TYPE TEXT NAME Name SearchPriceMax SIZE 6 gt lt P gt How it looks in the Storefront Name or Description AND OR C Manufacturer Search for products between and Start Search Figure 181 Adding Min and price search parameters Search Product Attributes Only the Search Mask template can search for product attributes When product attributes are created INTERSHOP also cr
77. Pages See Page Caching Store Live to staging copying from 115 Store Credit Checking credit limit preferences 49 Credit length setting 171 Customer setting limit for 171 Defined 49 System wide default setting value 58 Page 451 Store Design Wizard Customization choices 46 New template sets creating 334 New template styles creating 336 Style definition file style ini 341 Template style directory structure 335 Template style definition 334 Storefront 358 Locking 90 Log in session time out preferences 48 Look and feel 312 Unlocking 90 Storefront Templates 358 See Templates Supplier 56 Product assigning to 141 Purchasing Manager used by 165 System Administration First time use 40 Introduction 39 When and why to use 40 T Tables Attribute Data Types 146 IF Statements Relational Operators 272 Product Attributes TLE Variables 234 Relational Operators 272 Storefront Templates 313 Time Related TLE Variables 225 URL User Template TLE Variables 256 Tax Classes assigning to product 142 Classes creating and deleting 202 Individual customer activating 171 Jurisdiction assigning to customer 171 Jurisdiction default 57 Jurisdictions creating 201 Jurisdictions deleting 202 Overview 200 Rates entering 203 System wide activating 56 Tax matrix creating 203 Page 452 Template Editor Export Import buttons see also Templates Overview 297 Preview button 303 TLE Assistant 302 Template Tools See Tem
78. ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice ProductQuantity ProductSubTotal ProductlaxAmount ProductlotalPrice Productlotallax UnitOfMeasurement Table 64 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Purchase Order Print template with the loop variable SupplierOrderPositions Table 61 Print Template Purchase Order LOOP variable SupplierOrderPositions FAIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice FEAIt_ProductSubTotal ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice Page 284 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements LOOP Statements Table 61 Print Template Purchase Order LOOP variable SupplierOrderPositions Alt_ProductTotalPrice ProductQuantity Alt_ProductTotalTax ProductSubTotal lsProductVariation ProductlaxAmount ltemNo TE ProductTotalPrice ManufacturerName ProductTotalTax ManufacturerNo UnitOMeasurement ProductName Table 62 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Packing Slips Print template with the loop variable DeliveryPositions Table 62 Print Template Packing Slip Uses LOOP variable DeliveryPositions ltemNo ProductNo f lsProductVariation ProductQuantity PackingSlipNo UnitOfMeasurement ProductName Table 63 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Inventory Print template with the loop variable InventoryPositions Table 63 Print Template Inventory Uses LOOP variable InventoryPositions lsProductVariation ProductStoc
79. Storefront See Chapter 5 Templates for details on product template editing If you have not customized any product templates you can choose the pre designed Product default template from the drop down menu The most efficient option is to have your custom product templates designed and ready before entering products in the Product Manager Required Visible in Storefront Any product can be made invisible to customers by deselecting this box The database retains the product information for later re activation Contrast with deleted products which are permanently removed Optional Hot Deal INTERSHOP includes a special Hot Deals template where merchants can display special products separately from other products Check this box if you want to use the Hot Deals page in your store and have this product appear there Hot Deals products may also be accessed directly from a remote web site by using the Direct Storefront Entry and Buy Now banner options See the Direct Storefront Entry on page 397 for more details Optional NOTE Hot Deals are available to all customers without distinction and are not the same as discounts which can be assigned to different customer groups and with varying terms 10 off for new members 15 off for retailers for example Manufacturer Manufacturer names are created in the Settings Manager in the Drop Down Menus section see page 188 Once manufact
80. Storefront Access 88 Operator Settings 88 Change Passwords and Login 89 Delete an 90 Lock Unlock the Storefront cese RI 90 Database Administration 91 Data Import oo col Ive Rr ead 93 Data Import Tool Overview RR 93 Data Import Tool Step by Step 2 II 93 Work with Existing Data Import 104 Rules for Mapping Data Classes 107 Import Product 109 Command Line Data Hl Staging lue uaque vorax dcbet e mE 115 Information Copied Between Live and Staging Stores 0008 115 The Staging 116 Chapter 3 The Back Office 117 Introduction to the Back Office 119 When and Why to Use Back 0 120 Getting Started in the Back 0 121 Overview The Managers and Everyday Business Operations 122 Catalog 124 Catalog Look and Feel Assigning Catalog Templates 124 Access the Main Category le
81. System Administration E Unit of Measurement The drop down menu includes units of both measure and weight When accessing this drop down menu via the Unit of Measurement link as here choose a unit of measure pcs gal etc and ignore the weight values The same drop down menu is accessed from the Regional Preferences section of General Preferences to set a unit of weight The unit of measure you select is the default value assigned to products in the Product Manager when entering a product you can choose to override this default and assign any measurement unit in the list see Figure 29 To add values to the drop down menu see Create Drop Down Menu Entries on p 189 Default Blank Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Basket Preferences E Minimum Order Amount Set the minimum amount your customers can order of any product normally 1 If the customer tries to order less than the minimum the system will simply reset to the minimum amount You can adjust minimum order amounts for individual products in the Product Manager Exception If you activate inadequate quantity suspension then entering 0 removes the product from the customer s basket See Basket Preferences below Default setting 1 Product Number Separator Defines the mark used to separate the main product number from the appended number used to create an ID for a product variation Default setting
82. The Back Office Page 133 Catalog Attributes Catalog Manager Define or Edit Catalog Attribute Values Attribute names are general and apply to all categories Attribute values are specific to each category Be sure to enter values on the correct category level 1 Navigate to the desired category level and click Catalog Attribute Values The Catalog Attribute Values page is displayed Figure 78 All catalog attributes you have created are listed unless the Hide Empty Attributes select box is checked in which case only the attributes that have had values defined for this catalog are displayed To view all attributes de select the checkbox 2 Enter a new attribute value or edit an existing value You do not need to fill out every field use only the ones that are mean ingful descriptors of the category Values for multimedia attributes are filled in during the upload process See the following section for details 3 Click Save Upload Multimedia Files for Catalog Attributes 1 Navigate to the desired category level and click Catalog Attribute Values The Catalog Attribute Values page is displayed Figure 78 2 Click the Upload button corresponding to the multimedia attribute The Multimedia Attribute File Upload page is displayed Figure 80 w Catalog Manager BACK UPLOAD Multimedia Attribute File Upload Overwrite existing files Attribute MultimediaAttribute Current Value Source File B
83. The Customer Profiles Feature Optional 6 Click Save 7 Click Back to return to the category page The newly linked items display in the right column under Category Profile Figure 141 If a customer activates his or her profile only categories linked to the customer s profile will display to the customer Link Profile Items Directly to Products Use the Product Manager when you want to link some but not all products in a category to a profile item Use the Catalog Manager when you want to link an entire category of products to a profile item see Link a Profile Item to a Category on page 212 1 Using the Product Manager search for the product to which you want to link a profile item 2 Select the product number from the results list The Product Details page is displayed Figure 144 At the bottom of the page under Product Profile Information all profile classes created by the System Administrator appear in the left column any profile items directly linked to the product show in the right column L Product Manager BACK SAVE DELETE NEW PRODUCT ENTER STOCK PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE VALUES ASSIGN PROFILE MANAGE VARIATION HELP Product Details Product no S AC10003 Product AcuSteer Compass Description acusteer is constructed of the highest quality materials and is accurate to within a 0 005 tolerance rating Operator Administrator
84. The Price Display setting could affect your shipping costs Please review Set Price Display Model to Net or Gross on p 68 7 Click Save The Edit Shipping Method page is displayed for entering cost calculations Edit a Shipping Method Page 196 From the Shipping Methods Matrix Figure 124 on p 194 click on the name of the method you want to edit The Edit Shipping Method page is displayed Figure 126 If you are in the process of creating a new shipping method you are automatically advanced to this page Ai Settings Manager BACK SAVE DELETE ADD RANGE SET UP SHIPPING METHOD Edit Shipping Method Name Shipping Weight A Language English ID E Calculation Model Basket Weight Tax Classes E General Shipping Cost This store Iculati Calculation uses Net pricing CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager ADMIN manager manager manager Figure 126 The Edit Shipping Method page for a weight based shipping method Edit the name language and or tax class if desired The shipping ID is automatically assigned by INTERSHOP 4 and cannot be edited Ihe ID can be used by developers in Server Side Scripts if desired Enter a single shipping price for Flat Rate methods or a general shipping calculation for item price or weight based methods See Sample Shipping Calculations on p 197 For any calculation models ex
85. Therefore INTERSHOP has provided a set of corresponding TLEs with the suffix _Value that contain the non formatted values for example ProductPrice_Value Use _Value to get plain value from formatted TLE variables TLE Variable Read There are three read functions If the TLE variables or loops specified in a read function do not exist or are not available the function will return undef as the result and an error message is recorded in the INTERSHOP log file Use the Exists functions prior to a GetILE function to verify that the specified TLE is present This prevents errors from being written to the INTERSHOP log file Table 77 ExistsTLE Checks if a specified TLE exists and is available for use Use this prior to a GetTLE function as specified in the example Example var ExistsTLE CustNo GetTLE f CustNo undef INPUT TLE a TLE name OUTPUT flag Boolean true or false Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 415 TLE Handling Functions Table 78 ExistsTLELoop The Scripting API Functions example Checks if the specified TLE loop exists and is available Use this prior to a GetTLE function as specified in the Example ExistsTLELoop BasketPositions GetTLELoop BasketPostions undef INPUT loop a TLE loop name OUTPUT flag Boolean true or false Table 79 ExistsTLELoopData
86. a specific TLE loop Example productprice GetTLELoopData BasketPositions 1 ProductPrice INPUT A loop Index C TLE A A TLE loop name issues an error if this loop does not exist The index within the loop I count of loop elements The TLE name OUTPUT value The value of the specified TLE TLE Variable Set The SetILE function can be used with all Store wide User defined TLE variables but not with any other TLE variables SetTLE passes a value from the script to a User defined TLE variable without saving it in the database The changes are Table 84 SetTLE made to the current template only Example SetTLE MyTLE 0 0 Set the value of a TLE variable This value is used by the TLE compiler later to replace the TLE placeholder INPUT TLE The TLE name only User defined TLEs are valid The TLE must exist OUTPUT value The new value of the specified TLE Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 417 TLE Handling Functions The Scripting API Functions Create TLE Variable Use the create functions to create new TLEs and TLE loops to be used by the current template and specified SSS only Table 85 CreateTLE Make a new TLE variable and save the given value this TLE only exists until the template is compiled and sent to the client This TLE is not a persistent TLE but a temporary definition valid
87. account manually see Record Transactions in Customer Accounts on page 174 e Category Assign a customer to a category in order to offer discounts See Customer Categories on page 188 for a description of how to create additional categories and Discounts on page 190 for creating and assigning discounts Deactivated Deactivating a customer freezes the customer account but retains all existing customer data for future reactivation Deactivated customers cannot place orders and invoices and packing slips cannot be generated To find deactivated customers in the database set the radio button on the search page to Deactivated Yes and click Search Operator The operator who enters the customer data appears in this field as a default Change the selection if you wish to assign the customer to another operator Supplier Activate this checkbox if customer is actually a supplier See Define a Supplier on page 173 Page 170 Chapter 3 The Back Office Customer Manager Enter a New Customer Tax Jurisdiction Depending on how your store handles taxes you may need to choose the appropriate tax region where this customer lives from the drop down menu For complete details on how to set up your tax matrix see Tax Jurisdictions Overview on page 200 Tax Check this box to have the system automatically levy sales tax on this customer s orders Works together with the Tax Jurisdiction field Print Template
88. and commercial PERL programming services NOTE The definitive Perl reference for programmers is Programming Perl Second Edition by Larry Wall Tom Christiansen amp Randal L Schwartz published by O Reilly amp Associates For web based information try www perl com and language perl com INTERSHOP s Server Side Scripting extends the power of PERL with access to INTERSHOP s ILE variables and the underlying database to make Perl a full featured web programming language It allows calling and manipulating third party databases such as Oracle Sybase MS SQL and ODBC databases without third party software pieces Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 409 What To Use Server Side Scripting For Server Side Scripting Introduction Server Side Scripting is as easy to use as it gets you can simply write programmatic functions directly into the HTML source code of the templates INTERSHOP s application server handles everything else There is nothing extra to install or to configure This chapter contains What To Use Server Side Scripting For SSS Implementation The Scripting API Functions SSS Example What To Use Server Side Scripting For Page 410 Integrate with any kind of third party software or services Customize your own freight calculation Charge for delivery the way your business works The INTERSHOP demonstration stores Golf Store and Sports Place use SSS that can be obtained from your Site
89. and password Storefront Session Timeout 1 1440 720 Permitted length in minutes of valid storefront sessions Maximum Number of Nested INCLUDE Calls 1 100 10 This value defines the maximal allowed depth of INCLUDE calls in templates Cookies Enable cookies to store customer data name address etc on client browser Register Upon Order n Stock considered on hand when ordered Stock ordered from suppliers is listed in inventory when purchase order is generated Check Credit Limit Mv You can activate or deactivate customer credit check Enable Profiles Iv By enabling profiles you allow your customers to view only those produts or categories that they are interested in Year 2000 Split Year 50 90 75 All 2 digit year entries before this year will have 2000 added all others will have 1900 added i e 36 2036 92 1992 Default Web Server Directory For File Upload Enter the default directory used for file uploads This directory must exist on the web server and should be entered relative to the store image directory Figure 26 Set general system preferences on this page Mail Preferences INTERSHOP supports e mail notification for a variety of situations to send order confirmations to customers to notify merchants of customer orders and to send merchants error messages concerning store functionality and server side script testing Figure 27 All these preferenc
90. apply to non member customers Example SetCustomerShippingAddress hashreference See SetCustomerBillingAddress for complete example INPUT hashreference A hash reference to a structure containing all or some new values OUTPUT Table 111 SetCustomerPayment Change the current customer s payment method Example SetCustomerPayment 5 INPUT paymentid A payment id that is valid for this customer OUTPUT Table 112 SetCustomerCategory Change the current customer s category Example SetCustomerCategory category INPUT category A payment id that is valid for this customer OUTPUT Table 113 SetCustomerLogin Change the current customer s login Example SetCustomerlogin Gracie INPUT login A new login string OUTPUT Table 114 SetCustomerOperator Change the operator of the current customer Example SetCustomerlogin 007 INPUT operatorid A valid operator id OUTPUT Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 427 The Order Processing Functions Override Shipping Related TLE variables Table 115 OverrideShippi The Scripting Functions ngPrice Override the current shipping price Example OverrideShippingPrice 15 00 INPUT newshippingprice A valid price float OUTPUT Table 116 OverrideShippi ngTax Override the cu
91. assign a number Display Product Flag contains a 1 to display that sub product at the Storefront 0 otherwise Hot Deals contains a 1 to display in Hot Deals at the Storefront 0 otherwise Wholesale price Retail price Minimum Stock Quantity Current Stock Weight You can edit these values using the Create and Edit Variations page in the Product Manager after import See Create a Variation Type and its Values on p 152 for more information Page 110 Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Command Line Data Import Choose a Replacement Option In Step 4 Job Control of the Data Import Tool you are presented with three Replacement Options for your data Ignore select this option to import new variations Update revises only previously imported variations You cannot update internally created variations through import Replace first deletes any existing product that matches the imported product number along with all its variations It then replaces it with the imported product and variations if they exist Therefore if you want to replace just a single variation create a data file containing only this variation Edit Templates to work with Imported Product Variations For information on editing templates to work with imported product V ariations and attributes see Display Product Variations on p 381 Command Line Data Import NOTE Command line data impor
92. certain store service functions Service Change password Change the customer s password Service List of previous orders Show all current customer s previous orders Service List of previous orders Show all current customer s previous baskets Service View a previous basket View a selected previous basket of current customer Service View a previous order View a selected previous order of current customer Customer Profile Bookmark Related Storefront Templates Bookmarks Displays all bookmarks of current customer Profile Edit profile Edit the member s current profile Profile New profile Welcome message for members who use the profile editor the first time Profile Display profile Show the customer profile of current member Page 314 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront The Store Homepage Template Table 66 Storefront Templates TEMPLATES DESCRIPTION Miscellaneous Storefront Templates Store Message Generic messages to INTERSHOP user Store Password Asks the customer to enter a password Hot deals List of hot products and special bargains The Store Homepage Template The Web address URL for your Storefront automatically calls up the template Store Homepage This is a logical starting point for your store design NOTE If the System Administrator clicks the Lock Storefront link on the Sy
93. dash Basket Preferences Chapter 2 System Administration Whenever a customer puts a product in a shopping basket the INTERSHOP system retains that information whether the basket is ordered or not This feature enables registered customers to review and reorder any baskets they have filled in the past and also enables you to track customer interest in your products with great precision The settings on this page Figure 32 determine characteristics that will apply to all customer shopping baskets System Administration BACK SAVE Basket Preferences Inadequate Quantity Suspension 2 Remove products from basket if the selected quantity is equal zero Remain on Current Page After Adding Removing a Product n Skip displaying the basket and remain on the page where the link was triggered View Previous Basket Time Limit 0 1000 30 Enter the maximum number of days that a member can view a previous basket Display Non Ordered Baskets Only CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 32 Basket preferences in System Administration Page 59 Basket Preferences Page 60 Set General Preferences Inadequate Quantity Suspension Checking this box causes the system to remove a product from the customer s basket when the
94. data import using ODBC Instructions for using ODBC can be found in the Support section of the INTERSHOP Web site at www intershop com Data Import Tool Overview The Data Import Tool is a graphical user interface that you can use to upload customer product and catalog information into the INTERSHOP store database from existing text files This feature is helpful if you have a large number of existing records and manually re keying field values via the Customer Product or Catalog managers would be cumbersome and time consuming If you have customer product or catalog data in an external program such as a database like Access FoxPro FileMaker etc or spreadsheet like Excel or Lotus you will need to save this data as an ASCII text file Then using the Data Import Tool you can upload the file from your local hard disk to the INTERSHOP server Data Import Tool Step by Step The instructions in this section walk you through the steps of importing data into your store Once you have completed the steps of the Data Import Tool in sequence to create files for importing data you can use the links on the Data Import Tool Menu page to jump to any step to work with existing files Chapter 2 System Administration Page 93 Data Import Tool Step by Step Data Import Prepare the Import File Before using the Data Import Tool you must prepare the data import file If your customer product or catalog data is stored in an external dat
95. display model Replaces Alt_ProductPrice See Alt_ProductNetPrice eee eee eee eee e E E eee eee 9299 292929 97929 e E E 2997929 hu uU UU All templates except Catalog templates All templates except Catalog templates ot used alter ISMb 1258 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Table 19 Alternate Currency TLEs TLE Variable Alt_ProductSubTotal Description Extended price of any quantity of a single product less discount Displayed in the alternate currency Calculation TLE Variables Available Templates All templates except Catalog templates Alt_ProductTaxAmount Displays the net or gross tax amount when an alternate currency is used All templates except Catalog templates Alt_ProductTotalPrice Extended price of any quantity of a single product less discounts tax Displayed in the alternate currency All templates except Catalog templates Alt_ProductTotalTax Tax for any quantity of a single product Displayed in the alternate currency All templates except Catalog templates Alt_CurrencySymbol Currency symbol for the selected alternate currency All templates except Print templates Alt_CustCreditBalance Customer s account balance Displayed in the alternate currency All templates except Print templates FEAlt_CustStoreCredit Customer s total credit allowance Displayed in
96. distinguishes between the two groups An interface on the client side which communicates with the Sybase Database Server The INTERSHOP Application requires Sybase Open Client to remotely access data in INTERSHOP Mall databases Accessible by clicking System Admin on the back office navigation bar This is only an option if logged in using the System Administrator login and password System Administration is used for handling system wide settings editing templates and managing the database The person with access to this part of the INTERSHOP software is called the System Administrator Only person with access to System Administration in INTERSHOP products The System Administrator defines the primary settings maintains the database and assigns passwords to Store Operators who run the Back Office module Part of the tax matrix this defines the taxable category into which a product might fall Created and assigned in Statistics amp Preferences Manager of INTERSHOP Part of the tax matrix this defines the geographic regions where the store may sell to which tax rates may be applied Created and assigned in Statistics amp Preferences Manager of INTERSHOP The tax rate in percentage assigned to the intersection of tax classes and tax jurisdictions Created and assigned in Statistics amp Preferences Manager of INTERSHOP A document file containing formatting and page layout information Templates allow even novice users to crea
97. enable the method for this customer Payment Method Settings 7 Find the newly enabled payment method and select the checkbox to Selecting or clearing the checkbox for any payment method enables or disables it for the particular customer 8 Click Save or she orders in the Storefront 10 Repeat for other customers as needed Customer Manager BACK SAVE NEW CUSTOMER DEFINE PROFILE ACCOUNT INFORMATION PRINT PREVIEW DELETE Customer Details Name John Doe Customerno 1001 Comments E 0 Login Pohn Doe Account Balance 0 00 Password fev xx RR Password Conf Category Frequent Buyer x 7 Deactivated operator sis Tl Tax Jurisdiction US outside California x Alternate Currency US Dollar USD x Print Template English Customer default E Created 06 18 99 Updated 06 18 99 a cash on Delivery Charge to Account company check Credit Card via Phone Fax nmn Direct Credit Card Entry Direct Debit IV Personal Check u Prepaid Store Credit 10 000 00 Credit Length days 14 Bank 1 Bank2 Comments Send the customer a fax as order V Send the customer an email as order confirmation confirmation Account Address Shipping Address Ship to billing address Name ohn ooe lt Name ohn ooe o Software Programmer Software Programmer Street Address 123 Main Street Street Address 123 Main Street city Pro
98. entry box on the shopping basket page and another to allow shoppers to see prices in an alternate currency Page 360 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates The Basket Template Logged In Anonymous Customer Identification The sample code here evaluates whether the current customer is logged in as a registered member or shopping anonymously Using that information the shopping basket then displays customer registration information or states that the customer is still anonymous The example code on the next page uses IF and TLE variable IsAnonymous to evaluated whether the value of IsAnonymous is true or false If true the customer is told he is still anonymous If not true i e if HELSE then the customer s registration information is displayed See IF and ELSE Statements p 271 for more information First check if customer is anonymous gt I1sAnonymous lt CENTER gt You st lt CENTER gt ELSE 1 If cookies anonymous INTI ill anonymous in INTERSHOP are enabled and if the customer is not ERSHOP will display the customer s name and address gt CustNamel lt Registered customers may have left the Customer Name 2 and 3 fields of the registration form blank since they are not required Therefore INTERSHOP value for will only display them IF there is a
99. for a style to have template sets in multiple languages you must create a directory in the Templates directory for each supported language Schemes Section of Style ini File A scheme determines which available banner header and button styles are selected when a user chooses a particular scheme in the Store Design Wizard For example choosing a Blue Style in Step 4 of the Store Design Wizard selects blue buttons blue headers and blue banners At least one general scheme must defined for a template style Schemes count 4 1 Stylel 2 Style2 3 Style3 4 Style4 Table 70 Key Value inputs for Schemes Key Value in Example Description of Value count 4 The number of schemes being defined for this template The identifier for the first scheme offered which will be selected by default The identifier can be a name a number or a name with a number as shown here but each scheme must have its own unique identifier Style Chapter 5 Templates Page 345 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Table 70 Key Value inputs for Schemes Key Value in Example Description of Value 2 Style 2 The identifier for the second scheme offered 3 Style 3 The identifier for the third scheme offered 4 Style 4 The identifier for the fourth scheme offered Customizeable Sub Styles ColorSchemes ButtonStyles BannerStyles HeaderStyles
100. for the current template only Within the current template the TLE can be accessed by a later Example CreateTLE MyTLE geek INPUT A A TLE name A TLE B A value to be saved value OUTPUT No output Values good only for the current template Table 86 CreateTLELoop Create a TLE loop with the given name This function must be executed before CreateTLELoopData SetTLELoopStructure or CreateTLELooplteration can be called Example CreateTLELoop MyNewLoop INPUT loop A A TLE loop name OUTPUT No output Values good only for the current template which has been created Comment This function is interrelated with the functions CreateTLELoopData SetTLELoopStructure and CreateTLELooplteration For a complete understanding it is recommended that you review the tables for each of these functions Table 87 CreateTLELooplteration Create a new iteration in a present loop this must be called if you want to add new TLEs with CreateTLELoopData for a new row Example new_last_index CreateTLELooplteration MyLoop INPUT loop A TLE loop name OUTPUT index The index of the last iteration Comment See also CreateTLELoopData Table 88 SetTLELoopStructure Set a loop structure to a TLE loop each call replaces the last value Example SetTLELoopStructure MyLoop ref2Array INPUT A A TLE lo
101. g BasketTotalPrice computes the total cost of all products in the basket including tax and shipping Chapter 5 Templates INTERSHOP Template Tools Use the Preview Command Sample HTML that shows how the TLE variable might typically appear in context with other HIML code e Preview Content used by the Preview tool discussed below The value set in this field will show up in the Preview window wherever that TLE variable is placed in the HTML It does not affect display in the Storefront Most TLE elements have a value pre set in the Preview Content field but you can change the value at any time Simply enter the new value and click Save in the Template example window Use the Preview Command Click the Preview command from the template editor Figure 155 to see how the template code will look to the user With Preview you can instantly see the results of your coding decisions and edit as you go Since the preview is static the Preview Window uses the Preview Content information to display TLE variables When you see the pages from the Storefront of course the TLE variables are replaced by current values from the database Use the Revert to Default Command For each template with embedded INTERSHOP functionality INTERSHOP provides a page of basic Default code stored in the database When you click Revert to Default in the Template Editor the current template w
102. have been generated 0 New customers have been registered 0 New Orders This store is currently in Staging mode CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager ADMIN manager manager manager manager Figure 70 The back office entry page The back office is used by the operators and or the System Administrator to run the store Unless the System Administrator handles all of the everyday business tasks the System Administrator should create an operator login and password for each person assisting with daily store management See Operator Settings Menu on page 88 The System Administrator login and password give access to both the System Administration and Back Office functions For security reasons System Admin appears on the navigation bar only to the System Administrator and does not appear to those accessing the system with an operator login and password Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 119 When and Why to Use Back Office Introduction to the Back Office When and Why to Use Back Office Page 120 You use the back office primarily for these reasons For initial setup after you ve completed setup tasks described in When and Why to Use System Administration on page 39 The back office setup tasks are discussed in Getting Started in the Back Office on page 121 To carry out daily business tasks such as processing orders tracking inventory o
103. image of this banner sub style to be displayed in the SDW All image filenames should be alphanumeric and lowercase Notice how the images for Headers and 2 use the same filenames Chapter 5 Templates Page 351 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Color Schemes In this section you enter the HTML color codes associated with each color scheme defined for your template The HI ML color codes entered here will determine the color of the text background links and all the other elements on the web pages for each Color Scheme you defined in the Set up Information portion of the style ini file Color schemes Color1 name Color 1 BGColor ffffce FontColorText 000000 FontColorActiveLink ce6300 FontColorLink f 0000 FontColorViewedLink 696969 TableColor ffffc TableCellColor fEOEOEO TableCellColorText 000000 TableHeadColor ff00 TableHeadColorText TableBorderColor 00 00000 000 C3 C3 1C Color2 name Color 2 BGColor fceffff FontColorText 000000 FontColorActiveLink 3163c5 FontColorLink 3a3a3a FontColorViewedLink 0000cc TableColor 319400 TableCellColor ffffff TableCellColorText ceffff TableHeadColor 6699ff TableHeadColorText ceffff TableBorderColor 3a3a3a The value for the key name in the above code example is the friendly name of the color scheme Page 352 Cha
104. imported variations at the storefront and you must edit your product templates to display imported variations on one storefront page This sample code creates an interface for searching imported product variations with input boxes for product name color and size and a drop down menu to select the manufacturer lt FORM FormTagAttributes gt lt B gt Search for products lt B gt lt BR gt Name or Description lt BR gt lt INPUT NAME Name_SearchString SIZE 35 gt lt P gt Manufacturer lt BR gt SelectBox_Manufacturer lt P gt Color lt BR gt SearchVariation_COLOR lt P gt Size lt BR gt SearchVariation_SIZE lt P gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Start Search gt lt FORM gt Page 372 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates Using FORMs in Templates You can only place variation search TLEs in the Search Mask template Up to five product attributes or product variation types can appear in the search mask Keep in mind that if color is used as both a variation and an attribute this search mask will only find variations For this reason it s best if you do not use the same identifier for both a variation type and an attribute SSL Secured FORMs If you have set up SSL Secure Socket Layer with your Web Server you can make all FORMS secure by appending the letters SSL to each FormTagAttributes TLE variable For example to create an SSL secu
105. in which INTERSHOP can accommodate a variety of users including e Casual visitors Registered members e Business to business consumers who have pre qualified with the store owner This chapter tours Sports Place and shows the benefits offered to each of these customer groups Each type of customer e Logs in at a splash screen Looks for items to buy Places an online order that includes discounts e Obtains online customer service and account information for members and b to b customers only Use the Demostores INTERSHOP 4 includes three different demonstration stores browse any of them for ideas to see how flexible storefront design can be Sports Place This store highlights the new INTERSHOP 4 features and has extensive comments in the HTML to aid store designers E Training Store A tutorial for Web designers who customize INTERSHOP templates The Golf Shop This store features high end design elements Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 15 Use the Demostores The INTERSHOP Storefront Welcome to INTERSHOP 4 Sports Place This multi purpose all in one business to consumer and business to business storefront boasts advanced features including E customer category based discounts sophisticated searches wish lists tomm o d and custom catalog presentation Click on the Storefront link to shop Storefront Back Office or the Back Office link to manage this store Gol
106. information see Template Groups in Detail User Defined p 331 Chapter 5 Templates Page 323 Other Storefront Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront Other Storefront Templates This section provides quick notes and cross references for miscellaneous Storefront templates Store Message Template This template is coded to display a variety of error messages depending on actions taken in the Storefront The error messages can be edited and the template can be freely designed to match the look and feel of your store To edit the error message texts displayed see Storefront Message Templates List p 70 Store Password Template This template appears automatically whenever a customer selects a payment method for which the System Administrator has checked the Password Required box in Payment Method Settings see Payment Method Settings p 76 Designers can customize the look of the Store Password template but they cannot link it to other templates since Store Password has no URL TLE Variable associated with it Hot Deals Template Use the Hot Deals template to list products that you want to offer on special discount to all visitors in the store Products are designated for the Hot Deals page from within the Product Manager an operator simply checks the Hot Deals box on the product description page see The Back Office p 117 Once a product is marked as a Hot Deal in the Product Manager then INTERSHOP
107. into the database 5 Use the Default Value fields to map a default value to any database fields that are not assigned a value by your Data File The value entered will be assigned to records in the data import file that do not contain a value for this particular database field or to all records if this field is not defined in your file For example if your import file does not contain the field Manufacturer and if all the products you are importing have the same manufacturer you could assign the manufacturer name to all products by entering a value in the Manufacturer default value field Chapter 2 System Administration Page 99 Data Import Tool Step by Step Data Import 6 Click Save when you have finished entering your mapping settings 7 Click Load A mapping map file is created and stored in the Data Import directory for your store You can reuse this mapping file at a later date by selecting it from the Existing Mapping File drop down menu 8 Click Next to proceed to Step 4 Job Control Click Back to check or re enter information on a previous screen Click Delete to delete the mapping file currently listed on the page Click Cancel to return to the System Administration Main Menu Step 4 Job Control Import Mode and Condition Page 100 In Step 4 of the Data Import Tool Figure 61 you instruct the Data Import Tool how to handle the import process whe
108. is displayed Figure 72 If no categories exist you are informed This category does not contain products or mid level categories Products must be assigned to categories in the Product Manager before they will be displayed in your store a Catalog Manager NEW CATEGORY SORT CATEGORIES CATALOG ATTRIBUTE VALUES SORT CATALOG ALPHABETICALLY Main Level Categories Electronics Example of a Catalog basic Template Sports Example of a Catalog enhanced Template Language Courses Example of a List basic Template a list has no sub categories Automobile Supplies Automotive Accessories and Supplies Entertainment Options Everything you need to liven up your commute Mass Transit Rider Supplies for Mass Transit Riders CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 72 Main Level Categories page in the Catalog Manager Page 125 Create or Extend a Category Catalog Manager Create or Extend a Category Page 126 Click New Category from the main category level of the catalog to create new main level category or from any other level to add a subcategory Step by step instructions appear below NOTE If a bottom level category one that contains products and no other subcategories is extended the new subcategory inherits
109. lnyoiceRositions Used in LOOP statement Print template Invoice Boolean indicating whether product is a Hot Deal or not Can be used on all lsProductHotDeal product templates and in 100 Product templates Product basic Statements on product templates Used with TotalltemsInList to display All templates except Product ltemNo the position number for a listed templates product All templates except Catalog and ManufacturerName Manufacturer of product P d Mail templates ID number for manufacturer name All templates except Catalog and ManufacturerNo automatically generated in the Settings Mail templates Manager MinOrderLevel Minimum required order except Catalog and Mail templates HOnOrderProducts Number of products on order from a Storefront Product and List supplier Displayed in Storefront templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 231 Product Related TLE Variables Table 12 Standard Product TLE Variables TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates T Lists all products in order Used in iue sem plate Order conten OrderPositions and Print template Order LOOP statement confirmation Lists products from a previous order Storefront template Service View frenos Used in LOOP statement a previous basket ProductDescription Product description when the store is set to Gross price templates
110. office Your personal shopping assistant Your shopping assistant needs some information to guide you to the most interesting places in this store Select Hobbies you are interested in Tip Use the ctrl key together with the left mouse button to select or unselect items Cooking Cars Gardening Ef Activate my profile now Figure 196 Adding a profile activation checkbox This page allows the customer to choose whether or not to activate their profile If they activate it the TLE variable IsProfileActivated has a value of 1 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Create and Assign Profiles Step 3 Display the Profile to the Customer If you decide that profiles should always be activated once created this checkbox can be hidden and the value for IsProfileActivated can be set permanently to 1 Simply use the code below lt INPUT TYPE HIDDEN NAME Name ActivateProfile VALUE 1 NOTE A customer s profile can also be activated or deactivated in the Customer Manager by checking or clearing the Profile is Active checkbox See Chapter 3 The Back Office The Profile Display Profile template is automatically displayed when the customer submits the completed profile form by clicking the OK button see Step 3 below Step 3 Display the Profile to the Customer Once the customer has submitted a profile it is displayed using the Storefront templa
111. purchase order print out 260 Calculation 238 Calculation alternate currency 239 Calculation non formatted _Value 241 Category variables 237 Customer variables 226 Customer variables shipping 228 FORM variables 261 FORM variables input 262 FORM variables search 265 Introduced 224 List variables 237 Page Caching 269 Page Caching incompatible variables 270 Payment Method Credit Card 250 Payment Method General 250 Product 230 Product Attribute 234 Product Bookmark 236 Product Discount 236 Product Standard 231 Product Variation 235 Profile 230 Profile creating variables 391 Server Side Script 266 Service 242 Service Previous Basket 242 Service Previous Order 246 Session 257 Site Wide user defined 269 Template viewing available TLEs for 224 Time 225 URL 251 URL Basket Table 252 URL Product Table 254 URL Profile Table 255 URL Service Table 255 URL Session Table 256 URL User Template 256 URL User Template Table 256 URL Bookmark Table 253 URL Catalog List Table 253 URL Parameters 252 Index User defined 267 User defined deleting 269 User defined editing 268 User defined inserting code 267 User defined viewing 268 U UN SPSC using catalog structure 136 Unit of Measure Drop down menus adding to 189 Product assigning to 142 System wide default value setting 58 vs Unit of Weight 53 Unit of Weight System wide default value s
112. recognizes it as a hot deal product and will call it up with the TLE variable URL_HotDeals Because the Hot Deals template is used to present lists of products it is also discussed in LOOP Statements 273 Bookmarks Template Use the Bookmarks template to list products that customers have bookmarked in the store To use the bookmark feature add the TLE variable YURL AddBookmark to Product templates so that a bookmark link is displayed When customers click on that link the product information is loaded into the bookmark template Add the TLE variable URL_ViewBookmarks to templates such as the Login was successful page to allow members to review their current bookmark list Non members can bookmark products as well but their list will not be retained outside a single session See Bookmark Product TLE Variables p 236 for more details Page 324 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Catalog amp List Other Storefront Templates Template Groups in Detail Catalog amp List Catalog and List Templates can be freely created by outside designers unlike Storefront templates which are fixed parts of INTERSHOP You can have as many or as few Catalog and List Templates as you choose Catalog and List Templates work together and are very similar in structure System Administration BACK NEW CATALOG TEMPLATE TEMPLATES Catalog Templates English Category basic Sub categories with descripti
113. shoppers of their basket status since they will not see the basket page automatically See Notify Shoppers of Basket Status on p 376 for some examples Default setting Unchecked View Previous Basket Time Limit This setting limits the number of days the system will retain information about customer shopping baskets for customer viewing and reloading Default setting 30 days Display Non Ordered Baskets Only INTERSHOP permits members to review and reload shopping baskets filled in previous visits Check this option if you want these basket reviews to yield only baskets that did not result in orders Customers can do a separate search for previous orders Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Order Preferences Non Member Checkout Deactivate this feature to allow customers to reorder using the same basket repeatedly For example a client who needs to reorder the same shipment of office supplies each month can simply reload the previously ordered basket and reorder in seconds Default setting Unchecked Order Preferences Non Member Checkout INTERSHOP supports several optional features in the storefront order process Non member checkout allows customers to enter minimal information about themselves and make a purchase without establishing a persistent identity in the database If you want to offer non member checkout in your store you must first enable it here then edit the Storefront templa
114. storefront EN product 5010 and suppose you have created a User template titled DSE Introduction Page You want all customers who click the remote URL with the product action to be routed through the DSE Introduction Page Therefore in the select box next to Product View choose DSE Introduction Page Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 401 Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Direct Storefront Entry 3 If you have created another link using the action catalog 1001 for example you will need to create another User defined template introduction page and assign it in the Catalog select box 4 Click Save System Administration BACK SAVE HELP Direct Storefront Entry Settings Product View INC navbar cust browse E Select the User Defined Template for showing a product Catalog INC navbar business z Select the User Defined Template for showing a catalog Search Mask Select the User Defined Template for the search mask Hot Deals INC navbar logpanel si Select the User Defined Template for showing Hot Deals Basket INC nawbar retailer z Select the User Defined Template for showing a basket CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMI Figure 198 Direct Storefront Entry Settings page Page 402 Chapter 6 Specific Uses o
115. template in the store you append the unique numeric identifier to the TLE variable HURL_UserTemplate lt ID gt then embed the variable in the store template where you want the link to appear For example to link a newly created Membership Benefits User defined template into the Service Page Storefront template follow the steps below 1 Create the template as defined in Create a User Defined Template 2 Check the identifier line to find the unique ID number for this template In the example shown in Figure 169 the identifier is 1 one 3 Open the Service page template in the Storefront Template group 4 Create a link to the Membership Benefits page using the TLE variable ZURL UserTemplate l The full HTML format would be lt A HREF http URL_UserTemplate TemplateID gt Membership Benefits lt A gt 5 Click Save to keep changes NOTE User defined templates are also used as gateway templates in Direct Storefront Entry For a complete description of this feature and how to employ it with User defined templates see Direct Storefront Entry p 397 Page 332 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Print amp Mail Product Attributes vs Product Variations Template Groups in Detail Print amp Mail Print templates are used to design the paperwork you print out in the Order Manager and Customer Manager in your back office They format invoices customer da
116. text file containing your data does not have a header row deselect this box Selecting the Header Row checkbox instructs the Data Import Tool to skip the first row when importing data The header row usually contains names describing columns of data e g Product number Name Description etc See Figure 62 on p 101 for a sample data file with a header row Chapter 2 System Administration Page 95 Data Import Tool Step by Step Data Import 9 Click Save to save your data description file information 10 Click Load to load the saved data description file to the Data Import directory for your store II Click Next to continue to Step 2 Upload Data File The Upload Data File page is displayed Figure 58 Step 2 Upload Data dat File Use the Upload Data File page to upload your data import file directly to your Web server The upload process updates the file with the dat file extension If you completed Step 1 of the Data Import Tool the file name for your data description file is automatically listed as the Description File on this page Figure 58 Oa StorepackOfice ese The file defined or selected in Step is automatically listed on this page See Description File documentation cfg Data Import Tool File To Upload C WINNT yourdstafiledirectory bit Menu for infor BACK CANCEL PROCEED HELP DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 2 Upload Data File
117. the INTERSHOP 4 CD you can access them at the INTERSHOP Web site at http is4demo intershop com Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront The INTERSHOP Storefront Use the Demostores To access the index page via a Web browser Open the browser and type the index URL in the address line Figure 1 The default format is http lt server domain gt isroot index html Click the image or the Storefront link for Sports Place to see the Sports Place login screen Figure 3 From any computer via a Web browser Open the browser and type the Storefront URL in the address line The default formats are http server domain cgi bin sportsplace storefront Replace sportsplace with trainingstore to see the Training Store homepage Replace the words that appear in with your own server and domain names If you do not know your server and domain names ask those who installed your INTERSHOP system From INTERSHOP s web site Open the browser and type the INTERSHOP URL in the address line http is4demo intershop com Click the image or the word Storefront to see any demo storefront NOTE Bookmark the Storefront in your Web browser Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 17 Demonstration Homepages The INTERSHOP Storefront Demonstration Homepages Sports Place and Training Store exemplify two different ways to welcome shoppers into a store In Training Store the homepage is the same for all shoppers
118. the alternate currency All templates URL_ChangeCurrency Creates a link that changes the alternate currency Use with the parameter lt alpha_currency_code gt to display the desired currency Product template Product basic and Storefront template Basket SelectBox_Currency Creates a drop down menu to select an alternate currency Storefront templates Non member Data Registration Shipping Address These TLE variables are always available no matter which price display model is selected however the variable appropriate to the model used in your store should be used in templates Non formatted Numerical TLE Variables Certain TLE variables provide values that are automatically given special formatting i e lbs etc In order to use these values with relational operators or Server Side Script they must be accessed without formatting When Value is placed after these TLEs they only will display a numerical value without any special formatting For example BasketSub Total 20 00 BasketSubTotal_Value 20 All formatted numerical TLE variables have a _Value counterpart Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 241 Service TLE Variables Service TLE Variables TLE Variables The Service area of a store is where customers can read about purchase and return policies membership benefits payment and shipping methods etc or review invoices previous bask
119. the back office navigation bar Default address lt serviceman gt cgi bin lt storename gt admin Default login password admin admin 2 Select Mail Preferences from the System Administration Main Menu 3 Select the Enable Server Side Script Error Email checkbox and enter an address where SSS errors mails should be sent Figure 204 4 Click Save 27 System Administration BACK SAVE Mail Preferences Enable Order Confirmation to Merchant 24 Select the checkbox to have an order confirmation email automatically sent to merchants Merchant E mail Address Jrourstore yaurdomain com J Enter the email address where the merchant order confirmation emails should be sent Reply Address Jrourstore yourdomain com This address can be the same as the one entered for the Merchant E mail Address Enable Store Error E mail Select the checkbox to generate an email address when store error occurs Store Error E mail Address FRorename damain com d Enter the email address where store error messages should be sent Enable Server Side Script Error E mail Select the checkbox to generate an email address when server side scripting error occurs Server Side Scripting Error E mail Address Roreprogrammer domain com Enter the email address where the server side scripting error email should be sent Figure 204 Enable SSS Error Email on Mail Preferences pag
120. the template styles offered with the Store Design Wizard by adding your own button banner and header images as explained in Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard on p 334 Te CAUTION Running the Store Design Wizard will overwrite the current template design If you wish to keep the current design skip this section and continue with Set General Preferences on p 48 The Store Design Wizard will e Replace your existing template set Be most suitable for blank stores such as those based on the default store Apply banners buttons text and layout styles e Assign any existing products to one wizard designed product template After choosing one of the many template sets in the Store Design Wizard you can later customize them to suit your store Access the Store Design Wizard Use the instructions below to access the Store Design Wizard after your initial login I Click System Admin on the back office navigation bar The System Administration Main Menu is displayed Figure 20 2 Select Store Design Wizard from the Design section of the menu The first step of the Store Design Wizard is displayed Figure 22 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 43 Graphical Store Design Wizard Use System Administration First Time Run the Store Design Wizard The 11 step Store Design Wizard will replace a plain gray default store with the banners background colors font colors and butto
121. the upload is complete the Catalog Attributes Values page is displayed The value defined for the multimedia attribute is the file name and directory path Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 135 United Nations Standard Product and Services Classification UN SPSC Catalog Manager United Nations Standard Product and Services Classification UN SPSC Page 136 The UN SPSC is an internationally recognized hierarchal catalog structure that is used by supplier cataloging software and services to categorize and report expenditures While the UN SPSC is not a product numbering system it does organize products into a hierarchal catalog numbering system The files needed to import UN SPSC catalog data into your store are located in the UNSPSC directory on the INTERSHOP 4 installation CD If you do not have access to the installation CD contact your Site Administrator for copies There are two ways to use the UN SPSC information in INTERSHOP Bi Create the structure of your store catalog using the UN SPSC catalog structure Use the Data Import Tool to import the UN SPSC catalog into your store and assign your products to the catalog structure BI Assign UN SPSC catalog numbers to your products while retaining your existing catalog structure Create a product attribute for the UN SPSC catalog number then enter the appropriate UN SPSC catalog number as the attribute s value for each product in your store You can assign the UN SPSC catalog n
122. they can be deleted See also Deactivate Short for demonstration store Refers to any of the sample stores shipped with the INTERSHOP product The purpose of these stores is to help new merchants learn how the software functions merchants then delete the demo database and build their own store using the demo store framework or customizing it The ability to allow customers to jump directly into a particular page of your Storefront from a remote link without going through the Store Homepage template first To offer discounts merchants set up Discount Classes such as Summer Sale Holiday Offer etc These classes are then linked to customer categories and products Merchants set up a Discount Matrix in INTERSHOP which matches Discount Classes with customer categories and specific products This flexible system allows products to be purchased at different rates by different customers Compare with Hot Deals An Internet address provided through InterNIC the organization which registers and tracks Internet address information Glossary Drop down Menu Dump Device Dump File Dynamic Templates File Filename Follow up Letter FORMs Free Text Entry Hot Deals HTML HTTP IF Statements Input Fields Interface File Internet Invoice Java Glossary Window which opens on a computer screen that allows user to choose from a limited list of pre defined entries to define assig
123. to as WWWAnonymous the customer type for people who provided no information to the INTERSHOP system Information on all customer types is retained in the system INTERSHOP automatically creates an account for every registered customer This account tracks each financial transaction a customer conducts in the store Classification of customers defined in the Settings Manager Discounts are offered to certain Customer Categories See Ordered Orders All New Open below See Profiles A file that holds the contents of a database The database contents can be either dumped into a dump device or dump file Components of a relational database Objects are e g tables columns index views stored procedures users groups The database server is the program which creates and modifies databases and retrieves data from them INTERSHOP uses Sybase SQL Server Release 11 0 2 The default entry for the Database Server is ISSERVER When setting up INTERSHOP using 2 different computers we will refer to one as the computer running the database server or the INTERSHOP database server and the other as the computer running the INTERSHOP Application also referred to as the INTERSHOP Application Server An order customer Operator or product whose record remains in the database i e has not been deleted but is functionally non operative A deleted record is permanently removed from the database Customer orders must be Cancelled before
124. to have the system automatically check that the customer enters the proper number of digits for a credit card This action does not verify that the credit card is valid only that the number has been entered in a permissible format In case of error the customer will be prompted to re enter the credit card number in the proper format Check the box Check Credit Cards in the Back office to have the system verify the format of card numbers entered manually by the operators in the back office Click Save Process Orders Paid by Direct Credit Card Entry Merchants can use a variety of methods to process the credit card information they receive online Send order information to your merchant account at the bank This is the familiar method of ordinary small retail stores and requires no additional INTERSHOP adjustments Export all credit card data received to a file and process using an in house credit card system such as IC Verify INTERSHOP provides tools that both format the data into the appro priate fields for IC Verify and print or export it to a file See Manual Credit Card Handling on p 208 to launch this processing option Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data Credit card data can be encrypted using Triple DES Data Encryption Standard technology When encryption is enabled for a store credit card data stored in the database is not readable when remotely accessed using ODBC or Open Client When
125. to suppliers to re stock the store Used in conditional processing to compare the numeric value of items Marks products which have been allocated to a Customer but not yet purchased Whenever an online customer purchases a product the Inventory Manager labels it reserved until an invoice and packing slip have been generated Now referred to as the Main Level Categories list The main category level of the product catalog A program which initiates a search to match a text string supplied by the user Search engine input form in INTERSHOP INTERSHOP 4 includes a scripting API a set of functions for communicating with the INTERSHOP application that permits programmers to write Perl scripts to extend the functionality of their stores Secure Electronic Transaction SET A standard for secure transaction exchange via the Internet that uses a digital certification scheme to verify that the authorized credit card holder is the person making the transaction Page 443 Shipping Methods SQL SSL Store Credit Storefront Sub SKUs Suggest Orders Supplier Sybase Open Client System Administration System Administrator Tax Class Tax Jurisdiction Tax Matrix Template TLE Page 444 The various methods and costs for shipping products to customers defined in the Statistics amp Preferences Manager of INTERSHOP INTERSHOP 4 also includes a alternative server side script that permits stores to integrate
126. unique ID for the customer in the store database Return members can log into the store with a user name and password Membership benefits might include e Personalized customer profile based shopping Targeted discounts e Order tracking and review of past shopping baskets Wish lists retained from session to session e Other benefits as determined by the merchant In Sports Place the registration options appear automatically once a shopper places an object in the shopping basket Non Member Checkout Find a product and click Add or to Basket as appropriate The Basket page is displayed with three ordering options Figure 7 SPORTS 1 Your One stop Sports Superstore E C3 y Y Yo BASKET sp QUANTITY PRODUCT parte DISCOUNT m Navigator M90 Mountain Bike B 5 00 854 05 1 M Engine Red 16 Furuoka LX Ship Via USMail UPDATE SHIPPING 0 00 SUBTOTAL 854 05 Become a member to take advantage of additions store services TOTAL 854 05 Choose to order as Additional information about your order UPDATE Become a member a visitor or a Login as member Checkout as a visitor member Figure 7 The basket page for visitors in Sports Place Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 25 Enter Customer Data Page 26 2 3 Select the option Checkout as a visitor and click Continue The Non Member
127. you are intersted in Submit Tell us your interests Cooking Cars Gardening Figure 194 Profile edit form using radio buttons Page 392 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Create and Assign Profiles Create a Profile Form with Select Boxes lt H2 gt Step 2 Create an Input Form on t Select Hobbies you are interested in lt H2 gt lt P gt he Profile Editing Page lt U gt Tip lt U gt Use the ctrl key together with the left mouse button to select or unselect items lt P gt FOR FormTagAttributes lt SELECT NAME MULTIPLE SIZE 3 gt lt OPTION VALUE Hobbies_Cooking_VALUE IF Hobbies_Cooking SELECTED ENDIF gt Cooking lt OPTION gt lt OPTION VALUE Hobbies_Cars_VALUE IF Hobbies_Cars SELECTED ENDIF gt Cars lt OPTION gt lt OPTION VALUE Hobbies_Gardening_VALUE IF Hobbies_Gardening SELECTED ENDIF gt Gardening lt OPTION gt lt SELECT gt lt CE ER lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE OK lt CENTER gt lt FORM gt How it looks at the Storefront items Cars Gardening Your personal shopping assistant Your shopping assistant needs some information to guide you to the most interesting places in this store Select Hobbies you are interested in Tip Use the
128. you choose e g hobbies nationality products owned Within each profile class you then create the profile items from which customers will build their profiles For example you might create a profile class for Age and then create the following profile items within that class Age Under 12 Age Teen Age Adult and so on Once your profile classes and their items have been created in System Administration you ink the profile items to catalog categories and products using the Catalog and Product Managers as described below Then when customers choose to activate their profiles they will shop a personalized catalog showing only those categories and products that match their profiles You can view edit and activate each customer s profile from your store s back office using the Customer Manager Page 210 Chapter 3 The Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional Implementation Overview Implementation Overview The steps below are necessary for implementing the Profiles feature 1 Enter System Administration accessible only to the System Administrator to e Makes sure that Enable Profiles is checked in the System Preferences Default setting Enabled See System Preferences on p 48 e Create the profile classes and items to define customers and their interests using the Customer Profile Matrix link in System Administration 2 Use the Catalog and Product Manag
129. you wish you can replace this number with one of your own INTERSHOP will show a warning box if you attempt to assign a number already in use After clicking Save on this page you will no longer be able to edit the product number Required Product Name The name of the product This will appear in the Storefront Required Product Description This will appear in the Storefront as long as the assigned template indicates a place for this information HIML can be used in your Product descriptions see Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut on page 144 for information and instructions Recommended Operator By default the name of the operator who clicked New Product appears here You might change this for example to assign particular operators to particular products or to make one operator responsible for all Product Management Optional Page 140 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Create a New Product Discounts Use this drop down menu if you want to link the product to a pre defined discount which grants customers in particular categories a percentage off the retail price Discount classes are defined in the Settings Manager see Display or Change Existing Discount Classes on page 192 for complete information Optional Template All products must be assigned to a product template before they will appear in the Storefront Product templates determine the look of the product page at the
130. your product and category description fields See Edit a Category on page 128 for instructions and more information Chapter 3 The Back Office Catalog Manager Create or Extend a Category CD login hot deals basket service Sub Categories Equipment Sports Clothing search This text can be used to talk about This text can be used to talk about the sub category equipment to the sub category sports clothing to highlight what products can be found highlight what products can be found store here here e empty category Need Music for your workout Check out the Sound Systems in our Music category HELP Figure 74 Subcategories displayed in the Storefront using the default category template 4 Click Save You automatically return to the page displaying the parent category level where your new entry appears x Catalog Manager NEW CATEGORY SORT CATEGORIES CATALOG ATTRIBUTE VALUES SORT CATALOG ALPHABETICALLY Main Level Categories Electronics Example of a Catalog basic Template Sports Example of a Catalog enhanced Template Language Courses Example of a List basic Template a list has no sub categories Automobile Supplies Automotive Accessories and Supplies Entertainment Options Everything you need to liven up your commute Mass Transit Rider Supplies for Mass Transit Riders Books Books on every subject
131. 0fMeasurement Table 52 lists TLEs that can be used on any Product template with the loop variable ProductVariation Table 52 Product Template TLEs used with Product Template and Product Variations Alt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice Alt_ProductSubTotal Alt_ProductTotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalTax AvailabilityString DNSname DiscountName URL_CachedCatalog URL_CachedProductView URL_CachedUserTemplate URL_Catalog URL_ChangeAddress URL_BasketView EURL_ChangeCurrency Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 279 LOOP Statements TLE Statements Table 52 Product Template TLEs used with Product Template and Product Variations Page 280 DiscountPrice URL_ChangePassword FormTagAttributes URL_ChangePaymentMethod FormTagAttributesSSL H URL_DeactivateProfile lsProductVariation lsVariation_Color sVariation_Components lsVariation_Size URL_EditProfile URL_HotDeals FEURL_Login URL_NavigationFrame ManufacturerName HURL_NewProfile ManufacturerNo TURL NewStoreFrontSession MinOrderLevel URL_PlaceOrder On0rderProducts WURL PrevBasketList ProductDescription URL_PrevOrderList ProductName HURL_ProductView ProductNo URL_Register ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice ProductSubTotal URL_RemoveAllBookmarks URL_RemoveBookmark ProductTaxAmount HURL_RemoveFromBasket ProductTaxClass HURL_SaveProfile ProductTotalPrice URL_SearchMask ProductTota
132. 1002 Fire Engine 13 Red Sports Utilities n K 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit Metallic 1002 14 Yellow 1960 70 C L2 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit Classics MODE Metallic 15 Nall s 1270 08 Gas C 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Metallic T 2 Yellow Luxury Cars n 77 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Metallic kana 1 3 Yellow Minivans n v 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit nates Metallic T IL 4 Yellow n Iv 15 00 450 00 0 00 30 20 Edit gnes Midnight pluerr96ns K 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Midnight Blue 1970 8 Ol r2 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Midnight maA 7 Blue Luxury Cars oo K 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Midnight 8 Blue Minivans oo K 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Midnighi nE 3 Blue Sports Utilities oo v 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 95 The newly created variations set displayed on the Product Variation Matrix page NOTE For variations to display in the Storefront you must create a display and selection format radio buttons or selection lists on the product template For complete instructions and an example see Specific Uses of TLE in Templates on page 355 Edit Variations and Variation Attributes Values Page 156 All variations associated with a product share the same attribute values by default The default values can be
133. 2HTML i should yield amp uuml INPUT string A string value OUTPUT HTML An escaped string value Table 98 HTML2String Decode an HTML formatted string with special characters Replace all entities with their symbol Example string HTML2String html INPUT HTML A string containing HTML OUTPUT string A converted string value Page 422 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions The User Input Output Functions The User Input Output Functions These functions are for display purposes only and permit browser form interaction If the specified TLE variable doesn t exist then no result is returned and an error message is recorded in the INTERSHOP log file Table 99 Getlnput Read the data from any data input field of the referring page Example value Getlnput Name of input field INPUT key The name of an input field or other form element or URL parameter OUTPUT value The corresponding value Comment The function must be sent to the server with a post request HTML form If the input field doesn t exist the function returns undef This function doesn t manage HTML text conversion you must embed the necessary HTML tags in the string Table 100 AddContent Add text at the location of the script Example AddContent HTML_string INPUT HTML One or more strings
134. 39 Create New Template Styles Page 340 Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard e User defined templates must be listed by their INTERSHOP template ID number For example 9 html or 2 html Select User Templates from the list box on the Templates page in System Administration for a complete list of your User defined templates with their ID numbers Delete the Print Mail and Cartridge Templates folders The SDW template styles do not contain these templates Create a Banners Buttons and Headers folder for each scheme defined for your template style Sort the files in the Sitelmages folder into the Banners Buttons and Headers folders created in step four Renaming your files with the filenames of the SDW image files reduces the number of changes you need to make to the style ini file Copy a style ini file from an existing SDW template style into the directory of your new template style Edit the contents of the style ini file with the information filenames and color choices for your template style Information for completing this step can be found in Simple Template Style p 336 and the The Style Definition File style ini p 341 Copy the folder for your template style to the root level of the INTERSHOP data ishome Styles directory Your template style will be displayed in Step 1 of the SDW along with all the styles listed in the Styles direct
135. 9 270 ShippingTax 270 ShippingTotalPrice 239 270 ShippingTotalTax 239 270 ShippingZipCode 229 264 270 SpecialProducts 232 StockLevel 232 278 281 StockLevel_Value 281 StockLevelReserved 232 278 281 StockLevelReserved_Value 281 StorelmagePath 258 278 279 326 StorelmagePath 328 SupplierOrderPositions 260 SupplierOrderSubTotal 239 260 SupplierOrderTotalPrice 239 260 Index SupplierOrderTotalTax 239 260 TotalltemsInList 237 326 UnitOfMeasurement 233 281 284 285 URL_ActivateProfile 255 278 A eae 236 253 276 277 URL_AddToBasket 60 252 277 376 URL_BasketView 251 252 276 277 URL_CachedCatalog 253 276 277 278 254 276 277 URL_CachedUserTemplate 276 278 URL_Catalog 237 253 276 277 278 359 374 URL_Category 237 253 274 374 URL_ChangeAddress 228 229 252 254 276 277 278 URL_ChangeAddress Service 254 URL_ChangeCurrency 241 277 278 363 URL_ChangeLanguage 258 276 278 URL_ChangePassword 242 276 323 URL_ChangePaymentMethod 276 277 279 URL_DeactivateProfile 230 255 277 279 URL_DSEAction 256 399 URL_EditProfile 230 255 279 URL_HotDeals 233 254 276 279 324 URL_PrevPage 237 254 URL_ProductView 233 254 278 279 329 374 oductView 330 _Register 228 254 278 279 UI U URL_LoadBasket 245 URL_Login 256 277 279 URL_NavigationFrame 256 258 276 278 URL_NewProfile 230 255 278 319 UR
136. A list of previous baskets is displayed ordered or not as defined by the merchant in System Administration 3 Select one basket from the list A complete report of that basket appears Figure 15 4 To reload the basket for another order click Reload basket MY ACCOUNT QUANTITY PRODUCT 1 Professional Address information prices of these products were updated DISCOUNT PRICE TOTAL 5 00 370 00 351 50 USMail Shipping 0 00 Net total 351 50 Back RELOAD BASKET Note If you load this basket the current basket will be replaced nsend San Francisco CA 94103 USA These products were deleted from the collection and can t be ordered now Figure 16 A basket ready to be re ordered Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Retailers Log In as a Retailer Sports Place for Retailers Sports Place assumes that business to business clients are retailers who want to buy sports equipment at near wholesale prices and resell them to their own customers It assumes that such a retailer would need to prove his or her identity to the Sports Place merchant off line by letter phone etc The merchant would create logins for authorized retailers Retailers who buy more receive greater discounts in Sports Place Retailers may also use a two step re order process Each of these special features is described in the following sections Log In as a Retailer To demonstrate the concep
137. Add META Tags to New Files for Import You can create new files add them to the Iemplates directory you have defined and import them as recognized INTERSHOP templates To do this you must add META tags to the new template files BM New templates can be created in the following categories with the corresponding TemplateClass abbreviations Catalog Templates CT e List lemplates LT e Product Templates PR Print Templates PS e User Templates UT NOTE New Storefront templates abbreviated OS Mail templates and Cartridge templates cannot be created externally and imported Chapter 5 Templates Page 301 Use the TLE Assistant INTERSHOP Template Tools Corresponding templates in multiple languages must have the same name and description in all languages Remember if you change a name or description in a META tag be sure to do so in all applicable languages When new templates are created in only one language of a multi language store placeholder copies with the same name will be created in all other applied languages The content of these placeholder templates is derived from the default template for that template group You must have purchased and installed at least one Language Pack for this feature to be enabled Use the TLE Assistant The Template Language Extension section of this User Guide explains at length how TLE variables and statements work and how they can be used
138. Administrator to be used as examples for creating your own scripts or modified for use in your store UPS integration script included with the Golf Store demo store INTERSHOP 4 Link to electronic software distribution ESD systems to provide secure re usable download of digital goods Integrate with existing databases Forward incoming orders into your order processing and accounting system Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Implementation Overview Site Administrator and Programmer Roles SSS Implementation Overview Site Administrator and Programmer Roles Besides the Merchant implementation of Server Side Scripting involves the Site Administrator and a programmer who has knowledge of PERL and HTML These are the implementation steps in overview Ona store by store basis in the Site Administration module the Site Administrator enables SSS activates E mail Notification of SSS errors and defines a special database user name and password to be used by the SSS programmer Merchants who rent space in a multi store environment must ask their Site Administrators to enable SSS in their stores The SSS programmer uses PERL together with the Scripting API Functions to create the scripts for a store e Store templates are then edited in the back office usually by the SSS programmer to call the scripts see Call A Script from an INTERSHOP Template p 414 The System Administrator login and password for the stor
139. Back Office CLOSE DATA IMPORT TOOL Error Log The following errors occur during data import 5 22 99 14 20 3 Error reading value in record number 2 column 0 Figure 65 The Error Log page is displayed if you click Display Error Log on the Monitor page Currency Format Errors If the currency format in your import file does not match the settings you selected on the Regional Preferences page in System Administration you may get errors reporting a datatype mismatch when trying to import such records For example if INTERSHOP is configured to use a comma as the decimal point e g 5 99 and your import file uses a dot as a decimal point e g 5 99 you will get the datatype mismatch error Either change the currency format in your datafile or change the settings in INTERSHOP System Administration see System Preferences on p 48 for details Work with Existing Data Import Files You can use the links on the Data Import Menu page to jump directly to any step from the Data Import Tool Menu to work with any Data Description cfg Uploaded Data dat or Mapping map files which you have created previously For example you might choose to do this if you want to edit or delete existing Data Description and Data Files create a new mapping file using existing Data Description and Data Files import data using previously created Data Description and Mapping Files or to create and upload Data Description Files c
140. CHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager ADMIN manager manager manager Figure 133 Report on Storefront Processes The Current Status of Your Store shows Unprocessed Orders New Orders that have not yet been confirmed by operators and for which no invoice or packing slip has been generated Open Orders Orders that have been partially processed Accounts Receivable Orders with unpaid invoices What Happened Since Your Last Login summarizes storefront activity since the last log on with your login and password Sessions in the Storefront Number of times users have accessed your storefront Baskets Generated Number of times users have selected products and placed them in their shopping baskets Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Statistics New Customers Registered Number of new customers who have completed the registration form to obtain their own login and password New Orders Number of orders placed since your last login Search Traffic and Order Statistics You can search Traffic and Order Statistics to view statistical reports concerning your customers online traffic and cash flow 1 Select Settings Manager from the navigation bar 2 Click on Search Traffic and Order Statistics The Traffic and Order Statistics search page is displayed Figure 134 VN Settings Manager BACK SEARCH Search Traffic and Order Statistics Av
141. Category number not found Language User Defined Message e 4 CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 39 Enter a new error message Use the drop down menu to select the language in which you want to edit the text If you have not purchased and installed one or more INTERSHOP Language Packs all messages are in English If you have installed a Language Pack the message content reflects the chosen language Enter the desired message in the User Defined Message text box Error messages can contain HI ML tags such as lt B gt All special characters must be entered using their HI ML equivalent e g to display amp use the HI ML code amp amp Click Save Click Back to return to the list of messages The new text is now set to display in the Storefront Return Error Messages to Their Default Error messages cannot be deleted but can be restored to the default values From the System Administration Main Menu select Storefront Message Template List The error message templates are listed with descriptions Figure 38 Select the error message to be replaced with the default value The edit message page is displayed Figure 39 Click Delete The user defined message is deleted from the database The default message will now be shown in the Storefront Chapter 2 System A
142. CategoryName CustStoreCredit ShippingCity ShippingTotalPrice CustCity CustStreet ShippingCountry ShippingTotalTax CustCountry CustEMail ShippingE Mail ShippingZipCode CustCreditBalance TE CustTaxArea T ShippingFax Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements IF and ELSE Statements TLE Statements This section introduces TLE statements for building conditional processes and loops with TLE variables and for nesting templates TLE Statements are of three types IF and ELSE Statements Use with TLE variables and operators to build conditional processes LOOP Statements Used to output lists of variable data such as products selected by a customer e INCLUDE Statements Used to nest User defined templates within other templates NOTE All TLE statements are case sensitive All TLE statements begin with the sign IF and ELSE Statements INTERSHOP 4 enables you to process a section of a template conditionally using IF statements Create simple statements using and ENDIE or add complexity using the ELSE tag The value of the HTML or TLE variable displayed in the storefront is based on a real time evaluation of the IF statement Conditional statements and value comparisons are possible using either strings of characters TLE variables etc or numerical values Both possibilities are discussed below IF HELSE Conditional Statements This example shows the
143. Click Assign Profile The Assign Profile to Category page is displayed Figure 142 Profile items already assigned to the category if any are displayed in the top scroll window catalog Manager BACK SAVE Assign Profile to Category Profile settings for Sports Assigned Items Age Adult Age Teen Profile Classes Profile Items Age Teen CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 142 Assign Profile to Category with Profile Classes drop down menu 3 Select a profile class from the list using the drop down menu The profile items available for that class are displayed in the lower scroll window 4 From the lower scroll window select the profile item s you want to link to the category WY catalog Manager BACK SAVE Assign Profile to Category Profile settings for Sports Assigned Items Profile Classes Gender z Profile Items Gender Male CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 143 Assign Profile Items to a category 5 Click the Add button The selected profile items appear in the scroll window in the top half of the page but are not linked to the category until you click Save Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 213 Managing Profiles from the Back Office
144. DER SELECT BASKET PAYMENT METHOD eee PAYMENT It known J no password Product _ A Subtotal Shipping ORDER INPUT 4 CREDIT CARD ENTRIES gusec t er password If Direct Credit Card Entry LOGIN PANEL ORDER CONFIRMATION Login ia Figure 165 Checkout process for already registered members Reduce Click Steps for Member Orders While each of the templates in the order pipeline adds both value and flexibility some merchants will want to further simplify the order pro exa Page 320 cedure and reduce click steps for members placing an order For mple Enable cookies for member recognition and require no password to eliminate the Login step for returning members Leave out the optional Member Order Information template Accept only one payment method such as cash on delivery INTERSHOP will automatically skip the Order Select Payment Method template Enable the Remain on Current Page option in System Administration so that the basket page is only viewed when completing an order or when the Basket button is pressed Otherwise the basket page is displayed each time a product is added to or removed from the basket See System Preferences p 48 and Notify Shoppers of Basket Status p 376 for more information Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront Registration and Che
145. E Statements You can use the INCLUDE statement to nest a User defined template inside another template This allows you to share common elements such as navigation bars across all templates with a simple INCLUDE statement even in frameless web pages See Call the Navigation Bar Template into the Homepage Frameset p 359 for an example of using INCLUDE to nest a navigation bar in a template To call one template into another use the INCLUDE statement according to this format INCLUDE Template_Class Template_ID For Template Class always use UT because only User defined templates can be called into another template You can find the template ID for the template you want to call by selecting User defined Templates on the Templates page select Templates on the System Administration Main Menu page The code below shows how to set up an INCLUDE statement INCLUDE UT 3 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements INCLUDE Statements This code will call User defined template number 3 into the template where it is placed Rules for Using INCLUDE Statements Only User defined templates can be included nested in other templates See Template Groups in Detail User Defined p 331 for more information INCLUDE can be used with all templates except the Print and Mail Templates The included template is inserted at the point of the INCLUDE statement All chan
146. E Variables and Page 269 TLE Statements 271 TIF and ELSE d bero e eed 211 LOOP Statements 213 INCLUDE 286 Chapter 5 Templates 289 Introduction to Template Design 291 Getting Started with Template Design 291 Access Create and Delete Templates 295 Access tee mesi ores Ee Het Dee 295 Create Templates cese eee Ree Re er RR eR ERE E s 296 Delete Templates Met gale esis iR ER Heg 296 INTERSHOP Template Tools 297 Use the INTERSHOP Template 297 Export Templates and Import HTML 298 Use the TLE Assistant een ene Seat ee pem eu 302 Use the Preview 303 Use the Revert to Default 303 HTML Authoring Tools to Edit 304 Upload Files to the Web 304 Page Caching s ok ro e 307 Set Page Caching 308 Select T
147. E counterparts are used For example lt B gt BasketTotalPrice lt B gt lt BR gt Alt_BasketTotalPrice NOTE Because the Alt_ TLEs are figured using the exchange rates you have most recently entered a Previous Order or Previous Basket page may display alternate currency prices different from those that displayed when the order was first generated Create a Link to Change the Alternate Currency A link for each activated currency can be created using the TLE URL_ChangeCurrency and can be placed on the Basket or any product template A parameter containing the currency code must be added to the TLE The currency code is found on the currency page For example the following code placed on a template would display a link to change the alternate currency to Deutsche Marks lt A HREF http URL_ChangeCurrency DEM gt Show prices in Deutsche Marks lt A gt For member customers the selected alternate currency is saved as part of their customer data and appears on their customer data page in the back office This currency is then used as a new default whenever they log on For non member customers the alternate currency will change back to the default with each new session Create a Drop down Menu to Change the Alternate Currency A drop down menu containing all activated currencies can be created using the TLE SelectBox_Currency which creates a drop down menu of activated currencies For member customers this c
148. INTERSHOP needs the credit card data in order to process information e g for manual credit card processing or to display information e g in the Order Manager the data is decrypted for processing but remains encrypted in the database Chapter 2 System Administration Page 85 Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data Payment Method Settings Once a store enables encryption a key file is automatically generated and placed in the Intershop Data CCCkeys directory with the file name lt store_database_name gt key The file contains a key set that is a copy of a resident default key set Each store in a site that has encryption enabled has the same default key set but stores can create and use unique key sets Introduce a New Key Set INTERSHOP does not provide an internal key generator If you do not wish to use the default key set you need to generate a new one CAUTION If encryption is already enabled for a store that store s data can only be decrypted using the current key set DO NOT INSTALL A NEW KEY SET UNTIL HAVE FOLLOWED INSTRUCTIONS FOR Allow a New Key Set When Encryption is Already Enabled on p 87 below The key set is composed of A key tag KEYT that identifies a key set for a particular store and is saved with the encrypted data to insure correct keys are used for decryption 3 keys KEY1 KEY2 e An initial vector IVEC Each element in the set is 8 bytes and in hexadecimal format 0 9
149. It contains a main window including links to the primary product categories and a navigation bar providing links to the search mask the shopping basket etc Figure 2 All INTERSHOP store homepages built on the default dump are initially structured in this way Navigation bar catalog browser hot deals Welcome to the Training Store x Electronics hee where you ll find a quick and Example of a Catalog basic way to learn about building your Template own INTERSHOP store service Sports Product categories This special store provides Example of a Catalog enhanced search informative comments regarding Template basic store concepts template Language Courses store usage and options like conditional Example of a List basic or rule based presentation of Template a list has no content at the bottom of the sub categories store page you re viewing In some cases you will get a brief overview at the top of the page 3e hot deals When appropriate you will find a 2MB Psion Series 3A HELP button that will lead you to Psion Series 3a mare detailed information and pocket PC enly assistance Please also reference 521 69 the documentation provided with Aiwa AM FM Stereo your INTERSHOP product AM FM stereo radio small enough to fit in your pocket only 83 44 Figure 2 The Training Store homepage NOTE The look of the navigation bar and the names of the functions are ful
150. L_NewStoreFrontSession 256 276 278 279 URL_NextPage 237 254 URL_NonMemberCheckout 228 252 321 URL_PlaceOrder 252 278 279 URL_PrevBasket 245 ayy evBasketList 242 245 278 279 URL_PrevOrder 249 282 URL_PrevOrderList 242 249 278 279 323 RL RL 9 RL RL Index URL_RemoveAllBookmarks 236 253 278 279 URL_RemoveBookmark 236 253 278 279 URL_RemoveFromBasket 60 253 278 279 376 URL_SaveProfile 230 277 278 279 URL_SearchMask 254 256 258 277 278 279 URL_Service 242 279 URL_Store 256 258 279 yi enpa 256 277 278 279 URL_UserTemplate 332 URL_UserTemplate ID 256 URL_ViewBookmarks 236 253 278 79 324 URL_ViewProfile 277 278 279 319 390 Variation Value_ TypeName _CHECKED 235 VariationProduct 329 VariationType_ TypeName 235 VariationValue_ TypeName 235 VariationValue_ TypeName _ID 235 Pye ence DE CPP ame _SELECTED WeightSymbol 233 URL_CachedUserTemplate 256 URL_ViewProfile 230 WeightSymbol 53 TLE Loop Variable BasketPositions 274 275 276 277 283 Bookmarks 275 278 Categories 282 CreditCardRows 274 284 DeliveryPositions 274 285 nventoryPositions 274 285 InvoicePositions 274 285 OrderPositions 274 284 286 PrevBasketPositions 275 PrevBasketPostions 283 PrevBaskets 275 PreviousBasket 282 PrevOrderPositions 275 283 PrevOrders 275 Products 281 ProductVariation 275 279 dE dk Page 457 SearchR
151. OP Statements Page 276 Storefront Templates Table 49 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Hot Deals template with the loop variable SpecialProducts These variables can also be used with the loop variable BasketPositions on the following storefront templates Basket Non member Data Form TLE Statements Order Non member Order Information Order Member Order Information Order Confirmation Message Table 49 Storefront Templates see above TLEs Used with LOOP variable BasketPositions AIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice Alt_ProductSubTotal Alt_ProductSubTotal_ Value Alt_ProductTotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalPrice_Value Alt_ProductTotalTax Alt_ProductlotalTax_Value AvailabilityString Ti DiscountName DiscountPercent DiscountPercent_Value FormlagAttributes FormTagAttributesSSL T sProductVariation ltemNo ltemNo_Value ManufacturerName ManufacturerNo MinOrderLevel MinOrderLevel_Value Name_ProductQuantity TEOnOrderProducts OnOrderProducts_Value ProductDescription ProductName ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice StockLevel StockLevel_Value StockLevelReserved StockLevelReserved_Value UnitO0fMeasurement TEURL ActivateProfile URL_AddBookmark HURL_AddToBasket URL_BasketView URL_CachedCatalog URL_CachedProductView URL_CachedUserTemplate URL_Catalog URL_ChangeAddress URL_ChangeLanguage URL_ChangePassword URL_ChangePaymentMethod URL_EditPr
152. PURCHASING manager Product Profile Information CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 84 A Product Details page Edit Product Information Chapter 3 The Back Office Search for a product using the Search Products page click on Product Manager Click on the product number in the resulting list to view the Product Details page Edit any fields or attributes For information on using HTML in product descriptions see Using HTML in Category Descriptions on page 128 The process is identical Click Save Page 143 Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut Product Manager Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut Page 144 To simplify your workflow the Product Details page in the Product Manager includes an Enter Stock command as a shortcut to the Inventory Manager Follow the steps below to stock inventory from within the Product Manager For details on the Inventory Manager see page 160 1 Create a new product or search for and select an existing product 2 For products without variations click Enter Stock on the command bar from the Product Details page If a product has variations click Enter Stock from the Variation Product Details page A Stock Entry page from the Inventory Manager appears with the appropriate product number displayed Figure 85
153. ProductQuantity EURL_AddBookmark TEURL AddToBasket URL_BasketView URL_CachedCatalog URL_CachedProductView URL_CachedUserTemplate URL_Catalog URL_ChangeAddress URL_ChangeCurrency URL_ChangeLanguage URL_ChangePassword URL_ChangePaymentMethod URL_DeactivateProfile URL_EditProfile URL_HotDeals EURL_Login Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 277 LOOP Statements Page 278 Table 50 Order Select Payment Method Template TLE Statements TLEs used with Select Payment Method and BasketPositions TEOnOrderProducts ProductDescription ProductName ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice ProductQuantity ProductSubTotal ProductlaxAmount ProductTaxClass ProductTotalPrice T ProductTotalTax ProductWeight Protocol SearchFormlagAttributes SearchFormlagAttributesSSL SessionID StockLevel StockLevelReserved StorelmagePath TEURL ActivateProfile URL_NavigationFrame URL_NewProfile HURL_NewStoreFrontSession HURL_PlaceOrder URL_PrevBasketList HURL_PrevOrderList URL_ProductView URL_ Register HURL_RemoveAllBookmarks URL_RemoveBookmark URL_RemoveFromBasket HURL_SaveProfile HURL_SearchMask HURL_Service URL_Store URL_UserTemplate URL_ViewBookmarks HURL_ViewProfile UnitOfMeasurement Table 51 Bookmarks Template Bookmarks template with Bookmarks AIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice Alt_ProductSubTotal Alt_Produ
154. RSHOP and User defined Templates used by a template style Edit the list to reflect the templates used by your template style Reference User defined templates with the number assigned in the back office Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini Setup Information In this section you enter basic information about a template style including the title available languages and the number of schemes offered Info Section of the Style ini File This section determines how your template is displayed in Step 3 of the Store Design Wizard and directs the Store Design Wizard to the directories where your image static and template files are located Info name Antiques description Antiqued finishes and objects of art image preview jpg group Classic staticfiles StaticFiles imagedir SiteImages templates Templates preview preview html Table 68 Key Value inputs for the Info Section of ini file Key Value in Example Description of Value The name for the style that is listed name Antiques in Step 3 of the Store Design Wizard A short description of the template description Antiqued finishes and objects of art hid style to supplement the title in Step 3 of the Store Design Wizard A gif or jpeg image file that displays a thumbnail image of the A si template style in Step 3 of the image preview jpg SDW This image should not be larger than
155. Registration Name_ShippingPhone2 Input field for shipping address second phone number Value ShippingPhone2 Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingState Input field for shipping address state Value ShippingState Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingStreet Input field for shipping address street Value ShippingStreet Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingZipCode Input field for shipping address zip code Value ShippingZipCode Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Table 41 Input TLE Variables TLE Variable SelectBox_CreditCard Description Creates a select list to choose a credit card Values are automatically derived from System Administration FORM TLE Variables Available Templates Storefront templates Basket Input Credit Card Data Non member Data Member Order Confirmation SelectBox_PaymentMethod Creates a select list to choose a payment method Values are automatically derived from System Administration Storefront templates Basket Non member Data Order Select Payment Method 5SelectBox_ShippingMethod Creates a select list to choose a shipping m
156. S 7 operator TNI category Td payment Method Ti Date From Deactivated Yves C C ai Cancelled Yves C C a CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 110 The Search Orders page in the Order Manager Use the Search Orders Page The Search Orders page is used to find all types of paperwork in the store orders at all stages of processing invoices packing slips and basket information Simply choose the appropriate value from the Transaction Type drop down menu and click Search 1 Click Order Manager on the back office navigation bar to get the Search Orders page then select New Orders in the Transaction Type field You can refine your search by entering further parameters such as customer name or number a customer category an operator name or a date range 2 Click Search A list of orders fitting your search criteria appears Figure 111 Order Manager BACK HELP Order List New Name Date Sub total 990528 1002 John Smith 05 28 99 214 90 990528 1001 Jane Doe 05 28 99 258 33 2 of 2 New Orders have been found Displaying matches 1 2 CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager mana
157. S for page caching Activate Page Caching Feature Vv Activate this check box to enable page caching for templates Static Catalog Templates 3 Static List Templates 3 Static Product Templates 5 Static User Defined Templates 0 Static Storefront Templates 0 Total 1i CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 160 Page Caching Preferences Page Activate the Page Caching Feature Select the Activate Page Caching Feature checkbox to initiate page caching Selecting this checkbox has the following results Additional preferences are displayed on the Preferences page All existing Catalog List Product and User defined templates are selected and available for page caching The pages will actually be cached after the first time they are accessed in the storefront If you do not want individual templates in these categories to be cached you must de select them New templates created in these groups are also automatically selected for caching unless they are individually de selected See Select Templates for Page Caching p 309 for details Certain Storefront templates are available for caching Because Storefront templates are more likely to contain dynamic calculations customer profiles and other content that cannot be held in a static file they are not automatically selected upon activation You must select them indi
158. SE URL for the Remote Site E Create a User defined template to split frames page 400 or to act as an introduction page in a non frame based store page 399 Route the DSE URL through the User defined template by setting Direct Storefront Entry Settings in System Administration page 63 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 397 Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Direct Storefront Entry Create the DSE URL for the Remote Site Because DSE does not invoke the Store Homepage the DSE URL at the remote site must contain information that specifies What national language to present to the DSE customer the language ID What store page to present the DSE action e Special product or catalog identifiers for certain actions a numeric ID Each of these parameters is explained below When combined they form the Direct Storefront Entry URL in the following format http lt server domain gt lt storename gt storefront lt languageID gt lt action gt lt numericID gt http ntserver mystore storefront EN catalog 1 001 Use the Language Identifier If you have purchased and installed INTERSHOP Language packs the System Administrator chooses a default Storefront language in Regional Settings and shoppers can change the language on the store s Homepage Since DSE customers bypass the Homepage they do not choose which national language they will use to view multi lingual sto
159. Save The Edit Discounts page is displayed Figure 121 The message No discounts have been found appears at the bottom of the page indicating that you have created a discount class but that it has not yet been linked to a customer category or had its terms defined Settings Manager BACK SAVE DEFINE DISCOUNT TERMS DELETE SET UP DISCOUNTS Edit Discounts Language English zi Name Fall Sale Deactivated Description Bargains for frequent shoppers throughout the Fall season d No Customer Category Minimum Discount Valid from Valid to No discounts have been found CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 121 Use this page to edit a discount class 5 To link the new discount class to one or more customer categories and to define the terms of the discount click Define Discount Terms The Define Discount page is displayed Figure 122 TAs Settings Manager BACK SAVE SET UP DISCOUNTS Define Discount Name Fall Sale Customer Category Frequent Buyer s valid from date 09 01 99 Valid from time Min 8 Units Valid to date 11 01 99 Valid to time Discount 25 mm dd yy hh mm am CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 122 Assigning a discount class to customer ca
160. See Product Attributes p 145 for information on creating and defining product attributes You can then insert the attribute TLE variables in the templates as placeholders that will call up the proper values the text images or multimedia value of the attribute when requested from the storefront Figure 150 shows the TLE list once the user has created product attributes Product attribute variables Color Components Size catalogphoto long_description mfg_part_no product_image type Figure 150 The Product Attribute TLEs generated in a product template shown in a TLE Editor Table 13 Product Attribute TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Attribute is replaced by their attribute name created in the System Attribute Administration The value is assigned in Product templates Product basic the Product Manager and displayed in the storefront Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Product Variation TLE Variables Product Related TLE Variables As explained in Product Variations p 151 product variations allow you to display and sell different versions of a product from a single page in the Storefront For example a T shirt in many size and color combinations does not need a separate Web page for each possible combination Product variation TLE variables are composed of Types and Values defined by the merchant through the Product M
161. Server Side Script HTML code to call the Search Variation pm SSS into a template with a select box BEGIN use SearchVariation qw SearchVariation SearchVariation END LOOP VariationType lt input type hidden name Variations value id gt lt select name id gt lt option selected value gt name LOOP VariationValue lt option value value gt value ENDLOOP lt select gt lt br gt ENDLOOP Page 438 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Glossary Accounts Receivable Anonymous Customers Application Application Server Attributes Attribute Data Types Back office Basket not ordered Baskets Boolean Operators Browser Cancel Catalog Category CGI Comparison Operators Conditional Processing Glossary All invoices not marked paid are classified as Accounts Receivable Shoppers who have not yet provided any registration or order information Comprised of the Storefront System Administration Main Menu and the back office Managers When installing INTERSHOP on two different computers the machine containing the INTERSHOP Application can be called the Application Server Freely defined descriptors of a product such as fabric type and catalogs that are embedded in Product Catalog and List templates Attributes are created and assigned a value for each product or catalog in the Product and Catalog Manag
162. Shipping Methods Shipping Methods Settings Manager Here you specify the shipping method options you wish to offer to your customers The options you enter appear in a drop down menu available to customers on the storefront basket page When customers select a method the corresponding costs are displayed and added to the customer basket total Shipping can be calculated as a flat rate or can be based on basket items basket price or basket weight Create a New Shipping Method 1 From the Settings Manager main menu select Set Up Shipping Methods The Set Up Shipping Methods page is displayed listing all existing shipping methods with their criteria Figure 124 Sportsplace Store Back Office Administrator Microsoft Internet Explorer Settings Manager BACK SAVE NEW SHIPPING METHOD Set Up Shipping Methods Default Name Active Calculation Model Tax Classes Airborne 3 day Intl Flat Rate Shipping ks Fedex Overnight Flat Rate Shipping UPS Blue 2 3 days ks Flat Rate Shipping UPS Red a Flat Rate Shipping xI US Mail Ground 4 5 days Flat Rate Shipping ks usMail Flat Rate Shipping CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 124 The Set Up Shipping Methods page Page 194 Default Choose a method to be the first listed in the storefront drop down menu This defa
163. StocklevelOrdered 285 ProductStockLevelReserved 285 ProductSubTotal 238 278 279 281 283 284 285 3 ProductSubTotal_Value 277 281 ProductTax 232 270 281 283 286 ProductTax_Value 281 ProductTaxClass 232 270 281 ProductTotalPrice 238 270 278 281 282 283 285 286 ProductTotalPrice_Value 281 ProductTotalTax 238 270 278 279 281 ProductTotalTax_Value 281 ProductWeight 53 232 278 279 280 281 284 ProductWeight_Value 277 281 Protocol 278 279 REMOTE_ADDR 270 REMOTE_HOST 257 270 REMOTE_USER 257 270 SearchCover 371 266 278 279 Page 456 SearchFormTagAttributesSSL 266 278 279 366 SearchUseProfile 266 SearchVariation COLOR 372 SearchVariation_SIZE 372 SelectBox_CreditCard 265 SelectBox_Currency 241 363 SelectBox_Manufacturer 266 SelectBox_PaymentMethod 250 265 SelectBox_ShippingMethod 265 SelectBox_TaxArea 265 SessionHasExpired 258 SessionID 257 278 279 ShippingCity 228 264 270 ShippingComplete 282 ShippingCountry 228 264 270 ShippingEMail 228 264 270 ShippingFax 228 264 270 ShippingMethod 228 266 270 ShippingMethodID 228 266 ShippingName 270 ShippingName1 228 264 270 ShippingName2 229 264 270 ShippingName3 229 264 270 ShippingPhone 229 264 270 ShippingPhone2 229 264 270 ShippingPrice 229 270 ShippingStarted 282 ShippingState 229 264 270 ShippingStreet 229 264 270 ShippingSubTotal 23
164. Storefront view of a similar storefront loop fi Breakfast of Champions 15 00 15 00 Tom Sawyer 20 00 20 00 h Wuthering Heights 20 00 20 00 delete Figure 201 A simple loop of products in a basket Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 405 Empty Loops Loop Statements Empty Loops Page 406 For LOOP statements there is a special TLE variable TotalltemsInList whose value is the number of rows returned by the loop If the loop output is empty for example if a product list contains no products then the value TotalltemsInList is 0 In general you use this information to display an empty message In the example below the empty message includes a link to the search mask IF NOT KTotalltemsInList EQ 0 lt YES iterate trough all items LOOP Products lt 1 1 name and price for each item Row number ItemNo ProductName ProductPrice lt BR gt ENDLOOP ELSE lt 1 NO The list is empty gt lt BR gt No products have been found in this category Go to A HREF http URL_SearchMask gt SEARCH lt A gt to find products ENDIF How it looks in the storefront when there are no items in the list Empty Loop No products have been found in this category Go to SEARCH to find products Figure 202 An empty category In a LOOP statement the TLE variable ItemNo
165. USTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 87 Product Attribute Values page 2 Enter a new attribute value or edit an existing attribute value You do not need to fill out every field use only the ones that are meaningful descriptors for the product Values for multimedia attributes are filled in during the upload process See Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes on page 148 for details 3 Click Save Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes Use the instructions here to upload images and other multimedia files to your webserver using the Upload buttons on the Product Attribute Values page Figure 87 1 Open the Product Details page of the product to which you wish to upload multimedia and click Product Attribute Values The Product Attribute Values page is displayed Figure 87 Page 148 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Product Attributes 2 Click the Upload button corresponding to the multimedia attribute for which you want to upload a file The Multimedia Attribute File Upload page is displayed Figure 88 Product Manager BACK UPLOAD Multimedia Attribute File Upload Overwrite existing files Attribute Image Current Value 1002 jpg Source File Browse Target Directory SELECT CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager ma
166. Up Store Using the Back Office Managers The rest of this chapter continues in the order that the Managers appear on the navigation bar However you may want to take the following path to most efficiently set up your store according to your preferences For more information about each step see the respective Manager section in this chapter Bi In the Settings Manager Set up drop down menus shipping method options and sales tax information You may also set up discounts and customer profiles optional BI in the Catalog Manager Create your online product categories and subcategories in the Customer Manager Enter the names of your suppliers Bi in the Product Manager Enter specific information for each of your products and assign products to product categories and suppliers Assign each product to a template Bi In the Inventory Manager Enter amounts of stock on hand NOTE It is also possible to import existing product and customer databases See Data Import on p 93 for more information Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 121 Overview The Managers and Everyday Business Operations Introduction to the Back Office Overview The Managers and Everyday Business Operations The following brief overview describes how the Managers are used in your most basic day to day operations and lists the procedures and workflow steps you are most likely to perform regularly How the Managers Work Together Six of the
167. User Defined TLEs Name SALEPRICE Description Content Figure 152 Edit and Create User defined TLE elements 3 Specify a name for the new TLE element a description optional and the content that will be called whenever this variable appears in a template INTERSHOP 4 will not allow the creation of a User defined TLE with the same name as any existing TLE in the store Only one value can be entered for the content The content can be entered in any format consistent with HTML coding for example a color tag such as FFFFF for red or lines of Java Script code Click Save The newly defined element will appear in the TLE editor list in all templates throughout the store If you preview a template the user defined variables will show their designated content in the preview window You will preview User defined variable content when you preview a template View User Defined TLEs User defined TLEs are available to all templates In the System Administration Main Menu select Template The Template page is displayed Figure 151 2 Click User defined TLE The User defined TLE list is displayed Edit a User Defined TLEs Page 268 You can edit the content of a User defined element at any time and all templates containing the element will automatically use the new content However if you change the name of the TLE element you must also be sure to change its name wherever it occ
168. User Guide INTERSHOP 4 Updated To Include INTERSHOP 4 2 ISMb1259 The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice at any time This document and all of its parts are protected by copyright All rights including those of duplication reproduction translation microfilming storage on electronic media and processing in electronic form are expressly reserved INTERSHOP 4 is a registered trademark of INTERSHOP Communications Inc Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 95 and Windows 989 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corp Sun Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc All other company product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Copyright 2000 INTERSHOP Communications Inc All Rights Reserved 07 06 2000 Table of Contents Introduction to the User Guide lI When and Why to Use the User 1 Brief Overview of User Guide Contents 2 What Knowledge is 12 Getting the Latest INTERSHOP 5 12 Chapter Explore the Storefront 13 The INTERSHOP Storefront 15 Use the
169. Using 12 Hour or 24 Hour Format 12 symbol z PM Symbol pm Time Separator Figure 28 Regional settings in System Administration Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Regional Preferences Bi Back Office Language If you have purchased and installed a INTERSHOP 4 Language Pack you can select a default language other than English for use in the back office and in System Administration In order for Language Pack languages to appear in this drop down menu they must also be checked in Supported Language Preferences on p 65 Default setting English Storefront Language If you have purchased and installed one or more INTERSHOP 4 Language Packs you can select a default language other than English as the default storefront language Add links in the storefront to allow customers to switch from the default language chosen here to other activated languages Default setting English Unit of Weight The drop down menu includes units of both weight and measure To create new units such as lbs kg etc go to the Settings Manager and follow the instructions below Choose Set up Drop Down Menus from the Settings Manager Menu e Choose Units of Weight and Measure from the list e Entera unit of weight or measure in the resulting text field and click Add to List e Click Back to return to the Regional Preferences page When the units you need have been cr
170. View Previous Orders Time Limit This setting limits the number of days the system will retain information about a customer s previous orders for customer review Default setting 14 days Optimize Search Results Page 62 Adjust these settings to optimize search engine performance B First Threshold This setting works together with Last Search Time to determine when to truncate the search cache based on the size and age of the temporary search table Default value 400 000 rows Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Direct Storefront Entry Settings System Administration BACK SAVE Optimize Search Results Threshold based on the rows in temporary search table used by the search engine If the size of the temporary search table crosses this threshold and the Last search time was x minutes ago the temporary search table will be truncated Last Search Time 1 1440 If the size of temporary search table crossed the First threshold and the last search time is more than this value ago the temporary search table will be truncated Last Threshold 20000 3000000 10000 If the size of the temporary search table crosses this threshold the temporary search table will be truncated CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 34 Search engine and cache settings W Last Search Tim
171. a feature or how to perform a task If employees are assisting in the operation of your store you ll find Chapter 3 the Back Office especially useful as a training tool Introduction to the User Guide Brief Overview of User Guide Contents Brief Overview of User Guide Contents The User Guide contains the following e Chapter 1 The Storefront is your logical starting point Explore the sophisticated Sports Place demostore as a consumer or a retailer Brainstorm on how to customize your own storefront using the demostores as starting points Chapter 2 System Administration guides you through store setup covering system and security settings payment options special Storefront features and assignment of access rights The chapter also discusses routine database maintenance e Chapter 3 Back Office concerns everyday management of the store It instructs you in using the seven software Managers to handle daily business such as processing orders keeping track of inventory levels and ordering from suppliers This chapter also instructs you on how to create your online catalog e Chapter 4 explains how to use INTERSHOP s Template Language Extension ILE for template design e Chapter 5 describes how to work with INTERSHOP templates Chapter 6 gives specific examples of TLE and template tasks e Chapter 7 for experienced Perl programmers explains server side scripting tools that extend INTERSHOP functionality
172. abase or spreadsheet you will first need to save it as an ASCII text file Almost all programs can save data in this format When saving take note of the field delimiters and separators used You will need to specify these symbols in the Data Import Tool NOTE If you specify a comma as your field separator and a field value also contains a comma the Data Import Tool will not be able to parse the record properly For this reason you may want to use a separator such as a pipe that is unlikely to be found in field values If the import file contains product attributes the corresponding attribute names must first be created in INTERSHOP 4 See Product Attributes on p 145 for details on creating attributes See Import Product Variations on p 109 for special instructions on importing product variations Step Create the Data Description cfg File The first step is to enter information about the formatting of the data file that you want to import field delimiters field separators record separators and header row This information is saved in a data description file which issued by the Data Import Tool to import your data file The Data Import Tool automatically saves your data description file as a cfg file in the Data Import directory for your store Intershop Data ishome lt storename gt Datalmport 1 Select Data Import Tool from the System Administration Main Menu The Data Import Tool menu page is displayed Fig
173. able Categories 282 DeliveryPositions 285 InventoryPositions 285 InvoicePositions 285 OrderPostions 284 286 SupplierOrderPosition 284 M Main Level Categories Root Catalog 374 Manual Credit Card Handling See Credit Cards Manufacturer Drop down menus adding to 189 Product assigning to 141 Minimum Inventory See Inventory Minimum Order Level See Orders N Net Price 66 68 Numbers Formatted Currency 54 Date 54 Non currency 54 Time 54 O Operator Access rights 88 Customer assigning to 170 Deleting 90 Page 449 Login name changing 89 Password changing 89 Product assigning to 140 Order Member orders reduce click steps in 320 Non member checkout order flow for 321 Storefront process 30 ORDER MANAGER 176 Orders All Orders defined 177 Cancelling 184 Classifications 176 Confirming e mail 171 Confirming fax 171 Deactivating 177 179 184 Deleting 184 Following up 184 Information page 62 Invoice see Invoices Member registration order flow for 318 Minimum assigning to product 142 m customer order amount preferences New Orders defined 176 Open Orders defined 177 Packing slip creating 183 Paper trail 176 Processing new 178 Reports and statistics 204 Tracking 33 Two step reordering 36 Packing Slip See Orders Page Caching 307 Clearing 309 Dynamic templates reconverting to 311 Feature activating 308 Preferences setting 308 SSS activating 309 Templates selecting fo
174. ace using AND and OR including attribute search feature Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 371 Using FORMs in Templates Storefront Templates Product Variation Search You can build a search mask that allows customers to search by variation types as well as product attributes see Search Product Attributes p 370 When variation types are created INTERSHOP also creates search variable TLEs for each type These TLE variables are displayed in the TLE list of the Search Mask template For example suppose your store carries a T shirt using variations for the available colors and sizes INTERSHOP now creates new TLE variables named SearchVariation_COLOR and SearchVariation_SIZE You can place these TLEs on the Search Mask template allowing the customer to search by color and size NOTE You can also enable product variation searches using the Server Side Script SearchVariation pm Contact your Site Administrator for the SearchVariation pm script contained in the SSS folder of the Sports Place demonstration store For more information about using SSS see Advanced Using Server Side Scripting p 407 Imported Product Variation Search Variations imported using the Data Import Tool are also listed on the main product s variation page but these variation types actually become attributes with each variation having a different value This means you have to use attribute TLEs instead of variation TLEs to search for
175. age style name Buttons 2 For example this value might be called Blue 1 Buttons The image path for an example image of this image Buttons2 button_addtobasket button sub style to be displayed in the SDW 1 A friendly name that describes the image style For example this value might be called Red name Banners Banners 5 Page 350 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini Table 75 Key Value Inputs for Banners Buttons and Headers2 sections Key image Value In Example Banners topbanner jpg Description The image path for an example image of this button style to be displayed in the SDW name Banners 2 A friendly name that describes the image style For example this value might be called Blue Banners image Banners2 topbanner jpg The image path for an example image of this banner sub style to be displayed in the SDW name Headers A friendly name that describes the image style For example this value might be called Red Headers image Headers I header_hotdeals jpg The image path for an example image of this header style to be displayed in the SDW name Headers 2 A friendly name that describes the image style For example this value might be called Blue Headers image Headers2 header_hotdeals jpg The image path for an example
176. ager SYSTEM ADMIN manager Figure 162 Select or de select individual Storefront templates for Page Caching Chapter 5 Templates Page Caching Select Templates for Page Caching 4 Click Save If a warning box appears reminding you to refresh static files click OK 5 Click Back to return to the Templates page and repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select templates in other Template groups for Page Caching Reconvert Cached Templates to Dynamic Templates 1 De select template s that have been cached as described in Select Templates for Page Caching p 309 Click Uncheck All to de select all selected templates 2 Click Save Chapter 5 Templates Page 311 Select Templates for Page Caching How are INTERSHOP Templates Grouped How are INTERSHOP Templates Grouped INTERSHOP templates fall into two groups those that concern the look of the store itself and those that are related to correspondence with customers and merchants The template groups are listed below along with a brief description of their function Look and Feel of the Store Storefront Templates Define aspects of the Storefront not dependent on products or categories such as the Navigation Bar or a Registration Page Catalog Templates Used to display product category headings List Templates Used to display the list of products within a category List templates can display Product Attributes such as image etc if desi
177. all the products contained in the original Open the Catalog Manager The Main Level Categories page containing the main categories is displayed Figure 72 Click New Category to create a new main category or select categories until you reach the level where you wish to create a new subcategory then click New Category The New Category entry page is displayed Figure 73 E catalog Manager BACK SAYE New Category Category to Extend Category Name Books Category Description Books on Catalog Template Category basic list Template List basic CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 73 Enter information for a new category Enter the category Name Description and use the drop down menus to select a Catalog and List Template Figure 73 Catalog Templates display a list of category names in the Storefront See Figure 74 List Templates either display a list of product names in the Storefront or if no products or subcategories have been assigned to the category a message saying This category contains no products See Figure 75 INTERSHOP automatically recognizes whether a category contains subcategories or products and uses the catalog and list templates you assign as needed NOTE You can use HTML tags in
178. also contains the following files Figure 171 e preview html allows the SDW user to preview the Template Style they have chosen in a browser window e preview jpg a thumbnail image displayed in Step 3 of the SDW The recommended size for this image is 300X100 pixels or not larger than 400X200 pixels style ini a configuration file that describes the structure of a style and all associated schemes The style ini file is discussed in depth in Setup Information p 343 To view the contents of a template style directory go to the Intershop Data ishome Styles directory on your hard drive and double click on one of the template style directories Create New Template Styles You can create your own template styles for the Store Design Wizard in one of three ways Simple Use an existing SDW template style with your own images This involves replacing the colors and header banner and button images and changing the colors in an existing template style with your color choices and image files Intermediate Replace the images and modify the HTML layout of an existing SDW template style Follow the directions for creating a Simple template style open the template in an HI ML editor and change the layout and TLE variables as desired M Advanced Export an existing INTERSHOP store and create a new template style using the directory structure of an existing SDW template This involves creating a style ini file and organiz
179. ames the Store Homepage template defines how the frames should be split and what pages should be called into them Since the DSE URL bypasses the Store Homepage template it will only display the specified main page any other frames such as the navigation bar will not appear to DSE customers Therefore to keep the frame set when using Direct Storefront Entry you must define an alternate gateway that performs the functions of the Store Homepage template To do so create a User defined template for this purpose See p 59 for information on creating User defined templates The HI ML and TLEs on this gateway will be similar to those on the Store Homepage template In the example below the User defined template defines two frames and calls the Navigation Bar into the bottom frame In the main frame the example also shows that the TLE variable URL_DSEAction is used in lieu of a particular product category or other storefront TLE link in the main frame After you have assigned this User defined template in the DSE Preferences page see p 59 then URL_DSEAction will interpret the action specified in the remote URL and present the appropriate page Thus if the remote URL is htty ntserver mystore storefront EN catalog 1001 then URL_DSEAction will present the category associated with Catalog 1001 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 399 Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Direct Storefront E
180. an be created on either the Registration template or the Change Address template The selected currency is saved as part of the customers data for use as a new default on subsequent login For non member customers the drop down menu can be placed on the Non member Check out template This will change the alternate currency for the current session only Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 363 Using FORMs in Templates Storefront Templates Using FORMs in Templates HTML 5 collect data from web site visitors For example in INTERSHOP a registration page uses a FORM to present fields for customers to enter name address and other information The FORM is then submitted when the or Register Now button is clicked Standard HTML FORMs consist of FORM Tags which open and close the form lt FORM gt lt FORM gt FORM INPUT Elements which describe the input fields on the FORM INPUT elements consist of an INPUT NAME INPUT TYPE and optional information about the input tag s size and maximum length Form Tags INTERSHOP FORMs replace the sometimes lengthy and complicated HTML FORM characteristics with the standard TLE variable Form TagAttributes This means that creating FORMs in INTERSHOP is simpler than in standard HI ML Simply insert FormTagAttributes in one of the Storefront FORMs and INTERSHOP 4 knows which program to trigger and what data manipulation to perform Note that t
181. an example To delete a range check the Delete box by the range and click Save NOTE Ranges must not overlap i e do not define range A 5 and range 4 10 Sample Shipping Calculations A Item Ranges Where the Price Within the Range is Fixed To establish a simple shipping rate table like the following Table 6 A Sample Shipping Cost Table Items Covered Range to Specify Shipping Cost by Range 1 5 3 00 1 4 5 10 5 00 5 9 gt 10 ire ae 9 00 10 11 12 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 197 Shipping Methods Settings Manager 1 Create a basket item based shipping method and add two ranges as described in Edit a Shipping Method on p 196 2 In General Shipping Cost Calculation enter 9 00 0 00 number of items in the basket 3 In the Range fields enter 0 to 5 3 00 0 00 number of items in the basket 5 to 10 5 00 0 00 number of items in the basket 4 Click Save Figure 127 shows the completed page EN Settings Manager BACK SAVE DELETE ADD RANGE SET UP SHIPPING METHOD Edit Shipping Method Name Item based Shipping B Language English 1D Calculation Model Basket Items Tax Classes Non taxable ium No of Items in 1 Shipping Cost Calculation net 9 00 the Basket 2 Delete Range Shipping Cost Calculation net No of Items in and 5 53 00 heBas
182. anager As with product attributes once the Types and Values have been created INTERSHOP 4 generates the product variation TLE variables Table 14 Product Variation TLE Variables TLE Variable lsProductVariation Description Flag set to I if the product has variations 0 if not Used with IF statement and LOOP statements loop over variations Available Templates All templates except Catalog templates ProductVariation A loop variable that iterates over all variations for a product Product templates Product basic IsVariation_ TypeName Flag set to if the variation has the type TypeName TypeName is replaced by all the types created in the Product Manager Used with EF statement Storefront and Product templates VariationType_ TypeName Name given to the variation Type defined in the Product Manager TypeName is replaced by all the types created in the Product Manager i e VariationType_COLOR Loop over variations Storefront and Product templates VariationValue_ TypeName Name given to the variation Value defined in the Product Manager TypeName is replaced by one of the variation types created in the Product Manager i e VariationValue_COLOR Red Storefront and Product templates Yariation Value_ TypeName _ CHECKED Used when displaying product variations with a checkbox on product page the Type Name that
183. appears reading No products have fallen below minimum quantity levels It is unnecessary to order products 3 Click a Supplier name to get the Stock Order Suggestion Figure 103 4 Edit the suggested order To remove a product from the Stock Order Suggestion deactivate the appropriate checkbox on the left side of the page To adjust the recommended amount of product ordered change the Qty field NOTE To calculate a purchase order quantity for a product the Purchasing Manager takes the current inventory level subtracts the amount of product reserved ordered by customers in the Storefront but not yet shipped and compares the sum with the minimum inventory level mTA4 Purchasing Manager BACK Supplier List for Suggested Purchase Orders Supplier Street City Zip code Phone Gagets amp Gizmos 123 MainSt Anyville 12345 123 555 0977 Supplier Supplier Street Supplier City Supplier Zip Code Supplier Phone 1 CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 103 Stock order suggestions in the Purchasing Manager 5 To create a purchase order from the suggested order follow the steps in Create a Purchase Order Page 166 Chapter 3 The Back Office Purchasing Manager Create a Purchase Order Create a Purchase Order 2 Follow the procedure in Request Stock Order Suggestions on p 166 Cl
184. appears within the brackets will be automatically selected at the Storefront Storefront and Product templates VariationValue_ TypeName JD The submitted variation s Product ID number Storefront and Product templates VariationValue_ TypeName _ SELECTED Used when displaying product variations with a select box on product page the Type Name that appears within the brackets will be automatically selected at the Storefront Storefront and Product templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 235 Product Related TLE Variables Bookmark Product TLE Variables TLE Variables INTERSHOP 4 Storefronts can include a built in bookmark function allowing customers to tag products they don t want to purchase yet but would like to bookmark to look at again later See Bookmarks Template p 324 for more information on creating bookmark capabilities Table 15 Product Bookmark TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Lists all bookmarks for current Bookmarks registered customer Used in LOOP Storefront template Bookmarks statement CountBookmarks Murbei e All templates except Print templates bookmark list URL_AddBookmark Creates a link that adds a product to the bookmark list All templates except Print templates HURL_RemoveAllBookmarks Creates a link that removes all products from bookmark list All templates except Prin
185. apter 3 The Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional Managing Profiles from the Back Office Overview Profile Template Design How the profile feature appears to customers in the storefront depends on the Profile Templates design Every INTERSHOP store comes complete with three predefined profile templates corresponding to three Storefront pages A welcome page for customers who use the profile service for the first time A greeting page that gives the customer the options of activating and viewing their profile personal profile page where the customer selects or edits the items to be included in his her personal profile You can simply modify these predefined templates to suit your store Or with more advanced HTML design techniques your stores options are as unlimited as your imagination For details concerning the profile templates and how to modify them for your store see Activating the Profile on p 394 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 219 CHAPTER 4 Template Language Extension t 2 INTERSHOP DS Introduction to TLE Introduction to TLE INTERSHOP 4 s Template Language Extension TLE overcomes the limitations of standard HTML enabling your Web storefront pages to retrieve process and display data dynamically Web sites based on standard HTML can only send out static Web pages with fixed content so site designers have to create and store a separate Web page for every possible displa
186. ar messages To do so 1 Log on as System Administrator 2 From the System Administration Main Menu select Storefront Message Templates List The editable error messages are listed with a brief description of each Figure 38 Storefront Message Templates List Catalog Category not found The category number entered for DSE not found in database Basket Order Product Basket locked Attempt to update a locked basket Customer Deactivated Order processing is not possible for deactivated customers Product not available Product does not exist in the database Basket not found Basket cannot be found Order not found Order cannot be found Order creation failed The create order process failed for unknown reason Only 0 quantity positions in basket The basket contains only positions with quantity 0 Invalid tax area The submitted value is not an valid tax area code Impossible ordering as Anonymous It is not possible to order as Anonymous Figure 38 Editable Storefront Error Messages Templates partial list Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Storefront Message Templates List 3 Select the name of a message to edit The edit message page is displayed Figure 39 2 System Administration BACK SAVE DELETE HELP Edit Storefront Messages Message Category not found Description category number entered for DSE not found in database Default Message
187. ariation This price will not fluctuate with the main product price it remains fixed until the rule is edited or removed Apply Variation Rules Page 158 Access the Variation Create and Edit Rules page Figure 96 Do this either by creating a new variation set see Assign Types and Values to Create Variations on page 153 or by clicking the Rules button on a page of already created variations Figure 95 The Variation Create and Edit Rules page appears including any rules already applied to this set Figure 96 To define a rule for any single product variation Select a value from each of the Type drop down menus Selecta rule from the Name of Rule drop down menu e fusing an Additional Price or Fixed Price rule enter the monetary amount you want to apply in the Price field Click the Add Rule button Repeat for each variation in the set to which you wish to apply rules After all rules are defined click Apply Rules at the top of the page The Product Variations page appears Figure 95 reflecting your changes Any variations that had the Invalid Variation Rule applied will no longer be listed Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Delete Products from the Database lt Product Manager J BACK APPLY RULES VARIATION Create and Edit Rules 1008 Commuter Stereo Rule ID sessions Color Name of Rule Pr
188. as already been made Figure 44 Payment Method Settings page Step 1 Enable Payment Methods for All Customers First decide which payment methods you want all customers to see when they select a payment method in the drop down menu on the Basket page Figure 45 Enabling universal payment methods is the simplest and most important step in setting up the payment scheme for most merchants Click Save Chapter 2 System Administration Select the Payment Method Settings link on the System Administration Main Menu The Payment Method Settings page is displayed Figure 44 Select the Enabled checkbox for the methods you want to make available to all customers A method must be enabled before any of the other fields in the row can be checked Page 77 Use the Payment Method Settings Page Payment Method Settings 4 A dialog box appears Click OK 5 Check the Password Required box for any payment method where you want to require that customers enter their password before using the method Do not require a password if you want to offer a payment method to non member customers see Step 3 below NINTN x amp v HEN TRAINING STORE checkout Address information Billing John Doe Software Programmer 123 Main Street Providence Rhode Island 44444 USA Order summary Basket Number Tax 0 00 UPS Shipping US 2nd
189. asket 10354 gt lt A gt Removes Aiwa Blaster from basket System Administrator determines whether clicking this link leads to a display of the basket page or not See Remain on Current Page after Adding Removing Product p 60 and Notify Shoppers of Basket Status p 376 for more detail All templates except Print and Mail templates Table 26 URL Bookmark TLE Variables TLE Variable URL_AddBookmark Description Creates a link that adds a product to the bookmark Available Templates All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_RemoveAllBookmarks Creates a link that removes all products from bookmark list All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_RemoveBookmark Creates a link that removes current product from bookmark list All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_ViewBookmarks Creates a link that displays the bookmark list All templates except Print and Mail templates Table 27 URL Catalog List Variables TLE Variable URL_CachedCatalog Description URL for the main catalog Use only if the related catalog is cached Can also be used with an appended catalog ID parameter to specify a subcatalog listing Example lt A HREF http URL_CachedCatalog 218 gt Available Templates All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_Catalog Creates a link that displays the store s main categories 1
190. asket will display Set in System P Preferences List of previous basket order NoOfAvailableltems No of items in a previous basket that are still available Storefront templates only Service View a previous basket order No of items in a previous basket that Storefront templates only Service NU ned have new prices View a previous basket order In the previous basket item loop NotAvailable boolean the item is not available ina ids deleted hidden shelved PrevBasketComment Comment of the previous basket order View a previous basket order Date when the previous basket was Ya Storefront templates only Service PrevBasketDate created Used only in the Previous List of View previous basket Basket template Storefront templates only Service PrevBasketNo No of the previous basket List of View a previous basket order Number of baskets displayed in the Previous Baskets list Can be used in Storefront templates only Service LOOP statement in the Previous Basket View a previous basket template PrevBasketDate The creation date of a previous basket List of View a previous basket Lists previous baskets Can be used in Storefront templates only Service PrevBaskets LOOP statement on the Previous bcn oat pe
191. asses Create and edit tax classes Tax Matrix Configure tax matrix CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 129 Tax Settings Menu page 2 Click on Tax Jurisdictions Figure 130 CX Settings Manager BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST DELETE SET UP TAXES Tax Jurisdictions New Value Bay Areal California Spain US outside California CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 130 Create and Edit Tax Jurisdictions 3 Type your entry in the New Value field Example Bay Area 4 Click Add to List The new entry now appears in the list box 5 To make additional entries repeat steps 3 and 4 6 Click Back when done Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 201 Taxes Settings Manager Delete a Tax Jurisdiction 1 Select Set Up Taxes from the Settings Manager Main Menu The Tax Settings Menu page is displayed Figure 129 2 Click on Tax Jurisdictions Figure 130 3 Select the entry you wish to delete from the list box so that it shows in the New Value field 4 Click Delete and click OK when prompted 5 The entry no longer appears in the drop down menu 6 Click Save 7 Click Back when
192. ast six characters and cannot contain spaces Be sure to specify this for your customers on the Registration page in the Storefront No two customers can have the same identity set All columns in the identity set must be defined and values may not consist only of spaces or be empty Page 107 Rules for Mapping Data Classes Data Import Product Data Import Rules The product number must be mapped General rule for importing Sub Products Sub products or product variations are imported not as product variations but as attributes and can never be defined as product variations or have variation rules applied to them Importing product data will not affect the way product variations created in the back office are handled See Import Product Variations on p 109 for more information The catalog to which a product is assigned identified by Catalog Number or Catalog Name where Catalog Number overwrites Catalog Name must exist in the back office prior to import and be an End level product category not a Main level category The values you want to import for supplier tax class unit and product template of a product must exist in the database prior to import The Discount for a product must also already exist in the database and be unique Ifthe manufacturer of a product is specified in the data import file the Import Tool will assign the product to the manufacturer if it exists in INTERSHOP or c
193. ata Import Tool Menu page The Job Control page is displayed Figure 61 INTERSHOP Store Back Office BACK STATUS CANCEL START HELP DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 4 Job Control Data Description File CHOOSE FILE Data File CHOOSE FILE Mapping File CHOOSE FILE CHOOSE FILE product map products map Action validate and Import Use drop down menus to load existing data Database User description and mapping files Database Password C validate C Import Replacement Option Update C Replace C Ignore Start Import At Row Delete Data File After Import 7 Run in Background Clear Page Cache After Import 7 Figure 68 Jump to Step 4 Job Control page to load existing files Use the drop down menus to select the data description file data file and mapping file you want to use for importing your data Fill in the sections on the Job Control page following the instructions in Step 4 Job Control Import Mode and Condition on p 100 Click Start The Upload Data File page is displayed Figure 58 Rules for Mapping Data Classes Certain rules must be followed when importing different data classes This section outlines the rules specific to the customer product and catalog data classes Customer Data Import Rules Chapter 2 System Administration The customer number must be mapped Customer passwords must be at le
194. atabase Member Registration Register as a New Member from the Basket Page Find a product and click the Add to Basket button The basket page is displayed with three ordering options Figure 7 2 Select the option Become a member The membership registration form is displayed Figure 9 3 Fill out the form Login Name Password Password confirmation State Province Zip Postal Cod Country Tax jurisdiction Phone number Fax number E mail address Figure 9 Member registration form in Sports Place 4 Click Continue A registration welcome page is displayed with links back to other parts of the store Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 27 Register as a New Member from the Navigation Bar Sports Place for Members Register as a New Member from the Navigation Bar Customers can become members at any time by clicking the Register button in the navigation bar Click the My Account button in the Navigation bar If you are anonymous links are displayed for establishing a membership or logging in with an existing member name Click the Register link The member registration form appears As with all INTERSHOP pages the form is fully customizable Fill out the form as described in steps 3 4 in Register as a New Member from the Basket Page on p 27 Cookies A Personal Touch Most Web browsers now support a user identification string
195. ate Language Extension TLE Variables Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Table 41 Input TLE Variables TLE Variable Description FORM TLE Variables Available Templates Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustLoginName Input ie M Login nan member Data Shipping Address Value CustLoginName RM Registration Input field for billing address full name Brem templates Logins Non Name_CustNamel _ member Data Shipping Address Value CustNamel un Registration Input field for billing address company Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustName2 name field member Data Shipping Address Value CustName 2 Registration Input field for billing address Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustName3 additional name field member Data Shipping Address Value CustName3 Registration Input field for billing address phone Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustPhone number member Data Shipping Address Value CustPhone Registration Input field for billing address second Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustPhone2 phone number member Data Shipping Address Value CustPhone Registration m Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustState Input nas stat member Data Shipping Address Value CustState m Registration m Storefront templates Login Non Name_CustStreet liput Dai TS address gt DM member Data Shippin
196. ate New Template Styles Advanced Template Style This section is for advanced INTERSHOP users who have already created a fully functional INTERSHOP store A familiarity with the SDW template style directory structure is assumed Chapter 5 Templates Export an INTERSHOP Store Template Set to your hard drive Figure 172 shows the directory structure of an exported INTERSHOP store The files and folders in this directory must be renamed and reorganized to match the directory structure of a SDW template style StoreClosed html StoreE ror html StoreNotAccessible html Figure 172 Directory Structure of an exported INTERSHOP store Rename the static folder StaticFiles and place the loose default files Blank StoreClosed StoreError StoreNotAccessible in the folder These are the same files that are in the StaticFiles folder of a SDW template style Edit the template directory folders and filenames following the guidelines below e File extensions for all files must be changed from htm to htm Delete all files except default html from the Product Templates folder The SDW template style set only uses the default html product template Any additional product templates must be removed from the folder e Delete all files except default html and rootl html from the Catalog Templates folder e Delete all files except default html from the List folder Page 3
197. ated checkbox will be selected You can activate or de activate the profile at any time however this will not disable the customer s ability to activate or de activate profiles The only way to disable profiles is in System Administration System Preferences on page 48 4 If you wish to edit the customer s profile click Define Profile The Assign Profile to Customer page is displayed with the customer s current Profile settings Figure 148 f Customer Manager BACK SAVE Assign Profile to Customer Profile settings for Jacques Beulieu Assigned Items Age Adult Profile Classes Gender Profile Items Gender Female CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 148 Assign Profile to Customer 5 To delete an item from the customer s profile select it from the Assigned Items in the top of the page Click Delete button Pause until the item disappears from the scroll window and then click Save 6 To add an item to the customer profile select its profile class from the pull down menu Then select the item from the profile items scroll window Click Add button Pause until the item appears in the Assigned items window Click Save 7 Click Back to return to the Customer Details page The profile information at the bottom of the page reflects your modifications Page 218 Ch
198. ates whether the invoice has been paid and adjusts the customer s account accordingly The Database Access Functions The following functions are used to execute any kind of SOL statement call a stored procedure and retrieve the results from the Sybase Adaptive Server XI on which INTERSHOP runs There can only be one active database connection to the database at a given time so be sure all connections are closed before initiating a connection When making a database call it is important that you complete the initial action e g fetch data as executing a SOL statement while the process is running causes errors All database functions return 1 if the command was successful or 0 if any error occurred Table 120 DBConnect Connect to the current store database Example result DBConnect lt databasename gt INPUT database name Name of database attached to store OUTPUT Comment The result returns the connect status successful or not NOTE The name and the password of the database user are defined by the Site Administrator as described in the Site Administrator s Guide Table 121 DBDoSQL Execute any type of SQL statement requires an open database connection Example DBDoSQL sql_statement INPUT sql A string containing an SQL statement OUTPUT Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 429 The Database Access Functions The Script
199. atible with HIML authoring tools such as FrontPage which simplify template creation even further see HTML Authoring Tools to Edit Templates p 304 The INTERSHOP demo stores use both tables and frames in their design and we recommend that you understand how to use these standard HTML features before making significant changes to the INTERSHOP template set Dozens of publications and free online materials are available for learning more about HIML Choose an INTERSHOP Demo Store INTERSHOP products are shipped with three sample demonstration stores as discussed in Explore the Storefront p 13 The Training Store Figure 153 is designed to teach template functionality We recommend using it as your jumping off point Training Store includes e Extensive comments in the HIML explain what s going on in the code Help links in the storefront explain the function and use of each page e Navigational tips in the storefront explain the templates used For example when looking at a list of products in the Training Store you see that the list is based on the template called List Enhanced which contains an embedded Add to Basket function and inventory status Training Store makes it easy to understand how changes in the templates affect the Storefront and is the best tool for learning INTERSHOP template design quickly and easily login hot deals cat 919g hb 7 o ws basket Welcome to the Training Store where you ll fin
200. attribute types Up to 255 characters Attributes of this data type have a one line entry box that holds up to 255 characters String is a more efficient data type than Text and should be chosen whenever possible to enhance storefront performance String Unlimited characters A minimum of 2K is assigned in the database for each attribute value of Text data type Text even if only one character is actually entered Choose Text only when the attribute value is likely to exceed 255 characters in length Attributes of this data type have a scrolling text box entry field Edit or Delete Catalog Attribute Names Click Create and Edit Attributes on the Catalog Attribute Values page The Create and Edit Catalog Attributes page is displayed Figure 79 Select the attribute name in the Attributes list box The name of the selected attribute automatically appears in the Attribute Name entry field Edit the attribute name and click Save or click Delete to delete the selected attribute Deleting or changing the name of a catalog attribute changes or deletes the TLE variable associated with the catalog attribute Ra PI IE CAUTION Changing or deleting attributes currently being used by templates will cause the affected templates to misdisplay until updated Update affected templates with new catalog attribute TLEs 4 Click Back to return to the Catalog Attribute Values page Chapter 3
201. ax for products and or shipping in the alternate currency All templates Alt_BasketTotalTax Total tax charged for the items in the basket any tax on shipping costs in the alternate currency All templates Alt_OrderSubTotal Price of all products on order less discounts shipping costs in the alternate currency Storefront Print and Mail templates Alt_OrderTotalPrice Price of all products on order less discounts shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping Displayed in the alternate currency Storefront Print and Mail templates Alt_OrderTotalTax Total tax charged for the items on order any tax on shipping costs Displayed in the alternate currency Storefront Print and Mail templates Page 239 Calculation TLE Variables Page 240 Table 19 Alternate Currency TLEs TLE Variable Alt_SupplierOrderSubTotal Description Price of all products on supplier purchase order less discounts shipping costs Displayed in the alternate currency TLE Variables Available Templates Print template Purchase Order Alt_SupplierOrderTotalPrice Price of all products on supplier purchase order less discounts shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping Displayed in the alternate currency Print template Purchase Order Alt_SupplierOrderTotalTax Total tax charged for the items on supplier purchase order an
202. ax of the previous basket Storefront templates only Service order View a previous basket order Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Table 21 Previous Basket TLE Variables Service TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates 23 Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order mE Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order vers Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order ORE Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service 7E Preyshippingtipcode basket order View a previous basket order di Dus Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service PrevShippingtity basket order View a previous basket order DE Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service PrevShippingCeuntry basket order View a previous basket order T Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Ss at Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service 7E Pre
203. ble Templates BasketNo Basket ID assigned by the system All templates Current currency set in System CurrencySymbol TE All templates except Print templates Administration DNSname NIE All templates except Print templates www server net Message set in Storefront template Store GenericMessage Message set automatically in case of Storefront template Store Message error Flag set to if the previous action Wd Storefront template HasLanguageChange was a storefront language change 0 Hager if not Used with IF statement pus page lsInBasket Boolean value specifying if the product Storefront Product and has already been added to the basket List templates lsNewSession Flag set to I if new storefront session has been started 0 if not Used with IF statement See also Storefront template Store Homepage SessionHasExpired Flag set to I if password is lsPasswordRequired required 0 if not Used with EF All templates except Print templates statement OrderComment an Order Storefront Mail and Print templates Comment box Storefront Bookmarks Hot Deal NoOfltemsInBasket The number of products in a basket Search Results List basic and The legal value can be 0 Product basic templates PlacedOrderNo Previous order number ID Storefront Mail and Print templates TEREMOTE ADDR CGI environment var
204. bles Preview your design in progress Install a plain vanilla default template design NOTE See Create a User Defined TLE p 267 for information on using New TLE Figure 155 shows the commands for all of the Template Editor tools discussed below System Administration BACK SAVE AVAILABLE TLEs PREVIEW IN BROWSER IMPORT EXPORT REYERT TO DEFAULT TEMPLATES Catalog Templates Edit Editor Tools English Name Category default Description The default catalog template HTML lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt INTERSHOP Storefront lt TITLE gt Editor Window lt HEAD gt lt BODY BGCOLOR BGColor TEXT FontColorText LINK FontColorLink VLINK FontColorviewedLink gt lt CENTER gt lt TABLE CELLPADDING 0 CELLSPACING 0 BORDER 0 gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN CENTER gt lt IMG SRC StoreImagePath SiteImages topbanner jpg ALT topbanner gt lt TD gt lt T lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN CENTER gt lt IMG SRC StorelmagePath Sitelmages header_catalogbrowser gif ALT catalogbro lt TR gt lt TD gt 8nbsp lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt LOOP Categories lt TR gt lt TD gt lt A HREF http URL_Category gt CategoryName lt A gt IF CategoryDescription lt FONT SIZE 1 gt lt BR gt lt I gt CategoryDescription lt I gt lt FONT gt ENDIF lt BR gt 8nbsp lt TD gt lt TR gt ENDLOOP lt TABLE gt lt CENTER gt CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER
205. but most are intuitively named and simple to understand Whenever you are working on a particular template you can click Available TLEs on the command bar to bring up the ILE Assistant Figure 157 CLOSE NEW TLE INTERSHOP 2 http 77spitfire intershop com cgi bin sportsplace admin 1106578178 5e E3 INTERSHOP CLOSE SAVE HELP TEMPLATES Available TLEs TEMPLATES Available TLEs Edit Template variables Color This value will be used for previewing the product attribute Color Alt_BasketSubTotal B Example Alt_BasketTotalPrice IF Color Alt_BasketTotalTax lt TR gt lt TD gt Color lt TD gt lt TD gt Color lt TD gt lt TR gt N Alt_CurrencySymbol ENDIF Alt_CustCreditBalance Preview content Alt_CustStoreCredit Alt_ProductPrice Alt_ProductSubTotal Alt_ProductTotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalTax Alt_ShippingPrice Alt_ShippingSubTotal Alt_ShippingTotalPrice Alt_ShippingTotalTax AvailabilityString BasketNo BasketSubTotal BasketTotalPrice BasketTotalTax CountBookmarks CurrencySymbol CurrentDate CurrentDay CurrentHour CurrentMinute z Figure 157 Snapshot of the TLE Assistant The TLE Assistant provides Page 302 A TLE list containing the TLE variables and statements permitted in that template A TLE editor click on any variable in the TLE list to call up the explanation window containing Definition of the TLE variable e
206. but not all products in a category to a profile item use the Product Manager as described in Link Profile Items Directly to Products on page 214 1 Starting from the Catalog Manager Main Level Categories page click on category and subcategory names until you reach the category to which you want to link profile items Under Category Profile on the bottom left of the page are two columns the left column lists all the profile classes that the System Administrator has created the right column lists any profile items that have been assigned to the category if any Figure 141 INTERSH Mert Manager BACK SAVE NEW CATEGORY MOVE CATEGORY SORT CATEGORIES CATALOG ATTRIBUTE VALUES ASSIGN PROFILE DELETE HELP Mid Level Categories Category ID 220 Category Path Sports Category Name Sports Category Description Example of a Catalog enhanced Template Catalog Template Category enhanced Equipment Example of a list enhanced Template Sports Clothing Example of a List basic Template a list has no sub categories Category Profile INVENTORY manager CUSTOMER manager SETTINGS manager PURCHASING manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager SYSTEM ADMIN manager Figure 141 Available profile classes in the Catalog Manager Chapter 3 The Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional Managing Profiles from the Back Office 2
207. calculation will not be accurate since wholesale prices are always entered on a Net basis without tax while Gross retail prices include tax Comment If you provide a free text entry field at the Storefront and a customer enters text there that text will appear in this box gt Order Manager BACK SAVE NEW INVOICE NEW PACKING SLIP PRINT PREVIEW CANCEL Customer Order Details John Doe Software Programmer Print Template English Order confirmation default 123 Main Street Providence Rhode Island 44444 Payment USA Method Operator online z Deactivate Charge to Account UPS US 2nd Day Air treated on 06 18 99 Payment Terms 25 ss 55 14 90 Order No 990618 1005 O I PS Productno Qty Product Price ea Total Price 1 Leather Steering Wheel Cover 50 00 50 00 Color Fire Engine Red Model 1960 70 Classics 1002 1 Sub total 50 00 Tax 0 00 Total 50 00 Wholesale Price 15 00 Profit 20 10 Profit by 57 26 96 Comment Figure 112 A Customer Order Details page before an invoice or packing slip Print an Order Confirmation Optional Page 180 Some merchants print order confirmations to mail to customers others print them for internal use and record keeping If you want to use printed order confirmations 1 Open the Customer Order Details page Figure 112 and make any necessary edits as described above Don t f
208. called a cookie by Netscape that the Web server stores on the customer s computer If you choose to enable the feature in your INTERSHOP store member registration triggers the passing of the cookie so your store automatically recognizes the customer at subsequent logins Use the cookie feature to create a one on one relationship with your customers and to make your customers online shopping experience feel friendly and personal Log In as a Return Member Returning members may be recognized by a cookie but if not they can also identify themselves by login name and password to activate their membership Page 28 Login on the splash screen initially or click the My Account button in the navigation bar or choose Login from the Shopping Basket The login panel is displayed Enter your Membership Name and Password and click Log in If you entered the information correctly a welcome page with your name and address is displayed Click any of the links on the welcome page or use the navigation bar to continue shopping Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Members Use a Wish List Use a Wish List All products in Sports Place include a Wish List link that enables shoppers to keep track of products they like but don t yet want to add to the shopping basket All shoppers keep their bookmarks while in the store shoppers that give membership registration information will retain their bookmarks inde
209. cept Flat Rate click Add range if you want to define ranges of items weights or basket prices Repeat to create additional ranges See Understanding Ranges on p 197 Click Save Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Shipping Methods Understanding Ranges A range consists of the lower bound and everything up to but not including the upper bound Therefore if Range A 0 10 lbs 5 00 Range 10 20 lbs 8 00 Then a 10 b package would cost 8 00 to ship Decimals can also be used to fine tune For example if Range A 0 00 10 01 lbs 5 00 Range B 10 01 20 00 lbs 8 00 Then a 10 00 Ib package would cost 5 00 to ship NOTE The number of decimal places the system recognizes is determined in Regional Preferences see the Site Administration Guide for details If you enter a number with more decimal places than the setting allows the system rounds the number in the database Specify ranges based on the Regional Preferences setting if necessary The format of the range fields depends on the calculation model e Basket Items Integer Basket Price Currency e Basket Weight Float Any condition not covered by the range is considered part of the General Shipping Cost Calculation For example if range A is 0 10 lbs and range is 10 20 Ibs then anything weighing 20 lbs or over is handled by the general shipping calculation See Figure 127 on p 198 for
210. ces page Chapter 2 System Administration Page 65 Currency Preferences Set General Preferences Currency Preferences Merchants can activate any number of currencies allowing customers to view product service and basket pages with both the main store currency and alternate currencies Merchants can view the alternate currencies on certain print templates As in earlier versions INTERSHOP uses a main store currency This is the only currency used in the back office and is the currency customers see at the Storefront The store currency is no longer set in the Regional Preferences section of System Administration To implement alternate currencies the System Administrator must perform the following steps BI Configure Multiple Currencies See Configure Multiple Currencies on p 67 Bi Edit templates to enable alternate currency display See Alternate Currency Implementation on p 363 Edit templates to allow customers to change the displayed currency See Create a Drop down Menu to Change the Alternate Currency on p 363 NOTE The alternate currency in provided for display purposes only Purchases are always processed and paid in the default store currency The Currency Preferences page is also used to Bi Set price display for the store to net or gross See Set Price Display Model to Net or Gross on p 68 for additional details Page 66 Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Currency Prefere
211. changed to unsorted Import Product Variations CAUTION The Data Import Tool does not support variations created by the Product Manager Therefore we strongly recommend that you only import product variations if you have not and will not use the Product Manager to create variations What are Product Variations Variations allow one product in an INTERSHOP store to have multiple configurations For example a t shirt might have two colors and three sizes When created in INTERSHOP using the Product Manager these different values of colors and size become variation type values Every variation of a main product can be listed on a single product page at the storefront In the back office the variations are listed together on a page accessed from the main product page How are Product Variations Affected by the Import Process Variations imported using the Data Import Tool are also listed on the main product s variation page and are managed the same as internally created variations However these variation types actually become attributes and each variation has different attribute values Therefore you must use attribute TLEs instead of variation TLEs to search for imported variations at the storefront and you must edit product templates so imported variations display on one storefront page The following sections describe the how to prepare your data import file if you are importing variations using
212. chemes defined for your template style If you create or delete folders in the directory structure you must edit the style ini file to reflect these changes Edit the files in the StaticFiles folder The files in the StaticFiles contain messages that users can edit to suit the needs of their individual store By default there are four static files in this folder Blank Store Closed Store Error and Store Not Accessible If your template style requires additional static pages place them in this folder and edit the style ini file to reflect the change in directory structure Add any User defined Templates your template style uses to the Ut folder inside the Templates directory Adding User defined templates to your template style is optional Define the color scheme s in the style ini file In the Color Schemes section of the style ini file enter the HTML color codes for each scheme Replace the information in the info section of the style ini file with information for your store See Info Section of the Style ini File p 343 for more information Make additional changes to the style ini file as needed Ifyou did not rename your banner button and header images files you must edit the style ini file with the filenames of your images Ifyou use custom TLE variables in your template style you must map the variables in the CustomTLE and Custom TLE variabl
213. ckout Templates Non Member Data and Checkout Non Member ordering begins with the Non Member Data Form The System Administrator must enable non member checkout under Order preferences in System Administration Use the URL_NonMemberCheckout TLE variable to link Non member checkout to a Basket template Store Design Wizard layouts do this automatically Non Member Order from Basket page BASKET NON MEMBER T ORDER NON MEMBER DATA FORM rg ORDER INFORMATION _ORDER INFORMATION gt L 23 Product Payment Subtotal ___ _ L Shipping Credit Card ORDER CONFIRMATION Figure 166 Checkout process for non members Notice that for non members registration and checkout are compressed into a single template the Non Member Data Form can include all contact and payment information on a single page Error Messages Embedded in Registration Templates Normally storefront error messages are automatically triggered and displayed by the Store Message Template as described on p 324 The types of messages and their content are described in Storefront Message Templates List p 70 In three templates the Registration Member Data Form the Non Member Data Form and the Shipping Address form you have the option of displaying certain error messages on the form
214. code below is inserted in between the URL_AddToBasket variable and completes the add to basket link The necessary JavaScript includes the TARGET line TOP 7 where TOP is the name of the primary frame in our sample store All Store Home page templates provided by the Store Design Wizard use this same naming convention Sample Product Default Template with JavaScript lt HT Hi BO GI lt CE lt TITLE gt INTERSHOP Storefront lt TITLE gt H L gt AD gt EAD gt DY BGCOLOR BGColor TEXT FontColorText K FontColorLink VLINK FontColorViewedLink gt TER gt lt TABLE WIDTH 540 BORDER 0 CELLPADDING 0 CEL LSPACING 0 gt XTR TD IMG SRC StoreImagePath SiteImages top banner jpg ALT topbanner gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt IMG SRC StoreImagePath SiteImages hea TD gt der productexplorer jpg ALT productexplorer lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD gt nbsp lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN CENTER gt lt P gt lt utt lt A 4P sel IM but BOR P HREF http URL_RemoveF romBasket gt lt IMG SRC StoreImagePath SiteImages on_removefrombasket jpg ALT Remove from basket BORDER 0 gt lt A gt HREF http URL_AddToBasket TARGET TOP Reference ONCLICK self parent crosswindow
215. correct 6 Click Cancel if you want to reverse the transaction just completed The Stock Entry page reappears with all fields filled in The Quantity added to inventory is now subtracted and the Comments field reads Delete inventory transaction lt x gt 7 Click Save to finish reversing the transaction A fresh transaction report appears 8 Click Back if this information is correct E 5 Inventory Manager BACK ENTER STOCK CANCEL Inventory Transaction Detail Transaction no 1001 Productno 10328 Date 05 28 99 Stock Level 0 Operator Administrator Inventory Adjustment Actual inventory of 10328 In Inventory 50 Ordered 49 Reserved 4 CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN manager Figure 100 The Inventory Transaction Detail page Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 163 Use Inventory Transactions Inventory Manager Use Inventory Transactions The Search Transactions command on the Search Inventory page calls up a list of inventory transactions changes in stock levels that have been made either automatically or manually Search Review or Cancel Inventory Transaction 1 On the Search Inventory page Figure 97 fill in any search parameters such as date range or leave search fields blank to find all transactions
216. cription Available Templates CurrentOperator tne HUNE Print templates only report Number of days before a bill becomes due Variable value drawn from Credit CustCreditPeriod Length set in System Administration gt Print templates Invoice Customer Customers or on an individual customer data page CustCreditCard Type of credit card Visa MasterCard Print template Customer Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 259 Back Office TLE Variables TLE Variables Table 38 Packing Slip Print Out TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates CurrentOperator The operator printing the packing slip Print templates only Lists all products on current packing slip Used in LOOP statement Print template Packing slip Date when the latest packing slip for Storefront template Service List of an order was created previous order LastUpdateDate Dat ATES eS aslast Print template Customer updated hag i lates Credit Card Data PackingSlipNo Packing slip number Print templates Credit Cafd Data Packing slip Table 39 Purchase Order Print Out TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates ing i i Credit Card D CreationByOperator Operator to whom processing is Print templates Credit Card Data assigned Purchase Order CreationDate Date when the order was created Mail and Print templates
217. ct Variation Matrix Figure 95 Choose one variation as the default by selecting the D radio button This will be the first variation displayed in the Storefront Selecting the H checkbox will display the variation in the Hot Deals section and selecting the Visible in Storefront checkbox will make the variation visible in the storefront to make the variation invisible deselect Visible in Storefront Edit the wholesale or retail price weight or stock minimum information as needed for each variation Click on the In Stock link to adjust the inventory level See Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut on page 144 Click Save to save any changes Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 155 Product Variations vx Product Manager BACK SAVE VARIATION TYPES VARIATION VALUES DEFINE RULES Product Manager HELP Product Variation Matrix Product Leather Steering Wheel Cover Product No 1002 Number of Variations 15 Color Model D H Visiblein Wholesale Retail Weight Inventory Stock Attributes Storefront Price Price Fire Engine 1 Red i960 0 15 00 50 00 ooo fso 17 Edit Classics Fire Engine 1002 Red 1970 80 Gas 2 815 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit Guzzlers 1002 Fire Engine faa m Cars 2 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit 1002 Fire Engine 12 Red Minivans n K 15 00 50 00 0 00 30 20 Edit
218. ctTotalPrice HAlt_ProductTotalTax AvailabilityString DNSname DiscountName FormTagAttributes FormlagAttributesSSL lsinBasket lsProductVariation TEURL ActivateProfile URL_AddBookmark URL_AddToBasket HURL_BasketView URL_CachedCatalog URL_CachedProductView URL_CachedUserTemplate URL_Catalog URL_ChangeAddress EURL_ChangeCurrency URL_ChangeLanguage Table 51 lists TLEs used on Bookmark template with loop Bookmarks Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements Table 51 Bookmarks Template LOOP Statements Bookmarks template with Bookmarks ltemNo ManufacturerName ManufacturerNo MinOrderLevel NoOfltemsInBasket TEOnOrderProducts ProductDescription ProductName ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice ProductSubTotal ProductlaxAmount ProductlaxClass ProductlotalPrice ProductTotallax ProductWeight Protocol SearchFormTagAttributes SearchFormlagAttributesSSL SessionID StockLevel StockLevelReserved StorelmagePath URL_ChangePassword TEURL ChangePaymentMethod URL_DeactivateProfile URL_EditProfile HURL_HotDeals EURL_Login URL_NewProfile URL_NewStoreFrontSession HURL_PlaceOrder URL_PrevBasketList HURL_PrevOrderList HURL_ProductView URL_Register HURL_RemoveAllBookmarks URL_RemoveBookmark URL_RemoveFromBasket HURL_SaveProfile URL_SearchMask HURL_Service URL_Store URL_UserTemplate URL_ViewBookmarks HURL_ViewProfile Unit
219. ctions Enable Disable Encryption When encryption is enabled or disabled INTERSHOP performs the following steps BI Accesses the key set Counts the number of credit card entries in the database Compiles encrypts or decrypts and sets the data for each entry To enable or disable encryption 1 Log on as System Administrator and go to the System Administration Main Menu 2 Select one option e Click Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data A status page is displayed and INTERSHOP starts the process of encrypting all credit card data Once encryption is complete you return to the System Administration Main Menu OR Click Disable Credit Card Data Encryption INTERSHOP decrypts all credit card data and returns to the System Administration Main Menu Chapter 2 System Administration Page 87 Operator Settings Menu Control Back Office amp Storefront Access Control Back Office amp Storefront Access The Administration section of the System Administration Main Menu contains links to create and edit back office access rights and to temporarily lock the storefront displaying a Store Closed message to visitors Operator Settings Menu Operators handle the everyday store tasks in the back office Operators do not have access to System Administration Only the System Administrator can designate operators As a security precaution there are no default operators created in INTERSHOP All operators m
220. ctrl key together with the left mouse button to select or unselect od Figure 195 Profile edit form using a select box When the customer completes the selections and submits the profile form the selected items are stored as his or her profile in the Customer Manager Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 393 Step 2 Create an Input Form on the Profile Editing Page Create and Assign Profiles Activating the Profile Page 394 After customers have selected their profile choices you can allow them to activate the profile feature on the same page When activated a personalized Storefront reflecting the customer s personal profile choices is displayed as long as profile items have been assigned to corresponding categories and or products see Overview Profile Template Design p 219 When deactivated the normal Storefront appears NOTE Categories that have not been assigned any profile items will be visible to everyone regardless of the customer s profile To enable a customer to activate a profile you create a checkbox using the TLE variable Name_ActivateProfile as shown in the sample code below lt INPUT TYPE CHECKBOX NAME Name_ActivateProfile VALUE IsProfileActivated gt Activate my profile now When this code is added to the sample code shown for the select box list above the profile edit page will contain a select box listing the profile items you have defined on the back
221. cturer Creates a select list to choose a manufacturer Values are automatically derived from Product Manager Storefront template Search Mask Server Side Script TLE Variable Replacements Server side scripts can be written to customize your INTERSHOP 4 application When writing Server Side Scripts TLE variables containing formatted numbers cannot be used for calculation or comparison For all numeric values the unformatted _Value version of the TLE should be used The TLE in the table below illustrates the type of difference you can expect between standard TLE variables and TLE variables used with SSS Table 43 General Server Side Script TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates ShippingMethodID When using 555 use ShippingMethodID instead of ShippingMethod All templates Page 266 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables User Defined TLEs User Defined TLEs You can define your own TLE elements for use on any INTERSHOP 4 template User defined elements can be especially valuable for replacing often employed HTML tags such as those used for background colors and other design elements For example by creating a User defined element such as and giving it a value such as CC6000 your designers can edit and update the colors on all templates in the store simultaneously Both the TLE element and its value are specified in the User
222. d a link for returning to the Homepage search login hot deals basket service search store Figure 163 Navigation bar from Training Store Tips for the Navigation Bar You can copy and paste the code for a quick search from this navigation bar template into another template if desired For complete information on creating search fields see page 366 Each link on the Navigation Bar consists of a URL TLE variable which calls the appropriate template plus a gif image for the link s appearance If you are not using the Store Design Wizard see page 43 the quickest way to customize a Navigation Bar is simply to replace the gif images in the store s image folder with images that suit your own corporate identity The Basket Template Whenever a customer chooses products to buy in the Storefront those products are placed into a shopping basket from which all subsequent ordering processes proceed The Basket Template performs many dynamic functions and is an excellent place to hone your skills in INTERSHOP design In Training Store the Basket Template is used to e List all selected products e Calculate and re calculate the price tax shipping cost and applicable discounts for those products Display the customer s billing and shipping addresses if registered Chapter 5 Templates Page 317 Registration and Checkout Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront Registrati
223. d a quick and easy way to service learn about building your own INTERSHOP store search This special store provides informative store comments regarding basic store concepts template usage and options Lanquage Courses like conditional or rule based Example of a List basic presentation of content at the bottom Template a list haz no of the store page you re viewing In sub categories some cases you will get a brief overview at the top of the page gt hot deals When appropriate you will find a HELP button that will lead you to more detailed information and assistance Please also reference the documentation provided with your INTERSHOP product Figure 153 Use Training Store to learn INTERSHOP Template design concepts Page 292 Chapter 5 Templates Introduction to Template Design Getting Started with Template Design Plan Your Store A Checklist for Designers As with any design project pre planning is important Here is a list of things to consider before working with your INTERSHOP store HTML Explore existing stores for ideas The INTERSHOP package contains three demo stores to get you started and links to many other working shops are available from our Web site www intershop com Every day new retail stores appear on the Internet They can provide valuable ideas about store design INTERSHOP supports the most sophisticated design tools Java Script multimedia authoring tools etc Map ou
224. d assigned in the Catalog Manager Products can only be entered in a category which has no sub categories following it ie in the bottom level category A standard for external gateway programs to interface with information servers such as HTTP servers Mathematical operators used to compare text in conditional statements Created from IF Statements and Operators used to generate an action if a specific condition is met Page 439 Cookie Cross selling Customer Customer Account Customer Category Customer Order Customer Profile Database Dump Database Objects Database Server Deactivate Delete Demo Store Direct Storefront Entry Discount Classes Discount Matrix Domain Name Page 440 A general mechanism which server side connections can use to both store and retrieve information on the client side of the connection The addition of a simple persistent client side state significantly extends the capabilities of Web based client server applications Shopping applications can store per user preferences on the client and have the client supply those preferences every time that site is contacted Accomplished using Java scripts and Product Attributes the ability to automatically suggest complimentary products when a customer places a product in their basket Anyone who enters an INTERSHOP store is considered a customer Registered customers have unique identities in the system All others are referred
225. d below System Preferences Miscellaneous system settings Figure 26 Administration Session Time Out A security measure that limits how long the System Administrator can remain continuously logged in This measure helps protect against unauthorized use e g if the system administrator leaves the terminal and forgets to log off Default setting 720 minutes 12 hours Storefront Session Time Out This setting limits the time a customer may spend in the Storefront Default setting 720 minutes 12 hours Maximum Number of Nested INCLUDE Calls 1 100 This value defines the maximum depth of INCLUDE calls allowed in a template For details on INCLUDE see Rules for Using INCLUDE Statements on p 287 Default setting 10 Cookies INTERSHOP supports the cookie feature offered by most Web browsers A cookie is simply a small text file which the INTERSHOP server stores on a customer s local computer and which is called up automatically at all subsequent logins Return members then don t need to re enter their names to be recognized by the system Default setting Yes checked NOTE A new cookie is created on first login from any machine Cookie identification occurs only on subsequent logins from the same machine Page 48 Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences System Preferences Bi Register Upon Order If this setting is activated then as soon as an operator prints a
226. d currency as they will be needed when editing templates See Create a Link to Change the Alternate Currency on p 363 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 67 Currency Preferences Set General Preferences Select the main store currency This is the only currency used for payment and order processing If your store uses external payment methods the currency selected for the payment method should be the same as the store currency RR ARR AC C n l CAUTION If you change the main store currency the price of your products will NOT change to the new currency value You need to do this manually Also changing the main store currency affects all existing orders and invoices Be sure to process all open orders before making such a change Select a default alternate currency This is the alternate currency that is initially shown in the Storefront once the templates have been edited to allow for an alternate currency Enter a currency symbol for each activated currency Enter an exchange rate for each alternate currency The main store currency is automatically assigned an exchange rate of 1 All other exchange rates entered are relative to this currency Make sure to update this rate daily so customers see accurate information in the Storefront Exchange rates are updated manually It is also possible to update the rates using a script or other tool that accesses the store currencies da
227. d for a customer to enter a name in the registration form you use the input TLE itName CustName1 in the name part of the HTML tag To display the value if it is known the normal TLE CustName1 can be used For example lt INPUT NAM SIZE 25 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension E 4 AXLI ame_CustName1 VALUI ENGTH 50 E CustNamel Page 261 FORM TLE Variables TLE Variables Then when a customer enters a name in the Registration Form and submits it that name is received by INTERSHOP and stored in the database If the template is shown again it will use the stored value to display the field Table 41 lists all regular input TLE variables and Table 42 lists all TLE variables used to create search forms Page 262 Table 41 Input TLE Variables TLE Variable CheckBox_ConfirmationEMail Description Creates a checkbox for order confirmation to be sent by e mail checkboxes do not require values Available Templates Storefront templates Login Non member Data Form Registration CheckBox_ConfirmationFax Creates a checkbox for order confirmation to be sent by fax checkboxes do not require values Storefront templates Login Non member Data Form Registration FormlagAttributes Used to begin a form Storefront and Product templates FormlagAttributessSL Used to begin a form using SSL Storefront and Product templates Name_Activa
228. d of your error See Possible Errors on p 108 for more information on data import error messages Validate and Import selected by default The Data Import Tool will first check your data file and then import record by record Import If you select this option be sure that you have the correct Replacement Option selected and that your data files are all correct There is no Undo after you click Start 3 Select the Replacement Option to be used with regard to data already existing in the database The Data Import Tool evaluates the existing and replacement data by way of the product customer or catalog number If you are importing product variations see Import Product Variations on p 109 before selecting an option Ignore Will bypass or ignore records in the import file whenever a duplicate record already exists in the database Nothing for that record will be imported and the pre existing database record will remain unchanged Update Will update existing records identified by number and insert new records Replace Will first delete entire matching records in the database and then insert new records based on the values in the import file 4 Enter the row number at which to start the import If the data file has a header row the start row value is 2 If no value is specified the default value is 1 X Microsoft Excel test3 Js File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help d
229. data description and data files Use the Data Description File and Data File drop down menus to select the data description file and data import files for mapping The drop down menus only appear if you have jumped to this page from the Data Import Tool Menu If you arrive at this page from Step 2 your file is automatically listed on the page Select New File from the Existing Mapping File drop down menu New file is listed by default Select the data class customer product or catalog appropriate for your data file The Mapping File page is immediately updated to display A Mapping Section showing the File Fields defined by your data files header row Drop down menus with the available Database Fields A Default Section where you can specify or accept Default Values for the fields that are not assigned a value by your Data File Figure 67 Review Rules for Mapping Data Classes on p 107 before completing this process Follow the instructions in Map Fields and Assign Default Values on p 99 Click Save You do not need to click Load when working with existing files Click Next to go to Step 4 and import your data Click Back to re enter or review information from previous steps Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Rules for Mapping Data Classes Import a Saved Settings File Click Step 4 Job Control on the D
230. deal for this Style Figure 23 Select a basic template style in Step 3 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 45 Graphical Store Design Wizard Use System Administration First Time 4 In Step 4 Figure 24 choose a general color scheme Either click Customize to mix and match your colors and proceed to Step 5 or click Next to accept the Wizard default colors and proceed to step 9 BACK NEXT CUSTOMIZE PREVIEV Store Design Wizard Step 4 Style1 Style2 C UU ART DECO Stylea C Figure 24 Choose a pre set color scheme or customize it yourself Customizing steps 5 8 allows you to pick banner page header button and text colors separately Click Preview at any time to see a preview of your choices Figure 25 STORE BROWSER NEW Home electronics PRODUCTS HIFI photo video and more 521 69 Health amp Fitness Demo product 1 Fitness gadgets health aids Hard coded product Ouidoor amp Garden 83 44 Watches binoculars and everything else Demo product 2 the rugged individualist might need Hard coded product Home amp Comfort Things to spice up the house DEALS Automotive riving aids and accessories 521 69 zi Demo product 1 Hard coded product Q PR OFILE 83 44 v Demo product 2 Hard coded product STORE HOT DEALS SEARCH BASKET REGISTER SERVICE Figure 25 Preview of the Wizard displaying new produc
231. defined TLE variable Edit panel the contents of which can be changed at any time Figure 152 User defined TLE elements can also contain active lines of HI ML code or JavaScript This can be useful if you want a Java applet to run at various places in the Web site You only need to write the applet once A User defined element may contain any characters but you cannot embed a TLE variable inside the User defined TLE element Create User defined TLE elements whenever you want one centrally defined value to show up in a number of different templates NOTE The graphical Store Design Wizard discussed in When and Why to Use System Administration p 39 automatically creates a variety of User defined TLE elements for banners text background colors etc Create a User Defined TLE 1 In the System Administration Main Menu select Templates The Template page is displayed Figure 151 2 System Administration BACK OPEN TEMPLATE GROUP USER DEFINED TLE IMPORT EXPORT TEMPLATE Templates Language english E Template Group Figure 151 Click User DefinedTLE to create User defined TLE elements Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 267 User Defined TLEs TLE Variables 2 Click User defined TLE to get the User defined TLE list Click New TLE to open the User defined TLE Variable Edit panel Figure 152 INTERSHOP CLOSE SAYE HELP Edit
232. deletions in the live store also need to be changed in the staging store Failure to do so will result in those changes being lost when copying the staging store back to the live store Chapter 2 System Administration Page 115 The Staging Wizard Staging The Staging Wizard Select Staging Wizard on the System Administration Main Menu of the source store the store being copied Step 1 of the Staging Wizard is displayed Figure 69 Z BACK PROCEED System Administration Staging Wizard Step 1 Please enter the following information for the target store Admin Sy URL Ihttp Admin Password Database 1 Login Database Password SQL Server JISSERVER Name Please enter the following information for the source store Database mm Login Database Password CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 69 First step of the Staging Wizard Enter the URL for the back office module of the target store This URL should end in admin Enter the System Administrator password for the target store Enter the Database User login and password for the target store This information can be obtained from your Site Administrator If you have obtained a password in order to use ODBC or Ser
233. der Ordering begins with filling a shopping basket After choosing a membership option customers then enter payment and shipping information review their choices and complete the order Fill the Shopping Basket 2 To add or remove items change the number in the quantity field and click Update You can also click the trash can by the quantity field of a product you want to remove entirely from the basket Page 30 Browse the catalog or use the search to select a product and add it to the basket The basket page appears for modification Figure 12 NOTE It is possible to withhold showing the basket until the order is submitted or the Basket button is clicked This option reduces steps for the user See Basket Preferences on p 59 for details SPORTS PLACE Your One stop Sports Superstore BASKET sp See BARES 1 n Keenan Edge Carbon Forks 5 0096 123 50 s Seaside Casual Denim Shirt 5 0096 56 99 i D POE SN Ship via USMeil SHIPPING 0 00 SUBTOTAL 180 49 TOTAL 180 49 Figure 12 A member s basket When finished browsing choose a shipping method for your order and click Update Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Members Sports Place for Members Placing an Order Submit the Order as a Non Member As a Non member registration and payment information are entered on the same page to minimize click steps
234. der Manager most effectively The Paper Trail The Order Manager manages the paper trail in your shop and operators can make hard copy print outs of every step in the process INTERSHOP includes complete yet fully customizable print templates for creating printed invoices packing slips order confirmations and follow up letters Customizing these print templates can be as simple as putting your own address at the top of the page Once that s done simply choose the template you want from a drop down menu in the Order Manager and click Print to handle all paperwork and correspondence in your shop effortlessly How Customer Orders are Classified To be completed each order in the INTERSHOP system requires an invoice a record of payment on the invoice and a packing slip Based on these requirements customer orders are grouped by the Order Manager into three classes New Orders Orders are New when first discovered in your store before processing has begun i e neither an invoice nor a packing slip has been created Chapter 3 The Back Office Order Manager Record Transactions in Customer Accounts Open Orders Orders remain Open as long as one of three requirements is not yet met the invoice has not been created the packing slip has not been generated or the invoice has not yet been paid All Orders All Orders includes new open and completed orders NOTE There is no specific categor
235. display at the top of the page 2 Select New File from the Existing Mapping File drop down menu 3 Select the appropriate data class catalog customer or product from the drop down menu The Mapping File page is updated to display a Mapping Section where you can match file fields drawn from the header row of the import file to database fields You can also specify or accept default values for any fields not filled by the data file Figure 60 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 97 Data Import Tool Step by Step Page 98 27 Store Back Office BACK SAVE LOAD DELETE CANCEL PROCEED Data Import DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 3 Mapping File Data Description File Data File products cfg products txt dat If you arrive at this page Mapping File Existing Mapping File or Suggest Mapping for Data Class NEW FILE 8 Product Data from step 2 your files are listed Enter a name for your mapping file and select New File from the Mapping Section File Field Database Field Existing Mapping File Menu number description name purchaseprice sellingprice bearings length width trucks wheels wood wood_dealer pro color weight tape year tax_class category No E Description zJ Selling Price Visible At Storefront Mapping File Section The fields from your data file are listed on the left the database fields a
236. dministration Page 71 Storefront Message Templates List Customer Profile Matrix Customer Profile Matrix Customer profiles allow shoppers to view a customized catalog tailored to their interests Explore the Golf Store for an example shoppers can identify themselves as right or left handed golfers male or female After activating a profile of such characteristics they view the catalog items suited for example to right handed women To create a customer profile matrix System Administrators must Enable profiles in System Preferences described on p 48 Bi Create profile classes described on p 73 These are general categories such as Gender or Hobbies that contain specific profile items Bi Create profile items described on p 74 These are specific characteristics such as Male Female or Gardening Filmmaking Sports Link profile items to products and categories This is done in the Catalog and Product Managers described in Chapter 3 See The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on p 210 Bi Edit profile templates Activating the Profile on p 394 d System Administration BACK NEW CLASS DELETE CLASS Customer Profile Matrix Customer Profile Classes Available Items Age Adult Child Teen Gender Female Male CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 40 Custo
237. does not include tax See Set Price Display Model to Net or Gross on p 68 for more detail about these terms Recommended Minimum Inventory Used by the Purchasing Manager to alert you when stock is low before levels have reached zero We recommend setting this number to at least 1 Recommended Weight Used primarily for merchant information Optional Min order level The smallest quantity a customer can purchase Default is set in System Administration but it can be individually modified here See also Direct Storefront Entry on p 397 Optional 4 When product entry is complete click Save 5 The Product Details page now appears Figure 84 The Product Details page includes several features not present on the New Product page additional command options an inventory report and an Assign to Category field at the bottom A product must be assigned to a category or designated as a Hot Deal to be visible in the Storefront 6 Click the New Assign button at the bottom of the page The Select Category for Product page is displayed See Create or Extend 4 Category on page 126 for more information 7 Select the category or subcategory to which you want to link this product Click Assign to Category on the command bar at the top of the page Assign to Category only appears on the command bar of a category page if there are no additional subcategories Click on the subcategory li
238. done Tax Classes Know what sales tax laws apply to your store and determine the different product classes if any that you must take into account for your sales In some jurisdictions different product classes are taxed at different rates For example food items may not be taxable at the same rate as durable goods so you may need to create a separate tax class for each Enter and Delete Tax Classes 1 Select Set Up Taxes from the Settings Manager Main Menu 2 Select Tax Classes Figure 131 Settings Manager BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST DELETE SET UP TAXES Tax Classes New Value Non taxable Books Electronics Equipment Food Shipping CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 131 Create and Edit Tax Classes 3 Follow the same procedure for entering and deleting Tax Jurisdictions above beginning with step 3 Page 202 Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Taxes Create a Tax Matrix The tax rate for a particular transaction may depend on both the customer s tax jurisdiction and the tax class of the product being sold When you click on the Tax Matrix link INTERSHOP generates a table Figure 132 from the Tax Jurisdictions and Tax Classes that you have so far specified In the table you enter the applicable tax rates for all combinations of your product classes and c
239. e sections of the style ini file Ifyou use User defined Templates in your template style you must map the templates in the style ini file using the number assigned to the template in the INTERSHOP back office Page 337 Create New Template Styles Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard 10 Copy the folder for your template style to the root level of the INTERSHOP data ishome Styles directory Your template style will be displayed in Step 1 of the SDW along with all the styles listed in the Styles directory 11 Test your template style by running the Store Design Wizard at least once for every scheme defined Intermediate Template Style Creating an intermediate level template style requires a working knowledge of HTML and Web page design 1 Complete steps one through eight for a Simple template style 2 Using an HTML editor edit the layout and design structure of the existing template style as desired See Getting Started with Template Design p 291 and Specific Uses of TLE in Templates p 355 for information about editing templates NOTE You cannot make any changes that alter the directory structure of the template style All Store Design Wizard styles must use the standard directory structure Remember to update your style ini file if necessary 3 Complete steps nine and ten for a Simple template style Page 338 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Cre
240. e This setting works together with First Threshold to determine when to truncate the search cache Default value 420 minutes W Last Threshold When the size of the search table grows above the last threshold the search cache will be truncated Default value 500 000 rows Direct Storefront Entry Settings These options are discussed in Direct Storefront Entry on p 397 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 63 Customer Registration Preferences Set General Preferences Customer Registration Preferences Page 64 On this page you define a status for input fields on customer registration forms Each column must have at least one field assigned to it Password required Registration Field Corresponding TLE variable M 1 D NMC Login Name_LoginName v Iv r Name 1 amp Name CustNamei Iv m r 2 Name_CustName2 r rH Name 3 Name_CustNames r rH Street Name_CustStreet Iv Oo Iv Zip Code Name_CustZipCode Iv Iv City Name_CustCity o 77 Phone Name_CustPhone 27 n Phone 2 amp Name CustPhone2 r Fax Name_CustFax H n email amp Name CustEMail E iv Country Name_CustCountry H r State Name_CustState n BH Shipping Name 1 amp Name ShippingNamei n n Shipping Name 2 amp Name ShippingName2 Ln Ln Shipping Name 3 Name_ShippingName3 n n Shipping Zip Code Name_ShippingZipCode Oo n Shipping Street Name_ShippingStreet E E Shipping City amp Name ShippingCity Oo O Shipping P
241. e HTML code as you like using the TLE editor to insert dynamic variable information Click Save to keep changes 2 System Administration BACK SAVE AVAILABLE TLEs PREVIEW IN BROWSER IMPORT EXPORT REVERT TO DEFAULT DELETE TEMPLATES User Defined Templates Edit English New template Name Description To use this template in the storefront append the identifier 1 on the URL URL_UserTemplate 1 Identifier in this case used to link this User defined template into the storefront lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt User Template lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY BGCOLOR FFFFFF LINK 083898 gt lt CENTER gt lt BR gt lt TABLE CELLPADDING 0 CELLSPACING 0 BORDER 0 gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt H2 gt User Template lt H2 gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt lt Please create your template here gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt CATALOG manager PRODUCT CUSTOMER manager gei INVENTORY PURCHASING SYSTEM manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 169 Create a User defined Template Page 331 Product Attributes vs Product Variations Template Groups in Detail User Defined Link a User Defined Template to the Storefront On the editing page of your User defined template check the identifier line that appears just below the Name and Description fields To link the User defined template to another
242. e Product Manager Supplier names addresses etc are entered through the Customer Manager see Define 4 Supplier on page 173 for more information on entering suppliers in the database This section explains how to perform these tasks in the Purchasing Manager e Request Stock Order Suggestions e Create a Purchase Order Search and Review Purchase Orders e Cancel a Purchase Order All tasks begin from the Purchasing Manager search page Figure 102 Purchasing Manager SEARCH PURCHASE ORDERS SUGGEST PURCHASE ORDERS CLEAR FORM Search Purchase Orders Order No Supplier zi Date From To Total From To Cancelled Yes No C CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 102 Purchasing Manager Search Purchase Orders page Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 165 Request Stock Order Suggestions Purchasing Manager Request Stock Order Suggestions 1 Click Purchasing Manager to get the Search Purchase Orders page Figure 102 You can limit your search by entering a Supplier name from the drop down menu or a date range If you enter nothing you will get a complete list of Order Suggestions 2 Click Suggest Purchase Orders If any stock fitting your search criteria has fallen below minimum level then a list of Suppliers for those products appears If not a dialog box
243. e back office default admin admin is needed to edit templates The steps for SSS implementation are detailed in the rest of this chapter CAUTION Server Side Scripting permits unlimited Perl functionality One consequence of this flexibility is that a scripter could use Perl to gain access to all store files on the INTERSHOP database The Site Administrator should extend scripting rights only to known and trusted store programmers Enable SSS in Site Administration The Site Administrator must enable Server Side Scripting and provide a directory path where the Perl scripts for a store will reside Also a database access user name and password must be created for the programmer so that the SSS program can access the database and use the scripting API functions The Site Administrator must provide the user name and password enabled for the store 1 Log on to Site Administration module as the Site Administrator Default login siteadmin Default password siteadmin 2 Choose the Store Administration link from the Site Administration Main Menu The Store Administration Menu page is displayed Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 411 Enable in Site Administration 555 Implementation 3 Select the name of the store where Server Side Scripting is to be enabled The Store Administration page for the selected store is displayed 4 On the Store Administration page click SSS Preferences The SSS Pr
244. e handling of the payments in the back office Special TLEs are needed for credit card payments processed by external payment method processing General Payment Method TLE Variables These TLEs are used in the Storefront and on Print templates to display payment methods Table 23 General Payment Method TLE Variables TLE Variable PaymentMethod Description Payment method for the current order TLE Variables Available Templates Print templates Invoice Order Confirmation Packing slip SelectBox_PaymentMethod Creates a selectbox for choosing payment method Values automatically derived from System Admin Storefront templates Basket Non member Data Order Select Payment Method lsCreditCardEnabled ls set to true if there is at least one enabled payment method that requires credit card data Storefront templates only Credit Card TLE Variables This set of TLE variables can be used in Print Templates for printing out invoices and order confirmations and on the Credit Card Export template Table 24 Credit Card TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates CreditCardExpireDate Credit card expiration date day Print templates Invoice Order of month Confirmation CreditCardExpireMonth Credit card expiration month Erin slats Data Order Confirmation f e Print templates Invoice Credit Card CreditCardExpireYear Cr
245. e in System Administration Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 413 Call A Script from an INTERSHOP Template Implementation Call A Script from an INTERSHOP Template Once Server Side Scripting is enabled and the Perl script written it must be integrated into INTERSHOP s template s To do so go to a template and use two simple commands BEGIN and END Any necessary Perl code can appear between those lines For example BEGIN use Shipping ShippingCalc END Page 414 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions TLE Handling Functions The Scripting API Functions Server Side Scripting requires a set of functions to communicate with the INTERSHOP application The following function sets are defined in this section TLE handling functions Database access functions Layout formatting functions e Input output functions e Order processing functions TLE Handling Functions The three TLE handling functions allow scripters to read set and save the values of TLE variables directly Each function requires the name of one or more TLE variables or loops The leading character is optional when specifying ILE names Re Format TLE Calculation Variables to use in SSS scripts All TLE variables that hold numbers integers booleans floats for example ProductPrice are formatted and cannot be used with SSS to perform calculation functions
246. e in the Type field and click Add to List The new type name appears in the list box Repeat as needed For example enter the types Color and Size 4 Select a type from the listbox i e Color and click Variation Values The Assign Product Variation Values page appears Figure 91 Product Manager 52 S BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST DELETE Assign Product Variation Values Color Value Mercury Silver Fire Engine Red Metallic Yellow Midnight Blue CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 91 Add or delete values for a particular variation type on this page 5 Enter a new value in the field and click Add to List The new value name appears in the list Repeat as needed for this type For example enter Mercury Silver and Mamba Maroon or Color 6 Repeat steps to create values as needed Page 152 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Product Variations Assign Types and Values to Create Variations Variation sets combinations of types and values must be assigned to particular products in order for product variations to appear in the Storefront All the details and attributes assigned to a main product on the Product Details page Figure 84 apply by default to all its variations However it is possible to edit variation attribute values and other details for each inde
247. e is displayed 3 Choose a destination category or subcategory The top of the page reads Move Catalog x gt to Catalog lt y gt where x is the catalog you are moving and y is the destination category 4 Click Move Category to continue If the Move Category command is not displayed you have chosen a category that contains products Click Back to cancel the move or to choose another destination category Page 128 Chapter 3 The Back Office Catalog Manager Sort Categories and Products for Display in the Storefront 5 Click OK when the dialog box appears Or click Cancel and then Back to cancel the move You automatically return to the editing page of the category just moved PS catalog Manager BACK SAVE NEW CATEGORY MOYE CATEGORY SORT PRODUCTS CATALOG ATTRIBUTE VALUES DELETE End Level Categories Category ID 227 Category Path Electronics Music Category Name Music Category Description List basic Template also used in Category Language list Template List basic zl Aiwa AM FM Stereo 83 44 Enjoy superb AM FM stereo from a radio small enough to fit in your pocket Supersonic 6000 Stereo System 150 00 Portable Component System with Twin CD Player and Remote Portable Component System with CD Player 139 95 The best high power portable system money can buy AIWA Blaster CD Radio Cassette Recorder 119 95 Aiwa s fresh new shape for portable m
248. e start row value is 2 If no value is specified the default value is 1 delafterimport Presents the option of deleting the data file from the hard drive after a successful import Values 0 do not delete 1 delete e statusfile The status file displays information about the import process and is saved in the DataImport sub directory e errorfile The error file contains detailed information about records that were not imported successfully An error file is not automatically created by default Enter the value error log to generate an error file Start Command Line Data Import If you are a merchant without direct access to the hosting machine you will need to contact your Site Administrator for assistance in running the AT scheduler containing the command line you modified and running the ImportIool bat file containing your arguments l Setup an AT scheduler command for the days and times you wish to schedule data imports Refer to a Windows NT manual for instructions 2 Insert the modified command line into the AT scheduler and run the command from the DOS prompt From the DOS prompt run Scheduler NMImportTool bat directory INTERSHOP Data ishome yourstorename DataImport configfile yourfilename cfg mappingfile product map datafile yourfilename dat dbuser yourdbuserlogin password yourdbpassword insertmode updat database storedbnam dbserver ISSERVER importmode validate import startrow
249. e style directory structure An outline of the three methods for creating new SDW template styles for the SDW Definition of a Template Style A template style is a collection of files that serve to produce a certain look for an INTERSHOP Storefront A template style consists of the following The basic INTERSHOP template set You cannot add Storefront templates to the basic set but you can add an infinite number of Product User defined List and Catalog templates once you have created them in the back office Image sound video or other multimedia files These are referenced in each template Static HTML files The template style sets shipped with INTERSHOP contain static HTML files for Store Closed Store Error Store Not Accessible and a Blank Every template style must have at least one scheme defined for it A scheme is one of the sets of images and colors used to modify the template style There is no limit to the number of schemes you can create for a style Each scheme uses a different set of image files and colors but all schemes use the same template set Page 334 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Template Style Directory Structure Definition of a Template Style The files that comprise a template style are located in a single unique directory folder located in the 76ISROOT 6 ishome Styles directory of the web server running INTERSHOP Figure 171 display
250. e the price of a specific product in a basket Example OverrideProductPrice productno newprice INPUT productno newprice A valid product number and a new price float OUTPUT Comment The product must be in the basket All basket related variables will be recalculated during the execution of this function Table 106 OverrideProductTax Override the current tax and set a new tax for a specific product in a basket Example OverrideProductTax productno newtax INPUT productno newtax A valid product number and a new tax float OUTPUT Comment The product must be in the basket All basket related variables will be recalculated during the execution of this function Table 107 OverrideProductQuantity Set a new quantity for a given product in the basket Example OverrideProductQuantity productno newquantity INPUT productno newquantity A valid product number and a new quantity an integer value 0 OUTPUT Comment The product must be in the basket Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 425 The Override Functions The Scripting API Functions Table 108 OverrideProductDiscount Set a new discount for a given product in the basket Example OverrideProductDiscount productno newdiscount INPUT A valid product number and a new quantity an integer value gt 0 productno newquantity OUTPUT
251. e to move 3 Click on one of the sorting navigation buttons above the select box Top will move the selected category to the top of the list Up will move the selected category up one place on the list Down will move the selected category down one place on the list Bottom will move the selected category to the bottom of the list 4 Once the correct order has been achieved click Save 5 Click Close The order of the categories or products has changed on the Category page and in the Storefront As new categories are created they will be appended to the end of the list Return to the Sort window to move them to the desired position Sort Categories Alphabetically Categories and products can be sorted alphabetically Initial numbers are given first position then categories will be sorted by alphabetical order regardless of capitalization For example three categories named apple Orange and 3D when sorted alphabetically would be displayed 3D apple then Orange To sort alphabetically 1 On any category list page click Sort Categories Figure 76 The Sort Categories and Products window appears This window shows the order in which the categories or products are currently sorted 2 Click Alphabetize Figure 77 The categories or products are now sorted alphabetically Page 130 Chapter 3 The Back Office Catalog Manager Delete Catego
252. e your data description data and mapping files using the Data Import Tool See Data Import Tool Step by Step on p 98 Create Data Description Data and Mapping Files Using the Data Import Tool 3 Select Data Import Tool from the System Administration Main Menu The Data Import Tool Menu is displayed Figure 56 Complete the Data Import Tool Step by Step on p 93 Steps I 3 This creates the files cfg dat and map needed and saves them to the Datalmport directory of your store Complete Step 4 Job Control to test your data 4 Exit the Data Import Tool Define ImportTool bat Command Line Options for Your Import To set up data import at regularly scheduled intervals you must insert the proper command line into the AT scheduler The example code below is in the ImportIool bat file of your Intershop bin directory Enter the values that reflect your import file for each command line option in bold below To make your edits copy the example code at the bottom of the ImportTool bat text file to Notepad or other text editor Then copy the modified command line into the AT scheduler as described in Start Command Line Data Import on p 114 Sample command line code from the ImportTool bat file Page 112 SINTERSHOP bin perl exe SINTERSHOP AdminLib Service SysAdmin DataImport ImportTool ImportTool pm directory INTERSHOP Data ishome yourstore DataImport configfile lt yourfilename gt cfg
253. eated select one of them to be the default value The unit of weight you select becomes a fixed value in your system linked to an entry field in the Product Manager see Figure 29 It can also be used by weight based shipping methods The same drop down menu is accessed from the Products section of General Preferences to set a default Unit of Measurement Figure 29 illustrates how Unit of Weight and Unit of Measurement are put to different uses in the Product Manager NOTE FOR STOREFRONT DESIGNERS Neither Unit of Weight nor Unit of Measurement is utilized in the Training Store or Sports Place Storefronts If you would like to display these values in your own storefront use the TLE variables WeightSymbol with ProductWeight or UnitOfMeasurement in the appropriate Storefront Templates Chapter 2 System Administration Page 53 Regional Preferences Page 54 Set General Preferences E Date Style Select the date format you prefer If the format you select uses two digits to represent a year you need to enter a split date to be Year 2K compliant If your store uses a four digit year configuration no split date is required For details see Year 2000 Split Year on p 49 Default setting mm dd yy Currency Format Display currency in your national format Formats for using commas decimals and number of decimal digits vary among currencies Examples American standard 5 000 00 five thousand dollars German sta
254. eates TLE search variables for each attribute These TLE variables are displayed in the TLE list see p 59 for more information See Product Attributes p 145 for more information on creating product attributes In the example below suppose a book shop creates the product attribute Cover to describe their books and then assigns the attribute values hard or paperback to a number of products Page 370 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates Using FORMs in Templates Product attribute variables Color Components Size catalogphoto long_description mfg_part_no product_image type Figure 182 Sample attribute TLEs in the TLE list A search form is then built as in the sample code below using TLE variable SearchCover that allows the user to enter the type of cover they are looking for The resulting list contains those products which are assigned the attribute Cover and also have the value specified in the search input Insert the following into the code example for Search with AND or above right before the INPUT SUBMIT tag 1 NOTE You must first have defined the attribute SearchCover Enter Hard Cover or Paperback br SearchCover How it looks in the Storefront Name or Description AND OR C Manufacturer Enter Hard Cover or Paperback Paperback Start Search Figure 183 Search interf
255. eave blank Your entry appears as the default for customers when asked to select their tax jurisdiction from a drop down menu Default setting Blant Chapter 2 System Administration Page 57 Product Preferences Set General Preferences Store Credit Set here the default credit limit automatically applied to all customer accounts upon registration For a more complete description of store credit see Check Credit Limit on p 49 Default setting 500 00 Bb Credit Length Time limit before a customer s bill becomes overdue This entry is informational only and is not linked to any other INTERSHOP function Default setting 74 days Product Preferences Page 58 The default values set here apply to all products subsequently entered in the system See Figure 31 System Administration BACK SAVE Product Preferences Unit of Measurement dt This unit of measurement will be the default value for products in your store but can be changed individually in the Product Manager Choose measurements only nr Minimum Order Amount 1 9999999 Minimum order amount for product E Defines the separator between a main product number and a product variation number Product Number Separator CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS M manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 31 Product Preferences in
256. ed Operator Administrator Supplier Tax Jurisdiction France z Alternate Currency US Dollar USD Print Template English Customer brief Created on 06 18 99 Updated on 06 18 99 zI cash on Delivery a company Check Charge to Account Credit Card via Phone Fax Direct credit Card Entry Direct Debit Personal Check Prepaid Store Credit 00 Credit Length days 14 Bank 1 Customer Banki Bank 2 Customer Bank2 Comments Send the customer a fax as order y Send the customer an email as order confirmation confirmation Account Address Shipping Address ship to billing address Name Jacques Beulieu Name Jacques Beulieu Street Address City State Zip Code Country Phone email Jas Rue du Gauche Street Address City L State sso o o Zip Code Fare Country o Phone to 112222 1 Fax JRame domain com email 15 Rue du Gauche ville 86530 France 11 111 1111 11 222 2222 Iname domain com Customer Profile Information profile is activated Age FrequentShoppers Gender Hobbies VIPShoppers Figure 147 Customer Details page with Customer Profile information bottom left of page Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 217 Managing Profiles from the Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional 3 If the customer has activated his or her profile the Profile is Activ
257. ed by the values in the data description file If this file was created using the Data Import Tool it was automatically saved as a dat file NOTE The Data Import Tool automatically adds the extensions dat cfg and map to your existing file names e g products txt cfg When you are creating the arguments section of the command line verify that the config mapping and data files you enter have the correct filename dbuser Special database user login name assigned by the Site Administrator password The special database user password assigned by the Site Administrator If a password is not specified you are asked for it during set up insertmode The way in which the data is merged with existing data Choose from update replace and ignore See Step 4 Job Control Import Mode and Condition on p 100 for a complete explanation database The name of the database receiving the data dbserver The database server entry in your Sybase ini sql ini file Usually ISSERVER importmode You can choose from one of three import actions validate import validate and import See Step 4 Job Control Import Mode and Condition on p 100 for a complete definition of each action Chapter 2 System Administration Page 113 Command Line Data Import Data Import e startrow The row in the data file where import should begin If the data file has a header row th
258. ed on the day s date e g 20000608 ccexport txt From the Transaction Type drop down menu choose the category from which you wish to retrieve credit card data If desired enter additional parameters to narrow your search customer name or number name of assigned operator date range You can choose to include previously deactivated and or cancelled orders in your search or search for them exclusively by using the radio buttons at the bottom of the page The default setting No in both cases assumes that you are not searching credit card data for cancelled or deactivated orders Click Print Export to show a report of credit card data matching your criteria A new browser window opens displaying a print preview formatted according to the selected Print or Export Template To create a hard copy select Print from your browser commands You can now use this report to obtain approvals for credit card payments You are now ready to approve direct entry credit cards according to the method of your choice Upon approval or denial of credit you can return to the corresponding orders in your system via the Order Manager and continue processing the orders as appropriate e g print packing slip and ship product or inform customer of failed credit approval Log Off INTERSHOP Log off of the INTERSHOP 4 program by clicking Log Off on the Settings Manager Main Menu page You are
259. edit card expiration year Data Order Confirmation CreditCardNo Credit card number Data Order Confirmation CurrentDate The current date All templates CurrentOperator The emm operator Default value Print templates online CustNamel Customer last name first name All templates ProcessDate Date of customer s order Print template Credit Card Data ProcessNo ID for an order paid by credit card Print template Credit Card Data ProcessSubTotal Shipping Print template Credit Card Data Page 250 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables URL TLE Variables Table 24 Credit Card TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates The total price of an order paid by ProcessTotalPrice credit card Print template Credit Card Data The sum of all taxes for order ind ProcessTotalTax Pa Print template Credit Card Data shipping tax CreditCardRows aS to Print template Credit Card Data process URL TLE Variables All URL TLE variables have the prefix URL_ The URL TLE variables are used to create hyperlinks between INTERSHOP 4 templates storefront pages from the customer point of view providing flexibility in how a store is structured To create a link between templates use the URL TLE variables in conjunction with HTML anchor tags as in the example below Example Creating a Link to
260. edited to make attribute values different for each variation This is especially helpful for merchants who wish to display different image files for each variation The following items can also be adjusted independently for each variation once they are created e Hot deal status e Wholesale price Retail price Weight Minimum inventory e Numbe rin stock Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Product Variations To change an attribute value for a variation 1 Open the Product Manager main page and search for the variation To find a variation sub product and not the main product be sure to select Sub SKUs from the SKU drop down menu 2 Select the variation The Product Variation Matrix page is displayed listing each variation of the main product Figure 95 3 Click Edit for the product variation needing a new attribute value s The Product Attribute Values page for the selected product variation is displayed Figure 87 For information and instructions about product attributes see Define Product Attribute Values on page 147 4 Change the attribute value s and other specifications as needed 5 Click Save The product variation will now have an attribute value different from the main product For more information regarding uploading image files from the attribute page see Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes on p 148 Delete Variations There are four
261. eferences page is displayed Figure 203 INTERSHOP UE Site Administration m BACK SAVE HELP SSS Preferences Enable Server Side Scripting Iv Select the checkbox to enable Server Side Scripting for this store Store Perl Library Path _ Enter the path Specify the relative path of the perl library files used for Server Side Scripting for the Server Side Scripting Database Access User E directory you Enter the name used to connect to the store database create to hold Server Side Scripting Database Access Password the SSS used Enter the password for database access by a store Figure 203 Enable Server Side Scripting Preferences 5 Fill in the appropriate fields as defined below Enable Server Side Scripting Select the checkbox to enable the feature for the current store Because of the security implications of full Perl functionality we recommend limiting this feature solely to experienced and trusted users Store Perl Library Path Define the store specific directory where Perl scripts should reside relative to the store root For example INTERSHOP Data ishome storename SSS Server Side Scripting Database Access User optional This can be the same user name assigned for use with ODBC See the Site Administration Guide Assigning a special database user for full instructions ss _ CAUTION The Special Database User assigned in Site Admi
262. efine Mapping map File In Step 3 of the import process you map the fields parsed from your data import file to the appropriate database columns First you select the data class for the type of data you are importing customer product or catalog then you use entry fields and drop down menus that subsequently display on the Mapping Fields page Select Data Class for Mapping Select the data class for the data you are importing customer catalog or product data The data class selected determines which database fields display in the next section For example if you select Customer Data then the updated page will include fields for customer name address telephone etc Vf Store Back Office BACK SAVE LOAD DELETE CANCEL DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 3 Mapping File Files defined in Steps and 2 Data Description File products cfg Data File products tet dat H4 show here or m drop down Existing Mapping File NEW FILE s or menus if page Suggest Mapping for Data Class CHOOSE accessed direct CHOOSE y Customer Data mut Data CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN manager Figure 59 Step 3 Define Mapping File entry page 1 Check that the Data Description File you created or selected in Step and the Data File you selected for upload in Step 2
263. efront while also allowing you to track each variation separately in the sales reports and inventory Each variation is derived from a main product is assigned an individual SKU a Sub SKU based on the main product s number or Main SKU and inherits the attribute values of the product by default You can use the default attribute values or edit them to make attributes different for each variation An overview of the steps for creating product variations are as follows Bi Decide which qualities should be attributes and which variations Review Product Attributes on page 145 Create a Variation Type and its Values For example if you sell a shirt in various colors and sizes you create the types color and size and the values blue and green large and small See Create a Variation Type and its Values on page 152 Bi Assign Types and Values to Create Variations See Assign Types and Values to Create Variations on page 153 Edit Variations and Variation Attributes Values Optional All product variations inherit the attributes of the main product by default edit these values if you want the attribute values to be different for each variation See Edit Variations and Variation Attributes Values on p 156 Apply Variation Rules Apply rules to remove a particular variation from the set or to change the price of a variation This step is optional To display variations in the Storefront
264. emplate that contains a comment entry box You are still anonymous in INTERSHOP Sales tax and discounts will be shown after you have been registered NON CHECI LIT ORDERENGW Qty Product Price ea Total fir Wuthering Heights 20 00 220 00 Shipping Cost 10 00 Total 230 00 Message to anonymous customer generated by IF statement You re eligable for a 5 discount off your next order See the Service Page for more information Back Order if neccessary Customer comment entry box Shipping Shipping z Update Figure 176 Basket page Page 362 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates The Basket Template Alternate Currency Implementation To display prices in multiple currencies in the storefront you must edit the basket and product templates to display alternate currencies You cannot display prices solely in the alternate currency since all calculations are done in the store currency using the Calculation TLE variables and the values for the Alt TLEs are directly derived from them For example the value of Alt_BasketSub Total is figured by multiplying the value of BasketSub Total by the selected alternate currency s exchange rate For more detailed information see Configure Multiple Currencies p 67 For a complete list of Alt TLE variables see Alternate Currency TLEs p 239 Place the Alt TLEs wherever their Calculation TL
265. emplates 2 Click New Template A New Template page is displayed containing the default HIML code for that Template group 3 Give the new template a title of your choosing and edit the code as described in the rest of this chapter 4 Click Save NOTE It is not possible to create new Storefront Mail or Cartridge Templates you simply edit the existing versions For information on creating and implementing User defined templates see Template Groups in Detail User Defined p 331 Delete Templates If it is possible to delete templates a certain template group a Delete command appears at the top of the template list page Storefront templates and the Main Level Categories template cannot be deleted I Open a Template group 2 Select the template you wish to delete If it is possible to delete the template the Delete command will appear at the top of the page 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK Page 296 Chapter 5 Templates INTERSHOP Template Tools Use the INTERSHOP Template Editor INTERSHOP Template Tools This section discusses how to Use the Template Editor Use HIML Authoring Tools with Templates e Upload Files to Web Server Use the INTERSHOP Template Editor All templates are displayed in an Editor window where changes to the HTML are made INTERSHOP includes template editor tools to help you Export Templates and import HTML files Review TLE varia
266. emplates for Page 309 How are INTERSHOP Templates Grouped 312 Template Groups in Detail Storefront 313 The Store Homepage Template 1 eee eee eee 315 The Navigation Bar 317 The Basket Template seeker Re emt ehem 317 Registration and Checkout Templates 318 Service Templates i e elon E rare nme 323 Other Storefront Templates 324 Template Groups in Detail Catalog amp List 325 Template Groups in Detail Product 327 Product Attributes vs Product 327 Template Groups in Detail User Defined 331 Template Groups in Detail Print amp Mail 333 Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard 334 Definition of a Template 334 Create New Template 336 The Style Definition File styleini lee IRI 341 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates 355 Chapter 357 Storefront Templates 358 The Store Homepage 358 The Basket 360 U
267. er Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 169 Enter a New Customer Customer Manager Enter a New Customer Customers enter themselves in the database when they register online in the Storefront and INTERSHOP automatically transfers their registration information onto Customer Details pages in the Customer Manager But when they don t register themselves if for example they phone in and request that you perform their registration then you can create data pages for them manually Supplier information is saved in the Customer Manager using the Customer Details page Supplier information also needs to be entered manually To do so l Click Customer Manager to get the Search Customers page Figure 105 2 Click New Customer An empty Customer Details page appears for you to fill out Figure 106 3 Fill in the fields on the Customer Details page Figure 106 The explanations below describe the various fields Customer Number This is automatically assigned by the INTERSHOP system Comments This free text entry field can be used to display any comments in reference to the customer Login Password Password Confirm A password of at least 6 characters is required by the database The customer uses this password to login at the Storefront e Account Balance Keeps track of the customer s account balance outstanding invoices are subtracted and payments are added to the sum To adjust the customer
268. er enters a name in the field created by the input TLE variable Name_CustName the name entered becomes a value for the TLE variable CustName lt 1 Start with the FormTagAttributes gt lt FORM FormTagAttributes gt 1 Create an input field for customer s name The size value is how long the input field will be The MAXLENGTH value is the maximum characters the customer can enter gt Customer Name Required lt BR gt lt INPUT NAME Name CustNamel SIZE 62 AXLENGTH 50 Firm organization lt BR gt lt INPUT NAME Name CustName2 SIZE 62 AXLENGTH 50 lt FORM gt As it appears in the Storefront Customer name required Firm organization E Figure 177 The Registration template uses forms to capture information Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 365 Using FORMs in Templates Storefront Templates Required fields are designated in System Administration When designing this page make sure to note the required fields for your customers For more information on making fields mandatory or optional see Customer Registration Preferences p 64 Create Search FORMs Page 366 INTERSHOP 4 uses FORMs to carry out searches When customers enter something in a search field INTERSHOP searches the values that correspond to the TLE variable name used in that field Any matches are displayed to the c
269. er 3 The Back Office Page 185 Review and Follow Up on Baskets John Doe Software Programmer 123 Main Street Providence Rhode Island 44444 Basket No 990618 1008 06 18 99 Dear Customer Thank you for your interest in our products The following quote details the items in your basket Customer No 1001 Product Name Qty Price ea Net price 1002 1 Leather Steering Wheel 1 50 00 50 00 Cover UPS US 2nd Day Air 14 90 Sub Total 64 90 Tax 0 00 Total amount due 64 90 If you have any questions please don t hesitate to call Yours sincerely Administrator Page 186 Figure 116 A sample follow up letter for a non ordered basket Order Manager Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Setup Settings Manager The Settings Manager sets the standard preferences used by all the other Managers keeps track of activities so you can generate statistical reports and analyses and assists with credit card approval and processing This section describes the functions of the Settings Manager Figure 117 in detail e Setup e Statistics Manual Credit Card Handling Log Off INTERSHOP Settings Manager LOG OFF Main Menu SETUP Set Up Drop Down Menus Set up customer categories manufacturers and product units of measure Set Up Discounts Create edit and assign discounts to customer categories Set Up Shipping Methods Set up shipping
270. ers Product attributes are created as on of five data types float integer text string and multimedia The seven managers that appear on the navigation bar Where operators and administrators carry out the day to day tasks of running the store The back office for System Administrators also includes the System Administration Main Menu page Basket of products the customer has selected but not purchased See also Follow up Letters Page that displays items a customer has chosen to buy and automatically calculates price shipping cost applicable taxes and discounts Baskets whether ordered or only filled are retained in the system and provide valuable marketing information for merchants Customers who are members can review past baskets and reload them for easy re ordering Mathematical operators used to create compound conditional statements See Web Browser The INTERSHOP button used to eliminate a customer s order Customer order cannot be cancelled until any associated invoice and packing slip have been cancelled as well See also Deactivate and Delete Term used to describe the entire INTERSHOP database of products The Catalog is the equivalent of a mail order catalog it includes everything for sale in the store The INTERSHOP hierarchal catalog structure is composed of Main level Mid level and End level categories Only End level categories can contain products Any subset of the INTERSHOP Catalog Categories are defined an
271. ers order assuming you have enabled the tax feature in Customer Preferences in System Administration see Customer Preferences on page 56 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 203 Statistics Statistics Settings Manager Your database records all customer activity in your Storefront so you can gather valuable statistics INTERSHOP compiles detailed reports and analyses to help you make informed purchasing decisions and develop effective marketing strategies Statistical reports and analyses are accessible through three links Traffic and Order Status Overview Search Traffic and Order Statistics View Product Statistics Traffic and Order Status Overview This two part report is programmed to come up automatically as the back office front page each time you log on It s also accessible through the Settings Manager Page 204 Select Settings Manager from the navigation bar The Settings Manager main menu appears Figure 117 Select Traffic and Order Status Overview The Analysis of Traffic and Orders page is displayed Figure 133 Ai Settings Manager BACK Traffic and Order Status Overview The current status of your store 2 Unprocessed Orders 6 Open Orders 4 Accounts Receivable What has happened since your last login 2 Sessions in the storefront 2 Baskets have been generated O New customers have been registered 0 New Orders CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PUR
272. ers to link catalog categories and products to profile items See Link a Profile Item to a Category on page 212 and Link Profile Items Directly to Products on page 214 3 Plan with your Template Designer if applicable how the profiles feature will look and work in your Storefront See Activating the Profile on page 394 4 Modify the predefined profile templates in System Administration See Create and Assign Profiles on page 390 Once these steps are completed customers will be able to define and activate their own profiles in the storefront Customer profile Your profile is currently not used to select catalogues and products that match your personal preferences We are holding the following information on our server Your interests are cooking Edit profile settings Go to root catalog Figure 140 Customer s personal profile page in the Storefront Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 211 Managing Profiles from the Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional Managing Profiles from the Back Office Use the Catalog Manager to manage links between profile items and entire categories of products in your store catalog Use the Product Manager to manage links between profile items and specific products within categories Link a Profile Item to a Category Page 212 Follow these instructions to link a profile item to an entire product category in your catalog When you want to link some
273. ert JavaScript into Store Homepage Template The sample code below is inserted immediately after the title before the frame definition that normally appears on the Store Homepage template Page 384 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Product Templates Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced Sample Store Homepage template with JavaScript lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt INTERSHOP Storefront lt TITLE gt lt SCRIPT function newframewidth frame srcl src2 width var opt MARGINWIDTH 0 SCROLLING AUTO noresize with frame document close open writeln lt HTML gt writeln FRAMESET COLS widtht FRAMEBORDER 0 FRAMESPACING 0 BORDER 0 writeln lt FRA SRC srcl NAME links topt writeln FRA CROPPER gt writeln lt FRAMESET gt writeln lt HTML gt close HE Gl 05 RC src2 NAME rechts function newframe frame srcl src2 newframewidth frame srcl src2 120 function openwindow url name options newwin window open url name options newwin focus function servicewindow url openwindow url detail width 300 height 450 scrollb ars yes function crosswindow path store_path name reference a reference split var reference_no a 0 var reference_name 1 var refere
274. es and click Search Search and Edit Customer and Supplier Data I Click Customer Manager and fill out the search page Figure 105 Use the fields on the page to refine your search Leave all fields blank to get a complete list of customers and suppliers For information on back office search behavior see How Searches Behave on page 139 2 Click Search Customers or suppliers fitting your criteria are displayed Figure 107 3 Click a customer s number for the Customer Details page Figure 106 4 Make any changes necessary on the Customer Details page click Save ft Customer Manager BACK Customer List Customer no Name Phone eMail WW Wanonymous Customer default defaultuser domain com 10000 Supplier Supplier Phone 1 supplier supplier com 2 of 2 customers have been found CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager ADMIN manager manager manager manager Figure 107 A list of customers generated by searching the database Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 173 Delete Customers or Suppliers from the Database Customer Manager Delete Customers or Suppliers from the Database 1 Open the Customer Details page as described on p 173 2 Click Delete at the top of the Customer s Details page A warning explains that deleting a customer will also delete all associated orders and paperwork and alerts you if there are stil
275. es see Chapter 4 of this volume For information on editing templates see Chapter 5 The functions outlined in this chapter are primarily organized by template group Storefront Templates The Store Homepage Template The Basket Template Using FORMs in Templates Bi Catalog List Templates Product Templates e Display Product Attributes e Display Product Variations e Cross Sell Links in Product Templates e Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced E Create and Assign Profiles e Create a Profile Form with Select Boxes e Activating the Profile Bi Direct Storefront Entry e Create the DSE URL for the Remote Site Set the Direct Storefront Entry Preferences Loop Statements LOOP Statements in Catalog Templates e LOOP Statements in List Templates e LOOP Statements in Storefront Templates Empty Loops The examples presented show samples of HIML code that can be placed in templates Note that within the HTML code is explanatory text set off by the symbols lt and gt By convention each statement of explanatory text usually refers to the lines of code that follow it To use the samples in your own templates simply change the colors images names and other visual design elements to match your store Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 357 The Store Homepage Template Storefront Templates Storefront Templates Most of the Storefront templates have built in background functionali
276. es transactions to process list defaul wt default T InventoryPositions Iteration over all inventory items Print Templates Invoice default th InvoicePositions Iteration over all invoices Print Templates Order confirmation default 3 3 OrderPositions Iteration over all order items Print Templates Packing slip defaul d x uh die d DeliveryPositions Iteration over all delivery items Print Templates Purchase order default Iteration over all positions of a supplier SupplierOrderPositions P PP Print Templates order Page 274 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements LOOP Statements Table 48 Templates and Corresponding Loop Variables Template Name and Loop Variable Name Description Template Group Basket BasketPositions Iteration over all items of a basket Storefront Templates Bookmark Bookmarks Iteration over all bookmarks Storefront Templates Hot deals Iteration over all products declared as Ti SpecialProducts Storefront Templates HotDeals Non member data form BasketPositions Iteration over all items of a basket Storefront Templates Order Member order information BasketPositions Iteration over all items of a basket Storefront Templates Order Non member order information BasketPositions Iteration over all items of a basket Sto
277. es Non taxable z General Shipping Cost Calculation gross 28 95 0 00 Basket Weight Delete Range Shipping Cost Calculation gross a 0 zo 43 95 025 Basket Weight m 20 so 43 95 035 Basket Weight CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 128 Incremental shipping costs using a weight based model as an example Delete a Shipping Method 1 Select the shipping method by clicking on its name on the Configure Shipping Methods Matrix page Figure 124 The editing page is displayed Figure 126 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK to confirm deletion The shipping method no longer shows on the main page Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 199 Taxes Taxes Settings Manager Depending on tax laws where your business is located you may need to charge tax at different rates for e Customers in different tax jurisdictions e Different classes of products INTERSHOP accommodates the potential complexity of multiple tax jurisdictions product classes and rates As described below if your store uses Net based price calculations you simply enter tax jurisdictions in one drop down menu and tax classes in another then INTERSHOP combines them into a table or matrix where you enter the tax rates INTERSHOP then automatically calculates the applicable tax rate for ever
278. es a link that displays the frame that contains the navigation bar All templates except Print templates HURL_NewStoreFrontSession Creates a link that forces a new storefront session and reloads Home Page All templates except Print templates URL_SearchMask Creates a link that displays a search page All templates except Print templates HURL_Store Creates a link to the store home page 1 www server net cgi bin storename storefront All templates except Print templates Back Office TLE Variables Back office TLE variables are used mostly on print and mail templates to create reports in the back office or to process credit card payments Table 35 Manual Credit Card Handling TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Lists credit card information on a CreditCardRows printed form Used in LOOP Print template Credit Card Data statement ProcessDate Date of credit card transaction Print template Credit Card Data ProcessNo Order number Print template Credit Card Data ProcessSubTotal a e oral inae Donee Print template Credit Card Data discounts shipping cost ProcessTotalPrice ProcessSubTotal all tax Print template Credit Card Data Page 258 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Back Office TLE Variables Table 35 Manual Credit Card Handling TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates
279. es by purchasing the A HREF http URL_Store Search Run Search ProductName Legacy gt lt B gt Legacy G4 XC Mountain Tires lt B gt lt A gt Complete your bike now with tires that will hold up even on the roughest rides ENDIF S Please note the HREF is only split due to limited space SearchProductName is one word and there is no linebreak gt NOTE Please note that the above example uses TLEs product numbers and image directories that are specific to the INTERSHOP demonstration store Sports Place Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced The INTERSHOP Golf Store includes a special usage of Product Attributes and two JavaScripts to cross sell products using pop up windows For example when a shopper adds a particular golf club to a shopping basket a small window pops up advertising complementary clubs This section describes how to duplicate pop up window cross selling functionality in a very basic INTERSHOP store using the Bookstore theme Our example provides the three fundamental elements of the cross selling feature which are A basic sample JavaScript for the Store Homepage template Based on a default template formatted by the Store Design Wizard A basic sample JavaScript for any applicable product templates Based on the Product default template designed by the Store Design Wizard Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 383 Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Adva
280. es require that a mail server SMTP address first be created by the Site Administrator Merchants can then define individual e mail addresses here for order and error related mail Page 50 Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences 2 System Administration BACK SAVE Preferences HELP Mail Preferences Mail Preferences Enable Order Confirmation to Merchant iv Select the checkbox to have an order confirmation email automatically sent to merchants Merchant E mail Address Jyourname yourdomanin com Enter the email address where the merchant order confirmation emails should be sent Reply Address Jyourname yourdomain com This address can be the same as the one entered for the Merchant E mail Address Enable Store Error E mail Select the checkbox to generate an email address when a store error occurs Store Error E mail Address Jyourname yourdornain com Enter the email address where store error messages should be sent Enable Server Side Script Error E mail n Select the checkbox to generate an email address when a server side scripting error occurs Server Side Scripting Error E mail Address Enter the email address where the server side scripting error email should be sent Figure 27 Enable e mail notification on this page E Enable Order Confirmation to Merchant and Merchant E mail Address Check the order confirmation option to receive notification of orders b
281. es where on re importing you will want to replace the TLE variables In the meantime use the editor to format font color and other design elements e After editing re import the templates to INTERSHOP e Exchange live TLE variables for the placeholders and editing is done Upload Files to the Web Server Page 304 In INTERSHOP 4 there are two ways to upload files to the Web Server The method you choose depends on the types of files you are uploading and where you are in the INTERSHOP back office Most files should be uploaded using the link in the Design section of the System Administration Main Menu which allows you to place images and other files directly on the Web server where your store is running You do this over the Internet with a couple clicks of the mouse The File Upload feature on the Attributes page in the Product Manager can only be used to upload files associated with attributes of the multimedia data type See Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes p 148 for more information Chapter 5 Templates INTERSHOP Template Tools Uploading Files from System Administration Upload Files to the Web Server The Upload File to Web Server link is found in the Design section of the System Administration Main Menu l Select Upload File to Web Server from the System Administration Chapter 5 Templates Main Menu INTERSHOP automatically takes you to your store s document root o
282. esult in errors Page 299 Export Templates and Import HTML Files INTERSHOP Template Tools Import an Individual HTML File Open a template whose code you want to overwrite You can export the existing template to your hard drive as a backup before overwriting the original Click Import A Template Import page appears Click Browse to get the Windows File Upload window where you can select a file Click Open in the File Upload window to load the file name Click Import again The contents of your existing template are replaced by the imported code Click Save Click Preview in Browser to see how the code will display as a Web page Tips on Using META Tags on Exported Template Files When working with the files that result from a template export you will see that each file contains a set of META tag headers to identify the template for INTERSHOP All templates must have a complete set of META tags in place to be successfully re imported as a group to INTERSHOP META tags are not needed when working with individual templates Example tag set Page 300 lt META HTTP EQUIV TemplateId CONTENT order META HTTP EQUIV TemplateClass CONTENT OS lt META HTTP EQUIV LanguageId CONTENT 2 gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Name CONTENT Order SelectPaymentMethod w ETA HTTP EQUIV
283. esults 275 281 SpecialProducts 275 SupplierOrderPositions 274 284 TLE Statements 271 ELSE 271 272 273 ENDIF 271 272 273 F 227 230 235 236 237 243 257 261 271 272 213 IF and ELSE Statements 271 IE4 Color 330 INCLUDE 286 287 INCLUDE Statements 271 INCLUDE Statements rules for using 287 LOOP 231 232 236 237 243 247 258 259 260 261 325 381 LOOP Statements 271 LOOP ProductVariation 330 Conditional IF ELSE 271 Example LOOP in Main Level Categories 403 IF statements compare text values 272 IE compare numeric values 272 IF compound conditional 273 INCLUDE Rules for Using 287 Introduced 271 273 LOOP Category Templates valid TLEs 282 LOOP Mail Templates valid TLEs 286 LOOP Order Confirmation valid TLEs 284 590 Print Template Inventory valid TLEs LOOP Print Template Invoice valid TLEs 285 LOOP Print Template Packing Slip valid TLEs 285 LOOP Print Template Purchase Order valid TLEs 284 LOOP Print Template valid TLEs 283 LOOP Statements 273 LOOP Statements in Catalog Templates 403 LOOP Variables and TLEs by Template 275 Loop Variables by Function 275 TLE Variables Back Office 258 Back Office customer print out 259 Back Office inventory print out 259 Back Office invoice print out 261 Page 458 Back Office manual credit card handling 258 Back Office packing slip print out 260 Back Office
284. et Add the following lines of code to product related templates IF NoOfItemsInBasket NE You currently have NoOfItemsInBasket of this product in your basket ENDIF When shoppers click Add To Basket a message on the page displays how many of the product are now in the basket Figure 185 Page 376 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Catalog List Templates Using FORMs in Templates E INTERSHOP Training Store Microsoft Internet Explorer pn moveo login product browser hot deals Aiwa AM FM Stereo basket Enjoy superb 4M FM stereo from a radio small enough to fit in your service pocket soarch R Manufactured by Aiwa In stock 50 items Price 83 440 M store 1 Tell shoppers their You currently have 3 of this product in basket status if you your basket choose not to display the basket f Local intranet zone Figure 185 The training store with message text embedded HidelDisplay Buttons Depending on Basket Status Another way to show the basket status is to suppress the Add To Basket button when a product is already in the basket Similarly you can suppress the Remove From Basket button if the product is not in the basket To use this method edit the code on product related pages as follows NoOfItemsInBasket EQ lt A HREF http URL_AddToBasket gt Add to your basket lt A gt E LSE lt A HREF http URL_RemoveFr
285. et TLELoopStructure PrevBaskets PrevBaskets return Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Example Sample Server Side Script SearchVariation pm SearchVariation _pm This Sever Side Script allows a developer to create their own layout design for offering search parameters on variations Using the typeid and valueid of variations in the database this loop displays all variations in the system through separate drop down menus package SearchVariation require Exporter QISA qw Exporter EXPORT qw SearchVariation use strict use SharedLib Globals uselocal SharedLib Script API qw CreateTLELoop SetTLELoopStructure uselocal SharedLib Product qw ProductVariationValues VariationTypes sub SearchVariation my Stypeid TypesLoop my SValues my STypes VariationTypes foreach Stypeid sort STypes gt a cmp Types gt Sb keys STypes Values ProductVariationValues typeid push TypesLoop gt Stypeid name gt STypes gt S typeid VariationValue gt map id gt value gt Values gt _ sort Values gt a cmp SValues gt b keys SValues CreateTLELoop VariationType Set TLELoopStructure VariationType TypesLoop return Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 437 SearchVariation pm Example Sample
286. ethod Values are automatically derived from Settings Manager Storefront template Basket SelectBox_TaxArea Creates a select list to choose a tax area Values are automatically derived from Settings Manager Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Special Input TLE Variable Input_ProductQuantity This TLE variable is unique in that it also supplies the HIML tags around the input field and therefore should not be used inside an lt INPUT TAG gt The code example below shows how Input_ProductQuantiy is used lt td valign top align left bgcolor FFFFFF gt Input_ProductQuantity lt A HREF http URL_RemoveFromBasket gt lt IMG border 0 SRC StoreImagePath SiteImages bt_remove gif gt lt A gt lt td gt Search TLE Variables A powerful feature in INTERSHOP 4 is the ability to build customized search engines for searching the product database Search input names do not require value TLEs Table 42 Search Input TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Number of first displayed element on a page in a list Example if number of items in a list was set to 5 in Storefront templates Bookmarks FirstNolnBatch System Administration then the value Hot Deals Search Results and List for the first page of search list would template basic be I For the 2nd page the value would be 6 Storefront tem
287. ets and orders Table 20 Service TLE Variables General TLE Variable URL_ChangePassword Description Creates a link to page for changing membership password Available Templates All templates except Print templates HURL_PrevBasketList Creates a link that displays list of previous baskets All templates except Print templates HURL_PrevOrderList Creates a link that displays list of customer s orders All templates except Print templates HURL_Service Creates a link to display Service main page All templates except Print templates Previous Basket TLE Variables Previous Basket TLE variables are used in pages where members can review and or reload previously filled baskets The System Administrator determines whether to display all prior customer baskets or only those which have not yet been ordered Table 21 Previous Basket TLE Variables TLE AIt_PrevTotalPrice Description The total price of the previous order translated into an alternate currency Available Templates Storefront templates only Service List of View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingPrice The total price of shipping for the previous order translated into an alternate currency Storefront templates only Service View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingTotal The total price of shipping the previous order translated into an alternate currency Storefront
288. etting 53 vs Unit of Measure 53 United Nations Standard Product and Services Classification UN SPSC 136 Uploading Files Index Default web server directory preferences 50 Multimedia files for product attributes 148 Web server to 304 User Guide Introduction 11 Overview of the contents 12 When and why to use 11 User Defined TLE Variables See TLE Variables User defined V Variations See Product Variations Visible Option See Products W Welcome 11 Y Year 2000 Compliance 49 Page 459
289. f Store Pine A The INTERSHOP Golf Store features advanced design elernents and extensive cross sell marketing components for a highly effective business to consumer approach ran Storefront Back Office Training Store This INTERSHOP store explains many of the more interesting techniques for effective and efficient store creation through solid examples annotated code and copious comments Site Administration Manage your eCommerce site INTERSHOP Site Administration Storefront Back Office Figure The three demonstration stores included with INTERSHOP 4 seen from the index page Site Administrators when creating new stores for merchants might load one of these demonstration stores for the merchant to explore Alternatively INTERSHOP 4 includes a plain vanilla default store with no pre defined products categories or look and feel elements merchants can then run the Store Design Wizard to apply banners buttons and background colors or can design a look themselves This flexibility means that not everyone sees the same thing the first time they open their store s URL Access the Demonstration Storefronts Page 16 This chapter uses both the Sports Place and the Training Store for examples You can reach the storefronts from any computer via a web browser using the store URL If you do not have direct access to these demonstration stores included on
290. f TLE in Templates Loop Statements LOOP Statements in Catalog Templates Loop Statements LOOP statements are used to list items in the following template sets Catalog templates List templates Storefront templates e Print templates Mail templates LOOP Statements in Catalog Templates Using LOOP statements in Catalog templates prompts the software to list categories or products according to the catalog structure as defined in the Catalog Manager For example the Main level Categories template uses a LOOP statement combined with the loop parameter Categories to display all main level category names When you click on a main category link and the category contains subcategories it will loop those subcategories as shown below Example LOOP in the Main Level Categories Simplified URL Category creates the hyperlink that leads users to a category or list template page displaying category content Use URL_Category in LOOP statement to display a list of the links in the Storefront Use other TLE variables within the loop to display information about the category name description LOOP Categories lt A HREF http URL_Category gt CategoryName lt A gt lt BR gt CategoryDescription lt P gt ENDLOOP How it looks in the Storefront Simple Category Loop Horror From Mary Shelly to Steven King Literature Classics old and new Figure 199 A simple loop of
291. f a Storefront templates only Service previous basket order View a previous basket order ae Tax of the shipping of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order float percent View a previous basket order Sub total of the shipping of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order on Tax of the shipping of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order 7 Existence of a discount of previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order PrevCustName3 Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Page 247 Service TLE Variables Page 248 Table 22 Previous Order TLE Variables TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates ie Ores ee ie ae i ee quur Ingrese ee ee i e ee ee eae ane ee ie PrevShippingtethod Shipping method of a previous basket Storefront templates only Service order
292. f any variation types have been defined the Product Variation Matrix is displayed first From this page select Variation Types to access the Assign Product Variation lypes page Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 153 Product Variations Page 154 Product Manager Product Manager BACK SAYE VARIATION TYPES Assign Product Variation Types 1002 Leather Steering Wheel Cover Assign Variation Types Variation Values v Color Fire Engine Red x v Model 1360 70 classis n sessions April 20th to June 22nd 2000 Size m CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 93 Use this page to assign selected types and values in creating a variation set Note the types listed and examine the Variation Values drop down menu to be sure the types and values needed for the current product have been created To add more types or values click Variation Types and Create a Variation Type and its Values on page 152 After creating new types or values you may need to click Back to return to the Assign Product Variation Types page in order to proceed with the next step On the Assign Product Variation Types page Figure 93 select the checkboxes for all types you want to include in this set of variations For example check Color and Model NOTE Until a type has at least one value
293. fg Data Files dat and Mapping Files to use with Command Line data import see Command Line Data Import on p 111 for more information Your existing files can be selected using the drop down menus provided at each step Page 104 Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Work with Existing Data Import Files Edit or Delete an Existing Data Description File You can change the name and or the other values for any existing Data Description File Select Step 1 Data Description File from the Data Import Tool Menu Figure 56 The Data Import Tool Data Description File page is displayed Figure 57 9f Store Back Office BACK SAVE LOAD DELETE CANCEL PROCEED DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 1 Data Description File Data Description File Existing Data Description File NEW FILE roducts cfi Field Delimiter None Field Separator Semicolon x Record Separator New line T n Header Row M CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 66 Use the drop down menu to select a Data Description file to edit or delete Use the Existing Data Description File drop down menu to select the file you wish to edit or delete The name of the file selected automatically appears in the Data Description File entry field Choose the option you prefer Edit the name of the data descript
294. fic TLEs used with Save TLE Customer TLE variables CustCategoryNo CustLoginName TE CustPaymentMethodlD CustOperatorNo Customer Billing Address TLE variables CustName CustName2 CustName3 CustPhone CustPhone2 CustFax CustEMail CustStreet CustCity CustState CustCountry CustLipCode Customer Shipping Address TLE variables ShippingName ShippingName2 ShippingName3 ShippingPhone ShippingPhone2 T ShippingFax ShippingE mail ShippingStreet ShippingCity ShippingState ShippingCountry ShippingZipCode Basket TLE variables ShippingPrice ShippingTax All Store wide User defined TLE variables are valid Page 420 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions The Formatting Layout Functions The Formatting Layout Functions Use these functions to format number values and to display or decode special characters in the HTML Formatting All formatting output values reflect the settings entered by the merchant on the Regional Settings page in System Administration Table 93 Formatinteger Format an integer value to the current regional settings of the store This affects how commas and points are used i e European format for a thousand 1 000 American format 1 000 Example string Formatlnteger 2 INPUT value An integer value OUTPUT string A string yielding the formatted value Comment Set the Regional Settin
295. fields defined 364 Profile creating 391 Radio Buttons creating with 392 Search forms building 366 Select Boxes creating with 393 SSL secured 373 Free Text Entry 362 Index G Gross Price 66 68 H HHTML Button Visible not visible 310 Homepage INTERSHOP Communications 12 Hot Deals In the storefront 24 Products assigning as 141 vs discounts 141 HTML Authoring tools 304 Introduction 292 HTTP Definition 441 Hybrid HTML 307 TLE variables not to use with 270 I IF Statements 361 Comparison operators 272 Compound conditional 273 Conditional 271 Relational operators 272 Import Catalog Data United Nations Standard Product and Services Classification UN SPSC 136 Import Export Templates See Templates Inventory Adjusting levels preferences 49 Entering manually 162 Entering manually shortcut 144 Minimum assigning to product 142 Minimum purchasing manager and 165 Ordering 166 167 See also Purchase Order Purchase Manager Stock level checking 161 Transactions 164 INVENTORY MANAGER 160 Invoices Generating 181 Partial payments recording on 175 Payments recording on 182 Index Reports on 205 L Languages Back office default selecting 53 Links embedding in templates 375 Storefront default selecting 53 System wide preferences selecting 65 LOOP Statements Empty loops 406 In List Templates 404 In Storefront Templates 405 Product category links producing lists of 374 LOOP Vari
296. finitely For more information on adding wishlists or bookmarks to your own store see Bookmark Product TLE Variables on p 236 and the section entitled Bookmarks Template on p 324 To add a product to a wish list in Sports Place 1 to a product page either by searching or browsing Figure 10 Click My Account to retrieve your FORKS Edge Carbon Forks list Click here to add these forks to your wish list Figure 10 A product page with a wish list link 2 Click the add to wish list link in the lower right corner 3 Your personal wish list is displayed Figure 11 MY ACCOUNT Use the wish list as asket when visiting Sports Place Look for the n every product page You can always add these pr your basket by clicking on the add button You m from your wish list at any time by clicking the remove wish link Enjoy your stay Keenan Edge Carbon Forks This complete package Includes large diameter carbon with a machined crown and 130 00 ADD dropouts remove all wish list items ack Ba Figure 11 A personal wish list 4 Use the links on this page as follows Click on the image to go to the product page Click the trash can to remove a bookmark Click Add to add the product to your basket Click Back to store to return to the Sports Place login screen Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 29 Placing an Order Placing an Or
297. g Address Value CustStreet A Registration Input field for billing address zip code storefront templates Login Non Name_CustZipCode Value CustZipCode member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_LoginName Input field for type of login field i e Storefront login panel registration panel Value LoginName Storefront templates Login Registration Name_NewPassword Input field for a new password on password change page Storefront templates Change Password Credit Card Login Store Password Registration Name_OKButton Creates an OK button buttons do not require a value Storefront templates Change Password Credit Card Store Password Name_OrderComment Input field for the order comment box Value OrderComment Storefront templates Basket Non member Data Order Select Payment Method Name_Password Input field for membership password and old password on password change page Storefront template Change Password Page 263 FORM TLE Variables Page 264 Table 41 Input TLE Variables TLE Variable Name_PasswordConfirmation Description Input field for confirmation of new password on password change page TLE Variables Available Templates Storefront templates Change Password Registration Name_RegisterButton Creates a submit button for new registration buttons do not require
298. g Slip Find the Customer Order Details page if it is not already open See Use the Search Orders Page on page 178 for details on searching for a customer order If no invoice has been generated search for New Orders Otherwise search for Orders Click New Packing Slip The Packing Slip Details page appears Figure 114 INTERSHOP automatically subtracts the product quantities listed on the packing slip from the inventory gt Order Manager BACK PRINT PREVIEW CANCEL Packing Slip Details John Doe Print Template English Packing slip default z 123 Main Street Anytown Anystate 12345 Created on 06 21 00 USA Packing slip no 000621 1001 Order No 000621 1001 Product no Name Qty 1 10700 1 German Language Courses 1 pcs sessions April 20th to June 22nd 2000 ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 114 The Packing Slip Details page To print and mail the packing slip first choose a Print Template and click Print Preview A new browser window with the packing slip print preview appears To make a hard copy select Print form the browser File menu Click the order number to return to the Customer Order Details page A red PS symbol linked to the Packing Slip now appears
299. g this link leads to a display of the basket page or not See Remain on Current Page after Adding Removing Product p 60 and Notify Shoppers of Basket Status p 376 for more detail Available Templates All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_BasketView Creates a link that displays the current basket page All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_ChangeAddress Creates a link that a displays page to enter new shipping address An optional parameter can be added to select what page will display to the customer after the address is submitted Parameters are Basket OrderNow Service and Catalog Example URL_ChangeAddress Service All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_NonMemberCheckout Creates a link that displays the non member registration form Storefront templates Basket Non member Data Order Member Order Information Select Payment Method URL_PlaceOrder Creates a link that triggers the order process All templates except Print and Mail templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Table 25 URL Basket TLE Variables TLE Variables Description URL TLE Variables Available Templates HURL_RemoveFromBasket Creates a link that removes a specific product from the basket Outside the product and list templates add the product ID parameter Example lt A HREF http HURL_RemoveFromB
300. ge Page 316 Another option if you do not use frames is to make the homepage transparent to the shopper passing directly to a catalog or User defined template The Sports Place demo store exemplifies this approach In Sports Place the two part login screen is built on a User defined template When a shopper enters the Sports Place URL in a browser INTERSHOP automatically calls the homepage The homepage contains the HTML Refresh meta tag which specifies that after 0 seconds a User defined template ID number 5 should be called instead lt meta http equiv Refresh content 0 URL http URL_UserTemplate 5 gt Whenever you use such a Refresh the content includes time in seconds followed by the target template It is possible in special cases to enter an INTERSHOP store from another web site by jumping directly to a product catalog search basket with a product or hot deals page without going through the Store Homepage For step by step usage of Direct Storefront Entry see Direct Storefront Entry p 397 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront The Navigation Bar Template The Navigation Bar Template The Store Navigation Bar template in Training Store consists of two parts a Quick Search function at the top of the page and then six links to other storefront pages Registration Hot Deals the customer s Shopping Basket Customer Service an advanced Search Engine an
301. ge eliminating many click steps 1 Follow the steps to Log In as a Retailer on p 35 The main catalog page is displayed Figure 17 2 Select an order number from the Previous Visits section The previous order is loaded in the basket 3 Edit the quantities shipping method or items if needed then click Continue An order review page is displayed Sports Place assumes that retailer re orders are paid on account Therefore it eliminates the payment selection page 4 Click Order now if the order is complete An order confirmation is displayed This two step process uses a server side script To analyze what was used in Sports Place and adapt it for your own purposes view the page source in your browser You can also check the script used in PrevBaskets pm on p 435 for additional information Looking Ahead Page 36 Now that you ve completed this chapter and toured Sports Place you have A starting point for considering the design of your own store An understanding of INTERSHOP s basic Storefront functions from the customer s point of view Bi Helpful contextual information for considering the setup and system setting decisions discussed in the chapters that follow You ll learn more about the features you ve encountered here and about many others in the rest of this Guide Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront CHAPTER 2 System Administration t 2 INTERSHOP 1 When a
302. general format of IF statements Example Check if customer is to pay tax IF IsCustToBeTaxed You must pay tax lt BR gt ELSE You do not need to pay tax lt BR gt ENDIF More complex IF statements can be created using operators that compare one value to another Different operators are used depending on whether the compared values are treated as text or as numbers The following sections describe the different operators used Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 271 HF and ELSE Statements TLE Statements Comparison of Text Values Text strings or text TLE values can be compared using the Comparison operators in the table below These operators only compare text therefore the statement 0 EQ 0 00 would be false the text must be exactly the same Because they only compare text these operators can not tell if one value is greater than another To do a relational comparison see Comparisons of Numeric Values below Table 45 Comparison Operator for Text Values Operator Description EQUAL Performs a case insensitive comparison of the two values and EQ eae returns true if the values are identical NE NOT EQUAL Opposite behavior of EQ IN CONTAINS Checks to see if the value on the left is contained in the value on the right and returns true if it is Example Check Customer Country IF CustCountry NE USA Your order should be delivered within two wee
303. ger Figure 111 A list of orders Page 178 Chapter 3 The Back Office Order Manager Process a New Order 3 Select an order number to begin processing The Customer Order Details page is displayed Figure 112 containing the following elements Customer Name and Address If these fields need to be edited click on the customer name You will jump into the Customer Details page in the Customer Manager make and save your changes there then click Back to return to this customer order Print Template Used for printing order confirmations if desired See Print an Order Confirmation Optional on p 180 for details Payment Method The payment method chosen by the customer in the Storefront appears here but can be changed if necessary NOTE When a customer chooses the payment method Credit card by phone or fax and sends you the information off line the operator needs to enter a credit card number and expiration date on the order page To do so the operator should change the Payment Method from Credit card by phone fax to Direct Entry Credit Card and click Save The order page will refresh to include fields for credit card data which can then be entered and saved Credit Card Number Type and Expiration Date See preceding Note for Payment Method field Operator By default the operator who initiated order processing Can be changed Deactivate Deactivate an order to shelve it w
304. ges made to the HTML of the included nested template are immediately reflected in all host templates The maximum number of nested INCLUDE calls 1 100 allowed by a template is set on the System Preferences page The default value for this option is 10 See System Preferences p 48 for more information The included template supports the full TLE set of the including template Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 287 CHAPTER 5 Templates t 2 INTERSHOP DS Introduction to Template Design Getting Started with Template Design Introduction to Template Design INTERSHOP templates determine how the storefront looks to customers how the product catalog is presented how images and multimedia display and even the look and format of standard shop correspondence such as invoices and order confirmations A single template serves as the basis for displaying many Web pages with the same structure but changing content INTERSHOP 4 provides a variety of pre defined templates built with a combination of standard HTML and the extension language TLE Template Language Extension which permits even novice Web designers to create powerful and dynamic stores Each of these templates can be used as is or customized As explained in the introduction of Chapter 4 INTERSHOP templates work with TLE variables to save time and resources increase the ease and flexibility of store design and also enhance the performance of your
305. gs for a store using the Regional Settings page in System Administration Table 94 FormatFloat Format a float value reflecting the regional settings of the store Example string FormatFloat I 2 Can be used to format weight tax or any other decimal value INPUT value An float value OUTPUT string A string yielding the formatted value Comment Set the Regional Settings for a store using the Regional Settings page in System Administration Table 95 FormatMoney Format a money value reflecting the regional settings of the store Example string FormatMoney 9 99 INPUT value A money value OUTPUT string A string yielding the formatted value Comment Set the Regional Settings for a store using the Regional Settings page in System Administration Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 421 The Formatting Layout Functions The Scripting API Functions Table 96 GetDate GetTime Get the system date or time formatted to the current regional settings of the store Example string GetDate GetTime INPUT value An float value OUTPUT string A string yielding the formatted value Comment Set the Regional Settings for a store using the Regional Settings page in System Administration Layout Table 97 String2HTML Replace all special characters inside the string using HTML entities Example HTML String
306. gure 145 Assign Profile Items to a product Select a profile class from the drop down menu The profile items available under that class appear in the lower scroll window Select the profile item s you want to link to the product Click the Add button The selected profile item s appear in the scroll window in the top half of the page but are not linked to the product until you click Save Click Save Click Back to return to the Product Details page On the Product Details page the now linked items appear in the right column at the bottom Figure 144 Product Manager BACK SAVE Assign Profile to Product Profile settings for Portable Component System with CD Player Assigned Items Gender Female Age Ad Profile Classes Profile Items CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Managing Profiles from the Back Office Figure 146 Link profile to a product Page 215 Managing Profiles from the Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional Delete a Profile Item Link to a Category 2 In the Catalog Manager click on the category Click Assign Profile From the Assigned Items scroll window select the link you wish to unlink Figure 142 Click Delete button The item disappears from the scroll window but is not unlinked until you clic
307. has Broad 19 amp Old Alike to Contemporary Mindset jus Objets d Art or Related Spheres of Ideal for this Style Angles Appeal to Slightly More Appeal for Figure 174 Store Design Wizard Step 3 Page 344 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini Language Section of the Style ini File If a template style includes template sets for multiple languages you must map a directory for each supported language If your template set is only defined for one language specify that language as the default and do not enter any other languages The example below illustrates a template style that is available in English and German Languages default English DE German Table 69 Key Value inputs for the Language section of style ini file Value in Description of Value Example The sub directory name within the Templates directory that contains the template set for that store Languages that do not have a template set assigned to them automatically use default English the default templates set which can only be in one language The default template set can only be in one language each language must have its own template set inside the template style directory folder The sub directory name within the Templates directory which DE German contains the template set used by a specific language In order
308. he FormTagAttributes variable behaves differently depending on the Storefront template in which it is used The Storefront form templates are e Basket Log in panel e Non member Checkout Data form Order Input Credit card entries e Order Select Payment method Edit Profile Registration Data form e Service Change password Shipping Address Store Password Search e Product view if variations exist Forms can be placed on almost all INTERSHOP templates the list above contains only the possible storefront templates NOTE Search FORMS have their own FormTagAttributes called SearchFormTagAttributes See Build a Search Interface p 366 Page 364 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates Using FORMs in Templates To create a form you first place the form tags as follows in a template lt FORM FormTagAttributes gt 1 your form input fields should b ntered her lt FORM gt Between these tags you then enter code to define the input fields Create FORMs Using Input Fields Forms can consist of fill in or input fields INPUT fields have both a NAME a TYPE and sometimes a VALUE attribute There are many TLE variables that can be used for the input NAME see FORM TLE Variables p 261 for a complete list Input TLE variables request input and then transfer the value of the input to another variable For instance in the example below once the custom
309. he case repeat steps 1 and 2 verifying that you have selected the correct field and record separators and that the import file is in plain text format In the Mapping Section you map the file fields defined in your import file listed on the left to the appropriate database field in the drop down menus on the right See Rules for Mapping Data Classes on p 107 for important information about mapping your file In the Default Section you have the option of filling in a default value for the database fields associated with the data class you specified on the Define Mapping File entry page NOTE Review the Rules for Mapping Data Classes on p 107 before beginning this step 1 Verify that the correct Data Description File and Data Files created or selected in Steps and 2 are displayed at the top of the page 2 Enter a name for your mapping file 3 Choose New File from the Existing Mapping File drop down menu The Data Import Tool will automatically add the extension map to the Mapping file name after you have finished defining the file 4 Use the Database Field drop down menus in the right column to match or map the database fields to the file fields listed on the left e You must map a customer product or catalog number in order to create a mapping file Only one file field can be mapped to one database field Any field that is not mapped is automatically ignored and not loaded
310. he product Wuthering Heights Be sure that Wuthering Heights is assigned to the Product default template 3 Click the Attributes button at the top of the Wuthering Heights product data page Reference should be one of the attribute fields that appears 4 Enter the product number product name for the product Jane Eyre see Figure 193 In this case the product number was 1005 5 Save your changes You can now try out the cross selling feature in the storefront Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Product Templates Product Manager BACK SAVE CREATE AND EDIT ATTRIBUTES Product Attribute Values ProductNo 1001 ProductName Wuthering Heights Hide Empty Attributes V Text Attributes reference 1005 Jane Eyre CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY manager manager manager Figure 193 Assign a cross selling value to the attribute Reference Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates SETTINGS manager Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced Page 389 Step 1 Create a Link to a Profile Section with URL_ViewProfile Create and Assign Profiles Create and Assign Profiles Using Profiles you can gather information about customers and then present them with a personalized Storefront where only the categories matching the customer s own specified interests appear The process involves several areas of the INTERSHOP program as shown below E
311. hing feature uses and ensures that the pages displayed in the storefront are fresh Clearing the cache does not affect your template selections or reset your page caching preferences How often the cache needs to be cleared is directly correlated to the volume of traffic in a store Select Templates for Page Caching Template selection occurs in two ways Bi De selecting Catalog List Product or User defined templates By default all are selected for caching and you must un check the boxes by any templates you don t want cached NOTE Be aware that User defined templates that are used for Direct Storefront Entry should not be selected for Page Caching E Selecting Storefront templates A limited number of Storefront templates can be selected for caching Chapter 5 Templates Page 309 Select Templates for Page Caching Page Caching Page 310 Both selecting and de selecting are done in the Templates section of System Administration as follows Click the Templates link on the System Administration Main Menu The Templates page is displayed Figure 161 29 System Administration BACK OPEN TEMPLATE GROUP USER DEFINED TLE IMPORT EXPORT TEMPLATE SELECT TEMPLATES TO CACHE HELP Templates Language English Template Group User Defined Templates Cartridge Templates SETTINGS manager PRODUCT manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager CATALOG ma
312. hn Doe 990618 1006 06 18 99 558 38 990618 1008 John Doe 990618 1005 06 18 99 64 90 990618 1007 Jacques Beulieu 990618 1004 06 18 99 64 90 990618 1006 Jacques Beulieu 990618 1003 06 18 99 64 90 990618 1005 John Doe Non ordered 06 18 99 64 90 990618 1004 John Doe 990618 1002 06 18 99 64 90 990618 1003 John Doe 990618 1001 06 18 99 64 90 990618 1002 Kitty Howler Non ordered 06 18 99 214 90 990618 1001 John Doe Non ordered 06 18 99 1 514 90 9 of 9 Baskets have been found Displaying matches 1 9 ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager CATALOG manager Figure 115 A list of baskets generated from a search in the Order Manager Send a Follow Up Letter 2 Search baskets and open a Basket Details page as described on p 185 Choose a Print Template to print a follow up letter The INTERSHOP sample follow up letter Figure 116 includes a full description of the items in the basket To customize the message on this letter see Template Groups in Detail Print amp Mail on page 333 Click Print Preview The print preview window appears Select Print from your browser commands Close the print preview window to return to the basket page A record of each Print is automatically generated and appears at the bottom of the Basket Details page where it remains for your review Chapt
313. hod defined in step 5 See User Defined TLEs p 267 for instructions 7 Add the following lines to the Basket template Note If your store is available in multiple languages you must add these lines to the template set for each language Table 124 Calling Shipping pm from the Basket Template BEGIN use Shipping BASKET ShippingCalc after the line ELSE lt Rowcount gt 0 pping END 8 Edit the price matrix field within the Shipping pm module NOTE Be sure to set the weight attributes of all products to a valid value in the Product Manager Page 432 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Example Sample Server Side Script Shipping pm Example Sample Server Side Script The scripts in the next sections are used in the INTERSHOP 4 demonstration stores and should only be viewed as an example of the sort of scripts you could develop for your store Most of these scripts were written and configured specifically for Sports Place and can not be copied into your store as is INTERSHOP Technical Support does not support implementing these scripts into individual stores Shipping pm A sample server side script for calculating shipping cost based on weight Package Shipping require 5 000 require ISA EXPORT USE Str EXpo qw qw ict rter Exporter CalculateShipping use SharedLib Script API sub CalculateShipping Check for existence of TLE Shi
314. hone Name_ShippingPhone r Shipping Phone 2 Name_ShippingPhone2 r O Shipping Fax Name_ShippingFax E EF Shipping email 4 Name ShippingEMail Ln Ln Shipping Country Name_ShippingCountry r Shipping State Name_ShippingState Tax Area SelectBox_TaxArea Ft E e Figure 35 Body of Customer Registration Preferences page Password Required top of the page Check password required if you will require a password for membership registration This field does not affect the Non Member Checkout option Mandatory Fields for Members M Fields checked in the M column are considered Mandatory for members using the membership Registration page INTERSHOP will not accept the Storefront Registration page until the customer completes all fields marked Mandatory Fields for Non Members NMC If you do not enable Non Member Checkout then the NMC column does not appear on this page If you have enabled Non Member Checkout then any fields checked in this column are made mandatory for non members See Order Preferences Non Member Checkout on p 61 for more information NOTE When changing the status of a mandatory field don t forget to edit your templates to display an asterisk or other mark that shows your customers which fields are required Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Page Caching Preferences WB Unique Identity Check The fields designated in the I
315. hop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport error log ok Figure 63 The Data Import Tool Monitor page allows you to watch the import process Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Possible Errors Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Tool Step by Step When the import process is complete the Data Import Tool Status page listing the results of your import is displayed Figure 64 Zi Store Back Office CLOSE DATA CACHE RESET DISPLAY ERROR LOG REFRESH DATA IMPORT TOOL Status Import completed After an import enforce a DATA CACHE RESET if you did not choose an automatic reset In case of not imported or incompleted records press the DISPLAY ERROR LOG button Validated records Rejected records 20 1 Removed Pages and Directories Started At Current Time End Time Intershop Build Operating System Database Version Import OF Store Database Database User Import Mode Insert Mode Start At Row Delete Data File After Import Delete Cached Pages Completely After Import Directory Description File Error File Data Cache Reseted Exit Code 15 3 55 5 22 99 15 3 56 5 22 99 15 3 56 5 22 98 15Mb1249 MSWina2 Adaptive Server Enterprise 11 9 2 1031 P NT 1X86 OS 3 51 4 0 FBU Fri Aug 14 01 42 41 1998 product screenshot validate replace 2 FALSE TRUE Ci fintershop Data shome screenshot Datalmport CifIntershop Datafishomejscreensh
316. iable that displays the IP address of the user All templates except Print templates TEREMOTE HOST A CGI environment variable that displays the remote internet host name All templates except Print templates T REMOTE USER CGI environment variable that displays the remote user name All templates except Print templates HSessionID Unique session id to identify the current user and session All templates except Print templates Page 257 Back Office TLE Variables Table 34 Session TLE Variables TLE Variable SessionHasExpired StorelmagePath expired and a new session started The home page is always displayed in this case Otherwise the value is 0 false Used with IF statement NOTE If page caching is enabled all cached storefront pages are still available even after sessions have expired ee eee Path location where images are located Set by the Site Administrator LEA TLE Variables Storefront template Store Homepage All templates URL_ChangeLanguage Creates a link that when used without a parameter EN DE etc displays the default language If you have installed an INTERSHOP Language Pack use the 150 country code to set the parameter All templates except Print templates URL_Login Creates a link that displays member customers login page All templates except Print templates URL_NavigationFrame Creat
317. ice Be H Rules Fixed Price Rules 1 March 6th to May 8th 2000 Midnight Blue 45 00 Additional Price Rules CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager Figure 96 Add remove and apply variation rules on this page Remove Variation Rules To remove any rules applied to a variation set 1 Access the Variation Create and Edit Rules page Figure 96 Do this either by creating a new variation set see Assign Types and Values to Create Variations on p 158 or by clicking Define Rules on the Product Variation Matrix page of already created variations Figure 95 2 Any rules defined for this variation set appear in the list with a Remove Rule button on their left Figure 96 3 Click Remove Rule on all rules to be removed 4 Click Apply Rules Your changes will be reflected in the variation set Delete Products from the Database 1 Search for products using the Search Products page click Product Manager on the navigation bar 2 Select the product to be deleted by clicking on the product number in the resulting list The Product Details page for that product is displayed 3 On the Product Details page click Delete 4 A dialog box appears click OK to confirm the deletion The dialog will warn you if thi
318. ice This special store provides informative comments regarding basic store concepts template usage and options like conditional or rule based presentation of content at the bottom of the store page you re viewing In some cases you will get a brief overview at the top of the page search store When appropriate you will find a HELP button that will lead you to more detailed information and assistance Please also reference the documentation provided with your INTERSHOP product For more help visit the INTERSHOP Support site Electronics Example of Catalog basic Template Sports Example of Catalog enhanced Template Lanquage Courses Example of a List basic Template list has no sub categories Automobile Supplies Automotive Accessories and Supplies Entertainment Options Everything you need to liven up your commute Mass Transit Rider Supplies for Mass Transit Riders hot deals 2MB Psion Series 3A Psion Series 3a pocket PC only 521 69 Aiwa AM EM Stereo AM FM stereo radio small enough to fit in your pocket only 83 44 The purpose of this store is to demonstrate standard INTERSHOP functionality Access the Main Category Level Figure 71 A main category level in a Storefront Access the Main Category Level Chapter 3 The Back Office When you click the Catalog Manager button the Main Level Categories or root page of the catalog hierarchy
319. ick Save The suggestion now becomes a purchase order and the New Supplier Order form appears Figure 104 If you have activated the Record Upon Order option in System Preferences see System Preferences on page 48 then the Inventory Manager now considers the product in this order as stock on hand Purchasing Manager BACK SAVE New Supplier Order Gagets amp Gizmos 06 25 99 123 Main St Anyville ca 12345 usa Phone 123 555 0977 Product no Qty Product Wholesale price Tax Net y 1008 1 30 Commuter Stereo 50 00 0 00 1 500 00 sessions March 6th to May 8th 2000 Color Fire Engine Red 7 1008 2 30 Commuter Stereo 50 00 0 00 1 500 00 sessions March 6th to May 8th 2000 Color Metallic Yellow m 1008 3 30 Commuter Stereo 50 00 0 00 1 500 00 sessions March 6th to May 8th 2000 Color Midnight Blue CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 104 Sample purchase order form to a supplier From the Print Template drop down menu choose the format to print your purchase order INTERSHOP includes two different print styles To customize a Print template see Template Groups in Detail Print amp Mail on page 333 Click Save if you change the template or operator from the default Click Print Preview
320. ience served by your INTERSHOP store Figure 28 System Administration BACK SAYE Regional Settings Drop down menu Business Administration Language ean s Language used in INTERSHOP Business Administration English module Storefront Language egi x The default language of the INTERSHOP storefront English Unit of Weight Ibs H contains Units of both This unit of weight vill be the default value for products in your store Choose a weight value only Date Style m The format for date display and entry For formats with mmddyy 2 digits year see also the split date in the system preferences Weight and Measure Choose Unit of Weight here Currency Format Settings in this section determine the currency format The x denotes the selected currency symbol Decimal Point Separator for Groups of Digits Number of Decimal Digits Number of Figures in Groups of Negative Amounts xd Positive Amounts xii zx Decimal digit where floating point numbers are rounded 0 5 Number Display The format for integer number and floating point number display and entry Decimal Point k Separator for Groups of Digits Number of Decimal Digits Number of Figures in Groups Ek su Decimal Fractions with Leading Zeros 01 z Negative Amounts d E Decimal digit where floating point numbers are rounded 0 5 Time Style The format for time display and entry Display Time
321. ill be overwritten by this basic default code which can then be Saved like any other template change The Revert to Default command is a safety feature ensuring that template functionality is always retained and can be re instated no matter how drastically a template has been changed NOTE In some cases demonstration store templates have been given names such as Product default or Category default Be aware that the design of these templates is not necessarily the same as the design provided when you use the Revert to Default command Chapter 5 Templates Page 303 HTML Authoring Tools to Edit Templates INTERSHOP Template Tools HTML Authoring Tools to Edit Templates INTERSHOP is compatible with a variety of third party Web authoring tools such as Microsoft FrontPage and Homesite which allow you to design your Web pages visually without worrying about the HTML You create the look you want and the tool generates HI ML for you behind the scenes To work with an external editor it is helpful to Install the HTML editing program before installing INTERSHOP First replace any existing TLE variables in your template with static placeholders for example replace ProductPrice with a fixed number such as 10 00 Then export the templates as described in the section Export Templates and Import HTML Files p 298 When you open the files in an editor you will see the static placeholders you created in the plac
322. ills to customers Order Manager p 176 Three types of Print templates are used for in house records only Customers For printing out a customer s data sheet Customer Manager p 169 You can print an abridged or complete customer data page with the two templates included Inventory For printing the current inventory in your store Inventory Manager p 160 Manual Credit Card Reports For formatting direct entry credit card data for processing default code is in the appropriate format for ICVerify systems See also Settings Manager p 187 Chapter 5 Templates Page 333 Definition of a Template Style Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Store Design Wizard SDW allows you to design the look and feel of your INTERSHOP Storefront using one of the dozens of ready made designs included with your INTERSHOP program Each design offers a choice of color schemes navigation button styles and banner and header images that you can mix and match to produce a custom look for your store You can further customize the look and feel of the stores you create with the SDW using your own images to modify the existing template styles Advanced users can create completely new template style sets based on stores created in INTERSHOP This section provides A brief definition of a template style including an explanation of the style ini file Asummary of the templat
323. ing API Functions Table 122 DBNextRow Fetch the next result row from the database after executing an SQL statement that retrieved a value or information of some kind Note If there are multiple rows use a while loop Do not use select from table Example row DBNextRow SQL select nr name from products Perl row 0 will contain the number of the last fetched result row I contains the name of the product INPUT row A result row as values in an array OUTPUT Comment The order of the values in the retrieved list corresponds to the order in the SQL statement If no results exist it returns undef Table 123 DBDisconnect Disconnect from the database Example DBDisconnect INPUT Name of database The name of the connected database OUTPUT Comment This function closes an open database connection Page 430 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Using Server Side Script Examples The Database Access Functions Using Server Side Script Examples The instructions in this section are only for implementing the example SSS Shipping pm referenced at the end of this chapter This script can be obtained by searching the INTERSHOP Knowledge Base for User Guide Example SSS The Knowledge Base is located in the Technical Support section of the INTERSHOP web site The other Server Side Scripts listed at the end of this chapter are c
324. ing your image and template files into the directory structure required by the Store Design Wizard Figure 171 Simple Template Style The quickest and easiest way to create a new template style for the SDW is to replace the images of an existing template style with your own image files The new style will feature your banner button and header image files along with your color choices in the original template design structure 1 Copy one of the SDW styles from Intershop data Ishome styles directory to your hard drive The directory structure and style ini of this template is the foundation you use to build your new template style Page 336 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Create New Template Styles Chapter 5 Templates Rename the copied directory with the name of your new template style Rename your banner header and button image files to match the filenames used by the current style template Renaming your image files to match the names in the Banner Button and Header folders reduces the number of changes you need to make to the style ini file Replace the banner button and header files in the Banners Buttons and Headers folders with your own image files Each Banners Buttons and Headers folder belongs to one scheme defined for the template style Each scheme must have its own set of folders Create or delete folders in the template style directory to match the number of s
325. ion file in the entry field and or adjust the other values then click Save Click Delete to delete the selected file Click Save when you are finished making your changes The file with the new name and settings is listed in the drop down menu You do not need to click Load when working with existing files Click Next to go to Step 2 Upload file and upload your file to your Web server Click Back to return to the Data Import Tool Menu Chapter 2 System Administration Page 105 Work with Existing Data Import Files Data Import Create a New Mapping File for an Existing Data Description or Data File Page 106 It is possible to create additional mapping files using existing Data Description and Data Import files Select Step 3 Define Mapping File on the Data Import Tool Menu page The Define Mapping File page is displayed Figure 59 Vf Store Back Office BACK SAVE LOAD DELETE CANCEL DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 3 Mapping File Data Description File products x Data File changeirene txt dat menus to select Use drop down data description Existing Mapping je NEW FILE E file and data Suggest Mapping for Data Class dict map file to create a new mapping file CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 67 Create a new mapping file using existing
326. ion loop variables ProductVariation VariationType_sessions Variation variables IsVariation_sessions VariationProduct_CHECKED VariationProduct_SELECTED VariationSelect_sessions VariationType_sessions Variation Value_sessions Variation Value_sessions_CHECKED VariationValue_sessions_ID Variation Value_sessions_SELECTED Product attribute variables Color Image LongDescription Size Figure 188 Product Attribute Variables section of the TLE list panel 2 Select the TLE variable you wish to insert into the product template The Edit TLE Panel is displayed An example of code featuring the selected TLE appears in this panel Figure 189 Here is the sample code given in the panel IF Size Size Size ENDIF CLOSE SAVE HELP TEMPLATES Available TLEs Edit Alt_Currency Symbol Applies the symbol DM etc for the currently selected alternate currency Example Order total price Alt_TotalPrice Alt_CurrencySymbol Preview content Figure 189 The Available TLEs Edit Panel with sample code 3 Insert the code containing the TLE variable into the HTML of the product template Create your own code using the TLE variable or run a test using the example code in the Available TLEs Edit Panel Figure 189 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Product Templates Display Product Variations 4 Click Save Sample code for a prod
327. ion of System Administration See Search Result Preferences on page 55 A 2 Product Manager SEARCH NEW PRODUCT YARIATION TYPES CLEAR FORM Search Products Product no Product Manufacturer E category H H Supplier E skus Main SKUs x Visible at storefront Yes No C Both Hot Deals Yes C No C Both Assigned toa Catalog Yes C No C Both ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 82 Product Manager Search Products page Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 137 Search for Existing Products Product Manager Generate a List of All Products in the Database 2 Leave all fields blank Select Sub SKUs from the SKU drop down menu Searching Sub SKUs will display all product variations individually in the search results For example a T shirt offered in 3 sizes and 2 colors will be listed 6 times once for each variation To view only the main products select Main SKUs See Product Variations on p 151 for more information on variations Leave radio buttons selected for Both Click Search From the resulting list select a product number to view the Product Details page Search for Specific Products Refine a search using the following paramete
328. ippingPrice PriceByWeight TotalWeight return xsub PriceByWeight x my Weight shift x return 23 99 if SWeight gt 50 return 17 99 if SWeight gt 40 return 12 95 if Weight gt 30 return 8 99 if SWeight gt 20 return 6 00 if SWeight gt 10 return 3 00 if SWeight gt 5 return 2 00 if Weight gt 1 return 1 00 Page 434 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Example Sample Server Side Script PrevBaskets pm PrevBaskets pm This Server Side Script is used to display previous baskets that have been purchased during a previous storefront session When a user clicks on a basket link that this script generated they will immediately have those items loaded into their basket This script was used to create the two click business to business purchase solution featured in Sports Place Contact your Site Administrator or the INTERSHOP web site www intershop com products to see how PrevBaskets pm works in the storefront package PrevBasket require Exporter QISA qw Exporter EXPORT qw GetPrevBaskets use strict use SharedLib Globals uselocal SharedLib Script API qw ExistsTLE GetTLE DBConnect DBDoSQL DBNextRow DBDisconnect CreateTLELoop SetTLELoopStructure uselocal SharedLib Calculation qw RoundPrice uselocal SharedLib Regionals qw FormatOutput uselocal SharedLib DBInterface qw str2database u
329. isplay to customer after address is submitted Parameters are Basket OrderNow Service and Catalog example URL_ChangeAddress Service All templates except Print templates URL_NonMemberCheckout Creates a link that displays non member checkout data form Storefront templates Basket Non member Data Form Member Order Information Select Payment Method URL_Register Creates a link that displays member registration page All templates except Print templates Table 10 Customer Related TLE Variables Shipping TLE Variable Description Available Templates ShippingCity Shipping address city All templates ShippingCountry Shipping address country All templates ShippingEMail Shipping address email address All templates ShippingFax Shipping address fax number All templates ShippingMethod Method of shipping for order All templates The identifier for the ShippingMethod used in the database Because the ShippingMethod variable contains the SUM name of the shipping method in any slipped language and can be changed in the pe back office ShippingMethodID should always be used as a reference inside Server Side Scripts ShippingName Shipping address full name All templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Customer TLE Variables Table 10 Customer Related TLE Variables Shipping TLE Variable Description A
330. ister v registration page Mail templates Table 29 URL Product TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Creates a link that displays list of all URL_HotDeals products marked as Hot Deals in Product Manager All templates except Print and Mail templates URL to view information about the URL_CachedProductView product Use only if the related template is cached All templates except Print and Mail templates Creates a link that displays a specific product page Outside the product and URL_ProductView list templates add the product ID All templates except Print and parameter Example lt A Mail templates HREF http URL_ProductView 10354 gt HURL SearchMask Creates a link that displays a All templates except Print and search page Mail templates Page 254 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Table 30 URL Profile TLE Variables TLE Variable URL_ActivateProfile Description Creates a link that activates a customer profile and displays it URL TLE Variables Available Templates All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_DeactivateProfile Creates a link that deactivates a customer profile All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_EditProfile Creates a link that displays page to edit existing profile All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_NewProfile Creates a lin
331. ithout deleting it from the database Some merchants deactivate orders when they are completely processed as described in Deactivate Completed Order Optional on p 184 Shipping Cost Shipping methods and their associated costs are set up in the Settings Manager see Create a New Shipping Method on page 194 for details and chosen by the customer in the Storefront but operators can use this field to change an individual shipping fee if necessary Created on The date the order was created Payment Terms This field is not used by the system I and PS Columns The I for Invoice and PS for Packing Slip columns are initially blank Once an invoice and packing slip have been created then an link and a PS link will appear next to each product that was included on the invoice or packing slip If you do not want a product to appear on an invoice or packing slip e g when on back order you can deselect the O box for that product Later you can re activate the O box and create a new invoice or packing slip for the late shipping items Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 179 Process a New Order Order Manager Profit Profit by INTERSHOP automatically calculates these values if the merchant has entered wholesale and retail values when defining products in the Product Manager See Create a New Product on page 140 for details NOTE If your store uses the Gross price model the Profit
332. itself rather than in a separate template To implement this refinement use the TLE variable ErrorMessage as in the code example below IF ErrorMessage lt FONT COLOR FFFFFF SIZE 2 gt lt B gt ErrorMessage lt B gt lt FONT gt ENDIF When you insert this code at the top of one of the three permitted templates INTERSHOP will automatically display error messages for the particular errors listed below As you see the ErrorMessage variable behaves different on each template Chapter 5 Templates Page 321 Registration and Checkout Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront B ErrorMessage the Registration Member Data Form The following errors are detected and associated messages displayed e Password too short Password confirmation failed e Password contained spaces Duplicate registration e Customer identification failed Incomplete registration form E ErrorMessage on the Non Member Data Form The following errors are detected and associated messages displayed Incomplete registration form In this case an incomplete non member data form E ErrorMessage on the Shipping Address Form The following errors are detected and associated messages displayed e Customer identification failed Incomplete registration form In this case an incomplete shipping address form Page 322 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront Service Templates Service Temp
333. ity and cannot be duplicated or deleted from the system Storefront templates can be edited but cannot be created or deleted from the system And although there are many of them their functions fall into a few simple clusters as shown in Table 66 Storefront Templates The Storefront Templates section covers the following individual Storefront templates The Store Homepage Template The Navigation Bar Template The Basket Template The Registration Checkout Templates The Service Templates Other Storefront Templates Open the Storefront Templates Open the Storefront Templates in the Training Store to begin customizing your store design 2 Chapter 5 Templates Access Templates as described in Access Create and Delete Templates p 295 Select Storefront Templates from the Template Group list box The Storefront Templates list page is displayed You will find the 30 templates in an alphabetical list Table 66 Storefront Templates contains the same template list organized into logical clusters Table 66 Storefront Templates TEMPLATES DESCRIPTION Start Page Related Storefront Templates Start page of the Storefront Store homepage demo stores used to split frames Store navigation bar Navigation bar in demo stores displayed in a separate frame Store closed Page visible if Storefront is locked or store is not activated Basket Order Related Storefront Templates Basket Displays a customer
334. ity to apply a graphical style to your store After running the Store Design Wizard use the links on the System Administration Main Menu to complete the essential setup tasks of setting general preferences and setting up payment methods This section explains how to e Access the back office p 41 e Log In as System Administrator p 41 The first time you login you should change the default System Administrator s password Run the Graphical Store Design Wizard p 43 Set General Preferences p 48 e Create Your Own Payment Methods p 76 Once you have completed the tasks above you can continue setting up using the seven Managers in the back office See the section titled The Back Office on p 117 NOTE You may elect to have a Web graphics specialist assist you with template design while you perform the other setup tasks in the back office and in System Administration Chapter 2 System Administration Use System Administration First Time Access the Back Office Access the Back Office To access the System Administration Main Menu you must first call up the back office login panel This panel is used to access the back office and if you use the System Administrator login and password the System Administration Main Menu To reach the back office login panel from any computer via a Web browser 1 Open the browser and type the Administration URL in the address line The default format is http lt serverna
335. k Save Click Save Click Back to return to the category page The unlinked item no longer appears in the right column at the bottom of the page Delete a Profile Item Link to a Product 2 Page 216 Search for the product in the Product Manager Click on the product number The Product Details page appears Figure 144 Click Assign Profile From the Assigned Items scroll window select the item you want to unlink Click Remove button The item disappears from the scroll window but is not unlinked until you click Save Click Save Click Back to return to the Product Details page The deleted item no longer appears in the right column at the bottom of the page Chapter 3 The Back Office The Customer Profiles Feature Optional View and Edit a Customer s Profile Managing Profiles from the Back Office 1 In the Customer Manager search for the customer 2 Select the customer number from the search results The Customer Details page is displayed At the bottom of the page all available profile classes are displayed Figure 147 Customer Manager BACK SAVE NEW CUSTOMER DEFINE PROFILE ACCOUNT INFORMATION PRINT PREVIEW DELETE Customer Details Name Jacques Beulieu Customerno 1004 Comments E 0 2 Login Pacques Beaulieu Account Balance 73 01 Password Password Conf Category New Customer z Deactivat
336. k Levels Check Current Stock Levels 1 Click Inventory Manager to view the Search Inventory page Figure 97 Leave the search fields blank to check stock levels for all products or select a date range operator name product number or comment to limit the search 2 Click Stock Levels on the command bar A report of stock levels for all products matching your search criteria appears Figure 98 E 5 Inventory Manager BACK PRINT PREVIEW Stock Levels ProductNo Product In Stock Reserved Ordered Min Quantity 10328 Aiwa AM FM Stereo 50 o o 10 10330 1 2MB Psion Series 3A 20 o o 10 10330 2 2MB Psion Series 3A 20 o o 10 10335 Body bridge 50 o o 10 10338 HealthRider Home Pro Chrome 50 o o o 10348 Improved 512K Wizard 50 o o o 10352 Sharp Zaurus 50 o o 10 10354 1 AIWA Blaster CD Radio Cassette Recorder 20 o 0 0 10354 2 AIWA Blaster CD Radio Cassette Recorder 20 o 0 0 10700 1 German Language Courses 50 o o 0 Displaying items 1 10 a out of 22 CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 98 Stock levels report 3 For each product name and number the stock levels report details In Stock The current quantities in stock Reserved The amount of product already ordered by customers but not yet shipped to them no packing slip has been created Ordered The amount of product curren
337. k that displays page to create a new profile All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_SaveProfile Creates a link that saves an edited or new profile All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_ViewProfile Creates a link so that if a customer doesn t have a profile yet the template Profile new is displayed explaining how profiles work If the customer already has a profile Profile view is displayed All templates except Print and Mail templates Table 31 URL Service TLE Variables TLE Variable URL_ChangePassword Description Creates a link that displays page to change membership password Available Templates All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_LoadBasket Creates a link that reloads a previous basket into the current basket Used in View previous basket template Storefront templates Service List of View a previous Basket Order HURL_PrevBasket Creates a link that displays a previous basket Used with PrevBasketNo in List of previous baskets template Storefront template Service List of previous basket HURL_PrevBasketList Creates a link that displays list of previous baskets All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_PrevOrder Creates a link that displays a previous customer order To be used with PlacedOrderNo in List of previous orders template Storefront tem
338. ket T fio 00 CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER Figure 127 Fixed range shipping costs using an item based model as an example B Weight Ranges with Incremental Increases within the Range To establish a shipping rate table where a base price is always charged and a price per unit of weight the example uses integers however fractional weights can be specified is added within various ranges Table 7 Sample with Incremental Price Ranges Cost Range to Specify Weights in Range Incremental 0 20 Ibs 3 95 0 25 weight 0 19 Ibs 20 50 Ibs 3 95 0 35 weight 20 49 Ibs gt 50 lbs general shipping cost 3 95 25 00 50 Ibs or more 1 Create a weight based shipping method and add two ranges as described in Edit a Shipping Method on p 196 2 In the General Shipping Calculation enter 28 95 0 00 basket weight 28 95 base price 3 95 incremental cost 25 00 Page 198 Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Shipping Methods 3 In the Range fields enter 0 to 20 3 95 0 25 basket weight 20 to 50 3 95 0 35 basket weight 4 Click Save Figure 128 shows the completed page lt 4 o Settings Manager BACK SAVE DELETE ADD RANGE SET UP SHIPPING METHOD Edit Shipping Method Name Weigh Based Shipping Language English zl ID 8 Calculation Model Basket Weight Tax Class
339. ket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service PROC basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order The discount applied to the previous Storefront templates only Service ZR basket order View a previous basket order PrevOrderDate The creation date of a previous order STET templates oniy pene List of View a previous order Storefront templates only Service PrevOrderNo The number of the previous order List of View a previous basket order Flag indicating whether a previous Storefront templates only Service PrevShelved basket order is shelved deactivated or List of View a previous basket not order PrevshippingMethod Shipping method of a previous basket Storefront templates only Service order View a previous basket order PrevShippingMethodName Name of the shipping method of a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service View a previous basket order Price of the shipping method of a Storefront templates only Service PrevShippingPrice previous basket order View a previous basket order PrevShippingTax ne sence ee mis PrevShippingTotal PaL ae vin PrevShippingSubTotal A TOR nes ee PrevShippingTotalTax Shipping t
340. klevel ltemNo ProductStockLevelMin ProductName ProductStocklevelOrdered ProductNo ProductStockLevelReserved AddProductDescription Table 64 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Invoice Print template with the loop variable InvoicePositions Table 64 Print Template Invoice Uses variable Alt_ProductNetPrice FEAIt_ProductSubTotal FAlt_ProductlotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalTax ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice ProductQuantity ProductSubTotal Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 285 INCLUDE Statements Table 64 Print Template Invoice TLE Statements Uses LOOP variable InvoicePositions DiscountPercent lsProductVariation ltemNo ProductDescription ProductName ProductlaxAmount ProductlotalPrice ProductTotalTax UnitO Measurement Table 65 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Customer and Merchant Order Confirmation Mail templates with the loop variable OrderPositions Table 65 Mail Templates Customer Merchant Order Confirmation Uses LOOP variable ZOrderPostions AIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice AIt_ProductSubTotal HAlt_ProductlotalPrice ProductQuantity Alt_ProductTotalTax ProductSubTotal DiscountPercent ProductlaxAmount ltemNo ProductlotalPrice ProductDescription Productlotallax ProductName ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice INCLUD
341. ks BR ELSE Your order should be delivered within five business days lt BR gt ENDIF Comparisons of Numeric Values Use the relational operators below to compare the numeric value of items The values cannot contain any non numeric characters If a TLE variable generates values with non numeric characters such as currency symbols then add the parameter Value to return only the numeric portion of the value For example the TLE BasketTotalPrice returns a value including a currency symbol such as the dollar sign To compare it to another value add Value after the TLE name to return the number without a dollar sign ffBasketIotalPrice Value Table 46 Relational Operators Operator Description Less than gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to Equal to Compares the actual numeric value not the text For instance 100 100 I would be true but 100 EQ 100 1 would not be true lt gt Not equal Compares the actual numeric value not the text Page 272 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements LOOP Statements Example Check if customers spend more than 100 00 BasketTotalPrice_ Value gt 100 You are entitled to 10 off your next purchase lt BR gt ENDIF Compound Conditional Statements A compound conditional statement combines multiple conditional statements with Boolean
342. ks for shoppers to change to any of three alternate languages German French or Spanish lt when using a frameset it is important to set the right target for this link since the frameset need to be rebuild with the new language using the wrong target could result in a store in a store gt lt HREF http URL_ChangeLanguage DE TARGET _parent gt Change the language to German lt A gt amp nbsp A HREF http URL_ChangeLanguage FR TARGET 2 parent Change the language to French lt A gt amp nbsp A HREF http URL_ChangeLanguage SP TARGET _parent gt Change the Language to Spanish lt A gt Notify Shoppers of Basket Status The System Administrator may have chosen that the Add To Basket and Remove From Basket functions do not automatically display the basket page This is done to remove click steps and simplify the storefront shopping procedure See System Preferences p 48 for details on setting this option If you skip showing the basket until the order is placed or the shopper clicks the Basket link then you may want to assure shoppers that the item was successfully added to the basket without necessitating another click step There are many ways to do this including adding JavaScript alerts etc Below are two simple template edits that allow a shopper to monitor the basket without viewing it directly Show if the Current Product is in the Bask
343. l any open orders associated with the customer 3 Click Delete again click OK on the final confirmation box Record Transactions in Customer Accounts Every customer has an account governed by the INTERSHOP system outstanding invoices are subtracted from the balance while payments are added Each time money is moved in or out of the account an account transaction is recorded and stored by the Customer Manager Most of the time itis unnecessary to handle account transactions directly operators simply generate invoices and mark them paid in the Order Manager while the account balance is adjusted automatically However in a few cases you may want to modify account transactions These cases include e Correct an Account Transaction Error e Record Incremental Payments on an Invoice Correct an Account Transaction Error 1 Open a Customer Details page as described in p 173 2 Click Account Information The Customer Account Details page with the customer s account history appears Figure 108 The current account balance and credit limit show at the top of the page Transactions recording money withdrawn from or deposited to the account are listed at the bottom of the page If applicable a transaction is linked to an invoice number f 5 Customer Manager BACK NEW TRANSACTION Customer Account Details Name Jacques Beulieu Account Balance 73 01 Store Credit 500 00 Account Trans Invoice N
344. lTax TEURL Service ProductWeight TEURL Store Protocol URL_UserTemplate SearchFormlagAttributes SearchFormTagAttributesSSL URL_ViewBookmarks HURL_ViewProfile T SessionlD UnitOfMeasurement StockLevel VariationProduct_CHECKED StockLevelReserved VariationProduct_SELECTED StorelmagePath VariationValue_Color HURL_ActivateProfile URL_AddBookmark HURL_AddToBasket VariationValue_Components VariationValue_Size Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements Search Results and List Templates Table 53 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Search Results template with the loop variable SearchResults and on any List template with the loop variable Products HAlt_ProductPrice_Value AIt_ProductSubTotal Alt_ProductSubTotal_ Value Alt_ProductTotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalPrice_Value Alt_ProductTotalTax Alt_ProductlotalTax_Value AvailabilityString FormTagAttributes FormTagAttributesSSL lsinBasket T IsProductVariation ltemNo ltemNo_Value LongDescription NoOfltemsInBasket NoOfltemsInBasket_Value ManufacturerName ManufacturerNo MinOrderLevel MinOrderLevel_ Value TEOnOrderProducts Table 53 Search Results and List Templates Use with Search Result and List Templates AIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice On0rderProducts_ Value ProductDescription ProductName ProductNo ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice ProductPrice_Value ProductSubTotal
345. lates Use the template Service Page to link to three important customer services e Allow customers to change their password URL_ChangePassword for template Service Change password e Allow customers to track previous orders URL PrevOrderList for template Service List of previous orders Allow customers to load baskets previously filled URL_PrevBasketList for template Service List of previous baskets search login store services hot deals Store Service basket Reload previous baskets Order Tracking Change your password Activate profile View bookmarks Change your Shipping Address service search store Links to other pages on the site e Guarantee e How we handle back orders More about Payment Navigating and Buying in the Store The Gatalog displays all categories sub categories product lists Figure 167 Customer service page in Training Store In addition the Training Store Service Page template contains demonstration links to static HI ML pages that offer help text and navigational advice describe store policies and so on Because external static pages cannot display particular customer information or variable data many merchants also create User defined templates to link to their customer service area For example a page on membership benefits might display the current customer s name address and other member information For more
346. ld insert normal text The TLE variable acts as a placeholder When a specific page is requested the value of the variable is instantly determined by reference to the database and displays with the rest of the HTML page NOTE All TLE variables are preceded with a pound sign and are case sensitive This chapter discusses variables in groups according to functionality For ease of reference some variables may be listed and discussed in more than one group As a general rule all templates within a template group have the same TLE variables available to them The exception to this rule is the Storefront template group in which the templates carry out specific functions that require the use of different TLE variables View TLE Variables Available for a Template INTERSHOP 4 uses a variety of templates for displaying storefront pages see Templates p 289 The TLE variables available to a template are consistent with the requirements of the template type To view a list of the TLEs available to any template 1 Under Design in the System Administration Main Menu click Templates 2 To see User defined TLE variables click User defined TLEs on the command bar 3 To see the pre defined TLE variables for a specific template group select the template group from the menu box and click Open Template Group 4 Select a template The Template Edit panel is displayed 5 Click Available TLEs A lis
347. les Feature Optional 210 Understanding Customer Profile Classes and Profile Items 210 Implementation Overview 211 Managing Profiles from the Back 212 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension 221 Introduction to TLE 223 TLE Variables 5 094b Sere oe ee ec Set 224 View TLE Variables Available for a 224 Date and Time Related TLE 225 Customer TLE 226 Profile TLE Variables 2 eee eee teens 230 Product Related TLE Variables 230 Category and List TLE 237 Calculation TLE 238 Service TLE Variables os ects ok edhe ole Dea ee ek Aes ee 242 Payment Method TLE 250 URL TEE Variables ap ak 3 pee eo eh Sa np arg Hh wae open gel et ERR 251 Session TLE Variables 257 Back Office TLE 258 FORM TLE 261 Server Side Script TLE Variable Replacements 266 User Defined RR 267 TL
348. ly Product Attributes are available for all products and the attribute value is filled in product by product in the Product Manger For example Suppose you have a clothing store and you create a T shirt product template to display different T shirts You want to display explanatory text and an image for each so you decide to create product attribute fields in this template for a Description and an Image Now you create two different T shirt products the Picasso T shirt and the Matisse T shirt In the Product Manager you fill in the Description attribute for each for example 10096 cotton for one and 100 silk for the other In the Image fields you provide a path to a different image in each case See Product Attributes p 145 for step by step instructions Product Variations are defined with the Variations Manager tool in the Product Manager each variation becoming a kind of sub product with its own product number Sub SKU automatically derived from the main product number SKU Product variations allow the designer to present various combinations of product qualities on a single page in the storefront and to track each variation separately in the inventory Variations are composed from Variation TYPES and Variation VALUES All variations of a main product share the attributes of that main product To display variations in the Storefront the designer includes an HIML form on the
349. ly customizable In Sports Place a special user defined template provides a login panel as the opening page of the store Figure 3 How shoppers log in determines what store features they can use what discounts they see and what kind of shopping history they establish For information on how to create such a login screen for your own store see Use Refresh Tag to Redirect Through the Homepage on p 316 Page 18 Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront The INTERSHOP Storefront Log In on the Splash Screen Log In on the Splash Screen In Sports Place the login screen allows shoppers to identify themselves as anonymous visitors registered members or retailers in a business to business arrangement 1 Access Sports Place as described in Access the Demonstration Storefronts on p 16 The login splash screen is displayed Figure 3 SPORTS PLACE Your One stop Sports Superstore 4 BIKING FISHING SAILING MEMBERS Retailers get special prices and one click re orders Sample retailer logins are provided To become a Sports Place retailer call 1 888 000 1111 VISITORS SHOP Now Returning members login here Example logins login frequent_shopper password intershop shop as a customer or a retailer login retailer low password intershop login retail medit password intershop Click Shop Now to login retailer high shop anonymously password intershop
350. mail shopGonline com PCS eMail IMG Companylogo URL of an image with your company logo Figure 22 Step one of the Store Design Wizard Page 44 Chapter 2 System Administration Use System Administration First Time Graphical Store Design Wizard 2 In Step 2 choose whether to allow non members to order and whether to display an order information page to customers before their order is finalized Click Next These are optional features in INTERSHOP 4 and the Wizard needs to know whether to format the appropriate templates or leave them alone You could add them later but they would not have the Wizard based design Default values Yes Yes For more information on non member checkout see Customer Registration Preferences on p 64 For more information on the order information page see Order Preferences Non Member Checkout on p 61 e For information on designing the order flow see How are INTERSHOP Templates Grouped on p 312 3 In Step 3 Figure 23 choose the basic template style for your store Click Next All of the basic Store Design Wizard styles appear on this page Each style has mix and match customized banner designs and color schemes Figure 28 shows only a few of the styles available Store Design Wizard Store Design Wizard Step 3 All Purpose ience Will Find as Broad ontemporary Mindset Objets d Art or Related Spheres of
351. mation name password address phone and e mail address Some merchants may also want to solicit additional customer information such as hobbies age group etc In INTERSHOP this is accomplished through the Profiles tool discussed in Activating the Profile p 394 and in The Customer Profiles Feature Optional p 210 To integrate a Customer Profile into the registration process add a HURL_ViewProfile or URL_NewProfile link to the Registration Confirmation template Shoppers may arrive at the membership Registration Panel through various routes In Figure 164 the registration process is launched expressly from the Navigation Bar not for example by placing an order In another scenario the customer first puts products in a basket then chooses Member or Non member checkout Figure 165 Figure 166 Chapter 5 Templates Page 319 Registration and Checkout Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront The diagram in Figure 165 shows the order process for an already registered member Unregistered shoppers who want to become members would click New on the Login Panel and go through registration as shown in Figure 164 They would then use the navigation bar or a link bac k to the Basket and proceed as in Figure 165 1 it gt i i required or no CREDIT CARD i i cookie unknown Member Order from Basket page ORDER MEMBER ORDER INFORMATION OR
352. me domain gt cgi bin lt storename gt admin Replace the words that appear in lt gt with your own server domain and store name If you do not know these names ask those who installed your INTERSHOP system i e the Site Administrator 2 The back office login panel is displayed Figure 18 Logging in with the System Administrator s ID and password gives access to both the back office and the System Administration Main Menu logging in with an operator ID and password gives access to the back office only NOTE Bookmark the Administration login panel in your Web browser Store Back Office 24 ics The INTERSHOP Store Back Office provides operators and administrators with all of the tools they need to manage any online business You can access the Back Office as an operator to manage store products orders and inventories or as the System Administrator with expanded privileges to change store settings The default login and password for the System Administrator are both admin In the interest of security this default should be changed immediately 22 3 Login admin Password LOGIN Figure 18 Login panel for the INTERSHOP back office and System Administration Log In as System Administrator 1 Enter the default System Administrator login admin 2 Enter the System Administrator password The default password is admin After first use change the password and keep it n
353. ment method to link to an outside payment processor e g Open Market Transact ICVerify and others Click Save Click Back to return to the Payment Method Settings page The new payment method is now listed on the Payment Method Settings page and ready to be enabled Change the Name or Description of a Payment Method To edit the name or description of any method listed on the Payment Method Settings page Click the name of the Payment method you want to edit A page appears with fields for the name and description Make your changes Click Save Click Back to return to the Payment Method Settings page Chapter 2 System Administration Page 81 Use the Payment Method Settings Page Payment Method Settings Disable a Payment Method for All Customers Select the Payment Method Settings link on System Administration Main Menu Figure 44 If the default button is selected for the method you want to disable select another enabled method as the default If the For new customers box is checked for the method you want to disable clear it You can t clear the For new customers box if the method is selected as the default Now clear the Enabled box for the method you want to disable You can t clear the Enabled box if the For new customers box is still checked Click Save Disable a Payment Method for a Particular Customer
354. mer Profile Matrix page in System Administration Page 72 Chapter 2 System Administration Customer Profile Matrix Create Profile Classes Create Profile Classes Profile classes are general headings that contain related groups of profile items For example to allow your customers to tailor their shopping experience to their individual hobbies first create the profile class Hobbies and then create profile items such as Gardening and Filmmaking as explained in the instructions below 1 Select Customer Profile Matrix from the System Administration Main Menu The Customer Profile Matrix page is displayed Figure 40 NOTE The Customer Profile Matrix link will not appear on the System Administration Main Menu unless the System Administrator has enabled customer profiles on the System Preferences page The Profile Classes column lists all existing profile classes and the Available Items column lists the items assigned to each class Profile items can only exist within a profile class but profile classes do not have to contain items 2 Click New Class The Create New Class page is displayed Figure 41 System Administration BACK NEW CLASS SET UP CUSTOMER PROFILE Create New Class Profile Class Hobbies CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SUM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 41 The Create New Class profile page
355. methods and shipping costs Set Up Taxes Create and edit tax jurisdiction and the tax matrix STATISTICS Traffic and Order Status Overview An synopsis of activity in your store since your last login Search Traffic and Order Statistics Search statistics on baskets orders profit within set time frames Product Statistics Search product statistics using a variety of parameters Manual Credit Card Handling Print or export direct credit card entry information CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 117 Settings Manager Main Menu Setup In the Setup section you enter basic information used in the everyday operation and administration of your store You set up Drop Down Menus used in your storefront and back office pages Discounts for selected customer groups Shipping Methods for your customers Taxes for automatic application of sales tax to customer purchases NOTE Before opening your storefront for the first time you need to set up at least three items in this list Drop down Menus Shipping Costs and Taxes Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 187 Drop Down Menus Settings Manager Drop Down Menus Drop down menus enable users administrators operators and customers to select information entries from standardized pre defined lists of items Drop do
356. mize Search Results Direct Storefront Entry Settings Customer Registration Preferences Page Caching Preferences Supported Language Preferences Currency Preferences Enable SSL Storefront Message Templates List Profiles Customer Profile Matrix Payment Method Settings Payment Method Settings Direct Credit Card Entry Menu Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data Administration Operator Settings Menu Database Adminstration Menu Data Cache Reset Data Import Tool Lock Storefront Intershop Server Information Design Templates Upload File to the Web Server Store Design Wizard Staging Staging Wizard Support Technical Support Figure 20 The System Administration Main Menu Page 42 Chapter 2 System Administration Use System Administration First Time Graphical Store Design Wizard Graphical Store Design Wizard If your store is an unformatted default store the Store Design Wizard launches the first time you enter the back office To reach the Store Design Wizard on subsequent logins see Access the Store Design Wizard on p 48 NOTE Running the Store Design Wizard is optional and only one of many ways to design your storefront The Store Design Wizard lets you choose and customize the look and feel of your storefront color scheme button and banner styles navigation bars and page layout from one of more than thirty ready to use template styles You can also further customize
357. mplate Basket LOOP variable ZBasketPositions FEAIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice ProductName FEAlt_ProductSubTotal ProductNo Alt_ProductlotalPrice ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice Alt_ProductTotalTax ProductQuantity DiscountPercent ProductSubTotal sProductVariation ProductlaxAmount Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 283 LOOP Statements Table 58 Print Template Basket LOOP variable ZBasketPositions ltemNo ManufacturerName ManufacturerNo MinOrderLevel ProductDescription ProductlotalPrice ProductlotalTax ProductWeight UnitOfMeasurement ProductlaxClass Table 59 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Credit Card Print template with the loop variable CreditCardRows Table 59 Print Template Credit Card Data Export Format Credit Card Export with CreditCardRows CreditCardExpireMonth CreditCardExpireYear CreditCardNo CustNamel ProcessDate ProcessNo ProcessSubTotal ProcessTotalPrice ProcessTotalTax CreditCardExpireDate Table 60 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Order Confirmation Print template with the loop variable OrderPositions Table 60 Print Template Order Confirmation default AIt_ProductSubTotal FAlt_ProductlotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalTax Tf DiscountPercent ltemNo ProductDescription ProductName LOOP variable OrderPostions FEAIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice ProductNo
358. n 411 Overview Site Administrator and Programmer All Enable 555 in Site Administration 411 Activate 555 Error E Mails 413 Call A Script from INTERSHOP Template 414 The Scripting API lt 415 TLE Handling 415 The Formatting Layout 42l The User Input Output Functions llle IRI 423 The Basket Processing Functions 0 1 eee RR 424 The Override 425 The Order Processing Functions 428 The Database Access Functions lle RII 429 Using Server Side Script 431 Example Sample Server Side 433 SHIPPING PM a veut Sot td t a Guat Mentha 433 PrevBaskets pM sso cs anemia he rn E eene exeo eee PE aS sale T 435 437 Glossary or ecu eU RS Ses A areas 439 When and Why to Use the User Guide Introduction to the User Guide Introduction to the User Guide Welcome and congratulations on your INTERSHOP purchase Whether you sell business to consumer or business to b
359. n IsAnonymous lt INPUT TYPE CHECKBOX NAME SearchUseProfile CHECKED gt Consider your profile for search ENDIF You can also permanently enable or disable Profile Evaluation searches and hide the Profile Evaluation enable disable switch on the Search Mask so customers don t see it To do so don t use a checkbox but a hidden INPUT field where you pre set the value To permanently enable profile evaluation use this line of HTML lt INPUT TYPE HIDDEN NAME SearchUseProfile VALUE 1 gt To permanently disable profile evaluation use this line of HTML lt INPUT TYPE HIDDEN NAME SearchUseProfile VALUE 0 gt Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Direct Storefront Entry Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Direct Storefront Entry Set up Direct Storefront Entry DSE to create links on external Web sites that allow customers to jump directly to a particular page of your Storefront without going through the Store Homepage template first This feature can be used in many ways one of the most common uses is to allow merchants to advertise their products easily while also providing quick access for purchase For example a banner ad displaying a specific product can jump a shopper directly to that product s page without requiring the shopper to navigate the traditional catalog hiera
360. n TLE Variables Calculation TLE Variables Table 18 Calculation TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates ShippingSubTotal Price of all shipping less tax All templates ShippingTotalPrice Price of all shipping any tax All templates ShippingTotalTax Tax on a shipping cost All templates T Supplier rderSubTotal Wholesale price of all products on supplier purchase order less discounts shipping cost Print template Purchase Order SupplierOrderTotalPrice Wholesale price of all products on supplier purchase order less discounts shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping Print template Purchase Order SupplierOrderTotalTax Tax on all products on supplier purchase order any tax on shipping costs Print template Purchase Order Alternate Currency TLEs The values for the Alt TLEs are derived from the related Calculation TLE values For more information about displaying alternate currencies in the storefront see Create a Link to Change the Alternate Currency p 368 Table 19 Alternate Currency TLEs TLE Variable Description Available Templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Alt_BasketSubTotal Price of all products in basket less discounts shipping cost in the alternate currency All templates Alt_BasketTotalPrice Price of all products in basket less discounts shipping cost any assigned t
361. n the Web Server The data folders for your store appear in a list on the Select Target Directory for File Upload page along with other files you have uploaded Figure 158 System Administration BACK UPLOAD FILE DELETE SELECTED ITEMS Upload File to Web Server Select Target Directory for File Upload DataImport ExternalPages Images ProductImages SiteImages sss static Templates 7 StoreClosed html 7 StoreError html StoreNotAccessible html Current Directory CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager manager PURCHASING CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 158 File Upload automatically connects to your store s directory on the Web server Select the directory level where you want the file loaded and click Upload File The Upload File to Web Server Select File page is displayed Figure 159 7 System Administration BACK UPLOAD FILE Upload File to Web Server Select File Target Directory Soucefie M Overwrite existing files CATALOG PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager manager Figure 159 Select source file for upload PURCHASING manager 21 Choose file Class Network Neighborhood ima Netscape Communicator Einst 35HTSUS Ginte Archive GMin Assorted Images ayy n Files of ty
362. n Stock 50 Bookmarks 0 Reserved 0 unit set in General Ordered 0 Preferences Assign to category Electronics Music E Figure 29 Units of Weights and Measure in the Product Manager Search Result Preferences The preferences set here limit how many lines of information are displayed per page when customers or operators conduct a search Ideally you want to balance the amount of information displayed per page with the downloading speed of an average computer Depending on the average size of your entries something between 8 and 20 listings is usually appropriate The listings are divided between displays in the Storefront and the back office Default settings 10 items per page Chapter 2 System Administration Page 55 Customer Preferences Set General Preferences Customer Preferences The preferences defined here are applied to every new customer subsequently registering in your store New customers can register themselves in the Storefront the operators can also register new customers in the Customer Manager See Figure 30 E Deactivate New Customers Checking this box will deactivate all new customers deactivated customers cannot place orders Select this box if you wish to screen your customers before allowing them to place an order You may for example want to telephone each new customer or perform a credit check before fulfilling his or her first order Upon approval an operator can clear the
363. n or select an entry for a pre set field The System Administrator defines the entries for a number of pop up menus that are used by the Operators and or Customers A Dump Device is the logical name used in the Database Backup Server s name space related to a Dump File on disk tape A Dump Device can be used to dump and load database content A file in the Database Server s file system that holds the content of a database dump which can be used to restore a database A combination of standard HTML and dynamic variables used to assembly a web page in response to a user s request The response is assembled from data and templates written with dynamic variables to create pages with up to the minute changing information A collection of related information referred to by a filename The name of a file You use a filename to refer to a file When a customer has put a product in a basket but has not purchased it INTERSHOP can generate a Follow up Letter including information about the product This feature gives merchants a chance to send a highly focused to marketing offer Created using HTML and TLE on templates Used to collect customer input at the Storefront An input field added to a basket page that allows customers to enter any text they wish This text can then be viewed by the merchant on the order page Products that are discounted for all customers and listed together on one particular page Compare with Discount Ma
364. n styles that you choose Figure 21 STORE BROWSER p INTERSHOP Online is the i HOT DEALS first shopping software for This category does not contain products anything on the Internet The software contains everything you need to make money on the Net And you do not have fo write a single line of code What s mote if UNIX is too complicated for you CATALOG HOT DEALS SEARCH BASKET LOGIN SERVICE INTERSHOF Online also runs on Microsoft Windows NT Default STORE HOT DEALS SEARCH BASKET REGISTER SERVICE Figure 21 The default homepage left and a sample Store Design Wizard homepage right I In Step One Figure 22 enter merchant information and click Next To change the default System Administrator password enter and confirm a new password of your choice The password is case sensitive and must contain at least six characters Store Design Wizard Store Design Wizard Step 1 Name Administrator Login admin New Password Password Confirmation PROF MerchantName Carloina Jayhawk The name of the store owner MerchantStreeti 123 Main Street The address of the store owner MerchantSteet2 The address of the store owner part 2 Merchantzip 1245 Zip code MerchantState State MerchantCountry USA Country Merchanttity City MerchantPhone 555 555 1212 1 Phone MerchantFax 555 559 5888 Fax MerchantE
365. n the basket with the new quantity Example UpdateProduct productno productquantity INPUT productno quantity A valid product number and a new quantity overriding the current quantity OUTPUT Comment The product must be in the basket Page 424 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions The Override Functions The Override Functions Use Override to set a new value for specific TLE variables related to products customers and shipping for a set period of time session or current basket Although the new value is not saved to the database it does override the values of all related calculation variables for a given process For example OverrideProductPrice would set a new price for a product in the basket of a customer and the new value of product price would determine override the value of the basket sub total the basket total and all other related variables for the current customer and the current storefront session only Override functions operate for a set parameter of time usually for the current basket the changes made to the database values are temporary Override Product Related TLE Variables For all Override product related TLE variables the product must be in the basket and the execution of any one of these functions will cause all basket related variables to be recalculated Table 105 OverrideProductPrice Overrid
366. n to the main category list if you are currently on a different page 2 Click on a category link If you re looking for a bike for example try the Mountain Bikes link 3 A product list is displayed Figure 6 Products are listed in Sports Place with prices calibrated for different groups of shoppers For details on how to do this in your own store see The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on p 210 SPORTS PLACE Your One stop Sports Superstore PO Y 3 wa BIKING MOUNTAIN BIKES Gibson 2000 Mountain Bike 1 139 05 ff Figure 6 A list of products in the subcategory Mountain bikes 4 Click the Add button beside a product name to add it to your basket or click the product name to see more details and then click Add to Basket In this case choose the Gibson 2000 mountain bike Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 24 Sports Place for Visitors Enter Customer Data Enter Customer Data Shoppers in INTERSHOP stores can remain anonymous until they order At that point they enter some contact information determined by the merchant in order to receive their purchases INTERSHOP supports both member and non member based customer registration and Sports Place demonstrates several possibilities Non Member Checkout allows shoppers to enter the information they need to make a purchase without creating a persistent identity in the store database Membership Registration creates a
367. nager INVENTORY PURCHASING manager manager Figure 161 Click Select Template for Cache to set up Page Caching for your store Select one of the following template groups Storefront User defined Catalog List or Product and click Select Templates to Cache A list of the templates in the selected group that are available for page caching is displayed Select or de select individual templates to be cached Click Check All to select all the listed templates for page caching System Administration BACK SAVE CHECK ALL UNCHECK ALL TEMPLATES Select Templates to Cache Storefront Templates Ie Service Change password Change a member s password Ie Store homepage Start page of INTERSHOP Storefront Also used to split the frame set and call the root catalog and navigation bar templates Hot deals List of products designated as special bargains Login Login panel Login panel for INTERSHOP members Store navigation bar Navigation bar displayed in a separate frame at the bottom of the page in most demo stores Registration Registration member data form Input form member registration information Search mask Input fields for searching product database Service page Links to customer statistics store policies and order tracking CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager SETTINGS man
368. nager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 88 Multimedia Attribute File Upload page Activate the Overwrite Existing Files checkbox if you want to replace any existing files on the server Click Browse to use the Windows File Upload window to locate the intended source file for the multimedia attribute Click Select to select a target directory for the file upload A Product Manager CANCEL APPLY Multimedia Attribute File Upload Current Directory Backup SiteImages Figure 89 Multimedia Attribute File Upload panel for selecting target directory Use the links on the page to navigate to the directory where your files are located on the web server You can click at any time to return to the parent directory Figure 89 When the directory you wish to upload the file to is listed opposite Current Directory click Apply You return to the Multimedia Attribute File Upload page Figure 88 The upload path now appears in the input box Click Upload When the upload process is complete the Product Attribute Values page is displayed The value defined for the multimedia attribute is the file name and image directory Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 149 Product Attributes Product Manager Delete Product Attributes When you add delete or edit the name of a product attribute the attribute name is updated for all product
369. nce_path store_path Product View reference_no newwin window open width 300 height 300 with newwin document writeln HTML HEAD TITLE Pro Shopping advice lt TITLE writeln HEAD writeln lt BODY BGCOLOR FFFFFEF BACKGROUND path ImagesOnline background_cross gif writeln LINK 666666 VLINK 666666 gt writeln TABLE BORDER 0 gt writeln lt TR gt lt TD COLSPAN 2 BGCOLOR 003300 ALIGN CENTER gt writeln FONT COLOR FFFFFF SIZE 4 gt lt B gt The Bookworm Shopping Tip B TD writeln lt TR gt writeln TR TD COLSPAN 2 gt lt FONT COLOR 666666 SIZE 2 2 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 385 Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced Product Templates writeln Hey you just added a lt B gt namet lt B gt to your basket writeln There is another fine product in our catalog that writeln would fit perfectly with this one lt TD gt lt TR gt writeln lt TR gt lt TD WIDTH 300 gt nbsp lt TD gt writeln lt TD ALIGN RIGHT gt lt FONT COLOR 666666 SIZE 2 if reference no writeln I am talking about the lt BR gt writeln A TARGET TOP HREF writeln javascript self location http rreference path self focus writeln gt lt B gt reference_namet
370. nced Product Templates A special usage of product attributes as used by the sample JavaScripts A simple JavaScript for creating Smart Forms Smart forms allow the user to enter the form data by hitting Enter rather than having to click on a specific button NOTE To download an electronic version of these scripts go to www intershop com support and search the topic Cross sell The cross selling example provided here works as follows l Shopper enters the store and selects the book Wuthering Heights which has been cross linked to the book Jane Eyre 2 When the shopper clicks Add to Basket a small window pops up recommending the cross linked product Figure 192 Also of course Wuthering Heights is added to the basket in this step 3 If the shopper clicks the link for Jane Eyre in the pop up window then the product page for Jane Eyre appears and can be added to the basket as well Otherwise the shopper can simply close the pop up window NOTE Users who want to include this functionality in their own stores should know JavaScript and be able to customize the example provided here Security 202 storefron 1801540453 Home Product Price ea Total Qty Wuthering Heights 11 00 Total ge STORE pz HOTIDEALS SEARCH x BASKET SERVICE Figure 192 The cross selling window that pops up when customer clicks to Basket Step Ins
371. nces Configure Multiple Currencies The first step in enabling multiple currencies in a store is to activate and configure currencies on the Currency Preferences page then select the main store currency and default alternate currency 1 From the System Administration Main Menu select Currency Preferences The Currency Preferences page is displayed Figure 37 By default the US Dollar is activated and selected as the main store currency is at the top of the page System Administration BACK SAVE Currency Preferences Store Currency Currency Svmbol Ce Altemate Currency Afghanistan Afghani AFA j Default Currency Symbol Exchange Rate C Cuban Peso pz Deutsche Mark Es Euro Eo j French Franc Italian Lira Swedish Krona US Dollar Price Display Display prices as Gross Price Net Price CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 37 Currency Preferences page with seven alternate currencies defined 2 If you want additional currencies Select a new currency from the drop down menu Click Add Click OK to confirm selection or click Cancel and return to the page to make changes The selected currency is listed on the alternate currencies section and is activated Continue adding currencies as needed Make a note of the three letter codes for each activate
372. nd Statistics amp Prefs contains three sections with tools for statistical analyses handling credit card data and setting up store taxes discounts amp shipping methods Access to System Administration is in this Manager Open DataBase Connectivity is a specification for an application program interface API that enables applications to access multiple database management systems using Structured Query Language SQL With ODBC you have standardized access to tables in order to import export data to or from a SQL Database Server Assembly of a web page in response to a customer s request for information The response is assembled from data and templates stored in a database People authorized by the System Administrator to run the Back Office part of an INTERSHOP store Glossary Operators Mathematical Ordered Orders All Orders New Orders Open Packing Slip Page Page Caching PERL Product Attributes Product Variations Profile Item Profiles Purchase Orders Relational Operators Reserved Root Category Search Engine Search Mask Server Side Scripting SET Glossary See Boolean operators Comparison operators and Relational operators Term used in the Inventory Manager to designate a number of products on order from a supplier Compare with Orders All New Open below A complete list of new and open orders from customers Not to be confused with Ordered which indicates
373. nd field NOTE Quick find searches in Sports Place are case sensitive 2 Press Enter on your keyboard or click Go Any product matching your terms will appear in a list Use Expanded Search The refined search function in this Storefront allows customers to find products by entering part of a product name descriptive keywords manufacturer name price range and or product variations For details on augmenting the Search template in your own store see Using FORMs in Templates on p 364 Also select View Page Source from your browser navigation buttons to see the code and comments used in the Sports Place search template Search by Name Part Number Manufacturer Price Range l Click the Search button the navigation bar 2 Choose any combination of the following The radio button for searching by name or part number combined with a search term in the box manufacturer name e minimum to maximum price range 3 Click Go under the price range fields The reset button clears the form A list matching your search terms is displayed Page 22 Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Visitors Look for Things to Buy Search by Product Variation For more information on using this method to search by variation see Using FORMs in Templates on p 364 and SearchVariation pm on p 437 Search by variation takes into account the other search terms on the page
374. nd Why to Use System Administration When and Why to Use System Administration You enter the System Administration area for the following reasons Bi For initial setup tasks immediately after obtaining a store including optional first time design using the Graphical Store Design Wizard To Set General Preferences and Payment Method Settings You can change your General Preferences and Payment Methods atany time To delete the contents of the database or import database tables from another source To create item entries for customer personal profiles To copy store content from one store database to another using the Staging Wizard feature To create or delete operator access rights to the back office area and to change login names and passwords To do any template customizing including Page Caching and Direct Storefront Entry features To lock or unlock the storefront Chapter 2 System Administration Page 39 Use System Administration First Time Use System Administration First Time Page 40 After you have explored the Sports Place and Training Store demonstration stores to understand how customers experience the Storefront see Chapter 1 and the How to Set Up Shop tutorial you are ready to set up your own store If your store is an unformatted no graphic design default store the first time you enter the back office the Store Design Wizard will launch giving you the opportun
375. nd select Storefront pages into files that are instantly accessed at the storefront without repeat recurrences to the database Unlike regular HI ML pages cached pages are translated by a file reader and loaded to the browser This file reader allows INTERSHOP to carry the customer s session identification from cached page to dynamic page to the cached page without interrupting the shopping process or forgetting the customer s identity NOTE Once a page is cached it becomes static and dynamic functions such as Customer Profiles or price calculation cannot be used on that page Page Caching involves the following steps E Set Page Caching Preferences This includes Activate the Page Caching Feature Activate 555 for Page Caching Check Space Required and Clear Cache Bi Select Templates for Page Caching Reconvert Cached Templates to Dynamic Templates The following sections describe these steps in detail Chapter 5 Templates Page 307 Set Page Caching Preferences Page Caching Set Page Caching Preferences To access the Page Caching Preferences page Figure 160 select the link by the same name from the System Administration Main Menu If nothing has been activated yet only one checkbox appears on this page System Administration BACK SAVE CLEAR PAGE CACHE PAGE CACHE SPACE Page Caching Preferences SSS for Page Caching n Activate the check box to enable SS
376. ndard 5 000DM five thousand Deutsche Mark Default settings Appropriate for American standards NOTE If you change your store currency the value of old orders invoices etc will not be recalculated Number Display Same as Currency Format but applied to non currency numbers Default settings Appropriate for American standards Time Style Choose between the 12 hour standard including AM PM symbols or the 24 hour standard Display of AM PM and time separator are also adjustable in this section Default setting 12 hour standard Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Search Result Preferences Product Manager BACK SAVE DELETE NEW PRODUCT ENTER STOCK PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE YALUES ASSIGN VARIATION Product Details Productno 10328 Product Aiwa AM FM Stereo Description Enjoy superb AM FM stereo from a radio small enough to fit in your pocket E Operator Administrator IV visible at Store Discounts gt M Hot dea Template Produc basic Unit of Measure Notice that the default value chosen in General Preferences can be over ridden here The value is Manufacturer E 54 Price f24 75 used for counting Supplier Supplier Retail Price 93 44 inventory Tax Class Electronics Minimum Inventory 10 pcs units pcs Weight 0 20 Ibs Min orderlevel ie Unit of Weight A fixed quantification Availability In Stock Number i
377. nding on the nature of the products you sell for example product images use the multimedia data type All product attribute names are available to all products the attribute values are defined on a product by product basis Each product attribute created generates an associated TLE variable which appears in the list of TLE variables on Product Templates Keep in mind that attributes are used to describe main products while variations are used to describe sub products For example you might create an attribute to describe a T shirt as 100 cotton while you would create variations for the different color and size combinations in which the T shirt is available You may want to review Product Variations on page 151 when deciding whether you need to create attributes or variations for particular product descriptors Product attributes are implemented in the following steps Create or Edit Product Attribute Names of a specific data type You create and edit product attribute names using the instructions in this section All attributes are available for all products at all times E Define Product Attribute Values Attribute values must be defined on a product by product basis BI Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes Multimedia attribute values are defined in a special way Bb Insert the Product Attribute Code into the HTML This step is described in Chapter 6 on page 379 Bi Delete product attributes
378. ng cost Price of all products in basket less BasketTotalPrice shipping am All templates assigned tax for products and or shipping i BasketTotallax Tax on all products in the basket All templates any tax on shipping costs Price of all products on invoice less discounts shipping cost Print template Invoice Price of all products on invoice less discounts shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping Tax on all products on the invoice any tax on shipping costs lnvoiceTotalPrice Print template Invoice InvoiceTotalTax Print template Invoice Price of all products on order less OrderSubTotal E Storefront Mail and Print templates discounts shipping cost Price of all products on order less Rus OrderTotalPrice shipping cons any Storefront Mail and Print templates assigned tax for products and or shipping 0rderTotalTax prod ugis Storefront Mail and Print templates any tax on shipping costs ProductSubTotal Price for any quantity of a single All templates except Catalog product less discounts templates ProductlotalPrice Price for any quantity of a single All templates except Catalog product less discounts tax templates dProductlotalTax Total tax on any quantity of a single All templates except Catalog product templates Page 238 Chapter 4 Template Language Extensio
379. nistration will have access to all database tables in that store If you want to limit the rights of the SSS programmer to EXECUTE ONLY no READ ACCESS then use Sybase handling tools to create a different user with more limited access See Sybase documentation for details Server Side Scripting Database Access Password optional Defined and entered along with the database access user name above Page 412 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting 555 Implementation Activate 555 Error E Mails Notification Activate SSS Error E Mails Notification System Administrators can activate email notification of Server Side Scripting errors for their individual store by selecting the appropriate checkbox on the Mail Preferences The merchant programmer can use the information in SSS error e mail notices to help with debugging and error tracking We recommend using this only during the development phase on a staging store and for first time use on a production store Once everything is going well deselect the SSS Error Email checkbox on the Mail Preferences page to disable the feature NOTE For optimum efficiency in mail handling create a new mail account for receiving SSS error e mails This feature is activated from the System Administration Main Menu under the link Mail Preferences as described below 1 Log in as the System Administrator and bring up the System Administration Main Menu by selecting System Admin on
380. nks are used in HTML pages to construct logical threads allowing the user to navigate and find information easily To quit a computer session To leave the System Administration module and return to the Administration Login panel Process to gain access to a computer system Name required to access a computer system Technique used to collect and display lists of data stored in the database The parent product used to create product variations Also called the super product The section of the Back Office where the catalog structure is set up See also Catalog and Category The section of Back Office that holds all information address etc about registered customers and about suppliers The section of Back Office which holds all inventory information The Inventory Manager monitors the stock levels in the store and coordinates with the Purchasing Manager to suggest when new supplies are needed The section of Back Office where orders are processed and where invoices packing slips and other paperwork are created edited printed and stored The section of Back Office which holds all product information Because products represent the final branch of the catalog structure the Catalog Manager and the Product Manager can be thought of as a team The section of Back Office which monitors inventory and notifies the Operator when stock is low Can generate a purchase order to a supplier which the merchant must confirm print and se
381. nks until you ve reached an end level category that can accept products Once you click Assign to Category your product is assigned and you return to the Product Details page Page 142 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager 8 9 Edit Product Information Products can be assigned to more than one category Repeat as needed You ve now completed the minimum steps for creating a new product If you want to enter the product inventory level now see Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut on page 144 Then continue with further refinements creating attributes and variations if desired 22 Product Manager BACK SAVE DELETE NEW PRODUCT ENTER STOCK PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE VALUES ASSIGN PROFILE MANAGE VARIATION HELP Product Details Product no S AC10003 Product AcuSteer Compass Description acuSteer is constructed of the highest quality 5 materials and is accurate to within a 0 005 tolerance rating Operator Administrator z Discounts Big Discount x Template Accessories zl Manufacturer AcuSteer M visible at Storefront Hot Deal Wholesale Price net 119 00 supplier x Retail Price net 198 95 Tax Class Taxable z Minimum Inventory 0 Units z Weight 0 00 Min order level 1 Availability In Stock Bookmarks 0 Number in Stock 200 Reserved 5 Ordered 0 Assign To Category Equipment Accessories
382. ns View a previous basket Basket List Template Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service peel basket order View a previous basket order PrevCustFax Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Page 243 Service TLE Variables Page 244 Table 21 Previous Basket TLE Variables TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service irate Stes basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service bas
383. nt e Create Catalog Attribute Names and Define or Edit Catalog Attribute Values at any level of your catalog Delete Categories Import the United Nations Standard Product Services Classification UN SPSC catalog data into your store Using Profiles in the Catalog Manager to link profile items to categories is covered in The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on page 210 NOTE Some merchants already have extensive catalog information in an electronic format that can be imported into the INTERSHOP database The Data Import on page 93 describes this process Catalog Look and Feel Assigning Catalog Templates How the catalog information you create in the Catalog Manager will look in the Storefront depends on your templates When you create catalog categories in the Catalog Manager you assign Catalog templates to display product categories and List templates to display lists of products In the Product Manager you assign Product templates to display products See Templates on p 289 for instructions on customizing or creating these templates but when getting started you can simply choose from the predefined template sets downloaded when your store was created and change them later as desired Page 124 Chapter 3 The Back Office Catalog Manager catalog browser hot deals Welcome to the Training Store where you ll find a quick and easy way to learn about building your own INTERSHOP store basket serv
384. nt number Print template Customer Free text for the merchant to enter CustAccountDetails account details For example bank Print template Customer name Customer s external account number CustAccountString Print template Customer i e bank account number CustCategoryName Customer s category name All templates CustCategoryNo Customer s category number All templates CustCity Billing address City All templates Comments regarding Customer entered i CustComment garang Print templates Customer in Customer Manager CustCountry Billing address country All templates Number of days before a bill becomes due Variable value drawn from Credit CustCreditPeriod Length set in System Administration gt Print templates Customer Invoice Customers or on an individual customer data page CustEMail Customer s email address All templates CustFax Billing address fax number All templates CustLoginName Customer s login name All templates CustNamel Billing address full name All templates CustName2 Billing address company name field All templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Customer TLE Variables Table 9 Customer Related TLE Variables Standard TLE Variable Description Available Templates CustName3 Billing address additional name field All templates Customer s membership number
385. ntered Product number searches are also case sensitive For example assume that the following product numbers are in the database 1000 10100 10 1 e 10 A In the table below the right column shows what will result from the search entries queries in the left column Table 3 Search Query and Results Query Result 0 1000 10100 10 1 10 10 1000 10100 10 1 10 A 100 1000 1000 1000 10 10 1 10 A 10 10 10 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 139 Create a New Product Product Manager Create a New Product 1 Click Product Manager on the navigation bar to get to the Search Products page Figure 82 2 Click New Product The New Product page appears Figure 83 2 Product Manager SAVE HELP New Product Product no 1001 Product Description a Operator Administrator 2 visible at Storefront Discounts z Hot Deal Template Product default zi Manufacturer zi Wholesale Price net 50 06 Supplier gt Retail Price net 0 00 Tax Class zl Minimum Inventory 0 Units z Weight 0 00 Min order levei ft CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 83 The New Product page 3 Fill out the New Product page fields as described here Product Number INTERSHOP automatically assigns a product number If
386. ntry Sample Code for a User Defined Template Splitting a Frame Set lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt INTERSHOP Storefront lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt FRAMESET ROWS 34 FRAMEBORDER no BORDER 0 gt lt NOFRAMES gt A H2 gt Sorry you need a browser with FRAME support lt H2 gt lt NOFRAMES gt 1 Substitute 4URL Catalog with URL_DSEAction You do not need the IF Statement for New Session lt FRAME FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 ORESIZE SCROLLING auto MARGINHEIGHT 1 ARGINWIDTH 1 BORDER 1 NAME TOP SRC http URL_DSEAction gt lt FRAME NAME BOTTOM FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZE SCROLLING no MARGINHEIGHT 0 MARGINWIDTH 0 BORDER 0 SRC http URL_NavigationFrame gt lt FRAMESET gt lt HTML gt Page 400 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Direct Storefront Entry Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Create a User defined Template as an Introduction Page In a non frame based store when customers enter from a remote site you may want to create an introductory template that gives them some basic information about the store Create a User defined template for this purpose see p 59 for more information on creating User defined templates Along with the introd
387. nventory page Figure 97 2 Click Enter Stock on the command bar The Stock Entry page is displayed Figure 99 You can enter BACK SAVE CATALOG manager Product Number Required Quantity The amount of product you are adding to stock enter a negative number to subtract from current inventory levels Reserved Any amount you want to place aside e g on hold for a customer Normally 0 Ordered Amount you have ordered from a supplier and want to record manually Comments Explanatory notes dates etc describing the transaction for your reference Comments can be searched Optional Inventory Manager Stock Entry Product no Reserved 0 Quantity o Ordered 0 Description PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 99 Stock entry page 3 Click Save Chapter 3 The Back Office Inventory Manager Enter Stock Manually 4 An Inventory Transaction Detail report is displayed Figure 100 The top half of the form describes the current transaction The Stock Level field indicates what quantity of product was added or removed with a negative number The bottom half of the form shows the overall status of this product in inventory including quantities on hand ordered and reserved 5 Click Back if this information is
388. nvoice where you wish to record a payment If you are not sure of the correct invoice number click Back then select an invoice number from the account history for review 4 Enter the amount being paid in the Amount field 5 Click Save 6 You can continue to create new account transactions linked to this invoice until the entire balance has been paid NOTE Each time you record a payment to an account a confirmation box will appear asking if you want to set the invoice status to paid status Select yes once the invoice is paid in full Page 175 Record Transactions in Customer Accounts Order Manager Order Manager Operators use the Order Manager to process customer orders and to generate invoices and packing slips Orders proceed through the Order Manager in stages beginning when the customer places an order and ending when the items leave the warehouse en route to the customer s address Topics covered in this section include A Few Key Concepts for Managing Orders Process a New Order including how to e Use the Search Orders Page Print an Order Confirmation Optional e Generate an Invoice Record Payment on the Invoice e Generate a Packing Slip e Cancel or Delete an Order Review and Follow Up on Baskets A Few Key Concepts for Managing Orders Page 176 The Order Manager is the heart of back office administration Understanding a few key concepts will help you use the Or
389. nyone to create a visually rich semi customized store in minutes See Access the Store Design Wizard p 43 for details Programmers may want to read Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard p 334 to add their own template styles to the Store Design Wizard Chapter 5 Templates Page 293 Getting Started with Template Design Introduction to Template Design HTML Authoring Tools to Edit Templates INTERSHOP also supports third party Web authoring tools such as Microsoft FrontPage or HomeSite See HTML Authoring Tools to Edit Templates p 304 for more details Bi Plan your shop correspondence Invoices packing slips order confirmations and follow up letters can all be generated from INTERSHOP templates You may simply want to add your company logo and address to the default INTERSHOP Print Templates or make further customizations E For Programmers Consider writing a server side script to extend or customize INTERSHOP functionality See Advanced Using Server Side Scripting p 407 or instructions on creating Perl scripts using INTERSHOP s server side scripting feature Page 294 Chapter 5 Templates Access Create and Delete Templates Access Templates Access Create and Delete Templates Use these instructions to access create and delete templates These are general instructions for working with INTERSHOP templates and should be applied to all examples of editing templates in this chapter Access Templa
390. o 2 HealthRider Home Pro Chrome 1 4 German Language Courses 1 Super Bundle Plus 1 E INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager Figure 138 Top 2 products ranked by customer interest Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 207 Manual Credit Card Handling Settings Manager Manual Credit Card Handling INTERSHOP 4 makes credit card processing easy if you have offered your shoppers the option of directly entering credit card information If you add credit card processing software all handling can be done automatically If you prefer to process credit card payments manually you can print out reports in the format that makes manual processing most efficient Or you can export credit card data into standard batch processing formats for use with automated processing systems INTERSHOP 4 also allows you to search customer credit card data according to a wide range of parameters The default template for exporting electronic batch files follows the ICVerify Transaction Record Format This template Manual Credit Card Handling can be edited to format the data in any way you choose The default print template lists credit card data in these columns Customer name Order number Transaction date Transaction amount Credit card number Expiration date Search Direct En
391. o Date Amount 102 990618 1002 06 18 99 73 01 1 from 1 account transactions have been found CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 108 Customer Account Details Page 174 Chapter 3 The Back Office Customer Manager Record Transactions in Customer Accounts 3 Click on a transaction number to see the details in editable fields The Adjust Customer Account page is displayed Figure 109 f Customer Manager BACK SAVE DELETE TRANSACTION Adjust Customer Account Account Trans 102 Amount 73 01 Invoice No 990618 1002 Date mm dd yy 06 18 99 Comments invoice no 990618 1002 created CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 109 Adjust Customer Account 4 To correct an error in the Amount field simply enter the new value and click Save Record Incremental Payments on an Invoice Chapter 3 The Back Office 1 Open a Customer Details page and click the Account Information The Customer Account Details page is displayed Figure 108 2 To record a partial payment create a new account transaction by clicking New Transaction 3 From the list of invoice numbers select the number of the i
392. o a Few Variations on page 329 for template editing information 4 To rename an existing attribute select it in the Attributes list box enter a new name for the attribute in the Attribute Name field and click Save The renamed attribute appears in the Attributes list box SSS TS CAUTION Changing the names of an attribute also changes the name of the associated TLE variable and templates that use this TLE variable may misdisplay in the storefront 5 Click Back to return to the Product Attribute Values page Each attribute name automatically generates a corresponding TLE variable with the same name This variable must be inserted in the HTML of the appropriate Product Template to make the attribute visible in the storefront For example if you created the attribute Size you now insert Size where you want the text description or image if you defined an image file for the value of the attribute to appear in your template layout Abbreviated instructions for this process are given here See Insert the Product Attribute Code into the HTML on page 379 for details Define Product Attribute Values Once you have created a product attribute name it automatically appears in the list that is displayed if you click Product Attribute Values on any Product Details page Figure 84 To apply an attribute to a particular product enter a value for the attribute using the Product Attribute Values
393. o offer a range of payment methods to your customers In most cases once you select the checkbox the payment method is up and running INTERSHOP also gives you the flexibility to modify the preset methods and to add extra options All payment methods are created modified enabled or deactivated from the Payment Methods section of the System Administration Main Menu Figure 43 279 System Administration System Administration Main Menu General Preferences System Preferences Mail Preferences Regional Settings Search Result Preferences Customer Preferences Product Preferences Basket Preferences references Search Results Direct Storefront Entry Settings Customer Registration Preferences Page Caching Preferences Supported Language Preferences Currency Preferences Enable SSL Storefront Message Templates List Profiles Customer Profile Matrix You must enable customer profiles on the System Preferences page in order for this link to appear Payment Method Settings Payment Method Settings Direct Credit Card Entry Menu Enable Encryption of Credit Card Data Administration Operator Settings Menu Database Adminstration Menu Data Cache Reset Data Import Tool Lock Storefront Intershop Server Information Design Templates Upload File to the Web Server Store Design Wizard Staging Staging Wizard Support Technical Support Use these links to
394. odel 1960 70 Classics UPS US 2nd Day Air Sub total CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER TTING SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 113 The Invoice Details page Record Payment on the Invoice 1 Open the Invoice Details page You can open the invoice in either of two ways ay From the Customer Order Details page Click the to open the invoice OR From the Search Orders page Choose Accounts Receivable or Invoices If you know the invoice number enter it in the Transaction number field Click Search A listing of invoice numbers fitting your search criteria appears Click the appropriate invoice number to continue processing symbol 2 In the case of a full payment check the Paid box in the middle of the invoice page Figure 113 and click Save To record partial or incremental payments see Record Incremental Payments on an Invoice on page 175 Page 182 Chapter 3 The Back Office Order Manager Process a New Order 3 A dialog box appears explaining that INTERSHOP automatically records the invoice as paid in the customer account Click OK See Record Transactions in Customer Accounts on page 174 for a full description of customer accounts Click the order number to return to the Customer Order Details page If you have not already done so you can now generate a packing slip Generate a Packin
395. of the style ini file Color The color scheme defined in the Customizeable Sub Styles colorscheme ia Color section of the style ini file Chapter 5 Templates Page 349 The Style Definition File style ini Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard Button Styles Banner Styles and Header Styles In this section you enter the banner header and button image file names that will be used to display a preview image for the user in Steps 5 6 and 7 of the Store Design Wizard Specify one banner header and button image for each sub style offered Button styles Buttons1 name Buttons 1 image Buttons1 button_addtobasket jpg Buttons2 name Buttons 2 image Buttons2 button_addtobasket jpg Banner styles Banners1 name Banners 1 image Banners1 topbanner jpg Banners2 name Banners 2 image Banners2 topbanner jpg Header styles Headers1 name Headers 1 image Headersl header hotdeals jpg Headers2 name Headers 2 image Headers2 header hotdeals jpg Table 75 Key Value Inputs for Banners Buttons and Headers2 sections Key Value In Example Description A friendly name that describes the image style name Buttons For example this value might be called Red 1 Buttons The image path for an example image of this image Buttons button_addtobasket jpg button style to be displayed in the SDW 1 A friendly name that describes the im
396. ofile URL_AddBookmark FURL_AddToBasket URL_BasketView FURL_HotDeals FEURL_Login URL_NavigationFrame HURL_NewProfile FURL_NewStoreFrontSession URL_PlaceOrder Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements LOOP Statements Table 49 Storefront Templates see above TLEs Used with LOOP variable BasketPositions ProductPrice_Value ProductQuantity ProductQuantity_Value ProductSubTotal ProductSubTotal_Value ProductTlaxAmount ProductTax_Value ProductlaxClass ProductlotalPrice ProductTotalPrice_Value ProductTotalTax ProductTotalTax ProductTotalTax_Value ProductWeight ProductWeight_Value TEURL PrevBasketlist HURL_PrevOrderList URL_ProductView TEUNL Register HURL_RemoveAllBookmarks TEURL RemoveBookmark URL_RemoveFromBasket HURL_SaveProfile URL_SearchMask HURL_Service URL_Store URL_UserTemplate HURL_ViewBookmarks HURL_ViewProfile Table 50 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Order Select Payment Method template with the loop variable BasketPositions Table 50 Order Select Payment Method Template TLEs used with Select Payment Method and BasketPositions AIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice Alt_ProductSubTotal Alt_ProductTotalPrice Alt_ProductTotalTax AvailabilityString DNSname DiscountName DiscountPercent FormlagAttributes FormTagAttributesSSL sProductVariation ltemNo ManufacturerName ManufacturerNo MinOrderLevel Name_
397. ofiles Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Create and Assign Profiles Step 2 Create an Input Form on the Profile Editing Page Step 2 Create an Input Form on the Profile Editing Page Customers submit their personal profile preferences by filling out a form on the Profile editing page Storefront template Profile Edit Profile You can create a Profile form using HIML check boxes radio buttons or select boxes to present the available Profile classes and items As an example to help explain the steps below let s say a bookstore has created the Profile class named Hobbies in System Administration with the following Profile items Hobbies Cooking Hobbies Cars Hobbies Gardening The profile TLEs would be created as follows To create the NAME for the Profile INPUT field use a TLE variable composed of the Profile class name plus the suffix NAME The input TLE used to create a field for our example would be NAME Now create the value TLE variable to represent the items in the profile class Use the profile class name the profile item name and the word VALUE separated by underscores To complete our example the value variables would be Hobbies_Cooking VALUE Hobbies_Cars_VALUE Hobbies_Gardening VALUE Create variables for as many INPUT fields as you need based on the number of Profile classes and items you defined in System Administration The HTML code differs
398. omBasket gt Remove from your basket lt A gt ENDIF Insert Catalog Attribute TLE Variables into Catalog and List Templates Every attribute name automatically generates a corresponding TLE variable with the same name This variable must be inserted in the HTML of the appropriate Catalog or List Template to make the attribute visible in the storefront For example if you created the attribute Sale you insert Sale where the text should appear in your template layout Abbreviated instructions for this process are given here Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 377 Using FORMs in Templates Page 378 3 Catalog List Templates Open a Catalog or List Template and click Available TLEs The TLE list panel is displayed listing all the TLE variables that can be used with this template The Catalog Attribute Variables section at the bottom of the list shows the TLE variables for all the attributes that you have created Figure 186 Loop variables Categories Catalog Attribute Variables alternateimage catalogimage description Figure 186 Catalog Attribute Variables section of the TLE list panel Select the TLE variable you wish to insert into the catalog or list template The Edit TLE Panel is displayed An example of how the TLE can be used in HTML code appears in the panel Figure 187 CLOSE SAVE TEMPLATES Available TLEs Edit Sale This val
399. omes due Variable value drawn from Credit CustCreditPeriod Length set in System Print templates Invoice Customer Administration gt Customers or on an individual customer data page Print templates Invoice Order lnvoiceNo Invoice number P Confirmation 5 Flag set to I if invoice is not lnvoicePaid Print template Invoice paid Used statement lnvoicePositions Lists products on current invoice Used in LOOP statement Print template Invoice InvoiceSubTotal Price of all products on invoice less discounts shipping cost Print template Invoice nvoiceTotalPrice Price of all products in invoice less discount shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping Print template Invoice lnvoiceTotalTax Tax on all products on the invoice any tax on shipping cost Print template Invoice LastUpdateDate Date when the current record was last updated Print template Customer FORM TLE Variables INTERSHOP 4 templates use HIML FORM s to collect customer input FORMs involve two kinds of TLE variables Normal TLE variables used to present information and input or name TLE variables used to create the input fields where customers can select or enter information in the Storefront This information is then used when the template is processed and submitted to the server For instance to create the fiel
400. on e Offer a link to registration if the customer is still Anonymous e Offer a link to the Shipping Address page where shipping information can be changed Present a drop down menu of the available shipping methods from which the customer can choose Each of these function areas is thoroughly described in the HI ML help comments in Training Store and Checkout Templates Customer registration is an important aspect of e commerce INTERSHOP assumes that all customers ordering in a shop must provide some contact and payment information in order to receive their purchases INTERSHOP provides storefront templates for both member based and non member based registration The key difference between the types is Members create a unique recognizable ID in the database Non members must re register each time they order in the store In practice providing both member and non member access means that merchants can offer customer profiles targeted marketing suggestive selling special discounts etc for registered members who develop a shopping history while still offering a greater degree of anonymity for non members if desired After providing their information once members need only login or be recognized by a cookie on subsequent visits For more information on cookies see System Preferences p 48 Member Registration Page 318 Member registration begins with the Registration Member Data Form template Login for ret
401. on one page using a select box radio buttons or another display method create an HTML form in the product template Described in Specific Uses of TLE in Templates on page 355 NOTE Variations imported using the Data Import Tool are listed on the main product s variation page but become attributes during the import process This means that you must use attribute TLEs not variation TLEs to search for imported variations in the storefront See also Search for Specific Products on p 138 You can create variation types for products even before entering the actual products to which they apply Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 151 Product Variations Product Manager Create a Variation Type and its Values Variations are composed of types such as Color and Size and values such as Red Blue and Small Large that are defined by the merchant and converted into a matrix by INTERSHOP 1 Click the Product Manager to open the Search Products page 2 Click Variation Types The Variation Create and Edit Types page is displayed Figure 90 Product Manager BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST VARIATION VALUES DELETE ek VARIATION Create and Edit Types Type Size Color Components sessions CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 90 Add and delete variation types on this page 3 Enter a new type nam
402. on page 188 Customers who receive the discount will see the normal price discount percentage amount and discount price on their order confirmation and invoice Settings Manager BACK NEW DISCOUNT CLASS Set up Discounts New customer New customers will get 10 off of selected products Supplier discount Only for the best supplier CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 119 The Set up Discounts page showing a list of existing discount classes Create a New Discount Class Page 190 l Select Set Up Discounts from the Settings Manager Main Menu The Set Up Discounts page is displayed listing any existing discount classes Figure 119 2 Click on New Discount Class The New Discount page is displayed Figure 120 3 Enter a name and description for the new discount class CA Settings Manager BACK SAYE SET UP DISCOUNTS New Discount Language English x Name Fall Sale Description 5 ains for frequent shoppers throughout the fall season SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 120 Create a new discount class using the New Discount page Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Discounts 4 Click
403. on the Customer Order Details page next to the order number A record of each Print is automatically generated and appears at the bottom of the Packing Slip Details page where it remains for your review Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 183 Cancel or Delete an Order Order Manager Deactivate Completed Order Optional If the invoice has been generated and paid and the product has shipped with the packing slip you may want to mark the order deactivated You can then search for deactivated orders to find those you know to be entirely processed 1 Open the Customer Order Details page Figure 112 2 Check the Deactivate box in the upper right corner of the page 3 Click Save Cancel or Delete an Order To protect you from accidentally deleting an order from the database INTERSHOP requires that all orders be cancelled before they are deleted To cancel an order you must first cancel any associated invoices and packing slips Cancelling an invoice reverses the effect of the invoice on the customer account and cancelling a packing slip reverses its effect on the inventory Once all parts of the order have been cancelled you can delete the order from the database The associated invoice and packing slip records will also be deleted Review and Follow Up on Baskets Any time a shopper puts an item in a basket that information is retained and can be used in many ways This section will focus on how to follow
404. onfigured for INTERSHOP demonstration stores and are included as examples to instruct rather than to use Create a directory relative to the store s root where the script modules will be placed For example INTERSHOP Data ishome lt storename gt SSS If this directory is created by the merchant the merchant must tell the Site Administrator the path of this directory so the Site Administrator can carry out Step 2 see below On the SSS Preferences page for the store set the Store Perl Library Path to the directory defined in step I The Site Administrator must enter this information Obtain the Shipping pm example script from the INTERSHOP web site Copy the file Shipping pm to the directory where the Perl scripts for the store reside This is the directory specified in Steps 1 and 2 above In the Back Office 5 Create a new shipping method in Settings Manager in the INTERSHOP back office See Chapter 3 The Back Office for details if needed When you define the Net shipping cost set it to 0 After defining the method its id number will appear in the Shipping costs table in Statistics amp Preferences In System Administration 6 Create a new User defined TLE variable called ShippingWeightMethod and set the value to the id number of the Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 431 The Database Access Functions Using Server Side Script Examples shipping met
405. online store To further improve storefront performance INTERSHOP 4 includes an additional option you can save or cache templates to your system s hard drive Page Caching eliminates unnecessary calls to the database for an additional performance boost This chapter explains Getting Started with Template Design Access Templates Create Templates Delete Templates e INTERSHOP Template Tools e Page Caching How are INTERSHOP Templates Grouped e Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard This chapter focuses on a broad understanding of template tools and functionality The next chapter provides many examples of how to use HTML and TLE to perform specific tasks within a template Getting Started with Template Design There are three simple prerequisites to getting started as an INTERSHOP template designer We assume e You have basic knowledge of HI ML including tables and frames INTERSHOP is installed and running an INTERSHOP demo store The store concept has been planned in detail These three preparatory steps are discussed in more detail below Chapter 5 Templates Page 291 Getting Started with Template Design Introduction to Template Design Know Some HTML HyperText Markup Language HTML is the standard text markup language used to create documents for the Web It takes less than a day to learn enough HTML to create simple Web pages and to begin working with INTERSHOP templates INTERSHOP is comp
406. ons listed in simple table Category enhanced Example of improved graphics cross category promotional reference Root Categories Displays root categories Do not delete ORDER manager SETTINGS manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager CATALOG manager Figure 168 The Catalog Templates included with Training Store What are Catalog Templates Catalog Templates display the categories and subcategories of your product catalog in the Storefront More specifically they display Category name s Category description s e Link s to the next level of the category hierarchy You enter your categories and subcategories in the Catalog Manager but when designing a Catalog Template you don t need to keep track of them all You use LOOP statements to call up and display lists of categories See LOOP Statements p 273 for a complete discussion of Loops What is the Main Level Categories Template The INTERSHOP Main Level Categories template in INTERSHOP 3 this was called the root category template is the principal template in the Storefront It gives access to the other categories and subcategories in the store Most merchants link the Main Level Categories to their home page as described in The Store Homepage Template p 315 The Main Level Categories template code is modified just like any other Catalog template The Main Level Categorie
407. op name issues an error if this loop does not exist A loop B A reference to an array holding a loop structure loop structure can be ref2array nested Page 418 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions TLE Handling Functions Table 88 SetTLELoopStructure Set a loop structure to a TLE loop each call replaces the last value Example SetTLELoopStructure MyLoop ref2Array OUTPUT none Sets a structure Comment This function can only be used after the function CreateTLELoop has been executed See CreateTLELoop Table 89 CreateTLELoopData Create a TLE used within a TLE loop for a specific loop element NOTE If you want to add new TLEs for a new row with CreateTLELoopData CreateLooplteration must first be called Example CreateTLELoopData MyLoop 1 MyVariable a value us A A TLE loop name Sloop B The index within the loop l count of loop elements B Index C The TLE name D value D value i OUTPUT No output defined Comment See also CreateTLELooplteration TLE Variable Save Save sets the value of a TLE variable and then saves the changed value to the corresponding database fields If the specified indices User defined TLE variables or loops don t exist in the current template no value is returned If a non valid or set only TLE variable is used no value i
408. operators You can use ELSE with compound conditional blocks Below are the Boolean operators allowed in INTERSHOP 4 Table 47 Boolean Operators Boolean operator Description AND Conjunction OR Disjunction NOT Logical negation Example Using Compound Conditional Statement IF ProductNo EQ 001 OR ProductNo EQ 002 my sentence ENDIF IF ProductNo EQ 003 o the same ENDIF ae ZLOOP Statements The LOOP statement allows you to iterate over a number of items within a template The items can be categories products basket items or any other data structure provided by INTERSHOP as loops The LOOP statement makes it possible to easily create lists within the INTERSHOP templates Loop Variables and Templates Loop statements begin with LOOP loop variable where the loop variable is specific to the given template The LOOP statement ends with ENDLOOP and all HTML and TLEs within the LOOP and ENDLOOP are repeated for each item provided by the loop variable Only certain templates those intended to display a list of items support a specific LOOP statement Loops are available on Storefront including Category Product and List Templates Print and Mail templates The examples below show the use of Loops on a Category template and on a Print template Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 273 LOOP Statements TLE Statements Example Listing Catego
409. orget to Save any changes 2 Choose a Print Template from the drop down list INTERSHOP includes two sample print templates a simple Default and a version to be used with your company logo Chapter 3 The Back Office Order Manager Process a New Order 3 Click Print Preview A separate browser window appears displaying a print preview of the order confirmation letter Click Save A record of each Print is automatically generated and appears at the bottom of the Customer Order Details page where it is available for your review To make a hard copy choose Print from the browser File menu Close the print preview browser window to return to the Customer Order Details page Generate an Invoice Assuming you ve looked over the customer s order and found no problems you are ready to generate an invoice Most merchants will then want to print out and mail the invoice only to those customers who don t elect to pay online or by phone or fax with a credit card or electronic wallet Generating and printing invoices are two separate actions For its own record keeping the INTERSHOP system assumes a bill has been sent as soon as you click Invoice regardless of whether you make a hard copy print out To generate an invoice Open the Customer Order Details page and edit as necessary 2 Click New Invoice The Invoice Details page appears Figure 113 Simultaneously INTERSHOP crea
410. ory Test your template style by running the Store Design Wizard at least once for every scheme defined Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini The Style Definition File style ini This section is intended as a reference for editing the style ini file and does not contain instructions Every template style must have a style definition style ini file in its directory The style ini file maps information about a template style to the INTERSHOP application when the Store Design Wizard is invoked You can view and edit the style ini file in Notepad The style ini file is divided into sections and sub sections that loosely correspond to the directory structure discussed in Template Style Directory Structure p 335 Each major section is marked by a sign and section name any lines starting with are treated as comments and ignored by the system Sub section names are enclosed in square brackets Each sub section contains a list of key value pairs Figure 173 style ini Notepad Lol File Edit Search Help description Antiqued finishes and objects of art image preview jpg group Classic staticfiles StaticFiles imagedir SiteImages templates Templates preview preview html Languages default English Customizeable sub styles Buttonstyles count 4 1 Buttons1 2 Buttons2 3 Buttons3 4 Buttons4s BannerStyles
411. ot DataImport documentation cfa C Intershop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport documentation txt dat C1 fIntershop Data ishome screenshat Datalmportdocumentation map Cifntershop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport status Jog C fintershop Data ishome screenshot Datalmport error log ok ok Figure 64 The Data Import Tool Status page displays the results of your import Click Display Error Log to review any errors that may have occurred during the import process The Data Import Tool Error Log page is displayed Figure 65 See Possible Errors on p 108 for more information 10 Click Close to return to the Data Import Tool Monitor page Il Click System Admin on the back office navigation bar to exit the Data Import Tool and return to the System Administration Main Menu The Data Import Error Log Figure 65 page lists any errors that occurred during import Some errors such as datatype mismatches a character field mapped to an integer column are fatal meaning that those records cannot be imported Page 103 Work with Existing Data Import Files Data Import Field length errors however where the character length of a file field exceeds that allowed for the database column do not necessarily prevent file import but additional characters beyond the maximum will be truncated In the list select box next to the error summary you can specify whether to import or ignore such records 7 Store
412. otalTax 239 Alt_PrevShippingPrice 242 246 Alt_PrevShippingSubTotal 242 246 Alt_PrevShippingTotal 242 246 Alt_PrevShippingTotalTax 242 246 Alt_PrevSubTotal 242 246 282 Alt_PrevTotalPrice 242 246 282 Alt_PrevTotalTax 242 246 282 Alt_ProductPrice 240 276 277 281 Alt_ProductPrice_Value 281 Alt_ProductSubTotal 241 281 283 284 Alt_ProductSubTotal_Value 281 Alt_ProductTotalPrice 241 276 281 285 Alt_ProductTotalPrice_Value 276 281 Alt_ProductTotalTax 241 276 281 283 Alt_ProductTotalTax_Value 281 Alt_ShippingPrice 240 Alt_ShippingSubTotal 240 Alt_ShippingTotalPrice 240 Alt_ShippingTotalTax 240 Alt_SupplierOrderSubTotal 240 Alt_SupplierOrderTotalPrice 240 Alt_SupplierOrderTotalTax 240 AvailabilityString 231 281 Index BasketNo 257 270 BasketPositions 231 BasketSub Total 238 241 270 363 BasketSubTotal_Value 241 BasketTotalPrice 238 270 302 363 BasketTotalPrice_Value 273 BasketTotalTax 238 270 Bookmarks 236 catalogimage 326 Categories 237 403 CategoryDescription 128 237 282 CategoryName 237 274 282 CategoryNo 237 CheckBox_ConfirmationEMail 262 CheckBox_ConfirmationFax 262 CountBookmarks 236 270 CreationByOperator 260 CreationDate 260 CreditCardExpireDate 250 CreditCardExpireMont 284 CreditCardExpireMonth 250 259 262 CreditCardExpireYear 250 262 284 CreditCardNo 250 259 262 284 CreditCardRows 258 CurrencySymbol 257 CurrentDate 225
413. oted in a safe place See Change Passwords and Login Names on p 89 for details Chapter 2 System Administration Page 41 Access the Back Office Use System Administration First Time 3 Click Enter The back office welcome page is displayed Figure 19 ia Welcome Welcome to the INTERSHOP 4 Back Office Use the 7 Managers on the The current status of your store navigation bar at the E bottom of the to run 0 Unprocessed Orders your store System 0 Open Orders Administrators with 0 Accounts Receivable proper access will find an eighth SYSTEM ADMIN button on the navigation Whathas happened since your last login bar to modify overall 0 Sessions in the storefront store design and 0 Baskets have been generated 0 New customers have been registered 0 New Orders configuration This store is currently in Staging mode CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager mai manager manager manager manager Figure 19 The back office welcome page including a link to System Administration 4 Click the System Administration button The System Administration main menu is displayed Figure 20 22 System Administration System Administration Main Menu General Preferences System Preferences Mail Preferences Regional Settings Search Result Preferences Customer Preferences Product Preferences Basket Preferences Order Preferences Opti
414. ou wish to save click OK When the operation is complete a successful completion message appears Click OK Import ALL Templates Simultaneously All META tags must be in place to re import successfully See Tips on Using META Tags on Exported Template Files p 300 Open the Template groups main page by selecting Templates from the System Administration Main Menu Figure 20 Click Export Import Template A page appears where you choose whether to export or import Figure 156 To import enter the path name where the htm files are located It must follow the same directory structure as when the set was exported NOTE If you have installed a language pack and if different people are working with your templates in different languages be sure to re import all languages at the same time Re importing separately causes templates to overwrite each other Click Import Templates After successful import a results page appears listing the template group s that were imported updated or not imported Export an Individual Template Open the template by selecting its name from the template list 2 Click Export 3 A Save as window appears define where you will save the file and what you want to name it Click Save to save the file 4 To view the saved file open it in an HTML editor or design tool Chapter 5 Templates Opening a template file directly in the browser can r
415. ous Order TLE Variables Service TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates PaymentStarted At least one invoice to this order Storefront templates only Service is paid List of previous order PaymentComplete All items have been put on an invoice Storefront templates only Service and all invoices have been paid List of previous order Storefront templates only Service PrevBasketNo No of the previous basket List of View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PrevOrderNo No of the previous order List of View a previous basket order Lists products from a previous order Storefront templates only Service YE PrevOrderPositiofs Used in LOOP statement View a previous order PrevOrders Lists previous orders Used in LOOP Storefront templates only Service statement List of previous order PrevBasketComment Comment of the previous basket order templates Geri View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PrevSubTotal Sub total of a previous basket order List of View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PrevTotalTax Total tax of a previous basket order List of View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PrevTotalPrice Total price of a previous basket order List of View a previous basket order Laat Price of the shipping method o
416. own menu here The menu is then used to set up your discount matrix See Discounts on page 190 for details NOTE You may want to have all your newly registering members automatically assigned to a category of their own For example assign all newly registering customers to a Fall 99 category during the Fall season Once you create the Fall 99 category here the System Administrator can assign it to all newly registering customers See Customer Registration Preferences on page 64 Page 188 Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Drop Down Menus Manufacturers The drop down menu you create here lists the manufacturers of your products The menu appears in the Product Manager so you can specify the manufacturer of each product you offer The manufacturer drop down menu also appears in your Storefront enabling your customers to search for products by manufacturer or brand name Units of Weight and Measurement The drop down menu you create here is used in the Product Manager so that you can assign standardized measurement units e g pcs units cases to each product displayed in your storefront Create Drop Down Menu Entries Select Set Up Drop Down Menus from the Settings Manager Main Menu Click on the name of the drop down menu you wish to edit Customer Categories Manufacturers or Units of Weights and Measurement An editing page is displayed including a New Value entry field and
417. page 1 www server net cgi bin storename storefront All templates except Print and Mail templates URL User Defined Template Page 256 These TLE Variables link to particular User defined templates For more information on User defined templates see p 59 Table 33 URL User Defined Template TLE Variables TLE Variable URL_CachedUserTemplate Description Contains the URL to display User defined storefront templates to the customer Use only if the related template is cached Available Template s All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_DSEAction Variable available on all User defined templates for Direct Storefront Entry See p 59 for more information on Direct Storefront Entry All templates except Print and Mail templates TEURL UserTemplate ID Creates a link that loads a specific User defined template and must be used with the assigned ID parameter Example A HREF http TEURL UserTemplate 4 7 For more information see Template Groups in Detail User Defined p 331 All templates except Print and Mail templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Session TLE Variables Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Table 34 Session TLE Variables Session TLE Variables Session TLEs are maintained throughout a session but may change from one session to the next TLE Variable Description Availa
418. page for that product You can also upload files for multimedia attributes directly from this page see Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes on p 148 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 147 Product Attributes Product Manager 1 Open the Product Details page for a specific product and click Product Attribute Values The Product Attribute Values page for this product is displayed Figure 87 All the product attributes you have created are listed unless the Hide Empty Attributes select box is checked in which case only the attributes that have been defined for this product are displayed To view all attributes de select the checkbox Product Manager BACK SAVE CREATE AND EDIT ATTRIBUTES Product Attribute Values Product No 1002 Product Name Leather Steering Wheel Cover Hide Empty Attributes 7 String Attributes tor p Text Attributes LongDescription AccuSteer s Leather Steering Wheel Covers enhances safety and comfort by providing a firmer grip on your steering wheel Protect your investment in your automobile with the attractively designed steering wheel covers Available in 5 colors and 8 sizes to fit most models and makes Integer Attributes sze MM Multimedia Attributes Image i002 jpg UPLOAD INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager C
419. pe Al Files 7 zl em J CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager Page 305 Upload Files to the Web Server INTERSHOP Template Tools 3 Click Browse and select a file for upload using the Windows Choose File window 4 Click Upload File Your file is imported to the chosen directory Delete Files from the Web Server l Select Upload File to Web Server from the System Administration Main Menu INTERSHOP automatically takes you to your store s document root on the Web Server The data folders for your store appear in a list on the Select Target Directory for File Upload page along with other files you have uploaded Figure 158 2 Select the checkboxes by any files to be deleted 3 Click Delete Selected Items Page 306 Chapter 5 Templates Page Caching Upload Files to the Web Server Page Caching Page Caching allows you to boost Storefront performance by designating certain INTERSHOP templates to be saved as static files directly to your local file system Normally all INTERSHOP pages are compiled dynamically each time they are called a feature that provides vital flexibility for processes like compiling a shopping basket tax calculation etc However certain pages contain data that doesn t change frequently Saving these as cached files enhances performance by eliminating unnecessary database queries Merchants can store Catalog List Product User defined a
420. pendent variation To assign variation sets to particular products 1 Create a product see Create a New Product on page 140 or call up existing product s Product Details page Figure 92 222 m 2 Product Manager BACK SAVE DELETE NEW PRODUCT ENTER STOCK PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE VALUES ASSIGN PROFILE MANAGE VARIATION HELP Product Details Product no S AC10003 Product AcuSteer Compass Description acusteer is constructed of the highest quality Ej materials and is accurate to within a 0 005 tolerance rating a Operator Administrator 7 IV visible at Storefront Discounts Big Discount T Hot Deal Template Accessories zl Manufacturer Acusteer 2 Wholesale Price net 119 00 Supplier a Retail Price net 198 95 Tax Class Taxable T Minimum Inventory 0 Units zi Weight 0 00 Min order level 1 Availability In Stock Number in Stock 200 Bookmarks 0 Reserved 5 Ordered 0 Assign To Category Equipment Accessories PURCHASING manager Product Profile Information SETTINGS manager CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager CUSTOMER manager SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 92 Product Details Page 2 Click Assign Variation at the top of the Product Details page Assign Product Variation Types page is displayed Figure 93 only if variation types have not been previously defined I
421. plate Service List of previous basket HURL_PrevOrderList Creates a link that displays list of customer s orders All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_Service Creates a link that displays Service main page All templates except Print and Mail templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 255 URL TLE Variables Table 32 URL Session TLE Variables TLE Variable URL_ChangeLanguage Description Creates a link that when used without a parameter EN DE etc will display the default language If you have purchased and installed the appropriate INTERSHOP Language Pack this TLE would be used with the 150 country code parameter Example lt A HREF http URL_ChangeLanguage DE gt TLE Variables Available Templates All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_Login Creates a link that displays member customers login page All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_NavigationFrame Creates a link that displays the Store Navigation Bar template All templates except Print and Mail templates HURL_NewStoreFrontSession Creates a link that forces a new storefront session and reloads Home Page All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_SearchMask Creates a link that displays a search page All templates except Print and Mail templates URL_Store Creates a link to the store home
422. plate Editor 297 Templates And error messages 321 Basket 317 360 363 Catalog 325 Checkout 318 Creating 296 Cross selling editing 384 Deleting 296 Exporting all templates in database 298 Exporting individual templates 299 Forms 364 Frames defining in 358 Grouping 312 Hot Deals 324 Images linking to 328 Importing different languages and 299 Importing individual HTML file 300 Importing exporting vs 298 INTERSHOP Template Groups overview 312 Languages embedding links in 375 Linking manually 251 List defined 326 Main level categories defined 325 META tags 300 Multi lingual 299 Product adding images to 328 Product editing 379 Product editing to display attributes 379 Profile display 395 Registration 318 Revert to default command 303 Root category 359 Service 323 Store Homepage 315 358 359 Store navigation bar 317 359 Store password 324 Index Storefront list of miscellaneous 324 Storefront opening 315 Storefront overview 358 Template design getting started with 291 User defined creating 331 User defined linking 332 User defined linking to storefront 332 TLE 269 Assistant 302 TLE Individual Alt_BasketSubTotal 239 363 Alt_BasketTotalPrice 239 363 Alt_BasketTotalTax 239 Alt_CurrencySymbol 241 Alt_CustCreditBalance 241 Alt_CustStoreCredi 241 Alt_InvoiceSubTotal 240 Alt_InvoiceTotalPrice 240 Alt_InvoiceTotalTax 240 Alt_OrderSubTotal 239 Alt_OrderTotalPrice 239 Alt_OrderT
423. plates Bookmarks LastNolnBatch une k Mg rM E Hot Deals send une and List page in a List template basic Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 265 Server Side Script TLE Variable Replacements Table 42 Search Input TLE Variables TLE Variable Name_SearchCombination Description Used with radio buttons to combine two or more input fields with values of And Or TLE Variables Available Templates Storefront template Search Mask Name_SearchPriceMax Input field for upper price threshold for searches in price ranges All templates except Print templates Name_SearchPriceMin Input field for lower price threshold for searches in price ranges All templates except Print templates Name_SearchProductName Input field for product name or description All templates except Print templates Name_SearchProductNo Input field for product number to be searched All templates except Print templates Name_SearchString Same as Name_SearchProductName All templates except Print templates SearchFormTagAttributes Used to begin a search form All templates except Print templates SearchFormlagAttributesSSL Used to begin a search form using SSL All templates except Print templates SearchUseProfile Input field to enable searching only for items that match customer s profile Storefront template Search Mask SelectBox_ Manufa
424. plates simultaneously 1 Select Templates from the System Administration main menu The Templates page is displayed 2 Click Import Export Template A page appears where you choose to export or import Figure 156 System Administration BACK EXPORT TEMPLATES IMPORT TEMPLATES TEMPLATES Import Export Templates Path relative to your store home path Templates CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager CUSTOMER manager SETTINGS manager INVENTORY PURCHASING manager manager SYSTEM ADMIN manager Figure 156 Export Import all templates in the set 3 To export specify a directory location for the htm files INTERSHOP will create the directory structure you specify relative to your store s home path For example If your store has been installed with the directory structure c Intershop Data ishome lt storename gt then the path you specify in this field Templates for example will be automatically appended to the store s home path Figure 156 Chapter 5 Templates INTERSHOP Template Tools Export Templates and Import HTML Files 4 Click Export Templates to export all templates All templates will be exported as files that you can edit for example using a third party HTML authoring tool An alert window appears asking if you want to overwrite all existing files and directories If the destination directory is free of files y
425. please check our Info section or give us a call at 1 800 000 1111 You may also contact us by email ati Figure 14 The Account page for members in Sports Place Track Past Orders To track orders that you as a member have placed 1 Click My Account and choose List of orders up to now 2 Enter your password as prompted The order tracking page is displayed Figure 15 showing order status depending on what the merchant has done in the back office Order processing is completed when an invoice is created Payment is completed when the invoice is marked paid Shipping is completed when the packing slip is created 3 Click on an order number to review the ordered basket and its contents MY ACCOUNT PREVIOUS ORDER PAYMENT SHIPPING DATE ORDERS PROCESS PROCESS PROCESS TUTAL 07 05 99 completed not started not started 351 50 07 05 99 completed completed completed 180 49 Back Figure 15 List of orders up to now for a member in Sports Place Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 33 Online Customer Service Reviewing and Reloading Past Shopping Basket Page 34 Sports Place for Members Any time a shopper collects items in a shopping basket this information is saved and can be recalled Registered members can review and reload previous baskets To do so I Click My Account and choose List of baskets up to now 2 Enter your password as prompted
426. plete ProductlotalPrice PaymentStarted TE ProductTotalTax PrevCanceled UnitOfMeasurement Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Statements LOOP Statements Table 56 lists all TLEs that can be used on the View Previous Basket Service template with the loop variable PrevBasketPostions Table 56 Service Template View Previous Basket ViewPreviousBasket with PreviousBasketPositions FAIt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice ProductName FAlt_ProductlotalPrice ProductNo Alt_ProductTotalTax ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice DiscountPercent ProductQuantity DiscountPrice ProductSubTotal HasNewPrice ProductlaxAmount T IsProductVariation ProductlotalPrice ltemNo Productlotallax NotAvailable Table 57 lists all TLEs that can be used on the View Previous Orders Service template with the loop variable PrevOrderPositions Table 57 Service Template View Previous Orders View of Previous Orders with PreviousBaskets HAlt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice ProductNo Alt_ProductSubTotal ProductNetPrice ProductGrossPrice HAlt_ProductTotalPrice ProductQuantity Alt_ProductTotalTax ProductSubTotal DiscountPercent ProductlaxAmount TE lsProductVariation ProductlotalPrice ProductName ProductlotalTax Print and Mail Templates Table 58 lists all TLEs that can be used on the Basket Print template with the loop variable BasketPositions Table 58 Print Te
427. ppingMethodID return unless ExistsTLE ShippingMethodID No To en Less able this feature you must create a shipping method in the store Back Office Set t Repla he price of the new shippign method to 0 ce the ID below for ShippingMethodID to the ID assigned in the Back Office Enabl e SSS for the store and activate this shipping method The 1 ines below should be used in the Basket template to call the script BEG END IN use Shipping CalculateShipping return unless GetTLE ShippingMethodID 8 Check for basket position loop return unless ExistsTLELoop BasketPositions Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 433 Shipping pm Example Sample Server Side Script Check if there is at least one product in the basket return unless Get TLELoopCount BasketPositions init the weight of the basket my TotalWeight 0 my Si SProductWeight ProductQuantity loop over all basket items to calculate the total weight for i 1 i lt Get TLELoopCount BasketPositions i SProductWeight Get TLELoopData BasketPositions i ProductWeight_Value SProductQuantity Get TLELoopData BasketPositions i ProductQuantity_Value STotalWeight S ProductQuantity SProductWeight OverrideSh
428. preference if you will permit new shoppers to order without establishing a persistent membership identity in your store Default value Yes checked may differ depending on choices made in the Store Design Wizard Step 2 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 61 Optimize Search Results Set General Preferences Non Member Checkout for Members Check this preference if you will permit customers who have already established a recognized identity to order as non members Members who choose this option will not then be able to track such orders under their membership name Default value Yes checked may differ depending on choices made in the Store Design Wizard Step 2 Display Order Information Page for Members Check this preference to insert an order review page immediately after the payment selection page in the member based checkout process If a payment method is pre selected the order information page will appear immediately before the customer submits the order and receives the order confirmation page Default value Yes checked may differ depending on choices made in the Store Design Wizard Step 2 Display Order Information Page for Non Members Check this preference to insert an order review page immediately after the non member registration form in the non member checkout process Default value Yes checked may differ depending on choices made in the Store Design Wizard Step 2
429. product template and chooses how buyers will specity their choices i e via select box radio buttons or individual hot links For example Suppose in the clothing store described above the Picasso T shirt comes in SIZES Small Medium and Large and in the COLORS Blue and Green The store designer uses the Variation Manager to create a matrix of TYPES Size Color and VALUES S M L Blue Green The designer also creates two select boxes so buyers can choose any combination of size and color Chapter 5 Templates Page 327 Product Attributes vs Product Variations Template Groups in Detail Product Step by step instructions for working with Variations in the Product Manager appear in Product Variations p 151 The HTML forms and TLE variables needed to display variations are discussed in Display Product Variations p 381 Use Images in Product Templates To insert an image into your Product page you use or create a Product Attribute TLE variable like Image and embed it in the template along with the predefined variable StoreImagePath StorelmagePath provides a path to the store directory If your product image resides ina directory under the store directory you will need to specify the directory name along with StorelmagePath In the Product Manager you then assign a Image a value for each product If the attribute you created to hold your image files has the data type multimedia you can upload your image files from the A
430. products ordered by the merchant from a supplier A Customer Order which has not yet been processed in any way All orders which have been partially processed but are still incomplete A completed order must have an invoice a packing slip and a record of payment on the invoice The form included when a product is shipped to a customer which lists the product number product name and quantity ordered To be completed every order requires a packing slip and an invoice An HTML document that may contain text images and other online elements It may be static or dynamically generated It may be a stand alone HTML document or one that is contained within a frame See HTML Used to create pages stored in a file on a hard drive and read through a special file reader Because these quasi static pages minimize database queries the greatly improve response time in the storefront Practical Extraction and Reporting Language PERL PERL is primarily a system administration language used by System Administrators and Web Masters as a language for manipulating text files and processes See Attributes See Variations Created in System Administration and linked to categories and products Customers select from profile items to create their personal profile Customers select personal preferences from pre defined profile items placed on a page in the storefront The store can then be automatically tailored to their selections Orders sent
431. provides the current row number Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates CHAPTER 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting XN 7 INTERSHOP 1 Server Side Scripting Introduction Server Side Scripting Introduction INTERSHOP 4 comes with a built in interpreter for the PERL scripting language The interpreter enables use of Perl for what we call Server Side Scripting SSS SSS allows programmers to extend or change INTERSHOP s features without the need of third party development tools PERL is the most widely accepted platform independent programming language and was chosen by INTERSHOP because it does not require programmers to learn a new proprietary language as some vendors do At the same time PERL is extremely powerful PERL includes the functions of C and C including object oriented programming but is much easier to learn and to use For example PERL does not require memory management and string manipulation an important part of working with Web applications is much easier than with C or JAVA PERL is also the language of choice for database management it supports access to all industry standard databases including Oracle Sybase Informix MS SQL Server and ODBC connections PERL has thousands of users on all available computer platforms including all flavors of UNIX There is no other programming language with more public support resources web sites newsgroups literature user groups
432. pter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini Custom TLE Variables In this section of the style ini file you create a sub section for each CustomTLE variable that you defined in the Customizeable Sub Styles portion of the style ini file Custom TLE variables WelcomeText name Welcome description This text will be shown to welcome a new customer to your store default Welcome to the cyber stor SupportURL name Support URL description Enter a link to a location where shoppers can find help default http www examplestore com Table 76 Key Value inputs custom TLE variables Key Value In Example Description name Welcome Text A friendly descriptive name for the TLE variable 9 The en shoin A description of the TLE variable that gives SDW description welcome a new customer to f 9 users an idea of what value needs to entered your store The default value for the TLE variable that will default Welcome to the cyber store be filled in until the SDW user enters their own 9 text name Support URL A friendly descriptive name for the TLE variable 9 a E link i n description IE A description for the TLE variable 9 where shoppers can find help The default value for the TLE variable that will default http www examplestore com be filled in until the SDW user enters their own text
433. quantity entered is less than 1 This feature has two benefits Provides an easy way for customers to remove items from their baskets they simply adjust the number displayed to 0 and the product is removed e Prohibits them from accidentally sending an order for 0 items Default setting Yes checked Remain on Current Page after Adding Removing Product By default the Add To Basket button in all demostores governed by TLE variable URL_AddToBasket results in the same behavior the product is added to the basket and the basket view is displayed Using Remain on Current Page after Adding Removing Product allows merchants to select another option each time an item is added to the basket the buyer stays on the current storefront page This option allows shoppers to add multiple products from a single catalog list and then view the basket after all selections have been made The Remove From Basket button and its associated TLE variable URL_RemoveFromBasket is also affected by this option Check this field if you want shoppers to stay on the page where the Add To Basket link was clicked viewing the basket only when completing an order or when deliberately choosing the Basket button in the navigation bar See URL Basket TLE Variables on p 252 for more detail on using the URL_AddToBasket and URL_RemoveFromBasket TLE variables If you check the box enabling this feature you may also want to edit product pages to notify
434. r SETTINGS SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 42 Create or Delete Profile Items 4 Click Back to return to the Customer Profile Matrix page The new items show in the Available Items column to the right of the corresponding profile class name Chapter 2 System Administration Customer Profile Matrix Delete Individual Items from a Profile Class Delete Individual Items from a Profile Class On the Customer Profile Matrix page click the name of the profile class from which you want to delete an item The Create or Delete Profile Items page is displayed Figure 42 Select the item you wish to delete from the list box Click Delete Item click OK when prompted The deleted item no longer appears in the list box Repeat as desired Click Back to return to the Customer Profile Matrix page Delete a Profile Class If you delete a Profile Class you automatically delete all of the assigned profile items Click Delete Class on the Customer Profile Matrix page The Delete Profile Class page is displayed Select the class you wish to delete from the list box Click Delete Class click OK when prompted The class no longer appears in the list box You will be returned back to the Customer Profile Matrix page Chapter 2 System Administration Page 75 Delete a Profile Class Payment Method Settings Page 76 Payment Method Settings INTERSHOP allows you t
435. r 309 TLE variables incompatible with 269 Payment Methods Changing 81 Creating 81 Page 450 Direct Credit Card Entry 83 Disabling 82 Individual customer activating 171 Individual customer assigning to 179 Overview 76 Payment method ID 81 Payment method settings page 77 Pre approved customer options 79 Reducing clicks for shoppers with 320 Payment Terms Credit length setting 171 Preferences General 48 Baskets 59 Customers 56 E mail 50 Products 58 Regional preferences 52 Search results 55 SSL options 70 Supported languages 65 System preferences 48 Prices Products assigning to 142 Profit calculating 180 Reports on profits 205 207 Product Attributes 145 Cross selling 388 Data types 146 Deleting 150 Displaying 379 HTML inserting code into 379 Product Templates editing to display 379 Searching for 370 TLE variables for 234 vs Product Variations 327 PRODUCT MANAGER 137 Product Templates See Templates Product Variations Attribute values editing 156 Defining 327 Deleting 157 Displaying 381 Imported variation types displaying 328 Imported variation types searching 372 Index Importing 109 Overview 109 Rules adding 158 Rules removing 159 Rules types 158 Searching 372 TLE Variables 235 Types and values assigning 153 Types and values creating 152 vs Product Attributes 327 Products Creating 140 Data editing 143 Deleting 159 Hot Deals templa
436. rame 1 This describes the navigation frame The TLE variable URL_NavigationFrame loads the Storefront template Store Navigation Bar gt lt FRAME FRAMEBORDER no FRAMESPACING 1 NORESIZE SCROLLING no MARGINHEIGHT 0 MARGINWIDTH 0 BORDER 0 SRC http URL_NavigationFrame gt Figure 175 shows how this page coded as abo Storefront B STORE INTERSHOP Online is the first shopping software for Fiction anyone who wantstosel p 9 anything onthe Intemet Biographies The software contains Cookbooks everything youneedto Automotive make money on the Net And you do not have fo wrife a single line of code What s more if UNIX is too complicated for you INTERSHOP Online also runs on Microsoft Windows NT Copyright INTERSHOP Commomicstions ve will appear in the I Main level categories in top frame Navigation bar in bottom frame Figure 175 The Store Homepage Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 359 The Basket Template Storefront Templates The Basket Template The Basket template contains examples of many IF statements and comparison operators Here we include a sample IF statement that determines whether or not a customer is logged in as a registered customer and responds accordingly Also included are two other code samples one to place a customer comment
437. rchy The URL defined in the remote link calls up the page in the store where customers will enter There are special parameters attached to this URL which follow the format described in Create a User defined Template as an Introduction Page p 401 below One of these parameters called the DSE action specifies whether the customer will enter on a Catalog page a Product page a Search mask the Hot Deals page or in a Shopping Basket In the simplest scenario you simply create a DSE URL and embed it in the external web site for example in an advertisement If your store does not use frames and you allow customers to jump directly into an existing page then the DSE URL is all you need Two other scenarios are slightly more complex First if your store uses frames you need to create a gateway with a User defined template that splits the screen into a frameset You then use the DSE Preferences page in INTERSHOP System Administration Main Menu to route your DSE URL through this gateway Alternatively in a non frame based store you may want to show an introduction page before jumping directly to the designated product category etc Here too you create a User defined template for this purpose and use the DSE Preferences page to route the DSE URL through the introductory page In the more complex scenarios you need to carry out the following steps to fully implement Direct Storefront Entry Create the D
438. rdering from suppliers and administering customer account information See Overview The Managers and Everyday Business Operations on page 122 To make changes to the store catalog information e g to change product offerings descriptions or categories See the Catalog Manager on page 124 and Product Manager on page 137 To offer discounts to select groups of customers See the Settings Manager on page 187 To create reports and analyses of customer activities and sales See the Settings Manager on page 187 To manage links between your catalog and customer profiles See The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on page 210 Chapter 3 The Back Office Introduction to the Back Office Getting Started in the Back Office Getting Started in the Back Office Once you ve completed the setup steps in the System Administration area Chapter 2 you re ready to continue with setup in the back office Preliminaries Plan Your Catalog Begin by planning your store catalog map out the product categories you will display to your customers The more thoroughly you plan your catalog in advance the more quickly you ll be able to proceed through setup and open your store NOTE You can begin working with templates to customize the look of your store as soon as you start mapping out your catalog or you can complete the setup tasks in this chapter first See Chapters 4 6 for template design information Set
439. re in the data file to begin importing and what to do with your data file once the import process is complete To start the import process you must enter the special database user password provided by your Site Administrator If you do not have this password contact your Site Administrator V4 Store Back Office BACK STATUS CANCEL START DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 4 Job Control If you arrived from Step 3 Data Description File documentation cfg fil Data File documentation txt dat your les are Mapping File documentation map automatically bens i Database User DB_USER2 listed on the Database Password I o page Action validate and Import validate import Replacement Option Update Replace Ignore Start Import At Row E Delete Data File After Import 7 Run in Background T Clear Page Cache After Import Figure 6l Step 4 Job Control 1 Enter the special database user name and password provided by your Site Administrator You must have permission from your Site Administrator to access the database Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Data Import Tool Step by Step 2 Select an Action radio button for the import process you want Validate The Data Import Tool will check that the import data is suitable for the database fields without importing your file or any records For example if you try to import text into a field assigned to integers you will be notifie
440. re listed in the drop down menus on the right Fields that are left blank will be ignored Default Section Database Field Default Value Name Description Purchase Price Selling Price Quantity Unit Tax Class Weight Discount Visible At Storefront Hot Deal Supplier Manufacturer Print Template Minimum Stock Minimum Order Catalog Number Catalog Name On Stock Reserved Ordered Master Product Default Variation Attribute Image Attribute Software Attribute ClassLevel Attribute CourseTime1 Attribute CourseTime2 Attribute CourseTime3 Attribute CourseTime4 Attribute LongDescription Attribute Display Attribute Extras Attribute AboutTeacher Attribute Ports Attribute Memory Attribute PowerSupply Attribute Size Attribute Teacher Attribute Room Attribute Color Attribute Features o o a v r Default None Product basic o Default None E r one size fits all Default Value Section Values entered in this section will be inserted where no value exists in your data file Figure 60 Mapping File page for Customer Data import file Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Data Import Tool Step by Step Map Fields and Assign Default Values First verify that your import file has been correctly parsed by checking that each field from your header row is listed in the File Fields column of the Mapping Section If this is not t
441. reate a new one if the manufacturer has not yet been created in INTERSHOP e Any attributes listed in the data file must be created in the back office prior to import Amain Master Product may only have one sub product assigned as the default product Changing the default value of a single sub product will make this sub product the default if set to 1 or will make the one with the lowest product number the default if set to 0 e Assigning a sub product to a normal product will make the normal product a super product e Catalogs can only hold normal products products without variations and super products not sub products Catalog Data Import Rules The catalog number must be mapped Choosing Ignore as the Replacement Option in Step 4 Job Control will insert only new catalogs e Choosing Update as the Replacement Option in Step 4 will insert new catalogs and update existing catalogs if a value is entered in the data import file Page 108 Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Import Product Variations e Choosing Replace as the Replacement Option on Step 4 will update the catalog using the values in the data file and default settings but will not delete catalogs that are not listed in the data file The reason for this is that it is not possible to erase main catalogs that have sub catalogs attached Sort mode rule Alphabetically sorted categories affected by the import will be
442. red Product Templates Used to display individual products The basic product template is very simple other product templates include code to call up images and additional Product Attributes User defined Templates Optional User defined templates allow merchants to extend their storefront template set and insert pages with active TLE elements into the storefront flow User defined templates are also employed as alternate gateways for jumping into a page of the store from an external site Shop Correspondence Print Templates Used to define the appearance of invoices order confirmations packing slips and follow up letters as well as internal paperwork such as a print out of a Customer Details or Customer Order Details page Mail Templates Optional Used to define e mail and fax messages sent from the merchant to the customer Cartridge Templates Optional You may install any of a variety of payment shipping or other Cartridges to enhance INTERSHOP core functionality Many cartridges insert special cartridge templates into your system when the cartridge is installed Page 312 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront Select Templates for Page Caching Template Groups in Detail Storefront The 30 templates in the Storefront group along with the Main Level Categories found in the Catalog group are the most important templates in an INTERSHOP store They contain background functional
443. red login page in the template Login Panel or credit card entry page Order Input Credit Card entries template use the TLE variable FormTagAttributesSSL instead of FormTagAttributes Use this format to SSL secure any FORM in your system NOTE To maintain security you must also make sure that you are reaching an SSL page with any hyperlinks from an SSL secured FORM Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 373 Using FORMs in Templates Catalog List Templates Catalog List Templates The examples in this section show how to use TLE variables to edit or add features to your Catalog and List templates Direct Links to Single Products or Categories Normally URL_ProductView and URL_Category are embedded in LOOP functions in the Catalog and List templates to produce lists containing links to products or categories In special cases you may want to create a direct link to a single product or category instead of a list In this case you must manually append a particular product number to URL_ProductView or a catalog ID number to URL_Catalog if you do not add a parameter to HURL_Catalog the Main Level Categories page will be shown Here is a sample code to direct a link to a specific product lt A HREF http URL_ProductView 10328 gt Aiwa AM FM Stereo lt A gt To create a specific link to a category lt A HREF http URL_Catalog 218 gt To the category Electronics lt A gt
444. references 56 Product Preferences osos t eee eR Rp dee IR a rd 58 Baskets Preferences s oan esl ur ph ax Ee Acetate e 59 Order Preferences Non Member l Optimize Search 5 62 Direct Storefront Entry Settings 63 Customer Registration 64 Page Caching 65 Supported Language Preferences 65 Currency Preferences cis sink Le Lee WN eR BEM oa 66 Enable SSL oso tote Aie DENM er eR eei 10 Storefront Message Templates 10 Customer Profile 72 Create Profile Classes 73 Create Items for a Profile 14 Delete Individual Items from a Profile 15 Delete a Profile 15 Payment Method Settings 76 Use the Payment Method Settings Accept Direct Credit Card 83 Enable Encryption of Credit Card 0 85 Control Back Office amp
445. refront Templates Order Select payment method pay BasketPositions Iteration over all items of a basket Storefront Templates Search results Iteration over all products of a search SearchResults Storefront Templates process Service List of previous baskets r PrevBaskets Iteration over all previous baskets Storefront Templates Service List of previous orders PrevOrders Iteration over all previous orders Storefront Templates Service View a previous order PrevBasketPositions Iteration over all previous basket items Storefront Templates Service View a previous order Iteration over all previous order P TEPrevOrderPositions Storefront Templates positions Iteration over all variations for a Any Product Template ProductVariation product LOOP Variables Templates and TLE Variables In the previous section it was established that for each template that supports loop statements there is a specific corresponding loop variable In this section we add TLE variables to the template loop variable relationship In the same way that templates and loop variables are specifically matched the specific TLE variables that can be used in a loop statement depends on the loop variable and template involved The tables in this section list the TLE variables that can be used with specific template loop variable combinations Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 275 LO
446. rences page choose the price display model Select the Net radio button to use US style tax calculation where the product prices do not include tax Select the Gross radio button to use VAT style tax calculation where the product prices include tax 2 Click Save 3 Enter your product and shipping method prices See Create a New Product on p 140 and Shipping Methods on p 194 for details Notice that the Product Details page shows Net or Gross with the price field Similarly shipping method prices should include the tax if the price display is Gross and should not if the model is Net 4 Display price calculations in the storefront All storefront pages displaying product or tax amounts use TLE variables to display either a net based or a gross based number See Standard Product TLE Variables p 231 for details Example INTERSHOP interprets price calculations very differently depending on whether net or gross price display was set In the example below the product price entered is 6 00 the tax is 16 and a discount of 7 is applied When the price display is Net then the tax is added to the 6 00 price When the price display is Gross then 16 tax is assumed to be included in the price See the following calculations based on a quantity of 100 items Table 1 Sample Calculations for Net and Gross Pricing Net Gross Tax Total Total Total E Subtotal price price amount discount ta
447. res Therefore you may want to establish different links with different language identifiers for various external sites The language identifiers follow ISO 639 standards FR French e DE German e SP Spanish IT Italian e PG Portuguese NOTE 4 language identifier is required for DSE even if your store operates in only one language Page 398 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Direct Storefront Entry Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Use the DSE Action and Numeric IDs The DSE action defines what type of page a Direct Storefront Entry link should display There are five DSE actions hotdeals Displays a Hot Deals page searchmask Displays a search page e catalog catalogID Displays a particular category page Check the Catalog Manager to find the catalog ID number e product lt productID gt Displays a particular product page Check the Product Manager to find the assigned product number e addtobasket lt productID gt Adds the product identified by its number to a basket and displays it in the Basket page ready for purchase To simply jump into an existing non frame based page of the store create the DSE URL from these parameters and try it out Otherwise continue creating User defined templates and assigning them in the DSE Preferences as described in the following sections Create User Defined Template to Initialize a Frame Set In stores using fr
448. returned to the Back Office login panel See Access the Back Office on page 41 for login instructions Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 209 Understanding Customer Profile Classes and Profile Items The Customer Profiles Feature Optional The Customer Profiles Feature Optional INTERSHOP s Customer Profiles create a personalized shopping experience for your individual customers Each customer has the choice of creating his or her own personal profile to indicate personal or business characteristics and preferences and can then activate the profile at any time to automatically tailor your store s catalog and product displays to their specific buying interests This section contains the following topics Understanding Customer Profile Classes and Profile Itemss Implementation Overview Managing Profiles from the Back Office e Overview Profile Template Design Understanding Customer Profile Classes and Profile Items To set up Customer Profiling the System Administrator first creates the profile classes and profile items that you will use for your store Profile classes are general categories within which you create the more specific profile items through which your customers can identify themselves and their interests For example you might create classes to identify personal characteristics e g gender age product types or brands used e g type of computer operating system or anything
449. ries 3 Click Close The order of the categories or products has changed on the Category page and in the Storefront NOTE As new categories are created in the Catalog Manager they will now be automatically inserted in alphabetical order However new products will be appended to the bottom of the product list To resort products alphabetically open the sort window for the category using the Sort Categories button and click Alphabetize Delete Categories When you delete a category you delete all subcategories associated with it Any products that were assigned to those categories and not also assigned to another category will no longer be visible in the Storefront 1 Select the category to be deleted 2 Click Delete 3 A warning appears click OK if you are sure you want to delete the entire category structure All subcategories and product assignments in that category will also be deleted Catalog Attributes Catalog attributes are freely definable placeholders for images text and multimedia in the store catalog Catalog attributes can use three data types string text and multimedia Compare with product attributes which can use five data types For more information see Attribute Data Types on page 146 You create and define catalog attributes as follows Create attribute names and assign data types All attribute names are available to all categories at all times
450. ries as links LOOP Categories lt A HREF http URL_Category gt CategoryName lt A gt ENDLOOP 3 Example Listing Credit Cards for Manual Credit Card Processing table LOOP CreditCardRows lt tr gt lt td gt CustNamel lt td gt lt td gt ProcessNo lt td gt lt td gt ProcessDate lt td gt lt td align right gt ProcessTotalPrice lt td gt lt td gt CreditCardNo lt td gt lt td gt CreditCardExpireMonth CreditCardExpireYear lt td gt lt tr gt ENDLOOP lt table gt The table below illustrates the relationship between the templates and the loop variables The tables in the next section illustrate the relationship between templates loop variables and specific TLE variables Table 48 Templates and Corresponding Loop Variables Template Name and Loop Variable Name Description Template Group E Any Category template Tf Categories Iteration over all categories A Iteration over all products within a Any List template Products cili Order confirmation mail to 2 OrderPositions Iteration over all order items customer Mail Template Ord firmati il S me OrderPositions Iteration over all order items merchant Mail Template Basket default 7s BasketPositions Iteration over all items of a basket Print Templates Credit card data export format CreditCardRows Iteration over all credit card Print Templat
451. roduct Information on page 143 Display or Change Existing Discount Classes 2 Page 192 Select Set Up Discounts from the Settings Manager Main Menu A list of all previously created Discounts appears Click on a Discount The Edit Discounts page is displayed At the bottom of the page one or more numbered rows show the customer categories to which you have assigned the discount and the terms you defined in each case Figure 123 Make desired changes to the Discount name or description then click Save Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Discounts Settings Manager BACK SAVE DEFINE DISCOUNT TERMS DELETE SET UP DISCOUNTS EditDiscounts Language English zl Name Fall Sale Deactivated Description 5 2 2in for frequent shoppers throughout the Fall season Customer Category Discount Valid from Valid to Frequent Buyer 25 00 96 09 01 99 12 00 am 11 01 99 12 00 am CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 123 Editing a discount class 5 To change the terms of any particular application of the discount to a customer category click on its numbered link The Define Discount page filled in with the previously defined discount terms is displayed 6 Make changes as desired and click Save 7 Click Back to return Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 193
452. rowse Target Directory SELECT CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 80 Upload multimedia files to display on catalog pages 3 Activate the Overwrite Existing Files checkbox if you want to replace any existing files of the same name on the server 4 Click Browse to use the Windows File Upload to locate the intended multimedia source file Alternatively type the path and file name in the field yourself Page 134 Chapter 3 The Back Office Catalog Manager Catalog Attributes Click Select to find a target directory for the file upload Figure 81 3980 catalog Manager CANCEL APPLY Multimedia Attribute File Upload Select Target Directory for File Upload Current Directory e ExternalPages Images e ProductImages SiteImages Figure 81 Sample root directory for multimedia file upload Use the links on the page to navigate to the directory where you want to place the file Click at any time to return to the parent directory The Site Administrator can designate any file structure and should inform you which directory to use for catalog files When the directory where you want the file is listed opposite Current Directory click Apply You return to the Multimedia Attribute File Upload page The upload path now appears in the input box Click Upload When
453. rrent shipping tax Example OverrideShippingTax 10 INPUT newshippingtax A valid tax float OUTPUT The Order Processing Functions Use the manual call GetILE to get the order number or invoice number needed for any of the following functions from a specific TLE variable Table 117 Createlnvoice Create an invoice for the current order Example invoiceno Createlnvoice orderno INPUT orderno A valid order number OUTPUT invoiceno The invoice number if successful Comment Creates an invoice using exist the function returns undef customers account is charged the amount of the invoice If the transaction fails or the order number that doesn t all products of the given order that are not yet part of an invoice The Table 118 PayInvoice Set the current invoice as paid Example Paylnvoice invoiceno INPUT invoiceno A valid invoice number OUTPUT The invoice is marked paid Comment Marks the invoice as paid The customer s account gets updated with the correct amount Page 428 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting The Scripting API Functions The Database Access Functions Table 119 Cancellnvoice Cancels the current invoice Example Cancellnvoice invoiceno INPUT invoiceno A valid invoice number OUTPUT Comment Cancels the invoice and then evalu
454. rs in any combination Search by Product number or Product name by typing the information in the appropriate field Search by assigned parameters Manufacturer Category Template or Supplier by choosing from the drop down menus Select either Sub SKUs or Main SKUs Sub SKUs displays all product variations in the search results For example the search results for a T shirt will have each color and size combination listed separately Main SKUs displays only the main products without listing the variations in the search results See page 151 for more information on variations Use the radio buttons to refine the search further Possibilities include searching for products which are or are not Visible Hot Deals or Assigned to a category Yes searches only for products which are visible on special offer Hot Deals or assigned to a category No excludes from the search any products which are visible on special offer or assigned to a category Both will not make distinctions in your search 2 When you have defined your search terms click Search 3 From the resulting list select a product to view its Product Details page 4 Note that Clear Form clears the search page Page 138 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Search for Existing Products How Searches Behave A product or customer number entered in the search field will find all numbers that begin with the number e
455. rver processes View Database Size Display detailed information about store databases Delete Database Contents Clear the contents of the store database PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager CATALOG SYSTEM manager ADMIN Figure 54 Database Administration Menu for System Administrators Review Database Processes and Information Select View Database Processes to view the name of the database running your store the host name of the computer where it is installed the program currently accessing the database and the status of current procedures Select View Database Size to review the size of current database devices and see how they are segmented Delete Database Contents When you delete the contents of a database the template structure and all hard coded elements remain in place but variable elements products categories customer information invoices and packing slips are all deleted In a multi site environment only the Site Administrator can restore deleted database contents from backup files or a dump the System Administrator in each store does not have access to these backup files Chapter 2 System Administration Page 91 Lock Unlock the Storefront Page 92 Database Administration Menu To delete the contents of an individual store database Select Database Administration Men
456. ry Manager Freely defined units such as gallons meters dozens etc used in product definition Abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator URL is the standard for specifying the address or storage location of an object on the Internet URLs are used to call up particular pages or services with a Web browser HTML pages are also based on URLs The colon is always preceded by the protocol specification An address or host is specified usually preceded by a double slash Some examples of URLs http www w3 org index html or ftp ftp microsoft com Template created by merchant or web designer used to extend the default template set Also used in Direct Storefront Entry Self defined TLE element used to replace often employed HTML tags or to insert lengthy java scripts or multi media events in the templates Rules assigned to particular variations that allow different prices for different variations or that suppress a particular variation from the set Appended to particular TLE Variables to remove formatting Used to create variations they define what makes each variation different i e color or size Used to define the individual variation types 1 a value for the variation type color might be red Different versions of a product that can be displayed from a single page in the Storefront yet tracked separately in sales reports and inventory For instance the Main product T shirt may have Sub products variations deri
457. s 1 Open a Product Details page and click Product Attribute Values The Product Attribute Values page is displayed Figure 87 2 Click Create and Edit Product Attributes The Create and Edit Product Attributes page is displayed Figure 86 3 Select the attribute you wish to delete from the list in the Attributes list box 4 Click Delete Change Attribute Data Type It is not possible to change an attribute s data type directly You must re create the product attribute selecting a new data type as described in the steps below 1 Delete the attribute with the current data type as described above 2 Create the attribute with a new data type as described in Create or Edit Product Attribute Names on page 146 3 Define a value for the new attribute as described in Define Product Attribute Values on page 147 and update templates with the new attribute TLE variable See Insert the Product Attribute Code into the HTML on page 379 ALL Lc i pnkpzk 0GB CL X OO C Lnnl OAbuZLLLLLaESVousG hhAi CAUTION Changing or deleting attributes currently being used by templates will break existing links in the storefront unless you update affected templates with new product attribute TLEs Page 150 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Product Variations Product Variations Product variations allow you to display and sell different versions of a product from a single page in the Stor
458. s Directory Folders Description Banners A Banners directory contains banner image files You may have multiple Banner directories depending on the number of schemes defined for your style Because all schemes are called by the same template set the files in the Banners directory should use the same filenames as those in the Banners2 directory Headers A Headers directory contains header image files You may have multiple Headers directories depending on the number of schemes defined for your style The filename rules outlined for Banners also apply to Headers Buttons A Buttons directory contains button image files You may have multiple Buttons directories depending on the number of schemes defined for your style The filename rules outlined for Banners also apply to Buttons StaticFiles The static HTML files in this folder are not part of the template set but are used to display error messages or store contact information in the storefront Templates The Templates directory contains folders for each INTERSHOP template group Catalog Templates Ct List Templates Lt Storefront Templates 0s Product Templates Pr and User defined Templates Ut You can add templates to any template group except Storefront Templates Chapter 5 Templates Page 335 Create New Template Styles Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard In addition to the above directories a template style directory
459. s returned and an error message is recorded in the log file NOTE Although you may want to use the Save functions for compatibility reasons it is recommended that you use one of the Override functions to change the value of specific TLE variables Table 90 SaveTLE Set the value of a TLE variable as well as change the database content reflecting the new value Example SaveTLE ShippingPrice 0 0 INPUT A The TLE name can be a User defined TLE or any of the TLEs in Table A TLE 92 B value B The new value of the saved TLE OUTPUT No output defined Comment This function can be used with all the TLEs listed in Table 92 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 419 TLE Handling Functions The Scripting API Functions Table 91 SaveTLELoopData Set the value of a TLE variable inside a loop as well as change the database content reflecting the new value Example SaveTLELoopData BasketPositions ProductPrice 10 0 j sin A The TE Loop HBasketPositions This is the only valid TLE loop B index B The index within the loop rang count of loop elements C The TLE name see below for valid TLES Gaile D The new value D value OUTPUT The new value of the saved TLE Comment The ONLY valid TLEs are ProductPrice Productlax Quantity Discount Table 92 Specific TLE Variables that Can Be Written Back Saved Speci
460. s Orders TLE Variables Previous Order TLE variables allow members to check the status of previous orders The System Administrator determines how long to retain old information for customer review Table 22 Previous Order TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates The value translated to an alternate only Alt_PrevSubTotal List of View a previous basket currency order The value translated to an alternate Storefront templates un Gerne s Alt_PrevTotalTax List of View a previous basket currency order Storefront templates only Service The value translated to an alternate P Alt_PrevTotalPrice List of View a previous basket currency order Alt_PrevShippingPrice The value translated to an alternate Storefront templates only Service currency View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingSubTotal The value translated to an alternate Storefront templates only Service currency View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingTotal The value translated to an alternate Storefront templates only Service currency View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingTotalfax The value translated to an alternate Storefront templates only Service currency View a previous basket order No0fltemsOnOrder The number of items on the order Storefront templates only Service total List of previous order The number of items of the order that
461. s basket Order Confirmation Message Appears if the basket was ordered successfully Order Input credit card Asks the customer to enter credit card data entries Page 313 Select Templates for Page Caching Template Groups in Detail Storefront Table 66 Storefront Templates TEMPLATES DESCRIPTION Order Select payment method Allows selection of payment method Order Member Order Information Optional order information page for member checkout Order Non Member Order Information Optional order information page for non member checkout Registration Checkout Related Storefront Templates Non Member Data Form Displays input form for non member checkout information address etc Registration member data form Displays a registration form for entering membership data name address password etc Registration Confirm member registration Appears if the member has filled out the registration panel form correctly Login Login panel The login panel for current members Login Welcome page Appears if member login was successful Shipping address Edit the customer shipping address Search Related Storefront Search mask Templates Displays input fields for entering search text Search results Lists all products which matched the search parameters Customer Service Related Service page Storefront Templates Links to
462. s product is attached to any pending orders or accounts receivable You automatically return to the Search Products page in the Product Manager Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 159 Delete Products from the Database Inventory Manager Inventory Manager Page 160 All changes in your stock levels are handled by the Inventory Manager Whenever stock is added or subtracted from inventory the Inventory Manager assigns an inventory transaction number to track that change This section describes how to Check Current Stock Levels e Enter Stock Manually e Use Inventory Transactions All processes can begin from the Search Inventory page Figure 97 displayed when you click the Inventory Manager on the navigation bar NOTE You can control how many products are displayed on the Inventory Stock Level page by setting the Stock Level option on the Search Results page in System Administration See Search Result Preferences on page 55 for more information Inventory Manager SEARCH TRANSACTION ENTER STOCK STOCK LEVELS CLEAR FORM Search Inventory Transaction no Operator zl Comments Product no Name Date From CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager Figure 97 Inventory search page Chapter 3 The Back Office Inventory Manager Check Current Stoc
463. s template cannot be deleted Chapter 5 Templates Page 325 Other Storefront Templates Template Groups in Detail Catalog amp List What are List Templates List Templates display the final branch of the catalog hierarchy that is lists of individual products List Templates always include e Product name s e Product Description s Link s to the individual product page s List Templates may also include e Catalog Attributes Product Attributes e Options such as Add to Basket and Remove from Basket Like the lists of categories generated in Catalog Templates the lists of products in List Templates are built with the LOOP function and a couple of lines of HTML When to Use a Catalog Template When to Use a List You as a designer do not have to make this decision INTERSHOP knows what to do If a category contains subcategories then INTERSHOP will use a Catalog template if it is empty or contains products the system will use a List template In List Templates you can distinguish between an empty product list and a list with products by checking the TLE variable fTotalItemsInList When the total items in list equals 0 then a message appears alerting the viewer that no products have been found Add Catalog Attributes to Catalog and List Templates You can use catalog attributes to display text descriptions or images or multimedia files in the catalog To add catalog attributes to a template
464. s the directory structure used by the pre defined SDW template styles All SDW template styles have four schemes with each scheme having its own banner button and header folders Each folder in the template style directory is referenced in the style ini file which maps the template style directory structure for the SDW Exploring C Intershop Data ishome Styles Books 15 File Edit View Tools Help an Folders Contents of C Intershop Data ishome Styles Books B Intershop AdminLib Bannerst File Folder E bin E Banners2 File Folder CI Banners3 File Folder E GI Data Ca Banners File Folder ae E Buttons File Folder C3 Buttons2 File Folder D dela Buttons3 File Folder 8 80 Demostore E Buttons4 File Folder leaders ile Folder DevStore Eu File Fokk GelHolDeal E Headers File Folder leaders ile Folder amp C Golfstore Headers File Fold E Images Headers File Folder E ImagesAdmin E StaticFiles File Folder C3 ImagesMall E Templates File Folder C SiteMonitor ER preview html 7KB Netscape Hypertext a Startastore LET preview ipa 7KB JPEG Image oE Styles 4KB Configuration Settings 28 Antiques cm mE Business hd I 17 obieci s 17 2KB Disk free space 2 18GB Figure 171 Directory Structure of a Store Design Wizard Style Table 67 below explains the sub directories found in a template style directory Table 67 Template Sty le Sub Directorie
465. se also reference the documentation provided with Aiwa AM FM Stere l _ Aiea AN EM Hard coded product link as it small enough to fit m mH in your pocket only appears in the Training Store 93 44 The purpose of this store is to demonstrate standard INTERSHOP functionality Figure 184 Example of hard coded product link Change the Storefront Language If you have purchased and installed one of the INTERSHOP Language Packs the System Administrator sets the default language which loads when the store is accessed see Chapter 2 System Administration for details To allow shoppers to select an alternate storefront language you need to add links in the storefront typically on the Main level Categories page NOTE ou first need to create version of each template in each of the supported languages To create the link use the TLE variable URL_ChangeLanguage followed by a parameter that names the language to which you want to change INTERSHOP 4 supports multiple languages and uses the standard ISO identifiers English EN German DE French FR Spanish SP Italian Portuguese PG Additional languages are currently in development Contact the INTERSHOP web site at www intershop com for more information Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 375 Using FORMs in Templates Catalog List Templates This sample code creates lin
466. selocal SharedLib StorefrontSession qw SessionGetBasket SessionGetCustomer sub GetPrevBaskets my GPrevBaskets SBasketNo SubTotal Tax Date CreateTLELoop PrevBaskets SetTLELoopStructure PrevBaskets PrevBaskets my SessionID ExistsTLE SessionID GetTLE SessionID return unless SessionID S my CurrentBNo SessionGetBasket SessionID my CustomerNo SessionGetCustomer SessionID return unless CustomerNo S SCustomerNo str2database CustomerNo DBConnect Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting Page 435 PrevBaskets pm Page 436 Example Sample Server Side Script DBDoSQL select o nr o totalprice o tax convert varchar 12 o date convert int select value from preferences where keyword DateFormat from offer o where o customernr CustomerNo and datediff dd o date getdate lt 30 and exists select from customerorder r wher r customernr CustomerNo and r offernr o nr order by date desc while BasketNo SubTotal Tax Date DBNextRow next if SBasketNo eq S CurrentBNo next if PrevBaskets gt 5 push PrevBaskets PrevBasketNo gt SBasketNo PrevBasketTotalPrice gt FormatOutput money RoundPrice SubTotal PrevBasketCreationDate gt FormatOutput date Date DBDisconnect S
467. server eliminating the need to transfer complete HTML pages Java also contains a variety of security mechanisms Page 441 JavaScript Keyword License Key Evaluation Key Link Log off Login Login name LOOP Statements Main product Manager Catalog Manager Customer Manager Inventory Manager Order Manager Product Manager Purchasing Manager Settings ODBC On the fly Operators Page 442 A script language for the World Wide Web based on Java and developed by Sun Microsystems JavaScript code can be directly embedded in HTML pages but to be recognized it must be supported by the Web browser Netscape supports JavaScript in all browsers of version 2 0 and higher INTERSHOP Online uses JavaScript for communication functions in the administration modules Term for search delimiter in database search For example search on product name or manufacturer An encrypted string which allows you to run INTERSHOP on your machine It contains the INTERSHOP Application Server s IP address the maximum number of active stores allowed an expiration date version information and a checksum Every time you want to get results from the INTERSHOP Application Server this key will evaluated Short for Hyperlink The term applies to a reference made within an object to another object where the origin object is usually an HTML page and the referenced object can be an FTP server local file etc Li
468. sing FORMs in Templates llle RR 364 Catalog List Templates 374 Product 379 Display Product Attributes 379 Display Product Variations 38l Cross Sell Links in Product Templates 383 Cross Sell Pop Up Windows Advanced 383 Create and Assign 390 Step 1 Create a Link to a Profile Section with URL_ViewProfile 390 Step 2 Create an Input Form on the Profile Editing 391 Step 3 Display the Profile to the 395 Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with 396 Direct Storefront 397 Loop Statements 403 LOOP Statements in Catalog 403 LOOP Statements in List 404 LOOP Statements in Storefront Templates 405 Empty LOOPS eei ambe ed PR etre nt a 406 Chapter 7 Advanced Using Server Side Scripting 407 Server Side Scripting 409 What To Use Server Side Scripting 410 SSS Implementatio
469. sitions 243 PrevBaskets 243 PrevCanceled 282 PrevCustCity 243 PrevCustCountry 243 PrevCustEmail 243 PrevCustFax 243 PrevCustName1 244 PrevCustName2 244 PrevCustName3 244 PrevCustPhone 244 PrevCustPhone2 244 PrevCustState 244 PrevCustStreet 244 245 PrevCustZipCode 244 PrevHasDiscount 244 PrevOrderDate 244 282 PrevOrderNo 244 247 282 PrevOrderPositions 232 247 PrevOrders 247 PrevShelved 244 282 PrevShippingCity 245 J J J s J PrevShippingCountry 245 PrevShippingEmail 245 a PrevShippingFax 245 PrevShippingMethod 244 revShippingMethodName 244 PrevShippingName1 245 PrevShippingName2 245 PrevShippingName3 245 PrevShippingPhone 245 PrevShippingPhone2 245 PrevShippingPrice 244 247 PrevShippingState 245 PrevShippingSubTotal 244 J J Page 455 PrevShippingTax 244 247 PrevShippingTotal 244 PrevShippingTotalTax 244 PrevShippingZipCode 245 PrevSubTotal 245 247 282 PrevTotalPrice 245 247 282 ilPrevIotalTax 245 247 282 ProcessDate 258 284 ProcessNo 258 284 ProcessSubTotal 258 284 ProcessTotalPrice 258 284 ilProcessTotalIax 259 284 ProductDescription 128 232 276 278 279 281 284 286 ProductName 232 278 279 281 283 286 ProductNo 232 273 278 281 283 285 ProductPrice 232 238 278 281 285 304 ProductQuantity 232 238 277 278 285 286 Products 232 237 ProductStocklevel 285 ProductStockLevelMin 285 Product
470. slightly for radio buttons checkboxes and select menus See the following examples Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 391 Step 2 Create an Input Form on the Profile Editing Page Create a Profile Form with Radio Buttons or Checkboxes lt FOR lt P gt lt C FormTagAttributes gt F F R gt UT TYPI ER gt T INP ENT C lt P gt Tell us your interests lt BR gt 1 E submit VALU To us substitute checkbox for radi Create and Assign Profiles E Submit checkboxes instead of radio buttons The IF statement below will show a button as selected in the Storefront if it was selected previously by the customer mA lt INPUT TYPE radio NAME f 4Hobbies NAME VALUE 4Hobbies Cooking VALUE Hobbies_Cooking CHECKED ENDIF gt Cooking lt BR gt lt INPUT TYPE radio NAME Hobbies_NAME VALUE Hobbies_Cars_VALUE IF Hobbies_Cars CHECKED ENDIF gt Cars lt BR gt lt INPUT TYPE radio NAME Hobbies_NAME VALUE Hobbies_Gardening_VALUE Hobbies_Gardening CHECKED ENDIF gt Gardening lt BR gt lt FORM gt How it looks in the Storefront Your personal shopping assistant Your shopping assistant needs some information to guide you to the most interesting places in this store Please select a hobby that
471. stem Administration Main Menu page so it reads Unlock Storefront then the template Store Closed is called up The Store Homepage template can be used several different ways You can e Create a frameset where a navigation bar and catalog content are called Redirect the user through the homepage to another page using a Refresh meta tag e Use the homepage as a splash screen Use Homepage to Create a Frameset for Navigation and Content Despite their different appearances both the Training Store and Golf Store use the Homepage Template in structurally the same way to Divide the store pages into frames Call a navigation bar into one of the frames Call the main category level of the product catalog i e the Root Category Template into the other frame This design gives continuity to the store pages and assures that the customer can always access basic store functions using the navigation bar from any part of the store For a code example of splitting frames and calling the Navigation Bar and Main Level Categories templates see page 359 Use Homepage as a Splash Screen If you don t use frames you may use the homepage as a simple welcome page with navigation links built in with URL TLE variables For information on URL TLEs see URL TLE Variables p 251 Chapter 5 Templates Page 315 The Store Homepage Template Template Groups in Detail Storefront Use Refresh Tag to Redirect Through the Homepa
472. sting file to Field Separator Semicolon i import data Record Separator Newline _ m according to a Header Row previously specified format CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 57 Enter Data Description file information 3 Enter the name of a new data description file in the entry field The Data Import Tool will automatically add the file extension cfg to the data description filenames after you have finished defining the file 4 Select New File from the Existing Data Description File drop down menu 5 Enter Field Delimiter Use the drop down menu to select a field delimiter or enter an alternate choice in the adjacent text input box Specify the field delimiter used in the ASCII text data file you are importing If your data file does not use a field delimiter select None 6 Enter Field Separator Use the drop down menu to select a field separator or enter an alternate choice in the adjacent text input box Specify the field separator used in the ASCII text data file you are importing 7 Enter Record Separator Use the drop down menu to select a record separator or enter an alternate choice in the adjacent text input box Specify the record separator used in the ASCII text data file you are importing 8 The Header Row checkbox is selected by default If the
473. subcategories Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 403 LOOP Statements in List Templates List templates are used to display categories containing products List templates function exactly like Catalog templates but use the Products loop parameter to generate a list of products Example Use of LOOP in a List Template TABLE LOOP Products lt TR gt lt TD gt lt A HRI lt TD gt lt TD gt ProductPrice lt TD gt lt TR gt ENDLOOP lt TABLE gt How it looks in the storefront BF http URL_ProductView gt ProductName lt A gt Simple Product Loop Literature Product Tom Sawyer Wuthering Heights Breakfast of Champions 20 00 20 00 15 00 Figure 200 A simple loop of products You can use all Product TLE variables including all Product Attributes inside a loop statement in List templates Loop Statements LOOP Statements in Storefront Templates LOOP Statements in Storefront Templates Various predefined Storefront templates use embedded LOOP statements each with a certain loop parameter defined lt TABLE gt LOOP BasketPositions lt TR gt lt TD gt Input_ProductQuantity lt TD gt lt TD gt lt A HREF http URL_ProductView gt ProductName lt A gt lt TD gt lt TD gt ProductPrice lt TD gt lt TD gt ProductTotalPrice lt TD gt lt TR gt ENDLOOP lt TABLE gt
474. t button to appear The VALUE determines what the button will say gt XINPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Start Search lt FORM gt How it looks in the Storefront Search for products Name Wuthering Start Search Figure 178 A simple search interface NOTE If customers in the Storefront don t enter a search word they get a complete list of all products in the store database Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 367 Using FORMs in Templates Storefront Templates Search with AND or OR To add search parameters you can use the operators AND or OR in combination with the TLE variable Name_SearchCombination The following example allows the customer to enter a product name AND a manufacturer This example uses a HIDDEN input field to link product name and manufacturer searches without requiring the customer to specify the AND link The result is a list of products that match both the product and the manufacturer name If you want the customer to search by product name OR manufacturer substitute OR for AND lt FORM SearchFormTagAttributes gt lt B gt Search for products lt B gt lt BR gt Name lt BR gt lt INPUT NAME Name_SearchString SIZE 35 gt 1 Using TYPE HIDDEN keeps the option of AND from being changed The TLE Name_SearchCombination tells INTERSHOP to consider the next input field VALUE and tells INTERSHOP to consider the search combina
475. t is for technically advanced users who have a working knowledge of data import and database structure The instructions in this section outline the process of setting up command line data import but do not give specific instructions for writing Win NT or Unix commands You can import product customer and catalog data into INTERSHOP 4 using either the Data Import Tool or a command line process The instructions in this section outline setting up command line data import to schedule automatic data import but do not give specific instructions for writing Win NI or Unix commands The AT scheduler command must be created by the System Administrator in advance consult a Win NT manual for instructions The command line and a discussion of the command line options are covered in this section The process for setting up command line data import is as follows Prepare Data Import File on p 112 Create Data Description Data and Mapping Files Using the Data Import Tool on p 112 Define ImportTool bat Command Line Options for Your Import on p 112 Start Command Line Data Import on p 114 NOTE If you are a merchant without access to the command prompt on the hosting machine you will need to contact your Site Administrator for assistance Chapter 2 System Administration Page 111 Command Line Data Import Data Import Prepare Data Import File Your data import file must be a flat ASCII text file and it is recommended that you creat
476. t of TLEs that can be used on the template is displayed Figure 149 Page 224 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Date and Time Related TLE Variables TEMPLATES User Defined TLEs Microsoft In CLOSE NEW TLE TEMPLATES User Defined TLEs User defined Store TLE variables DiscountPrice DiscountPrice_ alue HotDiscountPrice HotDiscountPrice_ alue HotProductNo Hotdiscountpercent Hotyousave IMG_CompanyLogo MerchantCity MerchantCountry MerchantEmail MerchantFax MerchantName MerchantPhone MerchantState MerchantStreet1 MerchantStreet2 Merchantzip SearchManufacturer_V alue SearchPriceFrom_Value SearchPriceTo_Value SearchProductName_ alue SearchProductNr_V alue U_CategoryDescription ariation Figure 149 TLE list for the Product Template Date and Time Related TLE Variables Date and time related variables are used to display current date and time These variables demonstrate how simple and useful TLE functionality is To display the current date in one of your Storefront pages simply embed CurrentDate in the HIML of the desired template When this page is displayed in the storefront INTERSHOP 4 replaces the TLE variable CurrentDate with the current date Example HTML Code in INTERSHOP 4 Template lt H3 gt Today is CurrentDate lt H3 gt Resulting output in Storefront page Today is 03 31 98 NOTE The date format is set in System Adminis
477. t of pre approved retailers the login screen gives three test retailer names and passwords To log in as a retailer 1 Follow the steps to Access the Demonstration Storefronts on p 16 2 Enter one of the three retailer names and passwords listed in the lower right corner of the login page in the Retailer fields Sample name retailer high Sample password intershop 3 Click login A welcome page targeted now to high volume retailers is displayed 4 Click back to store The root catalog page for retailers is displayed Figure 17 The main categories biking fishing sailing are displayed without their sub categories Click on any category image to browse 07 05 1999 990705 1014 132 00 Figure 17 The high volume retailer main catalog page Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Page 35 Two Step Re Orders Sports Place for Retailers Sports Place uses INTERSHOP discounts to show different prices to different customer groups It also uses the customer profile feature to display different catalog offerings to retailers than to consumers For details on discounts and customer profiles in your own store see Discounts on p 190 and The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on p 210 Two Step Re Orders In the business to business world many items are re ordered consistently Sports Place simplifies the re order process by allowing retailers to reload previous orders directly from the welcome pa
478. t templates URL_RemoveBookmark Creates a link that removes current product from bookmark list All templates except Print templates URL_ViewBookmarks Creates a link that displays the bookmark list All templates except Print templates Product Discount TLE Variables The Discount TLE variables retrieve information from the discount matrix established by the merchant in the Settings Manager as described in Discounts p 190 Table 16 Product Discount TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Storefront Product List DiscountName Name of discount templates Storefront Product and List DiscountPercent Discount in templates Flag Set to I if customer is assigned to a category that gets a HasDiscount SB nes gory 8 All templates discount 0 if not Used with IF statement Page 236 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Category and List TLE Variables Table 17 Category and List TLE Variables Category and List TLE Variables Most of the values for Category and List TLE variables are created in the Catalog Manager These variables are used in Catalog and List templates TLE Variable Description Available Templates 2 Provides list of all subcategories in a Catalog templates Category basic category Used LOOP statement Root Categories CategoryDescription
479. t templates lsCustDeactivated Flag set to if customer is deactivated 0 if not Used with IF statement Print templates only lsCustSupplier Flag set to I if customer is supplier 0 if not Used with IF statement Print templates only lsCustSuspended Flag indicating whether the customer has been suspended Print templates only Page 227 Customer TLE Variables Page 228 TLE Variables Table 9 Customer Related TLE Variables Standard TLE Variable Description Available Templates TE lsCustToBeTaxed Flag acp Customer 1s ted All templates 0 if not Used with IF statement Flag set to 1 if customer has been Storefront templates Basket HlsCreditCardEnabled assigned payment methods using direct Member and Non member Order credit card entry 0 if not Used with IF statement Information Non member Data Form Select Payment Method sNonMemberCheckoutEnabled Flag set to I if merchant has enabled Non Member Checkout 0 if not Used with IF statement All templates except Print templates Name_ActivateProfile Creates a checkbox for activating the customer profile feature Storefront template Profile Edit Profile URL_ChangeAddress Creates a link that displays page to enter new shipping address An optional parameter can be added to select what page will d
480. t templates only Service HE OMEN previous basket order View a previous basket order Storef ly Service PrevBasketDate The creation date of a previous basket D bo temp aies ony List of View a previous basket ly Service PrevOrderDate The creation date of a previous order Storefront templates d List of View a previous order Flag indicating whether a previous ly 5 PrevShelved basket order is shelved deactivated or m ui pene iiit List of View a previous order PrevCanceled Flag indicating whether a previous Storefront templates only Service order is canceled or not List of View a previous order 2 At least packing slip to this order Storefront templates only Service tEShippingstarted has been created List of previous order ShippingComplete All items have been put on a packing ERIS templates only NOP List of previous order HURL_PrevOrder Creates a link that displays a previous customer order To be used with PlacedOrderNo in List of previous orders template Storefront templates only Service List of previous order HURL_PrevOrderList Creates a link that displays list of customer s orders All templates except Print templates Page 249 Payment Method TLE Variables Payment Method TLE Variables Payment method TLEs pertain to the different payment methods set up in System Administration and also th
481. t the flow of the Storefront from the customer s perspective How will your start page look Where will you put links to registration pages the shopping basket and customer service information Consider whether to showcase products on your opening page How can you minimize click steps for the customer Consider the organization of your catalog Plan how you will display your catalog categories and products in the Storefront The logical structure of the store catalog is created using the Catalog and Product Managers as discussed in Chapter 3 The Back Office Determine what Category and List templates you need to display those categories Determine what attributes the products share and decide how many Product Templates you need to show the different sets of attributes e You may already have products organized in an external database and wish to import them While products can be entered individually in the Product Manager large existing product and customer databases can also be imported See Data Import p 93 or check the INTERSHOP Web site for information on using ODBC BI Develop a look and feel for your store Graphical Store Design Wizard With the Store Design Wizard you choose the look and feel of the storefront color scheme button and banner styles navigation bars and page layout from dozens of ready made examples and apply them quickly and easily The Store Design Wizard provides an excellent tool for a
482. t values must match a sub string of the actual attribute value Float and integer types must match exactly Sample code for the drop down menu lt SELECT NAME ProductVariation onChange varsubmit gt LOOP ProductVariation lt OPTION VALUE http URL_ProductView VariationProduct_SELECTED gt ProductNo ENDLOOP lt SELECT gt IF Color lt br gt Color Color ENDIF lt strong gt lt font gt IF Size lt br gt Size Size ENDIF Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail User Defined Product Attributes vs Product Variations Template Groups in Detail User Defined User defined templates allow merchants to extend their storefront template set and insert pages with active TLE elements into the storefront flow Check the TLE editor for User defined templates and you will see that most customer and basket related TLE variables are available The same is true for all URL TLEs for linking the template into any part of the storefront process Many merchants create User defined templates to use as customer service pages that display data for the current customer Create a User Defined Template 2 Chapter 5 Templates In Templates select User Defined Templates from the list box and click Open Template Group Click New User Defined Template A completely unformatted undefined template appears Figure 169 Create th
483. ta and printed order confirmations that are sent from the store and can include customer order product and price information along with other applicable data handled by TLE variables 2 System Administration TEMPLATES Print Templates Baskets Print format for baskets Order Confirmations Print format for order confirmations Purchase Orders Print format for purchase orders Packing slip Print format for packing slips Invoices Print format for invoices Customers Print format for customers Inventory Print format for inventory Manual Credit Card Reports Templates for printing or exporting data from direct entry credit card orders CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 170 The Print Template menu page The Print Templates that create paperwork sent to customers include Basket For printing follow up letters about non ordered baskets Order Manager p 176 e Order Confirmation For printing an order confirmation to mail to a customer or keep for in house records see also Order Manager p 176 Purchase Order For sending an order to a Supplier Purchasing Manager p 165 Packing Slips For printing packing slips to be included with shipped products Order Manager p 176 Invoice For printing b
484. tabase table directly Click Save to save all configurations Deactivate Currencies Currencies can be deactivated at any time If you deactivate a currency make sure to remove all related links from templates used to display that currency see Create a Link to Change the Alternate Currency on 363 From the System Administration Main Menu select Currency Preferences The Currency Preferences page is displayed 2 Click the Delete button to the right of the desired currency Make sure all settings are correct and click OK when prompted otherwise click Cancel and return to the page to make changes Set Price Display Model to Net or Gross Page 68 By default INTERSHOP uses simple or net product prices and adds tax separately While this is standard in some countries such as the United States other countries normally use gross prices that include both the product price and the tax INTERSHOP 4 reverse calculates the product price from the gross price using the specified tax rate Chapter 2 System Administration Set General Preferences Currency Preferences Price display is a system preference that should be set before any product or shipping prices are entered in the store Switching from one price display model to the other does not change the prices stored in database and all the prices may require editing Activate Net or Gross Price Model 1 On the Currency Prefe
485. te 141 Manufacturer assigning to 141 Reports on 207 Searching 137 Supplier assigning to 141 Tax class assigning to 142 Template linking to 141 Visible Not Visible in Storefront 141 Weight assigning to 142 Profiles Search engine enabling 396 Templates creating links in 390 TLE variables for 230 TLE variables creating 391 Purchase Orders Cancelling 168 Creating 167 Printing 167 Searching and reviewing 168 Suggesting 166 PURCHASING MANAGER 165 R Re Format TLE Calculation Vaiables to use in SSS scripts 415 Relational Operators 272 Remain on Current Page 60 376 Reports and Statistics Overview 204 Product statistics accessing 206 Index Traffic and orders analyzing 205 S Scripting API Functions 415 Search Building 366 Building simple product search 367 Building with AND and OR 369 Building with AND or OR 368 Building with price ranges 370 Building with product attributes 370 Price ranges within 370 Product variation 23 Product Variations 372 Secure Socket Layer See SSL Security Measures SSL 70 Server Side Scripting Basket Processing Functions 424 Error email messages enabling 51 Explanation 410 Formatting Layout Functions 421 TLE Handling Functions 415 User Input Output Functions 423 Shipping Methods Deleting 199 Show Basket Status 376 Site Wide User Defined TLE See TLE Variables SSL Back office enabling in 70 FORMs enabling 366 373 Storefront templates enabling in 70 Static
486. te Profile Display Profile When designing the Profile Display Profile template you can use the TLE variables assembled in Step 2 along with IF statements to display the selected profile items lt B gt Your interests are lt B gt Hobbies_ Cooking cooking BR ENDIF IF Cars cars lt BR gt ENDIF Hobbies_ Gardening gardening BR ENDIF How it looks in the Storefront Customer profile Your profile is currently not used to select catalogues and products that match your personal preferences We are holding the following information on our server Your interests are cooking Edit profile settings Go to root catalog Figure 197 Profile Display profile Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 395 Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Create and Assign Profiles Step 4 Enable the Search Mask to Work with Profiles Page 396 On the Search Mask template you can embed a checkbox that allows the customer to enable Profile Evaluation for product searches made through the search mask With Profile Evaluation enabled only products matching the customer s profile are considered in a search To set up this checkbox use the Profile TLE variable SearchUseProfile as the checkbox INPUT name Because anonymous customers can t use this feature this line of HTML should be hidden if the customer is not registered or logged i
487. te well formatted documents by leveraging the template creator s design experience All INTERSHOP templates are composed of standard HTML amp TLE HTML templates are straight text and use pointer codes to access graphics multimedia and programming files Template Language Extension TLE is INTERSHOP s addition to HTML allowing easy access to variable data in the database Glossary TLE Statements TLE Variables Transaction Account Transaction Inventory Unit of Measure URL User defined Template User defined TLE Variation Rules _Value Variation Types Variation Values Variations Web Web Browser Web Server World Wide Web WWWAnonymous WYSIWYG Glossary Special commands for retrieving and displaying variable data under specific conditions in Templates For example IF THEN ELSE LOOP Placeholders for dynamic information in database such as customer names prices etc Any time a customer places an order or makes a payment the event is recorded under an Account Transaction number amp stored in the Customer Account history Account Transactions are linked to associated invoices Account Transactions can be processed automatically if a customer pays online for example or manually if they send in a check Any time a quantity of product in stock changes due to orders from customers incoming supplies etc the change is assigned an Inventory Transaction number and stored in the Invento
488. teProfile Creates a checkbox that allows customer to activate the customer profile feature Storefront template Edit Profile Name_CreditCardExpireMonth Input field for credit card expiration month Value CreditCardExpireMonth Storefront templates Basket Order Input Member Data Select Payment Method Non member Data Form Name_CreditCardExpireYear Input field for credit card expiration year Value CreditCardExpireYear Storefront templates Basket Order Input Member Data Select Payment Method Non member Data Form Name_CreditCardNo Input field for credit card number Value CreditCardNo Storefront templates Basket Order Input Member Data Select Payment Method Non member Data Form Name_CustCity Input field for billing address city Value CustCity Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_CustCountry Input field for billing address country Value CustCountry Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_CustEMail Input field for billing address e mail Value CustEMail Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_CustFax Input field for billing address fax number Value CustFax Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Chapter 4 Templ
489. tegories and defining discount terms 6 Select the desired customer category from the drop down menu NOTE For how to create customer categories see Discounts on page 190 If you leave the customer category blank you will not be able to save the discount Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 191 Discounts Settings Manager Enter a minimum quantity of product the customer must purchase to receive the discount Example If you select the customer category Frequent Buyer and enter a minimum quantity of 8 then the discount will apply only to shoppers who order 8 or more of those individual products to which you later link your discount class in the Product Manager Enter the amount of the discount that you wish to award as a percentage of the selling price Enter valid dates or leave blank to have the discount last indefinitely until you disable it Click Save to record your entries If you wish to extend the discount to another customer category with the same or with different values for discount percentage number of minimum units and valid dates repeat the procedure starting from step 5 and then click Save again Click Back when finished The discount takes effect for customers in the assigned categories when from the Product Details page in the Product Manager Figure 84 you link one or more products to the discount class in question See Create a New Product on page 140 and Edit P
490. templates only Service View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingSubTotal The shipping sub total of the previous order translated into an alternate currency Storefront templates only Service View a previous basket order Alt_PrevShippingTotalTax The total shipping tax of the previous order translated into an alternate currency Storefront templates only Service View a previous basket order AIt_PrevSubTotal The sub total of the previous order translated into an alternate currency Storefront templates only Service List of View a previous basket order Alt_PrevTotalTax The total tax of the previous order translated into an alternate currency All templates except Catalog templates Page 242 Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Table 21 Previous Basket TLE Variables Service TLE Variables TLE Description Available Templates dU Storefront templates only Service HasNewPrice product in an old basket has changed View a nea basket 0 if not Used with IF statement P Flag set in System Administration Set to I displays non ordered baskets Storefront templates only Service a Nak O deredset only 0 all previous baskets Used List of previous basket with IF statement Maximu dumber days a previous Storefront templates only Service MaxAgeToView b
491. tes Templates are accessed in the System Administration section of the back office 1 Open the back office Normally you enter the Administration URL in your browser to call up the Administration login panel Default format lt server domain gt cgi bin lt storename gt admin See System Administration 37 for details if necessary 2 Log in as System Administrator Login admin Default password admin 3 Select System Admin on the navigation bar 4 Select Templates from the System Administration Main Menu The Templates page is displayed listing all of the template groups Figure 154 2 System Administration BACK OPEN TEMPLATE GROUP USER DEFINED TLE IMPORT EXPORT TEMPLATE Templates Language Engish x Template Group Figure 154 Accessing templates 5 Choose a Template group e g Storefront and click Open Template Group A list of all existing templates in that group is displayed If you have installed an INTERSHOP Language Pack is installed you also must to select a Language 6 Select one template from the list to review and edit the code Chapter 5 Templates Page 295 Create Templates Access Create and Delete Templates Create Templates If it is possible to create templates in a certain Template group a New Template command appears on the page 1 Open a Template group e g Catalog Templates as described in Access T
492. tes see Registration and Checkout Templates on p 318 for details Some options on this page may already have been set in step 2 of the Store Design Wizard if you ran the Wizard on this store Both member and non member checkout procedures can insert an order information page immediately after the payment method is selected This page gives customers an opportunity to review their entire order before deciding whether to send or modify it 2 System Administration BACK SAVE Order Preferences Non Member Checkout 2 Select the checkbox to enable Non Member checkout in the INTERSHOP Storefront Non Member Checkout for Members Select the checkbox to allow members to use non members check out in the Storefront Display Order Information Page for Members Display Order Information Page for Member Checkout as last action before completing the order Display Order Information Page for Non Members Display Order Information for Non Member Checkout as last action before completing the order View Previous Orders Time Limit 0 1000 Enter the maximum number of days that member can view a previous order CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 33 Enable order options such as non membership in the storefront Non Member Checkout Check this
493. tes an account transaction which subtracts the amount due on the invoice from the customer account See Record Transactions in Customer Accounts on page 174 for a full description of customer accounts To print out and mail the invoice first choose a Print Template from the drop down menu and click Print A separate browser window appears displaying a print preview of the invoice 4 Choose Print from the browser File menu Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 181 Process a New Order Order Manager 5 Close the print preview window to return to the Invoice Details page A record of each Print is automatically generated and appears at the bottom of the Customer Order Details page where it remains available for your review The symbol I linked to the invoice will now appear on the Customer Order Details page next to the order number Figure 112 You can now await payment on the invoice or proceed with generating a packing slip gt Order Manager BACK SAVE PRINT PREVIEW CANCEL Invoice Details John Doe Print Template English Invoice default z Software Programmer 123 Main Street Payment Method Charge to Account Providence Rhode Island 44444 USA Created on 18 99 Balance due 64 90 Paid Invoice No 990618 1004 Order No 990618 1005 Product no Qty Product Total Price 1 1002 1 1 Leather Steering Wheel Cover 50 00 Color Fire Engine Red M
494. tes except Print templates Name_ActivateProfile Creates a checkbox to activate the customer profile feature Storefront template Profile Edit Profile HURL_DeactivateProfile Creates a link that deactivates a customer profile All templates except Print templates TEURL EditProfile Creates a link that displays page to edit existing profile All templates except Print templates TURL NewProfile Creates a link that displays page to create a new profile All templates except Print templates TEURL SaveProfile Creates a link that saves an edited or new profile All templates except Print templates TEURL ViewProfile Creates a link to page that displays customer s profile All templates except Print templates Product Related TLE Variables An online store needs to display product information in a variety of contexts in the store catalog in shopping baskets in special offers etc The variety of Product Templates cover all of these contexts together with the product related TLEs which are here grouped in five subdivisions Standard Product TLE Variables predefined for all products Product Variation TLE Variables merchant defined Product Attribute TLE Variables merchant defined Bookmark Product TLE Variables predefined for products bookmarked by customers Page 230 Product Discount TLE Variables predefined for products included in merchant s discount scheme
495. the Basket Template lt A HREF http URL_BasketView gt Go to the basket lt A gt The tables below are grouped by functionality Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 251 URL TLE Variables TLE Variables Adding Parameters to URL TLE Variables Certain URL TLEs use a specific template s functionality to call up the proper item When such a TLE is used outside the template with which it is normally associated it needs a parameter to work properly For instance on a product or list template the TLE URL_AddToBasket will automatically add the item to the basket If you want to embed the link on your root category page you ll need to add the product ID number as a parameter In the following tables the parameter needed is named in the description column along with an example of correct use NOTE If you use a parameter to call a specific product or category and that product or category is Page 252 displayed in the storefront on a page that uses Page Caching use the corresponding Cached variable See Page Caching p 307 for more information Table 25 URL Basket TLE Variables TLE Variables HURL_AddToBasket Description Creates link that loads a specific product into the basket Outside the product and list templates add the product ID parameter Ex A HREF http URL_ AddToBasket 10354 7 lt A gt Adds Aiwa Blaster to Basket System Administrator determines whether clickin
496. the Data Import Tool and how to choose the proper replacement options see Step 4 Job Control Import Mode and Condition on p 100 when importing product variations Chapter 2 System Administration Page 109 Import Product Variations Data Import Prepare Your Import File Prepare your product variations data import file according to the rules outlined below and following the instructions in the Data Import Tool section Prepare the Import File on p 94 B6 File Fields For INTERSHOP to map the variations to the correct super product on import the import file must contain the following fields for variations Super Product contains the product number for the super product associated with the variation Default Variation contains a 1 if that variation is the default to be shown at the Storefront 0 otherwise This can be changed in the Product Manager after import Values for attributes that define the variations For the t shirt example columns would be created for color and size The column head would contain the attribute name Color and the field for each variation would contain the values for example red The following product information for variations can differ from their super product All other information such as name and description will be ignored and inherit the values from the super product Product number you can assign your own product number If you do not INTERSHOP will automatically
497. the Root Category All templates except Print and Mail templates FURL_Category Creates a link that displays a specific Category page Outside the category and list templates add the category ID parameter Example lt A HREF http URL_Category 218 Catalog templates Category basic Root Categories Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 253 URL TLE Variables TLE Variables Table 27 URL Catalog List Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Creates a link that displays the next page of a list template when the list contains more items than set in System Administration Storefront templates Bookmarks Hot Deals Search Results and List template List basic TEURL NextPage Storefront templates Bookmarks Hot Deals Search Results and List template List basic Creates a link that displays the TEURL PrevPage previous page of list template Table 28 URL Customer TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates Creates a link that display as page to enter new shipping address An optional parameter can be added to select what page will display to the All templates except Print and customer after address is submitted Mail templates Parameters are Basket OrderNow Service and Catalog Example URL_ChangeAddress Service URL_ChangeAddress Creates a link that displays All templates except Print and URL_Reg
498. them IF CustName2 lt BR gt CustName2 ENDIF CustName3 lt BR gt CustName3 ENDIF lt BR gt CustStreet lt BR gt CustCit ENDIF y nbsp CustState nbsp Cust ZipCode NOTE All IF statements must end with ENDIF Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 361 The Basket Template Storefront Templates Customer Comment Entry Box A comment entry box can be added to the basket page using the TLE variable Name_OrderComment A customer can enter any text they wish in this box and whatever they enter will become the value for the TLE variable OrderComment The OrderComment TLE can then be placed on any subsequent templates in the order process for example on the Order Confirmation template to make the customer comment visible in back office order processing screens and printouts The Merchant can always view the customer by accessing the Order Details page in the Customer Manager The comment entry box must be used inside a form For more information on forms see Using FORMs in Templates p 364 Below is sample code for creating a comment entry box on the basket page lt INPUT TYPE TEXT NAME Name_OrderComment SIZE 50 MAXLENGTH 255 VALUE OrderComment gt In order to display the customer comment simply place the TLE OrderComment on the template where you d like it to appear Figure 176 shows a Basket page generated from a t
499. ting 170 Deleting 174 New customer deactivating 56 New customer entering 170 Non member checkout for members 62 Non member checkout payment methods 79 Non member checkout settings 61 Orders see Orders Preferences setting 56 Reports on 205 D Data Import Attributes 146 Command Line Data Import 111 Data Import Tool 93 Errors 103 Data Import Tool Overview 93 Database Database contents deleting 91 Information viewing 91 Processes reviewing 91 See INTERSHOP 4 Site Administration Guide Demo Storefront Accessing 16 Design Checklist 293 Catalog organization 293 Customer interactions 293 Store design 293 Storefront look and feel 293 Direct Storefront Entry 397 Page 448 Discounts 190 Class creating 190 Class editing 192 Customer category linking to 191 Product linking to 141 Display 379 Drop Down Menus Customer categories 188 Entries adding 189 Entries deleting 189 Manufacturer 189 Overview 188 Units of weight and measurement 189 E Errors And TLE ErrorMessage 321 In registration or checkout 321 Explore in the Storefront Log In as Return Member 28 Explore the Storefront Access the Storefront 16 Bookmarks 29 Browse the Catalog 24 Register from Basket page 27 Register from the Navigation Bar 28 Export Button See Templates F Follow Up Letter 185 FORMs Checkboxes creating with 392 Comment entry box creating 362 Form tags defined 364 Input fields 362 Input fields creating 365 Input
500. tion 266 368 Name_SearchPriceMax 266 370 ame_SearchPriceMin 266 ame_SearchProductName 266 367 ame_SearchProductNo 266 ame_SearchString 266 ame_ShippingCity 264 ame_ShippingCountry 264 ame_ShippingEMail 264 ame_ShippingFax 264 ame ShippingName1 264 ame ShippingName2 264 ame ShippingName3 264 ame ShippingPhone 264 ame ShippingPhone2 264 ame ShippingState 264 ame ShippingStreet 264 ame ShippingZipCode 264 oOfAvailableItems 243 oOfChangedltems 243 oOfInvoicesPaid 246 282 oOfInvoicesToOrder 246 282 oOfltemsInBasket 257 279 281 oOfltemsInBasket Value 281 oOfltemsOnInvoice 246 282 oOfltemsOnOrder 246 282 oOfltemsOnPackingSlip 246 282 oOfSubCategories 237 282 otAvailable 243 231 276 278 279 dt db db dt db db dt dt db db db db db db db db db HH db db db HHH db db db OH OF OnOrderProducts_Value 276 281 OrderComment 257 263 362 OrderCompletlyProcessed 246 282 OrderPositions 232 OrderProcessingComplete 246 282 OrderProcessingStarted 246 282 OrderSubTotal 238 OrderTotalPrice 238 a a Index dk dk db dt dt dk db dt dk db db db db db db dk dk db db db db dk db db dt db OrderTotalTax 238 PackingSlipNo 260 PaymentComplete 247 282 PaymentMethod 250 PaymentStarted 247 282 PlacedOrderNo 257 PrevBasketComment 243 247 PrevBasketCreationDate 243 PrevBasketDate 243 PrevBasketNo 243 247 PrevBasketPo
501. tion as a logical and gt ku lt INPUT TYPE HIDDEN NAME Name_SearchCombination VALUE and gt 1 The TLE SelectBox Manufacturer automatically builds a select box that will list all manufacturers entered in the system gt P Manufacturer lt BR gt SelectBox_Manufacturer lt BR gt lt P gt lt INPUT TYPE SUBMIT VALUE Start Search gt lt FORM gt How it looks in the Storefront Search for products Name Manufacturer New Line Press Start Search Figure 179 Search using And Page 368 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates Using FORMs in Templates Search with AND and OR You can also combine AND and OR in a single search form and let the customer decide how to search This is done by changing the TYPE for Name_SearchCombination from HIDDEN to RADIO as in the example below lt FORM SearchFormTagAttributes gt lt B gt Search for products lt B gt lt BR gt Name lt BR gt lt INPUT NAME Name_SearchString SIZE 35 gt lt P gt AND CHECKED means that this radio button will be selected as a default gt lt INPUT TYPE RADIO NAME Name SearchCombination VALUE and CHECKED amp nbsp OR lt INPUT TYPE RADIO NAME Name SearchCombination VALUE or lt
502. tly on order from your supplier Min Quantity The minimum amount of product you want to keep in stock Operators set this level on the product data page See Create a New Product on p 140 for details on changing this number 4 To print a copy of the report click the Print Preview command 5 To change the amount of product In Stock Reserved or Ordered see Enter Stock Manually 6 Select a product number to see the Product Details page You will automatically jump into the Product Manager Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 161 Enter Stock Manually Inventory Manager Enter Stock Manually Page 162 Changes in stock levels are recorded automatically in two cases When you generate a packing slip in the Order Manager the products listed on the packing slip are automatically recorded as having left inventory If a packing slip is cancelled this effect is reversed automatically as well Ifthe Register Upon Order option in System Preferences is activated by the System Administrator then when you generate a purchase order the ordered stock is automatically added to inventory Incoming and outgoing stock can always be recorded manually using the Inventory Manager as described in the following steps The Product Manager contains a useful shortcut to the same procedure see Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut on page 144 1 Click Inventory Manager to get the Search I
503. to retailers Use a special two click reorder process e Pay using account Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Sports Place for Visitors Sports Place for Visitors Look for Things to Buy Click Shop Now on the login screen to shop anonymously The first catalog page is displayed showing both root and sub categories together Figure 4 Sports Place uses a Server Side Script to show various category levels single page Your Site Administrator can provide the script that was used as a sample if requested e NE is SAILING Equipment Sails This store is for demonstration pt INTERSHOP Communications Inc urposes only Figure 4 The catalog main page as displayed to visitors and members Look for Things to Buy There are four ways to find products in the storefront e Quick search by product name Refined search by keywords and brand names e Browse through the catalog Use the HOT DEALS button to see special offers Chapter 1 Explore the Storefront Quick find Categories and sub categories on the same pages Page 21 Look for Things to Buy Sports Place for Visitors Use Quick Find Sports Place includes a quick search box on the upper right corner of all pages For information on how to build a quick search in your own store see Create Search FORMs on p 366 To quick find product names in Sports Place 1 Enter a product name in the quick fi
504. tomer categories Review and track new orders Generate order confirmations packing slips and invoices e Process customer payments Approve and Process Credit Cards If you permit your customers to enter their credit card information directly online or if you change phone and fax credit card payment to Direct Credit Card Entry see Enable Direct Credit Card Entry on page 84 then the Manual Credit Card Handling tool in the Settings Manager assists you with credit card processing steps e Print customer credit card data or transfer data to an electronic file Approve and process credit cards manually or through an automated approval system Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 123 Catalog Look and Feel Assigning Catalog Templates Catalog Manager Catalog Manager The Catalog and Product Managers work together to create the electronic catalog in an INTERSHOP 4 store The catalog consists of a potentially unlimited number of categories and subcategories arranged hierarchical tree structure that extends into as many branches as you choose Each branch always ends in a product entered through the Product Manager After a brief note explaining how the Catalog Manager works with your templates this section describes how to Access the Main Category Level unlimited number e Move One Category into Another Sort Categories Manually or Alphabetically to organize the presentation order in the Storefro
505. tration gt Regional Preferences Table 8 Time Related TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates CurrentDate Displays current date All templates CurrentDay Displays current day All templates except Print templates CurrentHour Displays current hour All templates except Print templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 225 Customer TLE Variables TLE Variables Table 8 Time Related TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates CurrentMinute Displays current minute All templates except Print templates Displ h Only availabl CurrentMonth spas month Only All templates except Print templates on print templates CurrentTime Displays current time All templates Displays current year Only available on T Currentlear spay year Ony All templates except Print templates print templates Customer TLE Variables Customer TLE variables relate to information about shoppers their names addresses chosen payment methods etc Many of the values for these variables come from registration and order forms that the shopper completes in the Storefront Separate tables are shown for standard information and shipping information Table 9 Customer Related TLE Variables Standard Page 226 TLE Variable Description Available Templates CustAccount2String Customer s second accou
506. trix Abbreviation for Hypertext Markup Language Derived from the page description language SGML HTML is the standard page description language for HTTP services on the World Wide Web HTML consists of a collection of hardware independent and platform independent commands describing the structure of a Web page The actual data is requested at the destination system and transmitted using the HTTP protocol Hyper Text Transportation Protocol HTTP TCP IP protocol used for transmitting HTML pages on the World Wide Web Web HTTP uses port 80 Used with conditional processing to display correct pages or information to individual customers Fill in fields used to create forms Contains the name of the SQL Server and a list of services provided by the server The Interface File is located on the Database Server The file must be available for each machine from which a connection to the SQL Server is made By default the Interface File is located in the Sybase directory and named sql ini under NT and interfaces under UNIX The network of networks supporting the TCP IP protocol No single entity controls the Internet The bill sent to a customer A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems introduced in 1995 This language very similar to C supports the Internet protocol and is suited for programming Internet applications Applets Applet program code executed by the client requests information from the
507. try Credit Card Information Page 208 1 Click on Manual Credit Card Handling from the Settings Manager Main Menu The Credit Card Handling page appears Figure 139 CX Settings Manager BACK PRINT EXPORT Manual Credit Card Handling Print Template English Credit card data export format z print a list of direct entry credit card data C Export direct entry credit card data to File ccexport txt Transaction Type Accounts Receivable Name Operator zl Custmr no Date From To Deactivate No ves C Cancelled No ves C all CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 139 The Manual Credit Card Handling page 2 From the Print Template drop down menu select a format If you are using the default formats your selection depends on your lan guage preference and whether you wish to print data or export it to a file If you create your own customized credit card information tem plates you will be able to select them from this list Template Groups in Detail Print amp Mail on page 333 Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Log Off INTERSHOP Select the appropriate radio button to determine whether to print the data or export it to an electronic file If you elect to export credit card data to a file enter a file name Example Enter a file name bas
508. ts categories and hot deals Page 46 Chapter 2 System Administration Use System Administration First Time Graphical Store Design Wizard 5 Customize Step 5 Choose a banner color Click Next 6 Customize Step 6 Choose page header colors Click Next 7 Customize Step 7 Choose button colors Click Next 8 Customize Step 8 Choose text and background colors Click Next 9 In Step 9 enter welcome text in the field provided 10 In Step 10 choose whether to create backup files Click Preview to see how the Storefront will look once products have been entered in the back office All Store Design Wizard template style share basic homepage features Frame based storefront e Catalog listing e Navigation bar Asample hot deals display In Step 11 click Finish if you are satisfied with your design INTERSHOP applies the changes then presents a Finished screen Your storefront now reflects the Wizard store design Chapter 2 System Administration Page 47 System Preferences Set General Preferences Set General Preferences Most of the default values in the General Preferences section will probably be appropriate for your store Whenever you are not certain select the default You can always come back and make changes later The links in the General Preferences section of the System Administration Main Menu Figure 20 allow you to access the Preference listings describe
509. ttribute Values page in the Product Manager See Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes p 148 Sample code 1F Image img src StoreImagePath Images Image gt ENDIF Display Imported Product Variations Because imported variations are defined as attributes rather than variation types you must edit templates if you want to display imported variations together on one page For products with only a few variations You can use a simple template that displays each variation as a link When a variation s link is selected the product page updates with that variation s information You can also create a drop down menu using HTML and TLEs See Display Product Variations p 381 For products with many variations You may want to use a JavaScript that creates a drop down menu containing each variation When a selection is made the product page automatically updates Sample code for both options follow Page 328 Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Product Product Attributes vs Product Variations Simple Template Display Links to a Few Variations Following is an excerpt of code used to display an imported product that has only a few variations A link is created to display each variation All formatting tags have been removed for clarity 1F IsProductVariation Variations LOOP ProductVariation lt br gt lt br gt VariationProduct_SELECTED lt B gt ProductNo lt B gt F
510. ttribute Values page is displayed with all the attribute names you have created Figure 87 2 Click Create and Edit Attributes The Create and Edit Product Attributes page is displayed Figure 86 2 Product Manager BACK SAVE ADD TO LIST DELETE HELP Create and Edit Product Attributes Attribute Name Attribute Data mese E Attributes Color string Image string LongDescription text SETTINGS manager ORDER manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager CATALOG PURCHASING CUSTOMER manager manager ge manager Figure 86 Create and Edit Product Attributes page Page 146 Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Product Attributes 3 Enter a name in the Attribute Name field select a data type from the Attribute Data Type drop down menu and click Add to List Attribute names cannot contain any spaces The new attribute appears in the Attributes list box and a TLE variable for this attribute is added to the Product Attribute Variables section of the TLE list panel NOTE You can enhance storefront search performance by choosing the more efficient data types of string integer and float instead of text whenever possible Choose the text data type only when the attribute is likely to approach or exceed 255 characters in length See Simple Template Display Links t
511. ty that cannot be changed and cannot be copied to other templates Therefore while you can add functionality to Storefront templates and edit them new Storefront templates cannot be created and existing ones cannot be deleted The examples in this section explain HTML based functionality that you can edit The Store Homepage Template The first page the customer sees when entering the store is the Store Homepage If the Store Design Wizard is used to design your Store the Storefront will be divided into frames Use Frames in the Homepage Page 358 The template Store Homepage is used to create a frame set which will allow you to display two templates in a single browser window The frame places the Navigation bar at the bottom of the browser window while the top frame which fills the rest of the web page displays your Main level categories template Figure 175 When designing your own store you can arrange the frame to display another layout or define different frame and border colors You can also remove the frames altogether This sample code creates the frameset HTML lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt INTERSHOP Storefront lt TITLE gt lt lt FRAMESET ROWS 34 FRAMEBORDER no BORD EAD R Q gt lt NOFRAMES gt lt H2 gt Sorry you need a browser with FRAME support lt H2 gt lt NOFRAMES gt
512. u from the System Administration Main Menu Select Delete Database Contents Figure 55 Enter your System Administrator password default admin Click Delete Database Contents A warning appears Clearing the database will delete all specified tables Click OK to continue The database contents will be deleted If you return to the Storefront you see that no entries remain in the product catalog System Administration BACK DELETE DATABASE CONTENTS DATABASE ADMINISTRATION Delete Database Contents Products Product attributes Categories Customers Profiles Baskets Orders Invoices Packing slips Statistics CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 55 Deleting the contents of the store s database SYSTEM ADMIN Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Data Import Tool Overview Data Import There are several methods you can use to import data into your INTERSHOP store The method you choose depends on your experience with databases the type of data you are importing and whether you are doing single import or wish to set up batch processing This section gives instructions for using the Data Import Tool and command line data import It also addresses the topic of importing product variations and product variation attributes INTERSHOP 4 also supports
513. u have already mailed until you have notified the supplier To search for all purchase orders you have cancelled in your system set the radio button on the Purchase Orders Search page to Cancelled Yes and click Search Chapter 3 The Back Office Customer Manager Cancel a Purchase Order Customer Manager It is important to know that the INTERSHOP system stores all your business contact information in the Customer Manager This means that not only your customers but also your suppliers are entered on Customer Details pages This section describes how to Enter New Customer Define a Supplier e Search and Edit Customer and Supplier Data Delete Customers or Suppliers from the Database e Record Transactions in Customer Accounts Using the Profiles feature in the Customer Manager to view and edit customer profiles is covered in The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on page 210 All processes begin from the Search Customers page Figure 105 f Customer Manager SEARCH NEW CUSTOMER Search Customers Customerno Name SteetAddress l lll State ziptoe county Phoe rax Payment Method H Comments Category far m Deactivated Both Supplier Both CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 105 The Search Customers page in the Customer Manag
514. ub style associated with your template Stylel name Style 1 image Banners1 topbanner jpg buttonstyle Buttonsl bannerstyle Bannersl headerstyle Headers1 colorscheme Colorl Style2 name Style 2 image Banners2 topbanner jpg buttonstyle Buttons2 bannerstyle Banners2 headerstyle Headers2 colorscheme Color2 Table 74 Key Value Inputs for Scheme Defaults for each sub style Value in A Description Example Stylel A friendly name that describes the style For instance the name name RedStyle could have been used here instead of the name Style Stylel A small image which gives a general idea of what the Style Banners topbanner jpg looks like This does NOT have to be a banner image it could Banners2 topbanner jpg be an image of a completed Style template saved as a gif or jpeg file image Buttons The directory name where the button images for the scheme buttonstyle are located This value must also be listed in ButtonStyles in Buttons the Customizeable Sub styles section of the style ini file Banners The directory name where the banner images for the scheme bannerstyle are located This value must also be listed in BannerStyles in Banners the Customizeable Sub styles section of the style ini file Headers The directory name where the header images for the scheme headerstyle are located This value must also be listed in HeaderStyles in the Customizeable Sub styles section
515. uct Manager generates a TLE variable that is listed in the list of available TLEs for product templates See Create or Edit Product Attribute Names p 146 The final step in implementing product attributes is to insert the attribute TLE variable into the product template HTML in order to display the attribute in the storefront Also multimedia attributes must also be uploaded to the back office to be fully implemented Insert the Product Attribute Code into the HTML To make a product attribute an active variable inside the template you must insert the corresponding product attribute TLE variable into the HTML code The product attribute TLE variable is the name of the attribute preceded by a sign For example if you created the attribute NeworUsed you now insert NeworUsed where you want a text description to appear in your template layout see the following code example Product Attribute TLEs will also be shown in the list of available TLEs for product templates See also Insert Catalog Attribute TLE Variables into Catalog and List Templates p 377 for a similar process Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 379 Display Product Attributes Page 380 Product Templates 1 Open a Product Template and click Available TLEs The Product Attribute Variables section shows the TLE variables for the attributes that you created Figure 188 CLOSE NEW TLE TEMPLATES Available TLEs Variat
516. uct template with attributes NeworUsed 1 The text New Used will appear followed by whatever value the NeworUsed attribute is given for a product gt lt B gt New Used lt B gt NeworUsed NeworUsed ENDIF Similar code was used to design the page below ic PRODUCT X b EN ADD FROM BASKET BASKET m Breakfast of Champions New Used New Availability Out of Stock Price ea 15 00 Total 15 00 Figure 190 Product page displaying attributes Display Product Variations Product Variations allow you to display and sell different versions of a product from a single page in the Storefront using HF and LOOP statements on a form The IF statement checks if a variation exists and the LOOP statement displays all iterations of the variation usually in a select box NOTE For information on how to create forms see page 365 on how to create and use IF Statements see page 361 in this chapter and TLE Statements p 271 in Chapter 4 on how to create and use LOOP statements see page 273 or TLE Statements p 271 in Chapter 4 Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Page 381 Display Product Variations Product Templates Sample code for displaying variations of a product with a select box appears below 1sProductVariation lt FORM FormTagAttributes gt IsVariation_Color lt B gt Color lt B gt lt S
517. uctory information a User defined template introduction page employs the TLE variable URL_DSEAction to interpret the action planted in the DSE URL i e product addtobasket etc A sample HTML statement for this purpose follows the format shown below Code for an Intro Template Linking to Page Specified by DSE Action A HREF http URL_DSEAction gt Click here for product information lt A gt After you have assigned this User defined template in the DSE Preferences page see Set the Direct Storefront Entry Preferences in the next section then URL_DSEAction will interpret the action specified in the remote URL and present a link to the appropriate page Thus if the remote URL is http ntserver mystore storefront EN product 5010 then when the user selects the link Click here for product information URL_DSEAction will present the product numbered 5010 Set the Direct Storefront Entry Preferences When using an introduction or gateway page for Direct Storefront Entry you must alert INTERSHOP to launch your page when a link with a DSE URL is clicked and submitted to INTERSHOP To do so use the Direct Storefront Entry Preferences page 1 In the System Administration main menu select Direct Storefront Entry Preferences 2 Select a User defined template for any action you are embedding in a remote DSE URL Figure 198 For example suppose the remote URL is http ntserver mystore
518. ue will be used for previewing the attribute Sale Example IF Sale Sale ELSE empty ENDIF Preview content Figure 187 The Available TLEs Edit Panel with catalog attribute TLE with sample code Insert the code containing the TLE variable into the HTML of the catalog or list template Create your own code using the TLE variable or run a test using the sample code provided Click Save Check the results in your storefront See also Display Product Attributes p 379 for a similar process Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Product Templates Display Product Attributes Product Templates You can create and customize product templates to suit each product in your store After you have created Product Attributes and Product Variations in the Product Manager you need to edit the HTML of the product templates to display the attributes and variations in the storefront This section assumes that you have already created product attributes and variations and are ready to edit the product template HTML See Product Attributes p 145 and Product Variations p 151 for more information This section covers the following topics Bi Display Product Attributes Bi Cross Sell Links in Product Templates E Edit Product Templates to display Embedded Search Functionality BI Product Cross Sell example using Product Attributes and JavaScript Display Product Attributes Every product attribute you create in the Prod
519. ult shipping method is used for any orders when the shopper does not choose an alternative method Name The name you assigned to the shipping method when it was created Active Check this box to make the shipping method visible in the storefront Calculation Model The model type is set when the method is created and cannot be edited thereafter The models are Basket Items Basket Price Basket Weight and Flat Rate The shipping methods installed with INTERSHOP 4 are all assigned to the Flat Rate model Tax Class A tax class you assigned when the method was created Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Shipping Methods Click New Shipping Method The New Shipping Method page is displayed Figure 125 P Settings Manager BACK SAVE SET UP SHIPPING METHOD New Shipping Method Name findefined Language English E Calculation Model FiatRate E Tax Classes CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 125 Enter new shipping method information If you have a Language Pack installed for a multi lingual store choose the language for this shipping method from the drop down list Enter the name of the shipping method as it should appear in this language in the storefront Choose another language and enter another name if necessary NOTE If your supports multiple languages you m
520. umber to the product attribute using the Data Import Tool ODBC or the Product Manager See Data Import on p 93 for information on importing catalog data into your store See Product Manager on p 137 for information on creating and defining attribute values Information about using ODBC can be found in the Services and Support section of www intershop com Chapter 3 The Back Office Product Manager Search for Existing Products Product Manager With the Product Manager you handle all aspects of the products in your store database This section describes how to e Search for Existing Products e Create a New Product Edit Product Information e Stock Products Using the Inventory Shortcut e Create or Edit Product Attribute Names and Attribute Data Types Define Product Attribute Values e Create a Variation Type and its Values Edit Variations and Variation Attributes Values e Apply Variation Rules Delete Products from the Database Using Assign Profile on the Product Details page to link customer profile items to products is covered in The Customer Profiles Feature Optional on p 210 Search for Existing Products The front page of the Product Manager is a search page Figure 82 You can generate a list of all products or you can narrow your list by entering specific information in the fields NOTE To limit the number of displayed search results change the Products value in the Search Results sect
521. ure 56 PE Store Back Office BACK DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 1 Data Description File Define save load and delete Data Description Files This server side located file includes meta information about the physical data file structure Step 2 Data File Upload Upload a client side located data file to the server or chose an already existing data fle Step 3 Define Mapping File Load delete and configure Mapping Files The mapping file contains the logical mapping from data file columns to database items and default data settings Step 4 Job Control Validate import or display status information about a running import CATALOG manager PRODUCT manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager CUSTOMER manager ORDER manager SETTINGS manager SYSTEM ADMIN Figure 56 Access any step of the Data Import Tool from the menu page Page 94 Chapter 2 System Administration Data Import Data Import Tool Step by Step 2 Select the link for Step 1 Data Description File The Step 1 Data Description File page is displayed Figure 57 7j Store Back Office BACK SAVE LOAD DELETE CANCEL PROCEED DATA IMPORT TOOL Step 1 Data Description File Select New File to create a new n File rakproductecfg 8 data description documentation file Select an documertation cfa n File slsproducts cfa Field Delimiter escis exi
522. urers have been defined you can assign one from this drop down menu Optional Supplier For the Purchasing Manager to work each product needs to have a designated supplier New suppliers are entered in the database using the Customer Manager see Define a Supplier on page 173 for details Once you have assigned a supplier to a product then the Purchasing Manager can use that information to alert you when stock is low and needs to be ordered Required for the Purchasing Manager tool Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 141 Create a New Product Product Manager Tax Class The sales tax matrix is defined in the Settings Manager see Create a Tax Matrix on page 203 If applicable under tax laws governing your area assign this product to a tax class using this drop down menu Optional Units Choose a Unit of Measurement such as pcs i e pieces if you want it to appear with the product description on invoices packing slips etc Units of Weight and Measurement are also defined in the Settings Manager see page 189 Optional Wholesale Price Retail Price Used in tracking invoicing and generating reports The retail price entered is the one that appears in the Storefront Note that Wholesale prices are always Net Retail prices may be Net or Gross If your store uses the gross price display model then retail prices are entered with the tax included If you use net price display model then the retail product price
523. urning members begins with the Login Panel template The information that members provide on the registration form is retained in the database and recalled each time they visit the store Chapter 5 Templates Template Groups in Detail Storefront Registration and Checkout Templates Figure 164 shows the two options available from the Login Panel New shoppers choose New and fill out the registration information Returning Members give their login and password receive a Login was successful message and proceed automatically to the Basket page Member Registration from Navigation Bar EDO LOGIN PANEL REGISTRATION MEMBER DATA Name Password Login Address Password ee LOGIN Email REGISTRATION CONFIRM MEMBER Y LOGIN WAS SUCCESSFUL BASKET MEMBER Use Navigation bar to continue or add links to BASKET etc Product on this page Subtotal Shipping Figure 164 Storefront templates for new registration or Member login You can make individual fields in the Registration Panel mandatory by selecting them on the Customer Registration Preferences page in System Administration NOTE Don t forget to highlight the fields designated as mandatory in the template with an or other identifying mark that your customers will see The Registration Panel includes input fields for fundamental contact infor
524. urs in your templates or your Storefront will not display properly You can change the description of a User defined element at any time with no effect to templates or storefront display Chapter 4 Template Language Extension TLE Variables TLE Variables and Page Caching In the System Administration Main Menu select Templates Click User defined TLE to get the User defined TLE edit list Select the TLE to edit The Edit User defined TLE panel is displayed Figure 152 In the TLE editor window change the content or description as needed Click Save All templates that currently use the TLE will now use the new content Delete a User Defined TLEs You can delete a User defined element However if you wish to delete a TLE element you should first delete the element from all the templates in which occurs If the TLE element is deleted but still remains in templates your Storefront will not display properly 2 4 5 In the System Administration Main Menu select Templates Click User defined TLE to get the User defined TLE Edit List panel Select the TLE to delete The User defined Edit panel is displayed Figure 152 In the TLE editor panel click Delete Click Close The TLE is now deleted Any templates that still contain the TLE will display the name of the TLE for example MyTLE instead of the value Site Wide User Defined TLEs Site
525. usic combines vell everything Quadro blaster Surround Sound System 500 00 The complete home stereo system with remote dual cassete deck and 6 CD changer Displaying Items 1 5 rom 5 CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 76 An end level category to which products have been assigned Sort Categories and Products for Display in the Storefront By default INTERSHOP 4 displays categories and products in the Category Manager and Storefront in the order they are created Categories and products can then be sorted manually or according to alphabetical order using the Sort Categories command on any category or product list page Sort Categories Manually To sort a category list manually 1 At any category level in the Catalog Manager click Sort Categories Figure 76 The Sort Categories and Products window appears Figure 77 This window shows the order in which the categories or products are currently sorted Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 129 Sort Categories and Products for Display in the Storefront Catalog Manager SAVE ALPHABETIZE Sort Categories and Products This category is sorted manually up pown BOTTOM Electronics gt Sports Language Courses Books Figure 77 The Sort Categories and Products window 2 In the select box click on a category you d lik
526. usiness you are now set to open a complete store on the Internet INTERSHOP gives you all the easy to use tools you need to Create a first class secure Internet store where customers can browse search and purchase your products Handle everyday business operations such as order processing and inventory management Gather and analyze statistical data to hone your marketing strategies This User Guide provides complete instructions and reference materials to help you get the most from your INTERSHOP store NOTE The User Guide assumes that you are already set up with the required hardware and Internet connection and that your INTERSHOP software is already installed If not see the Installation Guide included with INTERSHOP 4 When and Why to Use the User Guide For Getting Started Near the beginning of Chapters 2 and 3 you ll find useful Getting Started sections to lead you quickly through the essentials of setup while making sure you don t miss a step A section early in Chapter 3 on Everyday Use lays out workflow steps you are likely to follow in daily business and indicates which INTERSHOP tools help you at every point To get through initial store setup faster but with less detailed assistance refer to the How to Set Up Shop quick start tutorial included in the INTERSHOP package As a Reference Manual and Training Tool Page 11 Refer to the INTERSHOP 4 User Guide whenever you have questions about
527. ust be created by the System Administrator using the instructions below l Select Operator Settings Menu from the Administration section of the System Administration Main Menu The Operator Settings Menu page is displayed Figure 50 Operators Settings Menu Administrator admin Kitty Cartwright Miss Kitty Figure 50 Operator Settings Menu page 2 Click New Operator The New Operator page is displayed Figure 51 29 System Administration BACK SAVE OPERATOR SETTINGS New Operator Name Kitty Cartwright Deactivate CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SYSTEM manager ge manager manager manager manager ADMIN Figure 51 Use the New Operator page to create operator access rights to the back office Page 88 Chapter 2 System Administration Control Back Office amp Storefront Access Change Passwords and Login Names 3 Fill out all fields on the New Operator page Figure 52 Name may have any number of characters usually just a full name first and last Login is the name an operator uses to log into the system usually an abbreviation of the full name Password must be entered and verified All passwords must have at least 6 characters and are case sensitive Passwords should be kept secret and changed frequently to maintain security Only the System Administrator can change passwords a System
528. ust enter a name for each language If you do not enter a name for each language the shipping method will display with no description for the those languages where you did not enter a name and buyers will not know what the shipping method is Choose the calculation model as described in Table 5 Table 5 Calculation Models Calculation Model Description Calculates the shipping cost based on the number of items in the basket Basket Items Formula base unit_shipping_cost basket_items Can use ranges see Understanding Ranges on p 197 for details Calculates the shipping cost based on the price of the basket Formula base unit shipping cost basket price Can use ranges see Understanding Ranges on p 197 for details Basket prices for Basket Price net based stores do not include tax for gross based stores tax is included NOTE If basket discounts are implemented they are not considered when calculating basket price since the discount calculation occurs after the shipping calculation Calculates the shipping cost based on weight of the items in the basket Basket Weight Formula base unit_shipping_cost basketweight Can use ranges see Understanding Ranges on p 197 for details Flat Rate A fixed cost defined for the shipping method Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 195 Shipping Methods Settings Manager 6 Choose a tax class if tax should be applied to this shipping cost NOTE
529. ustomer jurisdictions Settings Manager BACK SAYE CATALOG manager SET UP TAXES Tax Matrix Non taxable Food Books Shipping Electronics Equipment California o0 eso eso eso eso Jeso Japan o oo 1 s fooo ooo ooo ooo Germany o oo 3 zoo zoo ooo 26 00 lw France 2 fazso w fazso l 02 50 250 Spain 0 00 0 00 0 00 ooo 00 96 Others 0 00 0 00 0 00 Jooo 96 US outside Califomia 0 00 w ooo 96 Bay Area 0 00 Jooo ooo 96 SETTINGS manager CUSTOMER manager INVENTORY manager PURCHASING manager PRODUCT SYSTEM manager ADMIN manager Figure 132 Tax Matrix page for a store with net based pricing Enter Sales Tax Rates 2 Select Set Up Taxes from the Settings Manager Main Menu Select Tax Matrix The Tax Matrix page is displayed Figure 132 Enter the applicable tax rates in the table for every combination of jurisdiction and product class Click Save when you have completed your entries Click on Back when done When you enter products in the Product Manager you then assign each product to its appropriate tax class see Create a New Product on p 140 INTERSHOP will then automatically calculate and apply the sales tax when custom
530. ustomer on the search results page The Search Mask template is used as its own page to perform store wide searches This template can be modified to contain the search elements described below Build a Search Interface You can create your own search interfaces using any store catalog or list template For these type of searches the functionality is not tied to the template where the interface and its input fields are displayed To create a search interface form instead or using FormTagAttributes or FormTagAttributesSSL TLE you need to use ffSearchForm TagAttributes or ffSearchForm TagAttributesSSL The examples below can be used either on the Search Mask template or within a search interface on another templates A table listing all Search TLEs is displayed on FORM TLE Variables p 261 The built in functionality of the Search Mask template or the use of SearchFormTagAttributes on another template causes the Search Results template to appear after the customer submits a search Chapter 6 Specific Uses of TLE in Templates Storefront Templates Using FORMs in Templates Simple Search of Product Name or Description To search for a product use the TLE variable Name_SearchProductName lt FORM SearchFormTagAttributes gt lt B gt Search for products lt B gt lt BR gt Name lt BR gt lt INPUT NAME Name_SearchProductName SIZE 35 gt lt BR gt lt P gt 1 Below the TYPE SUBMIT causes the Submi
531. vailable Templates ShippingName Shipping address additional or All templates company name field ShippingName3 Shipping address additional name field All templates ShippingPhone Shipping address phone number All templates ShippingPhone2 Shipping address second phone number All templates i stab Price assigned to shipping method in ShippingPrice the Settings Manager All templates ShippingState Shipping address state All templates ShippingStreet Shipping address street All templates ShippingZipCode Shipping address zip code All templates Creates a link that displays page to enter new shipping address An optional parameter can be added to select what page will display to URL_ChangeAddress after address is All templates except Print templates Parameters are Basket OrderNow Service and Catalog example URL_ChangeAddress Service Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 229 Profile TLE Variables Profile TLE Variables Profiles are used to create a customized shopping experience for member customers For detailed information on using profile TLEs see Activating the Profile p 394 lsProfileActivated Table 11 Profile TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Flag set to 1 if customer has enabled profile set to 0 if customer has disabled profile or is not a member Used with IF statement TLE Variables Available Templates All templa
532. values Storefront template Login Name_ShippingCity Input field for shipping address city Value ShippingCity Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingCountry Input field for shipping address country Value ShippingCountry Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingEMail Input field for shipping address e mail Value ShippingEMail Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingFax Input field for shipping address fax Value ShippingFax Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingNamel Input field for shipping address full name Value ShippingNamel Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingName2 Input field for shipping address company name field Value ShippingName2 Storefront template Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingName3 Input field for shipping address additional name field Value ShippingName3 Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address Registration Name_ShippingPhone Input field for shipping address phone number Value ShippingPhone Storefront templates Login Non member Data Shipping Address
533. ved from the different colors and sizes Each variation has its own product number SKU derived from the main product number See World Wide Web Client application used to retrieve and display text and graphic information published on the Web Server application used to publish information on the World Wide Web Also referred to as WWW W3 or the Web Based on the Internet client server hypertext information system Web sites referred to by their URL use HTML to display text and graphics HTTP links connect Hurls to access local as well as remote resources The Web also supports FTP Telnet Gopher protocols Customer type identifying people who enter the store but provided no information to the INTERSHOP system See Customer What You See 15 What You Get computer design Page 445 Index A Add To Basket Behavior 60 376 Administration Modules Changing passwords and logins 89 Attributes Data types 146 See Catalog Attributes See Product Attributes B Back Office First time use 121 Managers working together 122 Set Up Managers 121 Baskets Add products to 30 60 Following up 184 Non ordered 185 Non ordered baskets displaying 60 Preferences setting 59 Previous displaying 60 Reloading 34 Reports on 204 205 Batch Processing See Credit Cards Billing Shipping Address 17 1 Bookmarks 29 Call A Script from an INTERSHOP Template 414 Catalog Attributes 131 Catalog and List Templates adding to 326
534. vel o on nnan eee III 125 Create or Extend a Category scele e 126 Edita Category s Rp REED USERS 128 Move One Category into Another llle I 128 Sort Categories and Products for Display in the Storefront 00 0 129 Delete 131 Catalog Attributes 10s eee eS 131 United Nations Standard Product and Services Classification UNAPSO i Mp dehet ox adco ed ASI aT axe 136 Product Manager 137 Search for Existing Products 137 Create a New 140 Edit Product 143 Stock Products Using the Inventory 144 Product Attributes aeei deme 145 Product 151 Delete Products from the Database 159 Inventory 160 Check Current Stock Levels llle ee ee ee eee 161 Enter Stock 162 Use Inventory 164 Purchasing Manager 165 Request Stock Order Suggestions cse RII 166 Create a Purchase
535. ver Side Scripting the same password would be used here Confirm the automatically entered SQL Server name Enter the Database login and password for the source store Click Next A warning page is displayed Click Next A status bar is displayed followed by a completion screen Click Back to return to the System Administration Main Menu The target store now contains the same product data category structure profile items and template sets as the source store as well as the same image static and cached pages Page 116 Chapter 2 System Administration CHAPTER 3 The Back Office t 2 INTERSHOP DS Introduction to the Back Office Introduction to the Back Office This chapter discusses the INTERSHOP back office where you handle most everyday business tasks using the seven Managers Each Manager is accessed from the back office navigation bar Figure 70 For details on how to access the back office see Access the Back Office on page 41 ig Welcome Welcome to the INTERSHOP 4 Back Office Use the 7 Managers on the The current status of your store navigation bar at the d Ord hattan GF Ue nage to Un 0 Unprocessed Orders your store System 0 Open Orders Administrators with 0 Accounts Receivable proper access will find an eighth SYSTEM ADMIN button on the navigation What has happened since your last login Io ROM La 1 Sessions in the storefront configuration 0 Baskets
536. vidence City Providence SS State Rhode isand State Rhode Isand SS ZipCode jas SS Zip Code Country USA Country USA Phone 123 123 1284 Phone 123 123 1234 SS Fax 1231231255 O 1231231235 email namegdomaincom email name domaincom Customer Profile Information T Profile is activated FrequentShoppers VIPShoppers Figure 46 Payment methods selected for an individual customer 9 The new payment method will now appear for this customer when he Select payment method on this page to enable payment method for this particular customer Chapter 2 System Administration Payment Method Settings Use the Payment Method Settings Page Create Your Own Payment Methods Select the Payment Method Settings link on the System Administration Main Menu Click New Payment Method Enter a Name and Description for the new method If you have installed an INTERSHOP Language Pack you also need to select a language Click Save The Payment Method ID assigned to this payment method appears above the Language drop down menu The payment method ID is useful if writing server side scripts or coding that needs to identify the payment method for the database The External Payment Method checkbox also appears on this page Optional Select the External Payment Method checkbox if you are going to use this pay
537. vidually as described on page 309 Page 308 Chapter 5 Templates Page Caching Select Templates for Page Caching Activate SSS for Page Caching You may want to cache a template containing server side script This is possible provided that the script uses only TLE variables that can be cached For example ProductPrice may be a fairly static value prices in your store may change rarely But BasketTotalPrice must be calculated multiple times for every customer Clearly calculation variables cannot be cached and therefore server side scripts that use them cannot be cached If you have a script that makes sense for a cached template you must select the Activate SSS for Page Caching checkbox This saves a set value for the Server Side Scripts SSS on pages selected for page caching For example if a SSS has the function of saving a specific TLE value it is saved with the value of the TLE at the moment the page is cached NOTE This checkbox does not appear unless your Site Administrator has enabled SSS for your store Check Space Required and Clear Cache Use the Page Cache Space command on the Page Caching Preferences page to check the amount of disk space that is needed to store your static files on your local hard drive Use the Clear Page Cache command on the Page Caching Preferences page to clear your page cache on a regular basis Regularly clearing the page cache reduces the amount of disk space the page cac
538. vshippimgPhione2 basket order View a previous basket order 57 Part of the address of previous Storefront templates only Service PITE BREL basket order View a previous basket order edu Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service basket order View a previous basket order Part of the address of a previous Storefront templates only Service Pfredbp pains basket order View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PrevSubTotal Sub total of a previous basket order List of View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PrevTotallax Total tax of a previous basket order List of View a previous basket order Storefront templates only Service PreviotalPrice Total price of a previous basket order List of View a previous basket order Creates a link that reloads a previous oniy Servic TEURL LoadBasket basket into the current basket Used in M oe D View a previous basket View previous basket template Creates a link that displays a previous onh Tere TEURL PrevBasket basket Used with PrevBasketNo in ee l NN 2 List of previous basket List of Previous Baskets template URL_PrevBasketList linke that displays stof All templates except Print templates previous baskets Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 245 Service TLE Variables TLE Variables Previou
539. ways to remove variations and their associated types and values If a type or value has not yet been assigned to any product it be deleted Just select it in the Variation Create and Edit Types page or Assign Product Variation Values page Figure 90 and Figure 91 and click Delete To remove an individual variation from a set use the Invalid rule described below To remove ALL variations of a product you must delete the main product itself All associated variations will be deleted along with it Instead of deleting variations you can make an individual variation or set of variations invisible in the storefront by deselecting the Visible in Storefront checkbox on the Product Variation Matrix page Figure 95 Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 157 Product Variations Product Manager Product Variation Rules Overview There are three types of Product Variation Rules Figure 96 Invalid Variation Rule Apply this rule to delete a particular variation from the set To re enter the selected variation into the set simply remove this rule A complete variation set cannot be defined invalid Additional Price Rule Apply this rule to set an amount by which the price for a particular variation should remain above or below the main product price Additional Prices can be positive or negative amounts Fixed Price Rule Apply this rule to set a fixed price for a particular v
540. when setting Regional Preferences on p 52 you do not need to enter a number here to be Year 2000 compliant If you set your store to use two digits to represent a year enter a split date here to accommodate the new millennium A split date is a two digit number that represents the split between the 21st and 20th century For instance if 75 is set as the split date any number less than or equal to 75 would have 2000 added to it while any number greater than 75 would have 1900 added to it Therefore 49 would translate to 2049 and 82 would translate to 1982 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 49 Mail Preferences Set General Preferences Default Web Server Directory for File Upload Enter the URL for the web server directory where you most often upload files You will still have the option of specifying a different directory each time you upload files but the URL entered here will serve as the default For more information on uploading files to the web server see Upload Multimedia Files for Catalog Attributes on p 134 Upload Multimedia Files for Product Attributes on p 148 and Upload Files to the Web Server on p 304 v System Administration BACK SAVE System Preferences Administration Session Timeout 1 1440 720 The time minutes allowed for a session in the Site Administration module If a session time is exceeded the user will be asked to re enter their login name
541. with UPS s shipping module Structured Query Language A database command language that uses English like commands and syntax to retrieve data from a database Netscape developed the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol for authentication and encryption over TCP IP networks including the Internet Under this protocol clients and servers can reliably authenticate each other and then exchange encrypted data that only they can decode The key that unlocks the encrypted data is itself encrypted leaving no means for an unauthorized party to read the information An amount of money a customer can owe a store for a period of time The customer side of the online store where customers can browse for products put items in a shopping basket register and buy online The look of the Storefront is completely customizable and depends the merchant s imagination design skills and HTML knowledge INTERSHOP products include several sample demo storefronts to allow members quick and easy store setup Searching the Product Manager with this field displays all products that have no variations plus all variations Term used in the search mask of the Purchasing Manager to generate a list of vendors from whom the merchant needs to order fresh supplies Any vendor who supplies an online merchant with merchandise to sell Supplier and Customer information are both handled in the Customer Manager Checking a Supplier box on the Customer data page
542. wn menus assure that data is entered in a consistent error free format at important junctures and they save time otherwise required to enter and check data manually In the drop down menus section Figure 118 you define the contents of the following three drop down menus which appear in the back office the Storefront or both Customer Categories in which you can group your customers Manufacturers or brand names of your products Units of Weight and Measurement that can be assigned to your products Ai Settings Manager BACK Drop Down Menus List Customer Categories Customers and contacts are classified by category This list contains the available categories Manufacturers List of manufacturers Units of Weights and Measurement Units of weights and measurement CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 18 Drop Down Menus List in the Settings Manager Overview This brief overview describes how each of the drop down menus is used in the INTERSHOP system To edit any drop down menu see Create Drop Down Menu Entries and Delete Drop Down Menu Entries below Customer Categories If you wish to classify your customers into categories so you can offer discounts to selected groups of customers e g all retailers all customers who register in November etc you need to enter the customer category names in a drop d
543. wser File menu Settings Manager BACK PRINT PREVIEW Show Number of New Customers Number of New Customers Daily Fri 0 Thu 06 17 99 o CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 135 Sample Traffic Order Analysis Number of New Customers Daily View Product Statistics Product statistics provide you with evaluations of specific products You see how often customers looked at a product placed it in their shopping baskets and how many times it was sold You also see sales and profit figures for the product Additionally you can rank your products according to how often they were accessed during any time frame To View Statistics for an Individual Product l Select Settings Manager from the navigation bar 2 Click on Product Statistics A search page appears Figure 136 PE Settings Manager BACK SEARCH Search Product Statistics C Product no ol Top Of All Products Period From rnm dd yy Tf rmm dd yy CATALOG PRODUCT INVENTORY PURCHASING CUSTOMER ORDER SETTINGS SYSTEM manager manager manager manager manager manager manager Figure 136 Search Product Statistics page 3 Select the Product Number radio button and enter the product number NOTE The date range does not affect individual product queries Page 206 Chapter 3 The Back Office
544. x 238 IsAnonymous 227 270 IsCreditCardEnabled 250 IsCustDeactivated 227 Page 454 IsCustSupplier 227 IsCustSuspended 227 IsCustToBeTaxed 228 271 IsDirectCreditCardEnabled 228 IsInBasket 257 278 281 IsNewSession 257 IsNonMemberCheckoutEnabled 228 IsOnlyNonOrderedSet 243 IsPasswordRequired 257 IsProductHotDeal 231 15 8 15 281 285 286 IsProfileActivated 230 270 394 IsVariation_ TypeName 235 ItemNo 231 277 279 281 282 ItemNo_Value 281 LastNolnBatch 237 265 LastShippingDate 260 282 LastUpdateDate 260 LoginName 263 LongDescription 281 ManufacturerName 231 279 281 284 ManufacturerNo 231 281 284 MaxAgeToView 243 MinOrderLevel 231 276 277 281 MinOrderLevel_Value 281 Name_ActivateProfile 228 230 262 Name_CreditCardExpireMonth 262 Name_CreditCardExpireYear 262 Name_CreditCardNo 262 Name_CustCity 262 Name_CustCountry 262 Name_CustEMail 262 Name CustFax 262 Name CustLoginName 263 Name CustName 365 Name CustName1 263 Name CustName2 263 Name CustName8 263 Name CustPhone 263 lame CustPhone2 263 Name CustState 263 Name CustStreet 263 Name LoginName 263 Name NewPassword 263 IsProductVariation 235 276 277 278 dt dt db db HHH db db Index ame_OKButton 263 ame_OrderComment 263 362 ame_Password 263 ame_PasswordConfirmation 264 Name_ProductQuantity 276 277 Name_RegisterButton 264 Name_SearchCombina
545. x price 6 00 6 96 0 96 42 00 558 00 89 28 647 28 5 17 6 00 0 83 36 19 481 03 16 96 558 00 NOTE Even though Table 4 displays numbers rounded to two decimal places the INTERSHOP system ensures accurate calculation by using more decimal places resulting in the correct total price of 558 00 Chapter 2 System Administration Page 69 Enable SSL Enable SSL Set General Preferences SSL Secure Sockets Layer is a standard for encrypted data transmission on the Internet between a Web server and a client browser Do not enable SSL if you do not have an SSL enabled Web Server or your store will not work If your Web server is hosted by a third party contact them to find out if your server is SSL enabled The INTERSHOP back office is SSL compatible and can be SSL enabled by checking this box on the SSL Options page Default settings Not enabled NOTE It is also possible to encrypt selected information from the Storefront See SSL Secured FORMs on p 373 Storefront Message Templates List Page 70 INTERSHOP stores include a template called Store Message that is coded to recognize certain errors in the storefront and display a variety of error messages Sample errors include entries of invalid tax areas invalid passwords expired credit card numbers etc System Administrators and template designers do not need to edit the triggering template itself but they may want to change the wording of particul
546. y sale and applies it to customer orders unless you have unchecked the tax box under Customer Preferences in System Administration see Customer Preferences on page 56 NOTE If you have unchecked the Tax box under Customer Preferences in System Administration new customers will not be charged taxes If your store uses Gross based price calculations then the tax is included in the product price Use the tax classes to define different rates for different products However only one tax jurisdiction can be used ina store with gross based pricing See Set Price Display Model to Net or Gross on p 68 for details on pricing calculation models Tax Jurisdictions Overview Page 200 Know what sales tax laws apply to your store and determine the different tax jurisdictions if any that you must account for For example if you are located in Germany and have customers throughout Europe and the United States you may need to define a number of tax jurisdictions e g one for Germany one for the European Union and one for the USA NOTE Only one tax jurisdiction can be used in stores with gross based pricing Chapter 3 The Back Office Settings Manager Taxes Enter a Tax Jurisdiction 1 Select Set Up Taxes from the Settings Manager Main Menu The Set Up Taxes Menu page is displayed Figure 129 Settings Manager BACK Set Up Taxes Tax Jurisdictions Create and edit tax jurisdictions Tax Cl
547. y ID parameter Example lt A HREF http URL_Category 218 gt or displays a list when used in a LOOP statement Catalog templates Category basic Root Categories TEURL NextPage Creates a link that displays the next page of a List template when the list contains more items than set in System Administration Storefront and List templates TEURL PrevPage Creates a link that displays the previous page of a list template Storefront and List templates Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 237 Calculation TLE Variables TLE Variables Calculation TLE Variables The Calculation TLE variables cannot be set directly they derive their values from calculations performed by INTERSHOP 4 on other TLE variables For example the calculation variable ProductTotalPrice equals the product price either Net or Gross multiplied by ProductQuantity Some of these variables are specific to certain templates For example OrderTotalPrice is used only on order templates while BasketTotalPrice is used only on the Basket template By default values returned by calculation variables are automatically formatted with currency symbols decimal points etc as defined by the System Administrator in Regional Preferences Table 18 Calculation TLE Variables TLE Variable Description Available Templates T BasketSubTotal ra Pedes n basket Uus All templates discounts shippi
548. y e mail supplementing retrieval of new orders through the Order Manager in the back office If you check this option you must then enter a valid e mail address where these orders will be sent e g orders mystore com Default value None Reply Address If your customers reply to e mail you send them that reply will be sent to this address It can be the same as the Merchant address if desired Enable Store Error Email and Store Error E mail Address Check this option to receive e mail notification of storefront errors and enter a valid e mail address e g service mystore com Default value None Enable Server Side Script Error E mail and Scripting E mail Address Check this option when writing and testing server side scripts to be notified via e mail of errors in scripting logic Then enter a valid e mail address e g testing mystore com Default value None Chapter 2 System Administration Page 51 Regional Preferences Set General Preferences NOTE INTERSHOP also supports order notification by fax using a fax gateway service To see if a fax gateway is available for your site contact the Site Administrator If so and you wish to implement this feature you will also need to modify Storefront templates e g the Registration Panel template so that the fax option appears to customers when they order Regional Preferences Page 52 Adjust the Regional Preferences described below to suit the primary aud
549. y for completed orders but you can use the Deactivate feature to create your own subset Simply mark an order deactivated once all the steps are finished You can then use the search page to find Orders Deactivated Yes to get a list of completed orders How to Use Basket Information The Order Manager also keeps track of all shopping baskets that customers have filled whether those baskets were actually ordered or not ordered This basket information provides merchants with valuable opportunities for sales analysis one to one marketing and individualized discounting For example an operator can locate baskets that were filled but not ordered then print follow up letters to customers offering them a chance to buy those items at a discount NOTE If your store uses multiple currencies and if the main store currency is changed see Currency Preferences on page 66 then the new currency symbol will be attached to all invoices and orders whether open or not For example an order placed for 100 00 could be read as 100 DM if the main store currency is changed Chapter 3 The Back Office Page 177 Process a New Order Order Manager Process a New Order The following pages take you through all the usual steps for processing an order from start to finish Order processing begins from the Search Orders page Figure 110 gt Order Manager SEARCH CLEAR FORM Search Orders Transactionno SC
550. y option this heavy burden on designer and system resources vanishes with INTERSHOP which builds dynamic Web pages on the fly The instant a customer clicks a link in the storefront INTERSHOP 4 selects what template to use and based on the TLE in the template retrieves just the right information from the store s database Through TLE INTERSHOP templates build and display storefront Web pages instantly while making sophisticated store design simple The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with a TLE reference guide The chapter includes tables listing all the TLE variables and statements available in the INTERSHOP 4 system as well as some brief examples of how to use them in templates For more complex application of TLEs in context see Specific Uses of TLE in Templates p 355 To learn more about working with Templates see Templates p 289 An understanding of HTML is required for working with TLE TLE consists of variables and statements All TLE variables and statements begin with the sign This chapter is divided into two main sections e TLE Variables e TLE Statements Chapter 4 Template Language Extension Page 223 View TLE Variables Available for a Template TLE Variables TLE Variables INTERSHOP 4 TLE variables are placeholders for data in the INTERSHOP database and are used to display data that may change from one page request to the next Insert a TLE variable in HTML code just as you wou
551. y tax on shipping costs Displayed in the alternate currency Print template Purchase Order AIt_InvoiceSubTotal Price of all products on invoice less discounts shipping costs Displayed in the alternate currency Print template Invoice AIt_InvoiceTotalPrice Price of all products on invoice less discounts shipping cost any assigned tax for products and or shipping Displayed in the alternate currency Print template Invoice Alt_InvoiceTotalTax Total tax charged for the items on invoice any tax on shipping costs Displayed in the alternate currency Print template Invoice Amount retrieved from shipping table Alt_ShippingPrice in System Administration Displayed in All templates the alternate currency The price of the current shipping Alt_ShippingSubTotal method excluding tax Displayed in All templates alternate currency MOERS e Alt_ShippingTotalPrice Shipping price shipping All templates Displayed in the alternate currency Alt_ShippingTotalTax Totalita charged tr IMG All templates Displayed in the alternate currency Alt_ProductNetPrice Alt_ProductGrossPrice FAlt_ProductPrice sed to display the product price in an alternate store currency when the store is set to Net price display model New with INTERSHOP 4 ISMb 1259 Used to display the product price an alternate store currency when the store is set to Gross price
552. yle The name of the directories within Headers the template style directory that contains the image files for the ei Headers3 second third and fourth header 6 Headers4 Styles CustomTLE Section of the style ini File In this section you list the User Defined TLE variables used by your template style and schemes Each template style needs to have at least one TLE variable assigned in order to have options presented in Step 9 of the Store Design Wizard In this example we use the TLE variables WelcomeText and SupportURL which allow users to enter Welcome Text and Customer Support information for their store in Step 9 of the Store Design Wizard Table 73 Key Value Inputs for Custom TLE Variables Key Value in Example Description The number of User defined TLE variables used by count 2 this template style NA The name of the first User defined TLE variable WelcomeText The user fills in the actual value in Step 9 of the 9 SDW The name of the second User defined TLE variable The user fills in the actual value in Step 2 SupportURL 9 of the SDW 9 Page 348 Chapter 5 Templates Create New Template Sets for Store Design Wizard The Style Definition File style ini Scheme Defaults In this section you define which buttons banners and headers are displayed when a user selects a particular sub style in the Store Design Wizard You must enter information for each s

User Guide INTERSHOP 4

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents